You are on page 1of 924

Preliminary Draft

Program Interface

Database Reference Manual


(Version 15.20.xx)

The flexible way to communicate

The information contained in this document is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright, patent and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting TADIRAN TELECOM LTD.'s (herein referred to as the Manufacturer) rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained herein may be published, reproduced or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express, prior, written permission of the Manufacturer. In addition, any use of this document or the information contained herein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is strictly forbidden. The Manufacturer reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications. Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by the Manufacturer for the use thereof nor for the rights of third parties which may be effected in any way by the use thereof. Any representation(s) in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer's product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of future performance, either express or implied. The Manufacturer's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by the Manufacturer in relation thereto. This document may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors; no warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer's sales contract or order confirmation. Information contained herein is periodically updated and changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify the Manufacturer. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 1993-2005. All rights reserved worldwide. Protected by U.S. Patents 6,594,255; 6,598,098; 6,608,895; 6,615,404 All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders.

Foreword
Welcome to the Coral system Program Interface and Database Reference Manual. Flexibility is one of the great strengths of the Coral Systems. This manual is a highly detailed explanation of the core of the Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000, 6000 and Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000, as well as all previous Coral SL, I, II, III ISBX Telephone systems, the Program Interface (PI). By means of the PI, virtually all present and future communication needs can be customized for each site or location. The Program Interface is an integral part of the Coral product and is designed to allow you to serve your client creatively.

Record of Changes
Issue No. 0 1 2 Issue Date September 1993 January 1994 January 1995 Brief Description Software Version 8.3x, Preliminary Draft 1 Software Version 8.3x, Preliminary Draft 2 Feature updates with TBR, 4TEMP, includes V8.60 and new comprehensive index Software Version 9.2x, Preliminary Draft 1 Feature updates with CoraLINK, CoralQNET, 4VSN card, 8VSN card, APA, VDM, and Backup for large systems. Includes Version 9.2x Includes Software Version 9.35 Feature Updates with Wireless Station, SLS, SKW and SDT cards, Coral ISDNet replaces Coral QNET. Includes Software Version 9.5x Coral SL, 8DRCM, Malicious Call Trace, NPL Default change (add # to default dial numbers beginning with 1). Includes Software Version 9.87 Entered by: Tadiran Tadiran Tadiran

June 1995

Tadiran

4 5

February 1996 November 1997

Tadiran Tadiran

July 1997

Tadiran

Record of Changes
Issue No. 7 Issue Date November 1999 Brief Description Includes Software Version 10.19. No Data Connectivity to VDK,VDM and TIM Collect Call Reject Tone, Whisper Page, Second Ringback Tone (i.e. Call Waiting or Call Offer), Caller ID on Analog Trunks, 4TWL card GKT and Fonetasy PI Baud Rate Max: 38400 bps FLASH: MEX SVC24 replaces SVC Call Independent Signalling Connection Support Entered by: ECI Telecom

See New Developments Summary (Version 10.19) CN 7244-7121901 for complete list of changes.

Record of Changes
Issue No. 8 Issue Date September 2000 Brief Description Entered by: Includes Software Version 10.38. ECI E911 - CAMA support Telecom (USA) LTD. R2MFC supported on 30TM card. VFAC on Dial Service Retain Music Sources throughout Network. IVR-ACD Voice Mail on Keyset New Network Rerouting options 4IAA discontinued {V10.21} HDC - High Density Controller For Coral II-HT {V10.21} RSIS-HD - For Coral II-HD/ R and Coral III-HD/R {V10.21} See New Developments Summary (Version 10.21 and 10.38) for complete list of changes. Includes Software Version 11.08 Coral FlexiCom FlexSet SFT cards See New Developments Summary (Version 11.08) for complete list of changes. Includes Software Version 11.10 with the following new features: AutoSet Relocate FlexiCall (Phase 1) VIP Ring Second Party Speaker Status See New Developments Summary (Version 11.10) for complete list of changes. Tadiran Telecom Business Systems, LTD.

December 2001

10

May 2002

Tadiran Telecom Business Systems, LTD.

Record of Changes
Issue No. 11 Issue Date November 2002 Brief Description Includes Software Version 14.1x. The following features were added: Voice Over IP Hot Standby system Caller ID on SLTs -receiving over analog trunks (no extraneous hardware needed) Look Ahead Routing (LAR) Call Duration Limit Call Forwarding Internal/ External The following hardware was added: UGW card MG module IP Keysets (FlexSet-IP 280S) 8DRCF modem (56 Kbps) Coral FlexiCom 6000 Control Cards: MCP-ATS, FMSD, CFD, 16/32GC iCMC-200 4/8T-CID iDSP MEX-IP MCP-IPsl IPG The DX Version was cancelled. Entered by: Tadiran Telecom Business Systems, LTD.

Record of Changes
Issue No. 12 Issue Date January 2004 Brief Description Includes Software Version 14.65.xx with the following new features:
Voice Over IP (Phases II) Turret Console support ALI on Trunk Groups APA Authorization Enhanced (short) calling message Priority Preemption Internal SMDR Voice Page FlexSet-IP Numbers 4TWL-Rotary Coral System Directory FlexiCall (Phases II) Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) Overlap Dialing over PRI Extended CID Extended iCMC Voice Mail Support

Entered by: Tadiran Telecom Business Systems, LTD.

See New Developments Summary (Version 14.65.xx) for complete list of changes. The following hardware was added: MCP-IPx card Coral IPx 500,800,3000,4000 13 April 2004 Coral Version 14.66.xx. See New Developments Summary (Version 14.66.xx) for complete list of changes.
Italian Defaults added PS Ringer Shelf Defaults for IPx systems added various new parameters added

Tadiran Telecom Business Systems, LTD.

Record of Changes
Issue No. 14 Issue Date June 2005 Brief Description Coral Version 14.67.34. See New Developments Summary (Version 14.67.xx) for complete list of changes. Coral Verison 15.23.xx. See New Developments Summary (Version 15.20.xx) for complete list of changes. Entered by: Tadiran Telecom LTD. Tadiran Telecom LTD.

15

December 2005

List of Abbreviations
Abbrv. Meaning
#s
4TBR 2SD 2SK 2500 SET 3-Way 30T,30T/E 30T/M 30T/x 4ALS 4BID 4DTR 4GC 4IAA 4SH/S 4SK 4T 4T-C Two Station Data Circuit Card Two Station Key Telephone Card The basic SLT touch-tone desk telephone Three Way Party Call 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card E1 European Standard 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card E1 Mexican Standard 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card E1 Standard Variations Four ALS70 Trunk Circuit Card Four Trunk Belgium Inward Dialing Circuit Card Four DTMF Receiver Circuit Card Four Circuit Group Controller Circuit Card 4 Port Integrated Automated Attendant Four Single Line Telephone Interface Card with Hotel Circuit Four Station Key Telephone Card Four Trunk Circuit Card 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion for Coral IPx systems 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer 4TBR with a 4/8CID card in piggyback fashion 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion for the Coral IPx systems 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 4TEM 4TEMP 4TMR 4TPF 4TWL 4TWLsl 4VS 4VSN 500 SET 8ALS 8BID 8DID 8DTD 8DTR 8SD

Abbrv.

Meaning
8CID card in piggyback fashion for the Coral FlexiCom 200 or SL systems Four Trunk BRI Circuit Card Four Trunk E&M Tie-Line Circuit Card Four Trunk E&M Pulsed Tie-Line Circuit Card Four Trunk with Metering Circuit Card Four Trunk Power Fail Circuit Card Four Two Way Loop Trunk Circuit Card Four Two Way Loop Trunk Circuit Card for FlexiCom 200 systems Four Digitized Voice Circuit Card No Longer Available Four Digitized Voice Circuit Card- field installable voice messages The old SLT rotary dial telephone desk Eight ALS70 Trunk Circuit Card Eight Trunk Belgium Inward Dialing Circuit Card Eight Trunk Direct Inward Dialing Circuit Card Eight Dial Tone Detector Circuit Card Eight DTMF Receiver Circuit Card Eight Station Data Circuit Card

8/16/24SDT Standard Digital 8, 16 or 24 Line Telephone Interface Card 8/16/24SFT Standard Digital 8, 16 or 24 Line Telephone (2wire) Interface Card supporting the FlexSet as well as the DKT/DST/GKT series. 8D8Ssl 8/16SDTsl 8 Digital Key and 8 Single Line Telephone interface Card for Coral FlexiCom 200 systems Standard Digital 8 or 16 Line Telephone Interface Card for Coral FlexiCom 200 systems

4T-Cipx

4T-CID

4T-CIDipx

8/16SFTipx Standard Digital 8 or 16 Line Telephone Interface Card for the Coral IPx 500 supporting the FlexSet as well as the DKT/DST/GKT series. 8/16SFTsl Standard Digital 8 or 16 Line Telephone Interface Card for the Coral FlexiCom 200 supporting the FlexSet as well as the DKT/ DST/GKT series. Eight Single Line Telephone Interface Card with Hotel Circuit

4T-CIDsl

8SH/S

Abbrv.-1

List of Abbreviations

PI Reference Manual

Abbrv.
8SK 8SKD

Meaning
Eight Station Key Telephone Circuit Card Eight Station Key Digital Circuit Card

Abbrv.
ACK ACNR ACSE AE ALI

Meaning
Acknowledge Automatic Call Number Redial CoraLINK-Application: Association Control Service Element Application Entity Automatic Location Identification. This is the cross referenced location information based on the callers ID. (Abonnee Lijn Signalering 1970) Trunk Circuit Card - Netherlands Standard Additional Network Feature Automatic Number Identification Answer American National Standards Institute Application Processor Adapter For a DKT2000 Telephone Applications Processor Data Link Application Protocol Data Unit CoraLINK-Application Programming Interface AC Power Supply Automatic Route Selection American Standard Code for Information Interchange Abstract Syntax Notation One Auxiliary Service Unit Circuit Card Attendant

8/16/24SLS 8, 16 or 24 Line Standard 2-Wire Single Line Station Interface Card 8/16SLSsl 8 or 16 Line Standard 2-Wire Single Line Station Interface Card for Coral FlexiCom 200 systems Eight Magneto Telephone Circuit Card Eight Trunk Circuit Card 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion for Coral IPx systems 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer 4TBR with a 4/8CID card in piggyback fashion 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion for the Coral IPx systems 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface card with power failure (PF) transfer and a multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/ 8CID card in piggyback fashion for the Coral FlexiCom 200 or SL systems Eight Trunk BRI Circuit Card Eight Trunk with four Power Fail Circuit Cards 16 Single Line Telephone Interface Card with Hotel Circuit 16 Station Key Digital Circuit Card

8SM 8T 8T-C

ALS70 ANF ANI ANS ANSI APA APDL APDU API APS ARS ASCII ASN.1 ASU ATT

8T-Cipx

8T-CID

8T-CIDipx

8T-CIDsl

8TBR 8TPF 16SH/S 16SKD

B
BCS Bearer Capability Support (ISDN) Bearer Capability COS Basic Encoding Rules Bi-Directional R2MFC Protocol for use with 30T/M card version 32.xx and later Belgium Inward Dialing Busy Lamp Field Bits Per Second (RS-232 parameter)

A
AA ACC ACCT ACD Automated Attendant (4IAA card) Access Account Code Automatic Call Distribution, Automatic Call Distributor

BCCOS BER BI_D BID BLF BPS

Abbrv.-2

PI Reference Manual

List of Abbreviations

Abbrv.
BRI BSY BUT

Meaning
Basic Rate Interface (ISDN) 2B+D (see also 4TBR, 8TBR) Busy

Abbrv.
Coral FlexiCom Coral IPx

Meaning
Family of Coral FlexiCom 200, 400, 5000, 6000 systems Family of Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 Systems for 19 and 23 rack mounting Class of Service Coral Paging Adapter Calling Party Number Control Power Supply Coral FlexiCom 200 Expansion Unit. Maximum of 2 Expansion units per Coral SL or FlexiCom 200 Base unit. Computer Supported Telecommunication Applications; OSI Layer 7 Communication between a computing network and a CoraLINK System Coral Supported Telephony Services CSTS, is a Coral protocol and is used for communication between the CCM 3 and the Coral, providing more data transfer ability and better stability. Using the CSTS, Coral includes ANI and DNIS information in the messages among other relevant data. Computer Telephony Integration

Button on a keyset

C
CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (Used for USA systems only). CAMA telephony protocol detects MF tones sent by the telephony equipment and deciphers the caller ID. Computerized Attendant Position Country Code Continuous Communication Systems Coral Call Master: Coral system to run ACD applications. Card Database European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administration Call Forward Caller ID Call Independent Signalling Connection Circuit

COS CPA CPN CPS CSLX

CAP CC CCS CCM CDB CEPT CF CID CISC CKT CLA

CSTA

CSTS

CTI

D
DB Database 1 MB Static RAM piggy-back located on the MEX-IP2 or MCP-IPx2 card for database software with battery backup (Coral Common Control) Direct Dialing Inward (same as DID) Direct Dialing Outward (same as DOD) Distinctive Dial Tone Destination Digit (0 to 9, * or #) Digital Trunk Diagnostics Telephone Dial Pad including the numbers 0 through 9 and * and #. Direct Inward Dialing (same as DDI)

CoraLINK Adaptor (piggy back) Baby card is located on the MEX-IP2 or MCP-IPx2 card for CTI applications. Calling Line Identification Calling Line Identification Presentation Calling Line Identification Restriction Card List Conference Circuit Card Conference (3way CNF and 6way meet me bridge) and synchronization card for digital trunks Central Office, Public Exchange (same as LEX) Conference

DBX

CLI CLIP CLIR CLIS CNF CNSsl

DDI DDO DDT DEST DGT DGTL DI Dial Pad DID

CO CONF

Coral Common Control Coral systems based on a MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2 and MCP-ATS;

Abbrv.-3

List of Abbreviations

PI Reference Manual

Abbrv.
DIL DIM DISA DISC DKT DLIS DND DNIS DOD DP DPC DPEM

Meaning
Direct In-Line Data Interface Module Direct Inward System Access Disconnect Digital Key Telephone (Full Feature Phone), 2Wire Interface Digital List Do Not Disturb Dialed Number Identification Service Direct Outward Dialing (same as DDO) Dial Pulse Digital Protocol Converter Card Digital Programmable Expansion Module for DKT 2000 sets (FlexSet 40B for FlexSet 280 Series) Dialogue Service Element Digital Subscriber Line Display Module, 2 rows by 24 characters Display Module, 2 rows by 40 characters

Abbrv.

Meaning
E

E1 E911 E&M ECMA EIS EKT EOD EOS ETSI EU EVEN EXE EXCL EXT

30 Digital Circuit Card - European Standards Emergency 911 call Tie Trunk (Ear and Mouth) European Computer Manufacturers Association EKT to SLT Interface, Special Mode Electronic Key Telephone, 4-Wire Interface End of Dial End of Selection European Telecommunications Standards Institute Europe Evening Executive (Privilege) Exclude External Call

DSE DSL DSP48 DSP80 DSS DSS1 DST DST

F
Direct Station Selection Digital Subscriber Signalling no.1 Destination (used in database control) Digital Standard Telephone or Digital SingleLine Telephone, 2-Wire Interface Dial Tone Detector Data Terminal Equipment Data Terminal Ready Dial Tone Multi-Frequency Digitized Voice Message System, based on 4VS or 4VSN cards. FAC FCC FDC Forced Account Code Federal Communication Commission (USA) Discontinued High Density 3 1/2 1.44 M (2.88) Floppy Diskette Controller - (Coral Common Control) Facility Information Element Fonetasy Key Telephone Forward Discontinued 2.5 MB Flash Memory piggy-back card located on the MSX card; up to 4 FSX cards in one Coral Common Control

DTD DTE DTR DTMF DVMS DX Common Control

FIE FKT FWD FSX

G
Discontinued Coral PABX system based on the MCC card Control; generally used in very large systems providing more capabilities and operation speeds of higher traffic systems with up to 50,000 busy hour call attempts capacity. GID GFT German Inward Dialing Generic Functional Transport

Abbrv.-4

PI Reference Manual

List of Abbreviations

Abbrv.
GKT GRP GS

Meaning
Graphic Key Telephone Group Ground Start Trunk

Abbrv.
KB1-24 KSI

Meaning
Keyboard Number 1 -24 EKT to SLT Interface

L
LEX Local Exchange (CO) as used in Europe Least Cost Routing Listed Directory Number (site LDN) Light Emitting Diode Loop/Ground Start Trunk Public or Private Library Loop Start Trunk

H
HDLC HI HF HKFLS High Data Level Control Human Interface (same as PI) Hookflash Hookflash LCR LDN LED LGS

I
I/C I/O ICD iCMC ID iDSP IMC8 Incoming Call

LIB LS

M
In/Out International Code Designator Integrated Coral Message Center Identification 64 circuit FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) tone generator shared service card Integrated Memory Card with 8 Mbytes flash memory capacity for the MEX-IP2 and MCP-IPx2 Common Control Card. It contains the generic software of the Coral and is used to store the system database. Internal Call Internal Protocol Integrated Services Business Exchange Integrated Services Digital Network MEX-IP IST Industry Standard Telephone (same as SLT) MCP-IPx2 MEX MCC MCDX MCP MCP-ATS MCP-IPsl MCP-IPx Main Control Card for the DX Common Control Main Controller DX Main Control Processor Card (i.e., MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MCP-ATS) MCP Card for Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000 Common Control MCP Card for Coral FlexiCom 200 Common Control in Software Versions 14.1x MCP Card for Coral IPx 500 and FlexiCom 200 Common Control in Software Versions 14.6x MCP Card for Coral IPx 500 Common Control in Software Versions 15.xx and later MCP Card for Coral Common Control in Software Versions 10.xx, 11.xx and 12.xx MCP Card for Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000 and Coral IPx 800, 3000 Common Control in Software Versions 14.xx MCP Card for Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000 and Coral IPx 800, 3000 Common Control in Software Versions 15.xx and later Main Distributing Frame Member Multi-Frequency Code Multi Frequency Receiver Card

INT IP ISBX ISDN

K
Keyset KB KB0 FlexSet/FlexSet-IP/EKT/VDK/DKT/DST/GKT/ FKT Telephone Kilo Bytes (used for memory size) Keyboard Number 0 on Main Control Card (MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, MCP-ATS, MCBcsx, etc.)

MEX-IP2

MDF MEM MFC MFR

Abbrv.-5

List of Abbreviations

PI Reference Manual

Abbrv.
MIC MIS MPEM MSDX MSG MSI MSN MSX

Meaning
Microphone Management Information System for Traffic Reports (old-see TAP) Multi-Programmable Expansion Module for EKT and VDK Sets Mass Storage DX Message Manufacturer Specific Information Multiply Subscriber Number Discontinued MCP Card for Coral Common Control in Software V8.xx and V9.xx

Abbrv.
PC-ACD PCB PCC PCM PDB PEM PEX PF PI PICS

Meaning
Personal Computer Automatic Call Distributor Printed Circuit Board PC Console Pulse Code Modulation Port Database Programmable Expansion Module for EKT and VDK sets Peripheral Expansion for DKT sets Power Fail Program Interface (same as HI) Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Private Integrated Services Network Private Integrated Services Network Exchange Port List Property Management System Peripheral Power Supply Preference Primary Rate Interface Card, (23B+D) 1.5 Mbps, Enables Coral subscribers to connect to the ISDN public network Primary Rate Interface Card, (30B+D) 2 Mbps, Enables Coral subscribers to connect to the ISDN public network Priority Private Library Primary Program Proceed to Send Post, Telegraph and Telephone Administration Public Library Ports Without Disconnect Supervision

N
PISN N/A NA NFE NP, NPL NPID NSF NUM Not Applicable No Answer Network Facility Extension Numbering Plan Numbering Plan Identification (PRI calls) Network Specific Facility Number PINX PLIS PMS PPS PREF PRI 23

O
OAI O/G OHVA ONHK Open Application Interface Outgoing Call Off-Hook Voice Announce Onhook

PRI 30

PRIO PRIV PRM PROG

P
PABX PAD PB PBX PC Private Automatic Branch Exchange

PTS PTT PUB

Packet Assembly Disassembly PWDS Peripheral Buffer Circuit Card Private Branch Exchange Personal Computer RAM

R
Random Access Memory

Abbrv.-6

PI Reference Manual

List of Abbreviations

Abbrv.
RBS RCV RJCT RMI RO ROSE ROW RPS RSIA RSIM RSIS RTSE RTT

Meaning
Radio Base Station for Wireless Systems Receive

Abbrv.
Soft Keys SPKR

Meaning
Programmable Telephone Keys relating to different telephone conditions Speaker Source (used in database control) Supplementary Service Station Start Time/Day Suspect Service and Control Circuit Card Service and Control Circuit Card - Digital Seize

Reject SRC Remote Maintenance Interface Circuit Card SS Remote Operations ST CoraLINK-Remote Operation Service Element STR Rest of the World SUSP Ringer Power Supply SVC24 Remote Shelf Interface Adaptor Card SVC-D Remote Shelf Interface Master Card SZ/SZE Remote Shelf Interface Slave Card Reliable Transfer Service Element Regie of Telegraphy and Telephone (Belgium) T1 TAP TBR

T
24 Digital Trunk Circuit Card North American Standard Traffic Application Package Trunk BRI Circuit Card Trunk BRI Circuit Card with external power option Trunk Code (GID) Time Division Multiplexing Terminal Terminal Interface Module Trunk Trunk Group Trunk Number Tenant Transmit

S
SAU Software Authorization Unit for controlling system software packages plugged on the 32GC, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2 or MCBcsx card Signalling Carriage Mechanism Secondary Dial Tone Digital Key (DKT &DST) Station Card Secondary Serial Number Service Coral Peripheral Station Cards supporting FlexSets as well as the DKT/DST/GKT series. Stop/Go Session Initiation Protocol Wireless Extension Interface Card with support for base stations Single Line Telephone (same as IST) Single Line Station Card Station Message Detail Recording

TBRP TC TDM TERM TIM TK TK-G TK-N TNNT TRX/TX

SCM SDT SDT SEC SER SERV SFT SG SIP SKW SLT SLS SMDR

U
UCD UM UNA UNATT Uniform Call Distributor Universal Messaging Universal Night Answer Unattended

Abbrv.-7

List of Abbreviations

PI Reference Manual

Abbrv.

Meaning
V

Abbrv.

Meaning

VAC VDK VDM VDU VFAC VIC VOL VP VSM

Verified Account Code Voice Data Keyset, 4-Wire Interface Voice Data Module for DKT 2000 Series Video Display Unit Verified Forced Account Code Vision-Impaired Console Volume Voice Page Voice Synthesizer Module for Visually Impaired operator connected to an EKT

W
WST WU Wireless Station Wakeup, Wake up

X
XFER Transfer

Abbrv.-8

PI Reference Manual

Table of Contents 1 Introduction


General Description ............................................................................................... 1-2 PI Terminal Device................................................................................................. 1-4 Hardware Setup ..................................................................................................... 1-5 Access to the Programming Interface .................................................................. 1-10 PI Terminal Control Function Commands ............................................................ 1-13 Conventions Used in this Document .................................................................... 1-16 Country Codes ..................................................................................................... 1-18

Programming Requirements
Default System....................................................................................................... 2-2 Typical Site-Specific Programming ........................................................................ 2-3 Additional Programming......................................................................................... 2-4 Programming and Entering Time Units .................................................................. 2-6 Programming Functions ......................................................................................... 2-7 Locating Data Fields .............................................................................................. 2-8 Direct Access Abbreviations (DAA)........................................................................ 2-9 Entering Yes/No and Remove.............................................................................. 2-10 General Rules for Entering Names ...................................................................... 2-11 Authorization Items .............................................................................................. 2-12

Installation
Installation .............................................................................................................3-2 Feature Authorization ............................................................................................3-3

TOC-1

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition
Sizes Definition ......................................................................................................4-2 Sizes Tab ............................................................................................................4-18 Music Sources .....................................................................................................4-24 UNITS ..................................................................................................................4-27

Numbering Plan
General Numbering Plan .......................................................................................5-3 General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) ......................................................5-7 General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) ......................................................5-16 Special Feature Codes ........................................................................................5-48 FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes ...........................................................5-50 SHOW TYPE of NUMBER ..................................................................................5-52

TOC-2

PI Reference Manual

System
Feature Timers ......................................................................................................6-2 System Features ...................................................................................................6-7 System Features - Outgoing Trunks .....................................................................6-8 System Features - Incoming Trunks ...................................................................6-15 System Features - Station Options .....................................................................6-16 System Features - Intercept/Incomplete .............................................................6-29 System Features - Call Forwarding .....................................................................6-33 System Features - Camp-On ..............................................................................6-35 System Features - Hotel ......................................................................................6-36 System Features - Messaging .............................................................................6-38 System Features - Tones ....................................................................................6-42 System Features - Diagnostics ...........................................................................6-44 System Features - ISDN .....................................................................................6-46 System Features - Network .................................................................................6-47 System Features - Wireless ................................................................................6-48 Card List ..............................................................................................................6-51 Port List ...............................................................................................................6-58 Port List - Physical Location ................................................................................6-59 Port List - Dial Numbers ......................................................................................6-63 Digital Port Bus List .............................................................................................6-74 Tone Plan ............................................................................................................6-78 Ringers ................................................................................................................6-84 Reserved Links ....................................................................................................6-91

Class of Service
Station and Trunk COS .........................................................................................7-2 Attendant Class of Service ..................................................................................7-28 Tenant Class of Service ......................................................................................7-37

TOC-3

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls
General Trunk Timers ...........................................................................................8-2 Trunk Timers .........................................................................................................8-6 MFR Card Database .............................................................................................8-9 General Trunk Definitions ....................................................................................8-10 Trunk Group Definition ........................................................................................8-16 Alternate Route ...................................................................................................8-31 DID/E&M Groups .................................................................................................8-32 Offset Filters ........................................................................................................8-37 Power Fail Trunk Definition .................................................................................8-39 LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks .....................................................................8-41 4T/8T LGS Port Database ...................................................................................8-44 4T/8T Card Database ..........................................................................................8-46 E&M Continuous Timers .....................................................................................8-52 4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database ...........................................................8-55 4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database .................................................................8-57 4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database ................................................................8-59 4TWL Trunk Card DB ..........................................................................................8-76 URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) .........................................................................8-79 URC-Default Configuration ..................................................................................8-81 URC-Current Configuration .................................................................................8-83 URC-Card Database ...........................................................................................8-85 E&M Trunk Definition ..........................................................................................8-86 DID Trunk Definition ............................................................................................8-89 8DID Card Database ...........................................................................................8-90 T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration ........................................................................8-94 T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x Synchronization .................................................................8-97 T1 and 30T Card Database ...............................................................................8-100 T1 and 30T Port Database ................................................................................8-103 30T/M Card Database .......................................................................................8-105 30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database ................................................................8-111 30T/M DDI Port Database .................................................................................8-113 30T/M Timers ....................................................................................................8-114 30T/E Card Database ........................................................................................8-115 30T/E DDI Port Database ..................................................................................8-120 30T/E DDO Port Database ................................................................................8-122

TOC-4

PI Reference Manual

30T/E NonDDI Port Database ...........................................................................8-123 ALS70 Trunks ....................................................................................................8-125 ALS70 Card Configuration ................................................................................8-126 ALS70 Card Database ......................................................................................8-128 ALS70 Port Database ........................................................................................8-131 ALS70 Loop Start Port Database ......................................................................8-132 ALS70 DID Port Database ................................................................................8-133 ALS70 NonDID Port Database ..........................................................................8-134 ALS70 Trunk Timers .........................................................................................8-135 BID Trunks ........................................................................................................8-136 BID Trunk Port Database ..................................................................................8-137 BID Trunk Timers ..............................................................................................8-139 GID Trunks ........................................................................................................8-140 GID Card Database ...........................................................................................8-141 GID Port Database ............................................................................................8-145 GID Timers ........................................................................................................8-147

Station Controls
Station Timers .......................................................................................................9-2 SLT Definition ........................................................................................................9-5 iDSP Card Database ...........................................................................................9-15 SLT Card Database .............................................................................................9-16 Keyset/FlexSet Timers ........................................................................................9-23 Keyset/FlexSet Ring Cadence ............................................................................9-24 Wireless Stations .................................................................................................9-26 Wireless Stations .................................................................................................9-27 Keyset/FlexSet Definition ....................................................................................9-28 Keyset/FlexSet Button Programming ..................................................................9-55 Fixed System Keys - Programming .....................................................................9-83 Keyset/FlexSet Preference Programming ...........................................................9-84 APA, PEX+APA and APDL RS-232 Setup ..........................................................9-85 Magneto 8SM Card Database .............................................................................9-87

TOC-5

PI Reference Manual

10

Groups

Hunt Group ..........................................................................................................10-2 Boss Group .......................................................................................................10-18 Pickup Group .....................................................................................................10-21 Zoned Voice Page Group ..................................................................................10-22 Bell/UNA Group .................................................................................................10-23 Group Calls .......................................................................................................10-24

11

Libraries

Public Library .......................................................................................................11-2 Private Library .....................................................................................................11-7 Serial Library .......................................................................................................11-9 Large Public Library ..........................................................................................11-14 Large Public Library Numbering Plan ................................................................11-16 Large Public Library Contents ...........................................................................11-18 Directory - Systems (Shared) Directory Entries ................................................11-20 Directory - Personal Directory ...........................................................................11-22

12

Night Service

Night Service - Timers .........................................................................................12-2 Night Service- Definition ......................................................................................12-4 Weekend Timers .................................................................................................12-5 Holiday Timers ....................................................................................................12-6

13

Toll Barriers

Toll Barrier ...........................................................................................................13-2

TOC-6

PI Reference Manual

14

SMDR

Control .................................................................................................................14-2 Report Control .....................................................................................................14-8 Format Params ....................................................................................................14-9 Auto On-Line .....................................................................................................14-11 Charge Table .....................................................................................................14-14

15

Routing & Cost Calculation

Routing System Parameters ...............................................................................15-3 Routing Access General Definitions ....................................................................15-5 Routing Class of Service .....................................................................................15-8 Dial Services .....................................................................................................15-10 Route Elements .................................................................................................15-17 Routing Numbering Plan ...................................................................................15-20 Routing Translators ...........................................................................................15-23 Look Ahead Routing Triggers ............................................................................15-24 Cost Calculation Elements ................................................................................15-30 Cost Calculation Numbering Plan .....................................................................15-32 Cost Calculation Parameters .............................................................................15-33

16

Room Status/ User Canned Messages

Names .................................................................................................................16-2 Status/Message Select ........................................................................................16-3 Status/Message_Display .....................................................................................16-4 Busy Display ........................................................................................................16-5 Terminal ..............................................................................................................16-6

TOC-7

PI Reference Manual

17

Service Terminals

Password and Site Name ....................................................................................17-2 Message Control .................................................................................................17-4 Message Select ...................................................................................................17-6 Terminal Destination ...........................................................................................17-8 CoralVIEW Traffic (CVT) Terminal Destination ...................................................17-9 Call Trace ..........................................................................................................17-10 Terminal Setup ..................................................................................................17-11 KB0 Setup Through Attendant Console - Feature .............................................17-23 Terminal Reset ..................................................................................................17-24 Terminal Clear ...................................................................................................17-25 iVMF Remote Maintenance ...............................................................................17-26

18 19

Features Voice Transmission Controls

Feature Control ...................................................................................................18-2

General Description ............................................................................................. 19-2 Gains Tables .......................................................................................................19-3 Feature Control .................................................................................................19-16 Personal Port Gain, Compensation: Ports ........................................................19-21 Personal Port Gain, Compensation: Comp .......................................................19-22 Balancing Network ............................................................................................19-23

20

Wakeup

Wakeup Control ...................................................................................................20-2 Wakeup Report ...................................................................................................20-4

21

Special System OptionsTOC-8

PI Reference Manual

Database Control & Duplication Systems


Database Control ................................................................................................21-2 First Initialization ..................................................................................................21-3 Backup ................................................................................................................21-4 Database Control: Disk (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000) ...............................................................21-5 Save Database (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ........................................................................21-6 Load DBS (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ..................................................................................21-7 Copy Files (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) .................................................................................21-8 Show Dir (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ..................................................................................21-10 Auto-Backup (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ..........................................................................21-11 Database Control: FLASH (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) ....21-12 FLASH: Save (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) ............................21-13 FLASH: LOAD DBS (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) ................21-14 FLASH: SHOW FILE INFO (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) ..21-15 FLASH: AUTO BACKUP (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) .......21-16 FLASH: ERASE (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) .......................21-17 FLASH: INIT DUMP (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) ...............21-18 Duplication (FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 dual control) ..........................................................21-19 HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R redundant control) ......................................................21-24

22

Diagnostics

Diagnostic Tests ..................................................................................................22-2 Diagnostic Alarms ...............................................................................................22-5

23

Special Port Facilities

DVMS Port ..........................................................................................................23-2 Conference ..........................................................................................................23-4 Public Address/Page ...........................................................................................23-6 Modem ................................................................................................................23-7 Bell/UNA ..............................................................................................................23-8 Page_Q/Music .....................................................................................................23-9

TOC-9

PI Reference Manual

24 25

VFAC Time/Date Set and Adjust

Verified Forced Account Code ............................................................................24-2

Time Set ..............................................................................................................25-2 Time Adjust .........................................................................................................25-4

26

ISDN

System Features - ISDN .....................................................................................26-2 BCCOS Templates ..............................................................................................26-3 BCCOS Control ...................................................................................................26-5 NSF .....................................................................................................................26-6 Call by Call ..........................................................................................................26-8 Alternate Line ID ..................................................................................................26-9 ISDN Card Signaling .........................................................................................26-11

27

CoraLINK

CLA_STATUS .....................................................................................................27-2 CLA_SIZES .........................................................................................................27-7 WAIT_QUE ..........................................................................................................27-8

28

ISDNet

System Features - Network .................................................................................28-3 Node NPL ............................................................................................................28-6 Node Content ......................................................................................................28-8 Special Numbering Plan Functions ...................................................................28-11

TOC-10

PI Reference Manual

29

VoIP - Voice over IP

UGW ....................................................................................................................29-5 UGW: Default Configuration ................................................................................29-6 UGW: Current Configuration ...............................................................................29-8 IP Ports ..............................................................................................................29-19 IP Ports: Keyset .................................................................................................29-20 IP Ports: SLT .....................................................................................................29-26 IP Ports: LGS ....................................................................................................29-28 IP Ports: Net ......................................................................................................29-30 IP: Telephony Gateway .....................................................................................29-31 IP: General ........................................................................................................29-35 IP: Statistics .......................................................................................................29-40 IP: NET ..............................................................................................................29-41 IP: ZONE ...........................................................................................................29-43 UGW Software Upgrade: Activate .....................................................................29-47 UGW Software Upgrade: Cancel ......................................................................29-50 IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Activate ..............................................................29-51 IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel ................................................................29-54

TOC-11

PI Reference Manual

TOC-12

Introduction
The Program Interface (PI) is a detailed, menu-driven, interface system for programming the Coral System. This chapter gives general information on how to use the Program Interface and how to set-up the PI software and hardware equipment. The PI terminal commands are listed in tabular form for easy reference. Other conventions and shorthand notations used in this manual are also listed at the end of the chapter. The chapter contents include the following: General Description ......................................................................................1-2 PI Terminal Device.......................................................................................1-4 Hardware Setup ............................................................................................1-5 Access to the Programming Interface ........................................................1-10 PI Terminal Control Function Commands .................................................1-13 Conventions Used in this Document..........................................................1-16 Country Codes ............................................................................................1-18

1-1

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

General Description
The Program Interface (PI) is a detailed, menu-driven, interface system for programming the Coral System. It also provides access to the diagnostic facilities contained within the system software. The PI can be accessed through any of the following types of connecting devices: video display data terminal keyboard send/receive (KSR) printer data terminal a data terminal and modem PC with VT emulator PC with CoralVIEW Designer (CVD) PC with CoralVIEW Administrator (CVA)

An additional PI function allows saving and restoring the entire database contents to a binary disk file, using a personal computer (PC) and save/restore software. Backups are also updated to the IMC8 or CFD flash memory cards. See Database Control: Disk (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000) beginning on page 21-5. See Database Control: FLASH (CSX 200, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000) beginning on page 21-12. In the Coral FlexiCom 400,5000,6000 and Coral IPx 800, 3000,4000 the PI data terminal is connected to the Coral through one of the three RS-232 interfaces on the RMI card (RS-232C) or 8DRCM/ 8DRCF card (RS-232E) at the cable pinouts on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) or through the internal modem interface on the card. One RS-232E interface is provided at the front panel of the MEX-IP2, or MCP-ATS card in the Common Control (see Figure 1-1). In the CSX 200 Main Unit the PI is connected to one RS-232E interface. One KB0 is provided at the front side of the CSX 200. Additionally, the PI can be connected through an internal modem (KB4) located on the U-RMIcsx or RMIcsx card. For CSX 200 Systems with optional IPx 800X expansion unit the PI data terminal is connected to the Coral through one of the three interfaces (KB5,6,7) on the RMI card (RS-232C), or 8DRCM/8DRCF card (RS-232E) at the cable pinouts on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) or through the internal modem interface (KB8) on the card. In the Coral IPx 500M Main Unit the PI is connected to one of four RS-232E interfaces. One KB0 is provided at the front side of the MCP-IPx2 card. Another three interface connectors, KB1, KB2 and KB3 are provided at the upper left side at the auxiliary I/O entry of the main cage (MSBipx card). Additionally, the PI can be connected through an internal modem (KB4) located on the MSBipx card. For Coral IPx 500 Systems with optional IPx 800X expansion unit the PI data terminal is connected to the Coral through one of the three interfaces (KB5,6,7) on

1-2

PI Reference Manual

Introduction the RMI card (RS-232C), or 8DRCM/8DRCF card (RS-232E) at the cable pinouts on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) or through the internal modem interface (KB8) on the card. Multiple but simultaneous, independent PI sessions from different monitors are possible, though this practice is not recommended. Access to the PI is restricted to trained and qualified technicians. Uncertified personnel can unknowingly cause serious damage to the communication system database. The terminal or printer displays Coral-generated prompts (questions, instructions, options, etc.) in plain English; the programmer can make an entry, skip to the next prompt, or exit the programming function. The various card functions can be accessed using a written command, e.g. NPL to jump directly to the Numbering Plan or accessed stepwise, e.g. (0,0,5). Entries are made using a standard keyboard; the keyboard DELETE (not BACKSPACE) key is used on most terminals to erase incorrect characters. Entries are displayed as they are keyed. Changes entered, take effect in real time; i.e., as soon as the ENTER key is pressed, the change is entered into the system memory, and immediately takes effect.

1-3

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

PI Terminal Device
The Program Interface (PI) terminal device should be either an asynchronous, ASCII video display data terminal, a Personal Computer (PC) with terminal emulator software, a KSR printer equipped with a serial interface (RS-232E), a Bell 103/212A/V.90 compatible data modem (see Table 1-1 below). Either one of two popular video display terminal emulations are supported for character attributes, cursor positioning and screen refresh. If the video display terminal connected to the Coral system does not emulate one of the two supported emulations, or a portable data printer is used instead of a video display terminal, use the Printer definition in Terminal Setup beginning on page 17-11. The Modem setup definition is described in the same branch.
Table 1-1: Programming Interface Terminal Communications
Terminal Type DEC VT-100 (Default) Qume QVT-101 (or ADM-3A/5, TV1900) Standard KSR Data Printer Standard PC (also for CVT, CVA or CVD) CID terminal (not KB0) RS-232 Data Transfer Rate 8DRCF, 8DRCM, RMI, MEX-IP2, MCP-ATS, MCP-IPx2, MSBipx (IPx 500M), MCBcsx (CSX 200) Modem Compatibility 8DRCF, MSBipx (IPx 500M), RMIcsx, U-RMIcsx (CSX 200) Modem Compatibility 8DRCM, RMI Parity Data Word Length Stop Bits Format Bell 103/212A Answer-300/1200 bps CCITT V.21/V.22 Answer Mode-300/1200 bps None (Default), Odd, Even, Mark or Space 7 or 8 (Default) bits 1 bit Asynchronous data Standard ASCII character set 9,600 bps Default Baud Rate for all systems. See BAUD RATE (page 17-21) for a detailed list when changing baud rates.

56 Kbps (V.90 ITU-T)

To use the SNAP (real time display) functions available in some programming areas, the PI device must emulate a Digital Equipment Corporation VT-100 or a Qume Corporation QVT-101. This function is not essential for programming; however, it is beneficial when the PI device is also used for system diagnostics.

While the PI terminal device communication specifications may be altered, the default values listed in the above table, default upon first initialization, and must be used in order to initially enter the Coral system programming interface. Afterwards they may be changed.

1-4

PI Reference Manual

Introduction

Hardware Setup
The PI terminal device can be connected to an RS-232 type interface on the system; KB0 in all Coral systems, and KB1, KB2, KB3 in IPx 500 systems or to the RMI/8DRCM/8DRCF internal modem. All features and functions are available through either connection.

On-Site Connection
The PI terminal is connected to the MEX-IP2/MCP-IPx2/MCP-ATS/CSX 200 front panel DB9 connector, KB0. Note that the connector is wired as a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device. Verify that electrical connections between the KB0 port and PI terminal reflect a DTE to DTE or Null Modem connection. Many video display terminals require only the Transmit Data (Tx), Receive Data (Rx) and Signal Ground conductors to be connected between the PI terminal device and the KB0/KB1 or 8DRCM/8DRCF/RMI serial data port. The Qume QVT-101 terminal requires that the Clear to Send conductor be active or high (+3 to +12Vdc) to display received data. Figure 1-2 shows the connections for using a standard PC (COM1 or COM2) with the KB0 interface. Figure 1-3 shows the connections for using a VT-100 or Qume QVT-101 with the KB0 interface. Some portable data printer terminals require that one or more status conductors (e.g. Carrier Detect or Clear to Send) of the terminal be high, active, or asserted for the terminal to be on-line or in a communications mode. The Request to Send and Data Terminal Ready conductors of the KB0 connector are kept high and may be connected to conductors of the terminal device for this purpose. If the terminal device appears unresponsive after it is connected to the Coral, consult the manufacturers operating manual in order to determine if the selected terminal device required any status conductor to be active.

1-5

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

Figure 1-1. Control CardsFront Panel

MEX-IP2 MEX-IP2
M C P I P x 2

Option Switches

Option Switches KB0


KB0

Set DIP Switch# 1 to the Right for KB0 Connections

KB0

RESET IMC-x Release Button IMC-x RESET


RESET

IMC8 Release Button IMC8 LAN SAU

RS-232 E

KB0 Set DIP Switch# 1 to the Right for KB0 Connections

LAN

SAU

RESET Indicator Lights

RESET

ALRM SPKR HDD PWR

CPV5350

MCP-IPx2 Coral IPx 500

MEX-IP2 Coral IPx 800, 3000 FlexiCom 400, 5000

MCP-ATS Coral IPx 4000 FlexiCom 6000

CSX 200
GC UGW CPU

MRC GC ACT. POWER

MAINT.

FAN

KB0

UGW COM

LAN

WAN PRINTER

N.C. RESET SYS. RESET

MEMORY

DISK 1 3 5 7

IMC-x Release Button

IMC-x

KB0

RESET

1-6

PI Reference Manual

Introduction

KB0:

Data Terminal Port: RS232-E DTE Interface. Default configuration: 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100. Table 1-2 describes the KB0 RS-232 pin connections to the PI terminal. MEX-IP2 and MCP-IPx2: Switches 1-8 Always Set to the Right Switch 1 LEFT for PI-LAN (LIU) Connections Only Switch 1 RIGHT for KB0 Connections Switch 3 (MCP-IPx2) LEFT for IMC4 Switch 7 should be set to OFF (RIGHT) so that the system will respond after a power failure. Coral IPx 4000 and Coral FlexiCom 6000 systems: The Option switches are located on the 32GC control card, not shown here. There are only 4 switches (0-3) and Switch 3 should be set to OFF (Right) so that the system will respond after a power failure.

Option Switches:

Reset Button:

Forces the CORAL system to restart.

WARNING! Pressing this button will cause partial initialization and drop all calls. 7-Segment Display:
For alarms and diagnostics. CSX 200, Coral IPx 4000 and Coral FlexiCom 6000 systems: 7-segment display is not used. Software Authorization Unit is attached here. Coral IPx 4000 and Coral FlexiCom 6000 systems: The SAU socket is located on the 32GC control card, not shown here. CSX 200 system: The SAU socket is located on the right panel.

SAU

Table 1-2: KB0 RS-232 Interface Pin Functions


Pin 1 2 #* Signal Mnemonic N/A RX (Receive) Function --Receives serial data input fro communications link Sends serial output to communications link Data set is ready to establish a communications link Ground Data set is ready Indicates to data set that UART is ready to exchange data Data set is ready to exchange data ---

Tx (Transmit)

DTR

5 6 7

GND DSR RTS

8 9 *

CTS N/A

To connect the Coral system, pins 2, 3 and 5 are sufficient.

1-7

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

Figure 1-2. PI DB9 Terminal to KB0 Connection

5 9 4 3 2 6 1

SIGNAL GROUND - 5 9 DATA TERMINAL READY - 4 TRANSMIT DATA - 3 RECEIVE DATA - 2 CARRIER DETECT - 1

KB0 PROGRAMMING PORT (USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR)

9 PIN PC ASYNC. SERIAL PORT (USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)

Figure 1-3. PI DB25 Terminal to KB0 Connection

13 25

5 - SIGNAL GROUND 4 - DATA TERMINAL READY 3 - TRANSMIT DATA 2 - RECEIVE DATA 1

SIGNAL GROUND - 7 DATA SET READY - 6 CLEAR TO SEND - 5 REQUEST TO SEND - 4 RECEIVE DATA - 3 TRANSMIT DATA - 2 1 14

KB0 PROGRAMMING PORT (USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR)

PC Async. Serial Port or Async.Data Terminal (USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)

1-8

PI Reference Manual

Introduction

Remote Connections
Remote connections are made by connecting the PI terminal device to a modem and establishing a voice call from the remote terminal modem to the Coral Modem. CSX 200 system requires the installation of a U-RMIcsx or RMIcsx card to accommodate remote access, or the installation of an external, customer provided modem to the KB0 interface. Coral IPx 500 system is equipped with a built in modem. Coral FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 and Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 systems require the installation of an 8DRCM, 8DRCF or RMI card to accommodate remote access, or the installation of an external, customer provided modem to the KB0 interface. Figure 1-4 illustrates the necessary connections between the KB0 interface and a typical external modem, however, the connections to some modems may vary.

r
Figure 1-4. External Modem to KB0 Connection

When an external modem is connected to KB0, before first initialization, the option switches located on the control card must be set up for the required baud rate (see BAUD RATE on page 17-21).
Signal Ground Data Set Ready 5 - Signal Ground 4 - Data Terminal Ready 3 - Transmit Data 2 - Receive Data 1 Request To Send Receive Data Transmit Data To Typical Modem Device

KB0 SERIAL PORT (USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR)

See the relevant Coral Installation Guide and Hardware Reference Manual for precise modem setup instructions.

1-9

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

Access to the Programming Interface


Access to the Programming Interface facility is controlled by passwords. There are four PI password levels. The programmer requires Level 2. This password is provided only for qualified personnel.

PI Software Structure
The PI software is a menu-driven and branch oriented system. The programmer can select a specific branch, which branches out into more detailed lists. In addition, the programmer is able to jump from one menu to another with no restrictions, except those demanded by specific password levels. When the PI software is first accessed, the ENTER PASSWORD prompt appears. After a valid password is entered, the Root Menu appears.

1-10

PI Reference Manual

Introduction

Root Menu Variations


The Root Menu is the main menu in the PI structure, from which the rest of the PI issues. The PI software is part of the system software. The Root Menu reflects the installed software version by listing the available items specific to the installed software version.

r
Figure 1-5. PI Interface Root Menu

Entering the word ROOT anywhere within the PI, will take you to this menu.

(ROOT) CCS V15.20 Copyright (c) 2001-2005 Tadiran Telecom Ltd. (M) or (S) or (Active) NAME -

SAU # 0-CONFIG 1-DIAGN 2-TABLES 3-ADMIN 4-ROUTING/COST 5-ISDN 6-DATA 7-CoraLINK 8-NETWORK 9-IP 10-HELP

This manual describes all of the root menu options except 1-Diagn and 2-Tables. Tables programming is reserved for the manufacturers internal use. In Coral FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000 with Dual Control systems, the letter M (Master) or S (Slave) appearing after the version number indicates the PI side definition. In Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000 systems, the letter A (Active), S (Standby) (if feature authorization is present for duplication) or M (Maintenance) or the word Faulty appear after the version number indicating the PI side definition. SAU shows the Software Authorization Unit (SAU) unique serial number (without the leading zeros). This number is verified during system operation. When a mismatch is detected during operation, a system alarm is issued and an error message is displayed.

1-11

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

Access to Specific Menus


Access to the root menu may be done from anywhere within the PI, by entering the word ROOT. Access the menu items by keying a sequence of digits from the root menu that route the user to the required branch, such as 0,6,0 which will route to Public Libraries. An alternative method for accessing items is to type the alpha or alphanumeric code for the item, such as LIB which provides direct access to Speed Calling Libraries.

An advantage of using the alphanumeric code is that this method allows access to a specific branch from anywhere in the system, except from the NAME field. While the numeric digit method allows access only from the Root Menu. Alternatively, ROOT,0,6,0 routes to LIB from anywhere within the system.

1-12

PI Reference Manual

Introduction

PI Terminal Control Function Commands


The PI terminal keyboard is used to enter data and to instruct the PI software to perform specific functions. Several special function commands are available, and executed by simultaneously pressing the [CTRL] (Control) key and a specific letter key. The commands and their functions are listed in the following table.
Table 1-3: PI Control Characters and Escape Functions Code
[CTRL] B [CTRL] C [CTRL] D

Description
Causes the previous field within the menu or list to be displayed. Cancels the current process; returns PI to previous menu or list. Often a displayed mode contains too many entries or tables to be displayed on one screen. To view a subject one entry (screen) at a time, use the [CTRL] D switch. To cancel, use [CTRL] D again as a toggle switch. While this mode is active, after displaying the first screen of entry, the PI pauses. To continue viewing the next screen of entry, press <CR>. When the [CTRL] D switch is activated, the following messages are displayed: activate: ***ENTRY BY ENTRY DISPLAY*** cancel: ***SCROLLING DISPLAY*** Causes the End-of-Table message to be shown, after the last field in Update mode. When activated End-of-Table allows the [CTRL] B switch to jump to the last field. This switch toggles between the default Normal Display and the End-Of-Table display. Defines a new Escape or Home menu; When [CTRL] H is entered the following message appears: ESC will place you in this Node This PI menu is now displayed whenever pressing [ESC]. Note: Entering ROOT from anywhere within the PI will always place you in the Root menu.

Remarks

[CTRL] E

[CTRL] H

The ASCII character code defines [CTRL] H as the BACKSPACE character. Some terminal keyboards can be configured to send a DELETE character when backspacing. When available on the terminal, select this option to avoid changing the Escape menu.

[CTRL] N

For Use by Manufacturer Only.


Toggles the display of memory pools in chain order. When activated the following messages are displayed:

*** CHAIN DISPLAY *** *** NORMAL DISPLAY ***

1-13

Introduction
Table 1-3: PI Control Characters and Escape Functions Code
[CTRL] O

PI Reference Manual

Description For Use by Manufacturer Only. Coral FlexiCom 5000 or IPx 3000 -Duplication only.
Toggles terminal communication between the Slave and the Master side. When full duplication is invoked (i.e., in the U and U' configurations, see MASTER on page 21-20, [CTRL] O enables the technician to operate the PI from the 8DRCF/8DRCM/RMI or KB0 master terminals as if s/he is physically located at the slave location.

Remarks
Recommendation: Return to the Master side before ending a PI session (with [CTRL] P).

Coral FlexiCom 6000/R or IPx 4000/R Dual Control only.


Toggles terminal communication between the Standby and the Active side. See HSB on page 21-25. After connecting (or disconnecting) the terminal to (or from) the KB0/8DRCF/8DRCM/RMI Slave/Standby side or KB0 Master/Active side, one of the following messages appear: terminal connected or terminal disconnected. The following terminal status messages appear while the terminal is being connected between sides: FlexiCom 5000 switching terminal to slave side or switching terminal to master side. FlexiCom 6000 switching terminal to Standby side or switching terminal to Active side. [CTRL] P Ends the PI session; password entry is required to start a new PI There is an automatic logout upon session. Pressing [CTRL] P is recommended when exiting in inactive terminal (see AUTO_LOGOUT order to prevent unauthorized operators from entering the PI and and AUTO_LOGOUT_TIME on page 17-20). causing damage. When changes are made to systems that do not include an automatic backup, the following message appears:

CAUTION!!! Auto backup NOT available <<DATABASE SAVE Recommended After Changes>> Quit Anyway (Y/N)? Y
Typing N(o) returns to the current PI mode. Typing Y(es) will leave the session.The default is Y(es) [CR]. [CTRL] Q Turns off the [CTRL] S command (below). [CTRL] Q and [CTRL] S functions are commonly referred to as X-On/X-Off or DC1/DC3. Some terminal keyboards include a SCROLL LOCK key, which alternately sends a [CTRL] S and [CTRL]Q to toggle scrolling.

[CRTL] R [CTRL] S [CTRL] T

Shows the current menu path from the Root Menu. Utilized by KB0 only. Causes the display to stop scrolling. Displays current system status: Installation name, current time and date, terminal number, password level, system software and card version and system type HDC/4GC/16GC/32GC, HSB & MCP-ATS, etc. Causes the previous menu or list to be displayed.

[CTRL] U

1-14

PI Reference Manual
Table 1-3: PI Control Characters and Escape Functions Code
[CTRL] V [CTRL] W RESTART [CTRL] Y ESC

Introduction

Description
Terminates the display of stimuli code messages. Toggles the 25-line scroll function on (display scrolls 25 lines and stops) and off (display scrolls to the end of the menu, list, etc.). Begins a RESTART procedure. This command is used when the PI is not properly responding. Type RESTART in upper case. Pressing the Escape key in any location returns the session to the PI Home Menu as defined by [CTRL] H. The Root Menu is the default; any menu or list may be specified by moving to the desired menu and entering [CTRL] H.

Remarks
Same as entering MSG,2,0,N.

1-15

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

Conventions Used in this Document


Routes Branch headings (starting in Chapter 3) always show the subject and the route keyed from the Root Menu to reach that subject, for example:

Installation

W ROOT

[0,0,0,0]

Many option headings offer alternative routes; the first route given is the shortest route and may be used from any point in the PI menu structure. An example is:

Feature Timers

W FE.T

[0,0,1,0]

FE.T (also called Direct Access Abbreviation) may be keyed to access the feature timers from any location in the PI structure. FE.T cannot be accessed when in Name fields. The route shown by digits and commas is used only from the Root Menu.

Digits must be separated by commas or spaces. 0,0,0 and 0 0 0 are acceptable; 000 is not acceptable.

1-16

PI Reference Manual

Introduction

Ranges and Defaults


The ranges and defaults available for a given programming option are presented immediately after the parameter name on the same line. The range default is designated with an arrow on top of default item. For example, the range for SUSPECT SEIZE TIME in Trunk Definitions can be listed as:

50..80..500 ms

or 0..80

where 80ms is the default in both cases and is designated by a pointed arrow on top of the number. When no default is designated, the default is Not Applicable. For ranges that may include more than one default, the defaults are listed separately. For example, the defaults for the PAGE parameter in Station and Trunk COS, is shown as:

Yes/No Yes: COS 0-9 No: COS 10-15


Explanation: The range is Yes or No. For COS 0-9 the default is Yes. For COS 10-15 the default is No. When a system range is not relevant, None is shown as the entry. In addition, when a range specification is not applicable for a specific option, the abbreviation N/A is given instead of data. When a system default is not available or not applicable, no arrows are shown and, thereby, no default designated. Display Only Parameters Parameters which are read only options, (i.e. Display Only) appear with the following icon before the Range. The example below indicates that the parameter value may vary between 0 and 60 units. The actual value is indicated on the PI screen.

0..60
Database Forms A document called Database Forms is provided for writing down the various site programming definitions that differ from the defaults presented in this manual. Database Forms provides a convenient notebook for programmers to record specific site data and information. This information can then be used in order to redefine the various PI parameters. The headers of each major option in the Database Forms mirror the titles of each Coral branch i.e., major options in this document.

1-17

Introduction

PI Reference Manual

Country Codes
The Coral incorporates two different system types. System Type 0 defines the system defaults used in North America. The countries that use System Type 0, but with slight differences for their ranges and/or default values are listed as CCn types (where n is a number). The relevant country type is listed below. System Type 2, designated as Eu, is used for European countries. The countries that use the same system type but slightly different ranges and/or defaults are listed as Eun, where n indicates the specific country (see below).
Table 1-4: Country Codes USA Israel Mexico Brazil Venezuela Argentina China Poland India ROW (Rest Of World), i.e. all other
countries not included in this list.)

System Type

Country Code CC0 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4 CC5 CC6 CC7 CC8 CC9 CC10

Country

System Type 0
Country Codes: CCn (n = any number)

Russia Netherlands Belgium Germany Spain Hungary Greece Australia New Zealand Czech Republic Italy Caribbean Islands

System Type 2
Country Codes: Eun (n = any number)

Eu0 Eu1 Eu2 Eu3 Eu4 Eu5 Eu6 Eu7 Eu8 Eu9 Eu10

System type and Country Code (CC) numbers are displayed during Installation or in the Install branch, see SYSTEM_TYPE and COUNTRY on page 3-2. When the word European or Eu, without a specific country, is given this means that the system parameters or specifications are general for European systems. If no country or area is indicated then the parameter is valid as presented. 30T/E, ALS70, BID & GID trunk cards are used only in European systems.

1-18

Programming Requirements
This chapter describes the PI programming requirements. Basic shorthand notation used throughout the PI is also described in this chapter. Default System .............................................................................................2-2 Typical Site-Specific Programming .............................................................2-3 Additional Programming ..............................................................................2-4 Programming and Entering Time Units .......................................................2-6 Programming Functions ...............................................................................2-7 Locating Data Fields ....................................................................................2-8 Direct Access Abbreviations (DAA) ...........................................................2-9 Entering Yes/No and Remove ....................................................................2-10 General Rules for Entering Names ............................................................ 2-11 Authorization Items ....................................................................................2-12 Default System defines the default databases according to the country, system type and Common Control card type. Typical Site-Specific Programming and Additional Programming describe PI programming for all the different PI branches. Programming and Entering Time Units defines the PI time unit notation. Programming Functions describes the different PI functions available at the branches or options. Locating Data Fields and Direct Access Abbreviations will help you locate the desired parameter, data field or branch needed to program the PI. Entering Yes/No and Remove Range and General Rules for Entering Names describe the general rules for entering Yes, No, Remove and Names in the parameter range. Authorization Items list the specific features that need software authorization before they can be implemented.

2-1

Programming Requirements

PI Reference Manual

Default System
The configuration of the Common Control cards determines the default database that is installed upon First Initialization, as shown below. CSX 200, Coral FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 as well as the Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000 and 4000 systems default to a Coral system with 4GC, with authorized features defined by the SAU unit. Should a particular parameter impact upon a different option, the relation between the two is explained in the relevant description.

The SIZES parameters must be programmed before all other parameters. Changing the SIZES parameters causes the system to revert to the manufacturer's default program.

2-2

PI Reference Manual

Programming Requirements

Typical Site-Specific Programming


Depending on the site, the default database may require some programming. When it is necessary to modify the default database, this information should be entered in the Programming Forms. The programming parameters most often changed are found in the following branches: Sizes (Chapter 4) Sets the maximum number of various system services, such as ports, libraries, stations, trunks, etc. Numbering Plan (Chapter 5) Modifies the numbering plan for the specific site. System (Chapter 6) Modifies system timers, system features, system tones and identifies the hardware assigned to specific physical locations. Class of Service (Chapter 7) Defines access to system features and functions. Trunks (Chapter 8) Defines trunks and trunk groups; individual menus are provided for Central Office (loop/ground start), E&M, DID, T1, E1 (30T), TWL, PRI (PRI-23/30 and IPG), BRI (TBR), SIP trunk and power fail trunks. Stations (Chapter 9) Defines all SLT, Magneto, FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, SIP terminal and keyset requirements. Power Fail stations are identified in the database using the Power Fail Trunk form in Chapter 8 (Trunks).

2-3

Programming Requirements

PI Reference Manual

Additional Programming
Depending upon site requirements, the following major options may need additional programming. Groups (Chapter 10) Defines Hunt Groups, Boss Groups, Pickup Groups, Zoned Voice Page Groups, Bell/UNA (Night Answer Groups) and Group Calls. DID/E&M Groups and Trunk Groups are defined in Chapter 8. Libraries (Chapter 11) Defines public (system-wide) and private (station-related) speed call libraries as well as the parameters for the System Directory. Night Service (Chapter 12) Defines night service timers as well as incomplete and intercept call destinations. Toll Barrier (Chapter 13) Sets toll restrictions (barriers) on outgoing calls. Station Message Detail Recording (Chapter 14) Controls the systems detailed call reporting to external SMDR systems. Routing (Chapter 15) Defines Routing and Cost Calculation parameters. Room Status (Chapter 16) Controls the systems room status feature. Service Terminals (Chapter 17) Defines the various system parameters for service terminals. Features (Chapter 18) Defines port features which can be activated from either the PI terminal or the Attendant Console. Voice Transmission Controls (Chapter 19) Controls voice transmission across ports and cards. Also included in this chapter is the Network Balancing System. Wakeup (Chapter 20) Defines the Wakeup controls and Wakeup report production. Special System Options (Chapter 21) Defines those features that control the database, duplication system as well as the Hot Standby Coral Systems. Diagnostics (Chapter 22) Defines those options that perform the various diagnostic tests and check the system alarms.

2-4

PI Reference Manual

Programming Requirements Special Port Facilities (Chapter 23) Defines those special options that are available for tenant members, plus defining DVMS ports. Verified Forced Account Code (VFAC) (Chapter 24) Describes the various options that are available for VFAC. Time/Date Set and Adjust (Chapter 25) Describes the way in which the system time and date are set and adjusted. Integrated Services Digital Network (Chapter 26) Describes the various ISDN system options. CoraLINK (Chapter 27) Describes the CoraLINK database options. ISDNet (Chapter 28) Defines and allocates the Nodes and Node Contents in a Private Coral Network and also includes the special General Numbering Plan functions for the Network Nodes. Voice Over IP (Chapter 29) Manages the Coral VoIP (Voice calls over Internet Protocol) details. IP Ports are managed from the branches included in this chapter, as well as general system-wide IP parameters. Remote upgrades to the UGW card as well as to IP Keysets may be implemented via the PI as well.

2-5

Programming Requirements

PI Reference Manual

Programming and Entering Time Units


The following table presents the 12 hour to 24 hour conversions for programming and entering time units in the PI. Exceptions to the required 24 hour format are described below.
AM Hours
Time Midnight 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Enter 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

PM Hours
Time Noon 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Enter 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Minutes are entered as two digits (00 through 59). All time entries are hh:mm, where hh = hour (00-23) and mm = minutes (00-59). For single-digit hours, 1AM to 9 AM, a leading 0 can be added as required by the programmer; for example: 8 am can be defined either as 8:00 or 08:00. A colon (:) must be entered between the hour and minutes.

2-6

PI Reference Manual

Programming Requirements

Programming Functions
The following table presents the eight programming functions that can be applied to the Program Interface. Only functions relevant to a specific branch are available in that branch or option.
Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Function UPDATE DISPLAY ADD REMOVE SNAP SHOW DUPLICATE Description Allows changing or modifying the parameter values or characteristics. Displays all parameters for any specific port or range of consecutively numbered ports. Instructs the system to make an addition to the existing parameter or option for a specific port. Deletes an existing parameter. Similar to DISPLAY, but in real-time. Used for on-line monitoring from a single monitor only. Generally used for showing Diagnostics and Numbering Plan tables. Copies a defined feature or parameter from one port or station to another port or station. Useful for rapidly defining new stations or updating existing stations. Deletes the branch database from memory while in a specific branch.

ERASE

2-7

Programming Requirements

PI Reference Manual

Locating Data Fields


Data fields (parameters) can be located using short-cuts. When the question
Any specific data field (type? for help)

appears, any one of several actions can be taken: All Fields: Press <CR> to display or update all fields. Single Field: Enter single field name or field number to display or update a single field. Multiple Fields: Enter up to seven field names and or field numbers to display or update multiple fields. Each field must be separated by either a space or comma, for example: 2,5,9 or 11 15 24 26 or 0 5 or MAX_RING, EXT.ID are all valid entries. Field Search: Enter single field name/field number and value required for searching. (field name) = (value). For example: while in the KEY node, to identify all keysets defined as attendant, enter ATT = Y. All keysets defined with this value appear. Two values cannot be entered in the same instance; e.g. ATT = Y, PCC = Y is not a valid entry.

Field names can be entered in any of the following methods: Full field name, e.g. MAX_RING. The least amount of letters that identify a parameter, e.g. Max for MAX_RING. The system will always start searching from the top of the current node. Field index number, this is the number that appears in square brackets after the field name, e.g. [0]. Field Index is always correct for the most recent Coral Version (check this handbooks front cover to determine the most recent Coral Version). In the more advanced versions, new field names are added. Changes can occur in their numbering. Compatibility cannot be guaranteed between field index numbers for different Coral Software versions.

2-8

PI Reference Manual

Programming Requirements

Direct Access Abbreviations (DAA)


Certain branches and options can be directly accessed from any location in the PI tree. The entire list of these abbreviations (or mnemonics) can be displayed by either entering HELP or typing 7 on the main menu. Since HELP is also a Direct Access Abbreviation (DAA), typing the letters HELP anywhere in the PI tree, except in NAME field, will bring up the List Of Direct Access Abbreviations to the PI Tree. The following table presents the currently available DAA features. This list is presented in alpha-numeric order, as opposed to the actual PI on-line list, which has a slightly different arrangement. Entering ROOT anywhere in the PI returns the system to the Root (Main) Menu.
Branch
4T/8T CARD_DB ALT ROUT TK.GROUP BELL/UNA GROUP BOSS GROUP BUSY PORTS CARD DATABASE CARD LIST CLASS OF SERVICE COST CALCULATION DATA SERVICES 8 DID CARD_DB DID/E&M TRUNK GROUP DIGITAL BUS LIST DIGITAL TRUNK KEYSET DEFINITION

DAA

Branch CALL HUNT


IPKEY

DAA

BRANCH
SMDR CONTROL STATION TIMERS SYSTEM GEN. SYS FEATURES SYS TIME SET-UP TERMINAL SET-UP TOLL BARRIER TONE PLAN TRUNK DEFINITION TRUNK GROUP TRUNK GROUP DEF. TRUNK PORTS TRUNK TIMER UGW Configuration VERIFIED FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

DAA SMDR ST.T SYSGEN SFE TIME TERM TOLL TON TRK TKGP TGDEF TRUNK TK.T UGWC VFAC

TKDB GROUP CALLS ROUT HUNTING GROUP BELL IP Ports KEYSET BUSY IST/SLT DEF. CDB COS
LCR/ROUTING

BOSS IST/SLT CARD_DB STDB SLT(or IST) LCR LIB NET NIGHT NODE MSG PICK PDB PLIS

CLIS LIBRARIES
NETWORK

COST NIGHT SERVICE DATA NODES DIDG PI MESSAGES DLIS PICK-UP GROUP DTDB KEY
PORT DATABASE PORT LIST

DIDB NUMBERING PLAN NPL

or
KEYSET PROGRAMMING KEYSET TIMERS FEATURES PORTS FEATURE TIMERS GROUPS

EKT PROG PREFERENCE PREF


Voice over IP WAKEUP WIRELESS ST (PDB) ZONED GROUPS

IP WAKEUP WST VPZ

EK.T RESERVED LINKS LINK

(SVC only)

FEAT RINGER P.S. FE.T SIZES DEF. GROUP

RPS SIZ

The layout and order of the Direct Access Abbreviations shown above is slightly different from the on-line version; this is for the sake of clarity only.

2-9

Programming Requirements

PI Reference Manual

Entering Yes/No and Remove


Entering the Yes or No answer to any option can be done in several ways, any of which is accepted by the system:
YES
YE Y

NO
N NON NONE

Remove
Remove Rem R

The letters can be entered in either upper or lower case or in combination. However, if any other letters are entered the following message appears:
SYNTAX ERR, TRY AGAIN.

2-10

PI Reference Manual

Programming Requirements

General Rules for Entering Names


The following rules apply for entering names in the various PI features that require such a definition. These naming rules are generally applicable for most options. However, when special considerations are required these are mentioned along with the option description.

Naming Rules
1. The number of characters allowed in names is determined according to the option requirements. 2. Control characters are ignored and should not be used. 3. Names cannot have spaces or tab characters. Any character entered after an inadvertent space or tab is ignored. 4. For space/blank, enter underscore: _. 5. Upper and lower case letters can be used in any combination. Letters are displayed exactly as entered. In the following cases, however, the names are displayed in Uppercase: Idle keyset/FlexSet displays Site Name Password 6. Direct Access Abbreviations may be used for names. While entering names, DAA access is blocked. 7. In Semitic systems, letters appear right to left. 8. Each port/group/library has a set of two names, SHORT and FULL, which appears on a KEYSET according to the following: DSP32 SHORT name DSP48 SHORT name or first 9 characters of full name (the selection between Short and Full, is defined system-wide, see SFE, on page 6-23) DSP80 FULL name DSP160 FULL name 9. To remove a defined name, use R. Entering R displays the default BLANK.

2-11

Programming Requirements

PI Reference Manual

Authorization Items
Software Upgrades, new Feature Activations and increasing Feature Sizes, require Software Authorization. Generic software and feature activation, features sizes and software authorization information are all included on the IMC8 or CFD flash memory card. The Authorization set includes a serial number which must match the Software Authorization Unit (SAU) physically installed on the following cards: MCBcsx (CSX 200 right panel) MCP-IPx2 (Coral IPx 500) MEX-IP2 (Coral FlexiCom 400 and Coral IPx 800) MEX-IP2 (Coral FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000)* 32GC (Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000)

A unique SAU number is assigned per system. The SAU information determines the feature implementation capabilities or feature access authorization for a customer. Loading unauthorized updates will cause the system to shut down after 14 days unless the proper authorization (SAU) is provided. Authorization allows for up to 50 software subversion upgrades, allows increasing the system sizes and activating specific features. The latest software version allowed for the site is verified by the Coral prior to the complete software installation. Attempting to install an unauthorized version, the Coral will abort the process without overwriting the current software version. Any attempt to exceed limited or maximum numbers, e.g. sizing, results in an error message. When a feature is not authorized in the system, any attempt to access that feature results in the following message:
(feature name) is not authorized in the system.

In the following pages all options that are controlled by the authorization system are assigned Authorization Limit or Authorization Control.

*.

For the FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000 systems with duplicated control, an identical yet separate IMC8 is required for each system side. Each IMC8 includes its own unique Software Authorization number. . For the FlexiCom 6000/R and Coral IPx 4000/R systems with dual redundant control, an identical yet separate CFD is required for each system side. Each CFD includes its own unique Software Authorization number.

2-12

Installation
This branch presents certain system defaults, based on the Software Authorization Unit (SAU), at the time of initial installation. Installation parameters configure the system logic, allocate memory, establish default system sizes and set port and feature defaults; all according to the type of system specified. Installation and Feature Authorization display fields are described on the following pages: Installation ....................................................................................................3-2 Feature Authorization ...................................................................................3-3

Installation parameters are programmed automatically by the manufacturer before all other parameters are programmed.

3-1

Installation

PI Reference Manual

Installation

W SYSGEN,0

[0,0,0,0]

The following fields show the presently defined system type, and country of installation. Used for display purposes only. SYSTEM_TYPE 0 (Most Countries), 1 (Special Applications), 2 (European system) The parameter defines a set of countries or authorities with similar specifications.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COUNTRY System_Type 0: 0 (USA), 1 (Israel), 2 (Mexico), 3 (Brazil), 4 (Venezuela), 5 (Argentina), 6 (China), 7(Poland), 8 (India), 9 (International-ROW), 10 (Russia)

System_Type 1: 0/1/2: Consult Factory; System_Type 2: 0 (Netherlands), 1 (Belgium), 2 (Germany), 3 (Spain), 4 (Hungary), 5 (Greece), 6 (Australia), 7 (New Zealand), 8 (Czech Republic), 9 (Italy)
Determines the country in which the system is installed. USA includes countries using the North American standard (see Country Codes on page 1-18). This parameter determines several defaults including display and grammar conventions, whether central office trunks default to loop start or ground start, port dialing default is rotary or DTMF, special timers, etc.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CABINET_TYPE 0 (Coral FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000) 1 (Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 and Coral IPx Office) Determines the type of cabinets this Coral is housed in.

Installation SYSGEN,0 [0,0,0,0]


3-2

Enter 0 for Coral FlexiCom systems. Enter 1 for Coral IPx systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Installation

Feature Authorization

W FEAT,1

Displays the feature implementation capabilities on feature access authorization. DISPLAY CURRENT determines whether the feature is available. To activate Coral Features requiring Authorization, use the FMprog utility. FMprog is a tool for Coral dealers who install, upgrade and maintain Coral FlexiCom systems using Flash Memory cards.
Coral system type Control card type MCBcsx MCP-IPx2 MEX-IP2 Flash Memory card type IMC8 IMC8 IMC8

IPx Office IPx 500 FlexiCom 400, 5000 IPx 800, 3000 FlexiCom 6000 IPx 4000

MCP-ATS

CFD

Whenever an updated version of the Coral software is released, the upgrade is delivered to the sites either on 3.5" diskettes, e-mail, or via other electronic media file transfer. The upgrade is contained in a self-extracting compressed file, specific for the site. The upgraded generic feature software and authorization must be extracted by a PC via the FMprog utility, and then written from the PC hard disk into the memory card. The SAU number on the memory card must match the SAU number on the physical SAU attached to the Control card.

For redundant systems (Coral FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R), only one SAU number is used per side. Therefore, the SAU number on the physical SAU device must match the SAU number on the CFD memory card for that side. For more information, see Authorization Items on page 2-12.

Contact your dealer for the proper upgrade.

0 - DISPLAY Displays the current authorization set, limitations and feature capabilities. CURRENT (see Table below)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1 - DISPLAY NEW Not used. (DISKETTE)


l l l l l l l l

3-3

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

For duplication systems (Coral FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000), only one SAU number is used per side. Therefore, the SAU number on the physical SAU device must match the SAU number on the IMC8 memory card for that side.

Installation

PI Reference Manual

FEATURE 1 PORTS

RANGE 6000* (max)

DESCRIPTION Shows the maximum Ports (stations and trunks) allowed in the system. The total number (sum) of KEYSETS, SLTS, TRUNKS, FlexSets, KEYSETS_IP, SOFTSET, SLT_IP, LGS_IP and NET_IP must be less than the number of Ports. Parameters may be defined in excess of their Authorization Limit in the Sizes Definition branch in order to avoid a First Init when adding stations. However, attempting to use equipment in excess of its Authorization Limit results in the UNAUTHORIZED message and the attempt fails.

KEYSETS

XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Shows the maximum number of available Keyset ports for this system. Includes: FlexSet, APDL, CPA, Wireless handsets (FlexAir/CoralAIR), EKT, VDK, DKT, DST, CPA, GKT, all VM keyset ports Also includes all wired FlexSet units. Therefore, for example, if you have 100 DKTs and 100 FlexSets in your system, KEYSETs would have to be at least 200 and FlexSets (below) would have to be at least 100. XXXX indicates that the Keysets limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

SLTS

XXXX (or 1-4000*) whichever is smaller

Includes: Magneto and Type 500 or Type 2500, standard Single Line Telephones. 9-SLT_IP, below, must be defined for SLT IP sets. XXXX indicates that the SLTS limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

TRUNKS

XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Includes all types of trunks: analog, digital, Loop Start, Ground Start, E&M, PRI, BRI DID, etc. 10-LGS_IP, below, must be defined for LGS IP trunks. XXXX indicates that the TRUNKS limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

FlexSets

XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Includes all FlexSet Models: 120/120D/120L/120S/121S/280/280D/280D-Z/ 280D-HS/280S/281S/, Flexset APDL and iCMC (each iCMC card requires 24 entries) The number of FlexSets must be smaller than the number of KEYSETS. 6-KEYSETS_IP, below, must be defined for IP keysets. XXXX indicates that the FlexSets limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

3-4

PI Reference Manual

Installation

FEATURE 6 KEYSETS_IP

RANGE XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

DESCRIPTION Includes all IP Keyset models: FlexSet-IP 280S XXXX indicates that the Keysets IP limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

SOFTSET

XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Includes all Coral Softsets: FlexIP SoftPhone XXXX indicates that the Softsets limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS. TBD

8 9

SENTINEL SLT_IP XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Includes all IP SLTs: IP SLTs are Type 500 or Type 2500 standard single line telephones connected via Coral Teleport/FXS units to the Coral IP Network. XXXX indicates that the SLT_IP limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

10

LGS_IP

XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Includes all IP LGS trunks: IP LGS trunks are analog trunks connected via Coral Teleport/FXO units to the Coral IP Network. XXXX indicates that the LGS_IP limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

11

NET_IP

XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

Includes all Coral IP QSIG Network connections for this Coral system via UGW cards. XXXX indicates that the NET_IP limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

12 13 14

SIP TERMINAL SIP TRUNK MEDIA_CHAN. 0-999

TBD TBD Defines the maximum number of UGW Media Channels supported throughout this Coral system.

3-5

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

Installation

PI Reference Manual

FEATURE 15 APA

RANGE XXXX (or 1-3400*) whichever is smaller

DESCRIPTION Defines the maximum number of APA ports allowed throughout this Coral system. APA may be installed on these units:
FlexSet 280S/281S with APA or PEX+APA FlexSet APDL with APA or PEX+APA FlexSet 80S (GKT 4320) FlexSet 80P (GKT 4321) DKT 2322 DKT 2000 Series with APA DKT APDL

XXXX indicates that the APA limit is equivalent to the number of PORTS.

Note:
More than 100 APA units may be installed and work simultaneously when CAP_MSG_DESTINATION [35] (page 6-27) in Station Options (SFE,2) is set to Specific enabling a Primary and Secondary Busy/Idle message destination. 16 17 DAYS URC DTMF (nnn) XXXX Feature Time Limitation: For Future Use Applicable for: Coral IPx 500 systems with MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above Coral IPx Office systems with MRC, U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx cards Coral systems with MRC on PUGW or PUGWipx cards Defines the maximum number of URC (and MRC) DTMF Receiver (DTR) resources authorized for this Coral system, see URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) beginning on page 8-79. XXXX indicates that the URC DTMF limit is equivalent to a maximum based on the URC configuration (0....24) and on the MRC type.

Feature Authorization FEAT,1


3-6

PI Reference Manual

Installation

FEATURE 18 URC CLID XXXX

RANGE Applicable for:

DESCRIPTION

Coral IPx 500 systems with MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above Coral IPx Office systems with MRC, U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx cards Coral systems with MRC on PUGW or PUGWipx cards Defines the maximum number of URC (and MRC) CLID (Caller ID) iDSP resources authorized for this Coral system, see URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) beginning on page 8-79. XXXX indicates that the URC CLID limit is equivalent to a maximum based on the URC configuration (0..16..32) and on the MRC type. 19 URC 3WAY XXXX Applicable for: Coral IPx 500 systems with MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above Coral IPx Office systems with MRC, U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx cards Coral systems with MRC on PUGW or PUGWipx cards Defines the maximum number of URC (and MRC) 3-WAY conference resources authorized for this Coral system., see URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) beginning on page 8-79. XXXX indicates that the URC 3WAY limit is equivalent to a maximum based on the URC configuration (0..8..24) and on the MRC type. 20 URC CONF XXXX Applicable for: Coral IPx 500 systems with MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above Coral IPx Office systems with MRC, U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx cards Coral systems with MRC on PUGW or PUGWipx cards Defines the maximum number of URC (and MRC) CONF (meet-me conference bridge) resources authorized for this Coral system., see URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) beginning on page 8-79. XXXX indicates that the URC CONF limit is equivalent to a maximum based on the URC configuration (0..2..6) and on the MRC type.

3-7

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

Installation

PI Reference Manual

FEATURE 21 URC MFR NA

RANGE Applicable for:

DESCRIPTION

Coral IPx Office systems with MRC cards Coral systems with MRC on PUGW or PUGWipx cards Defines the maximum number of MRC MFR (MFC Receiver) resources authorized for this Coral system. XXXX indicates that the URC MFR limit is equivalent to a maximum based on the MRC type. 22 ROUTING

YES/NO

When set to Yes, enables Routing Access and Cost Calculation features. See Chapter 15

23 24

DATA FEATURES SMDR BACKUP

NO

Not Used Provides the system with a memory buffer for storage of SMDR on-line records whenever the printer or log device are unable to accept records. See Chapter 14

YES/NO

25 26 27 28 29

2nd LANGUAGE 3rd LANGUAGE 4th LANGUAGE VFAC PRI

YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO


YES/NO

Defines the other languages that may be used by the KEYSET displays.

Defines VFAC feature for outgoing calls. Enables PRI-23, PRI-30, UDT (PRI-23) and IPG card operation when set to Yes. Routing Authorization (above) must be set in order to use PRI and IPG in the system. Defines the ACD HUNT GROUP type features. When the authorization is not present, only UCD groups are available. Determines whether the following features are accessible: ROOM STATUS CHECK IN/OUT WAKEUP CALL CHARGE NOTE: This feature is mutually exclusive with the 60 - CANNED MESSAGE feature. Therefore, using this feature preempts the use of CANNED MESSAGE in the same Coral system.

YES/NO

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

30

ACD

YES/NO

31

HOTEL/MOTEL

YES/NO

3-8

PI Reference Manual

Installation

FEATURE 32 CAP CSTS Protocol

RANGE

DESCRIPTION Enables a Computerized Attendant Position (CAP). When Authorization is not present, only PCC is available. CSTS - Coral Supported Telephony Services

YES/NO

33 34 35

TRAFFIC (CVT) TBR CoraLINK

YES/NO YES/NO
YES/NO

Enables the installation of the Traffic Application Package: CoralVIEW Traffic (CVT). Enables the installation of the 4TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBR and 8TBRP (includes: ipx, csx, sl) cards. Enables the installation of the CLA, FCLA or CLA-ATS cards used in order to operate the CoraLINK feature for FlexCT applications. Enables ISDNet Setup. QSIG calls are enabled only with Network Authorization. For IP QSIG networking via UGW cards, 11-NET_ IP, above, must be defined.

36

NETWORKING

YES/NO

37 38

HSB FlexAIR SKK

YES/NO N/A

Enables a Coral FlexiCom 6000/R or Coral IPx 4000/R System setup with Dual Common Control. Enables installation of the SKK (FlexAIR) or SKW (CoralAIR) cards, thus providing service for wireless telephones. Decides whether the Coral sends an answer signal to the CO upon receiving incoming calls from the CO depending on whether the call was answered by a System Message (see WITH_ANSWER [2] SAU Requirement on page 23-3).

YES/NO

39

4VS NO ANSWER

YES/NO/ N/A

Also enables the conversion of a CNF card from an 8 port 3-Way Conference Card (max: 8 simultaneous calls of 3 members) to a 2 port Conference Card (max: 2 simultaneous calls of 15 members). 41 42 ST.-V.M. CALL TRACE

YES/NO YES/NO

Allows the incorporation of Voice Mail on station ports (SLTs or Keysets). Malicious Call Trace allows the Called Party or an Attendant to compile a list of all incoming calls to the Called station. The Attendant can compile a list for more than one station.

3-9

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

40

CONF

YES/NO

Enables Conference ports (on CNSsl, 8DRCF, 8DRCM & CNF cards) operation.

Installation

PI Reference Manual

FEATURE 43 CALLER ID

RANGE

DESCRIPTION Enables the identification of the calling partys number (CID) over analog trunks (Loop Start/Ground Start: 4/8TPF with external CID trunk box or 4/8T-C cards). See 53-SLT-CID below.

YES/NO

44 45

SL SAU CONTROL HIGHEST VERSION

YES/NO/NA
nn.xx

Describes whether a Software Authorization Unit (SAU) is required for the Coral FlexiCom 200. Describes the highest software version upgrade possible. Where nn is the software Version number and xx is the version upgrade. The highest software version for Version 15.0x is 15.49. Trying to load a higher version than authorized causes the A message on the seven segment display on the front panel of the controller card and results in the following message: Unauthorized Version, CORAL will shut down soon. Your version is mm.xx, Highest authorized version is nn.xx The Coral will shut down after 14 days if proper authorization is not established.

46

E911 (Emergency Calls)

YES/NO

When set to Yes, the system enables MF tone transmission via specific trunks to public and local emergency centers using E911 protocols. This feature also allows E911 program activation over PRI trunks. When set to Yes, the system enables the authorized user to silent monitor only one party of a conversation at a time. Default feature code: #1448

47

SPLIT MONITOR

YES/NO

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

48

CVA

YES/NO

When set to Yes, this parameter enables access to the Coral View Administrator (CVA) Application. The CVA is mostly used by entry-level operators and supervisors. When set to Yes, this parameter enables access to the Coral View Designer (CVD) Application. When set to Yes, this parameter enables access to the Coral View Designer Pro. Application. When set to Yes, the Auto Set Relocate feature enables swapping telephone profiles.

49 50 51

CVD CVD_PRO. AUTO SET RELOCT.

YES/NO

YES/NO
YES/NO

3-10

PI Reference Manual

Installation

FEATURE 52 FlexiCall

RANGE YES/NO

DESCRIPTION Determines accessibility of the FlexiCall feature. When set to Yes, enables designating any nonCoral system phone as an additional station destination thus ringing both Coral and non-Coral phone simultaneously as well as enabling certain Coral features at the non-Coral phone. Affords Caller ID information for SLT stations equipped with a display or external box display. Requires FSK compatible CID display unit for SLT. The feature requires a 8/16/24SLS (software version 3.xx or higher) peripheral card and iDSP card. In the CSX 200 systems the feature requires a U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx card. In the IPx 500 systems the feature requires an MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above. See 43-CALLER ID above.

53

SLT-CID

YES/NO

54

DIRECTORY

YES/NO

Enables creating a public and personal directory via the Coral system database port Names. Default feature code: #1994

55

Freedom

YES/NO

Enables using non Coral telephones as virtual Coral stations thereby affording these external (off premises) telephones the vast array of Coral services. The Freedom feature is also known as IRSS.

56

FlexAIR SMS

YES/NO

57 58 59

SILENT MONITOR MLPP MUSIC DIALTONE

YES/NO
YES/NO YES/NO

Enables the Silent Monitor feature. Multi Level Priority and Preemption allows the ranked user to prioritize calls on a per call basis. When set to Yes, enables defining a music source instead of Dial Tone for Coral stations. See DIAL_ TONE MESSAGE SOURCE [76] (page 7-20) in COS,0 to define the music source to be used.

3-11

Feature Authorization FEAT,1

For FlexAir systems: Enables sending Coral SMS messages to/from the Corals FlexAir Portable (handset) units.

Installation

PI Reference Manual

FEATURE 60 CANNED MESSAGE

RANGE YES/NO

DESCRIPTION PI predefined, canned, text messages are displayed on the calling partys keyset until the call is answered. The text messages may be used to define the called partys status (Out to Lunch, In Meeting Room 6, etc.). NOTE: This feature is mutually exclusive with the Room Status (Hotel/Motel) feature. Therefore, using this feature preempts the use of the Room Status feature in the same Coral system.

61 62 63 64

Not in use CFM INTERNAL TRAFFIC IPx Office

YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO

Not Used TBD TBD Determines whether the this Coral system is a Coral IPx Office system.

* This depends on the authorization file in the FMsl/IMC8/CFD memory card for the particular system. The number presented is the maximum for the largest Coral system.

Feature Authorization FEAT,1


3-12

Size Definition
This chapter defines the system size parameters. In order to allocate the memory resources efficiently, the SIZE topics are divided as follows: Sizes Definition ............................................................................................4-2 Sizes Tab.....................................................................................................4-18 Music Sources.............................................................................................4-24 UNITS.........................................................................................................4-27

Sizes Definition and Sizes Tabulation relate to the parameter sizes, updating, displaying and tabulating the parameter sizes based on the different types of keysets and system ports available. System General Speed Calls (Not Used). Music Sources defines the music source set-up for the system and for individual keyset users. Up to four different music sources are available. Units describes the number of time slots used system-wide as well as allows the user to know which PB card and Power Supplies exist and on which system shelf.

4-1

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

Sizes Definition

W SIZ

[0,0,0,1]

Sizes Definition is used to set the system size parameters. Sizes must be programmed before all other parameters.

Changing the Size Def parameters causes: 1. The system database (excluding installation, size table and the MAX_DVMS_MSG field in SFE messaging) to return to its default values. 2. The system to reset. 3. The interruption of all calls.

Size parameters allocate the Coral memory resources efficiently for a particular installation. Modifying the size table utilizes unused memory space for active features. The maximum size allowed per parameter is listed in parenthesis on the terminal screen. The listings in this manual may differ from actual maximums usually indicating a recommended maximum.

Note: Sizes may be defined in excess of their corresponding authorization limit in order to enable system growth without the need for a First Initialization procedure (i.e. returning all Sizes to their system defaults).

CURRENT_Config

Default/Modified

r
Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

To return to the DEFAULT configuration, First Initialization must be performed, see First Initialization beginning on page 21-3.

Shows whether or not a change was made in SIZE. If a change was made, the word MODIFIED is shown. If no change was made, then the word DEFAULT appears.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SYSTEM TYPE, COUNTRY CURRENT MEMORY SIZE INFORMATION

See SYSTEM_TYPE and COUNTRY on page 3-2


Shows the recently defined system type and country of the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Displays the memory details for the current database and Coral Software version. The information is accurate and can be used for relevant calculations, such as increasing or decreasing the database sizes.
xxxxxx BYTES USED BY DATABASE, AUTO BACKUP AVAILABLE xxxxxx BYTES USED BY RAM xxxxxx BYTES LEFT IN MEMORY

For systems where Auto backup has not been defined, then the first message would be displayed as follows:

4-2

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition
xxxxxx BYTES USED BY DATABASE, AUTO BACKUP NOT AVAILABLE.

then, the database memory stores have been exceeded. The technician should try to reduce the values of less important table parameters to free memory for the recent updates. If this is not possible, additional memory cards (see table below) should be purchased. The technician can also try to perform a manual backup depending on the database size.
Coral system type IPx Office FlexiCom 400, 5000 IPx 500, 800, 3000 FlexiCom 6000 IPx 4000
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Memory card type DBM-2/4/8 DBX (discontinued) DBM-2/4/8 4XMM or 8XMM

Capacity 2, 4 or 8 MB 1 MB 2, 4 or 8 MB 4 or 8 MB

DISPLAY Pending_ P (Preserve Changes) / No (Previous Changes Not Saved) Changes? This field is only relevant after making changes in the features listed in the following fields, and after entering No for the UPDATE field at the end of the table (i.e., for system changes that are still pending and have not been saved). Modifications of Size Definition are written to the backed-up RAM when the system is updated. If an update is not performed the system remains at its previous values and the changes are stored in a temporary memory. To restore the pending changes, enter P. Pressing any other key causes the pending changes to be erased upon system initialization.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IMPORTANT! The sizes listed in this database are established by program default and can be changed. The sizes are, however, ultimately limited by the SAU. Changes may affect other sizes or operational relationships within the system.

Max Ports

6000
Shows the maximum stations and trunk capacity. The maximum number of stations and trunks cannot be changed. The total number of current STATIONS and TRUNKS cannot exceed the Max Ports value.

4-3

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

STATIONS:
Maximum Stations

6000 - Defined automatically by System Type


Shows the maximum station capacity for all FlexSet, IP Keyset, SLT, EKT, DKT, DST, GKT, and Wireless stations. The maximum number of stations cannot be changed. The total number of SLT, SLT_IP, KEYSETS 1, KEYSETS 2, KEYSETS 3 and WIRELESS cannot exceed Max Stations. The total number of current SLT MAX, KEYSETS and TRUNKS cannot exceed the Max Ports value.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Max SLTs

4000
Shows the maximum number of SLT ports that may be defined for this Coral system.

r
l l l l

The total number of SLT and SLT_IP ports cannot exceed Max SLTs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT 4..16..4000 FlexiCom 200: 64 Defines the current capacity for Magneto and Type 500 or Type 2500 standard Single Line Telephones (SLTs) connected via the SLT station cards (24SLS,, 8S8Fcsx, 8SM, etc.).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT_IP 0..8..4000 Note: Default = 0 when upgrading from non-IP systems Defines the current capacity for Type 500 or Type 2500 standard Single Line Telephones (SLTs) connected via Coral Teleport MP-1xx/FXS external units. These units require UGW card support, see UGW beginning on page 29-5.

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]


4-4

PI Reference Manual Max Keysets

Size Definition

3400
Shows the maximum keyset capacity for all FlexSet, Wireless, EKT, DST, DKT and GKT units. Contact your dealer to change the maximum number of keysets. The total number of KEYSETS 1, KEYSETS 2, KEYSETS 3, KEYSETS_ IP and WIRELESS cannot exceed Max Keysets. The total number of current SLT, KEYSETS and TRUNKS cannot exceed the Max Ports value.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

KEYSETS 1 0..3400 Shows the current keyset capacity for the following sets: FlexSet 120/120D/120L/120S/121S, EKT1XX, VDK121, DKT21XX, DKT1XXX, DST, and CPA units. iVMFipx, IPC/SFC and uCMC card ports are also allocated by this parameter
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

KEYSETS 2 0..3400 Shows the current keyset capacity for the following sets: EKT2XX and VDK221 units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

KEYSETS 3 0..16..3400 Shows the current keyset capacity for the following sets: FlexSet 80S/80P/280/280D/280D-Z/280D-HS/280S/281S (also with PEX, APA or PEX+APA), iCMC (each iCMC card requires 24 KEYSET1 allocations), EKT3XX, VDK321, DKT23XX, FKT, GKT and APDL.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Shows the system wide current keyset capacity for Internet Protocol (IP) keysets such as: FlexSet-IP 280S or FlexIP SoftPhone. These units require UGW or UGWipx card support, see UGW beginning on page 29-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SIP_TERMINAL 0..60..3400 TBD....


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WIRELESS 0..50..3400 FlexiCom 200: 0..48..1536 Shows the current capacity for portable handsets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-5

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

KEYSETS_IP 0..60..3400 Note: Default= 0 when upgrading from non-IP systems

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

TRUNKS:
Max Trunks

Defined automatically by Coral System Type FlexiCom 6000 or IPx 4000: Max: 3400 All other systems: Max: 1500
Shows the maximum trunk capacity for all PRI, TBR, LGS, LGS IP, NET IP, E&M and DID trunks. The maximum number of trunks cannot be changed.

Notes: The total number of LGS, E&M, DID, PRI, TBR, LGS IP and NET IP trunks cannot exceed the Max Trunks value. The total number of current SLT, KEYSETS and TRUNKS cannot exceed the Max Ports value.

LGS 0..8..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above) Shows the current CO loop and ground start trunk capacity for the following types of cards: 4T, 4T-C, 4T-CID, 8T, 8T-C, 8T-CID, 4TMR, 4TPF, 8TPF, 4TWL, T1-LS/GS, 30T-DOD, 30TE-NONDID, GID, ALS70-LS/DID/NONDID.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M 0..4..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above) Shows the current E&M trunk capacity for the following card types: 4TEM, 4TEMP, T1-E&M, 30T-E&M.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID 0..8..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above) Shows the current Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk capacity for the following card types: 8DID, 30T-DID, 8BID.

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]


4-6

PI Reference Manual PRI 0..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above)*

Size Definition

Shows the current max number of PRI or B-channel ports for ISDN. This parameter affects the maximum IPG and PRI-23/30 cards on PRI channels that can be installed (see 0 - SIGNALING CHANNEL beginning on page 26-11). Each PRI-23 requires 24 allocations. The card provides 23 B channels plus one D channel that also needs to be allocated. Each PRI-30 requires 32 allocations. The card provides 30 B channels plus two D channel that also needs to be allocated. Enter 24 for each PRI-23 or UDT (PRI-23) card. Enter 32 for each PRI-30 or IPG card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TBR 0..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above)* Shows the current Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Trunk circuits for ISDN, or the number of B channels. This parameter affects the maximum 4TBR and 8TBR cards that can be installed for defining BRI channels (see 0 - SIGNALING CHANNEL beginning on page 26-11). Enter 8 for each 4TBR or 4TBRP card. Enter 16 for each 8TBR or 8TBRP card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LGS_IP 0..8..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above) Note: Default = 0 when upgrading from non-IP systems Shows the maximum CO loop and ground start trunk capacity for the Coral Teleport MP-1xx/FXO external gateway units to the IP network. These units require UGW or UGWipx card support, see UGW beginning on page 29-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Shows the maximum capacity of Coral QSIG IP Network ports. These units require UGW or UGWipx card support, see UGW beginning on page 29-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SIP_TRUNK 0..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above) TBD....


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

*.

The maximum number of D-Signalling channels for PRI and BRI (TBR) trunks combined may not exceed 254. Every two BRI ports provide one D-channel, every 24 PRI-23 ports provide one D-channel and every 30 PRI-30 or IPG ports provide two D-channels.

4-7

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

NET_IP 0..Max (Defined by Max Trunks above)

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

LIBRARIES:
Maximum Libraries

14096, Defined automatically by System type


Shows the maximum number of Private and Public libraries. The maximum number of libraries cannot be changed. The total number of Private and Public Libraries cannot exceed the maximum value listed here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIVATE 0..500..10000 FlexiCom 200: 0..960..4096; FlexiCom 300, 400V: 0..1000..4096 Shows the current capacity for station related private speed call numbers on Coral Main Database Storage.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PUBLIC 0..500..4096 Shows the current capacity of the system public libraries. When LARGE_PUB Library (below) is used, it is advisable to reduce PUBLIC capacity to the minimum required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LARGE_PUB 0..65000 Shows the current capacity of the system Large Public Libraries.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LARGE_NPL 0..1000 Shows the available number of memory units for the Large Public Library Numbering Plan. The values entered into LARGE_NPL define the quantity of memory units available. They do not define the number of entries. Each entry may use more than one memory unit. The relationship between the value entered and the number of entries is defined by the following formula: NUM_PLAN: # of memory units used = (2 x # of From/To Dial# entries) + the # of (From Dial # = To Dial #) entries. Where:
l l l

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

From/To Dial # is used when the From Dial# is different from the To Dial#. From Dial # =To Dial # is used when the From Dial# is equal to the To Dial#.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LARGE_PUB_DIGITS 0..MAX_DGTS_ON_TK [4] in SFE, 0 FlexiCom 200: 20 Determines the maximum number of digits available for dialing out on a trunk via the Large_Public Lib. The number entered here cannot exceed the number defined

4-8

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition in MAX_DGTS_ON_TK [4] on page 6-8 (Route: SFE,0) in System Features-Outgoing Trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIRECTORY Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes to enable the Coral System Directory. This feature enables the keyset user to have the names of external parties appear on the keyset display instead of the calling number, when it exists in the directory. A public directory is automatically created, from which a personal directory can be derived at each user station.

Tip: Check the system memory sizes before enabling this feature, 61 bytes are needed per directory entry.

Shared Directory Memory = [Public Library +Hunt Group+Boss Group+N_Stations] x 61 bytes. Personal Directory Memory = [ N_Stations x 42 bytes] + [ENTRIES PER USER x 61 bytes x N_Keysets]. Public Library = PUBLIC (page 4-8) parameter value Boss Group = BOSS (page 4-10) parameter value Hunt Group = HUNT (page 4-10) parameter value N_Stations = the total number stations defined for: SLT + SLT_IP + KEYSETS 1 + KEYSETS 2 + KEYSETS 3 + KEYSETS_IP + WIRELESS. N_Keysets = the total number of stations defined for: KEYSETS 1 + KEYSETS 2 + KEYSETS 3 + KEYSETS_IP + WIRELESS
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ENTRIES PER USER Range: Any number; Default = 0

This parameter appears only if DIRECTORY, above, is set to Yes.

GROUPS:
BELL/UNA 0..3..6 Shows the current capacity for Bell/Universal Night Answering (UNA) groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ZONE PAGE 0..10..250 FlexiCom 200: 5 Shows the current capacity for Zoned Voice Page groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-9

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

Defines the maximum number of Personal Directory entries per station. Setting this parameter to 0, disables the use of Personal Directory, system-wide.

Size Definition BOSS 0..80..1024 FlexiCom 200: 30 Shows the current capacity for Boss Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

PICKUP 0..60..512 FlexiCom 200: 30 Shows the current capacity for Pickup Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HUNT 0..30..500 FlexiCom 200: 10 Shows the current capacity for UCD/ACD Hunt Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GRP_CALL 0..250 FlexiCom 200: 1 Shows the current capacity for Conference Group calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_ 0..Max defined in GRP_CALL SIMULTANEOUS_ FlexiCom 200: 1 GRP_CALLS Default = 10 when GRP_CALL, above, is not 0; For Coral upgrades, the default is CONF_CKTS (page 4-12) if GRP_CALL is not 0. Shows the current capacity for simultaneous GRP_CALLs (see above).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TRUNKS 0..31..250 Defines the maximum number of Trunk Groups.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

PEM/DPEM 0..64..240 FlexiCom 200: 0..24..120 FlexiCom 300, 400V: 0..120 Shows the current capacity of the Programmable Expansion Modules: FlexSet 40B, DPEM and PEM. The PEM/DPEM size must be less than, or equal to, the number of keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TURRET CONSOLE 0..20..50 Shows the system-wide maximum capacity for Turret Consoles.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8DRCF/8DRCM/RMI/ 1..2..6 ASU Shows the current capacity for U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx, MRcsx, 8DRCF, 8DRCM, RMI or ASU cards (and MSBipx in the Coral IPx 500).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-10

PI Reference Manual NUM_PLAN 0..200..32000 FlexiCom 200: 0..500..1000; FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000: 0..200..8000 IPx 500, 800, 3000: 0..200..8000

Size Definition

Shows the available number of memory units for the system Numbering Plan. The values entered into NUM_PLAN define the quantity of memory units available. They do not define the number of entries. Each entry may use more than one memory unit. The relationship between the value entered and the number of entries is defined by the following formula: # of memory units used = (2 x # of From/To Dial# entries) + the # of (From Dial # = To Dial #) entries. Where:
From/To Dial # is used when the From Dial# is different from the To Dial#. From Dial # =To Dial # is used when the From Dial# is equal to the To Dial#.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OFFSET_FILTER 0..4..250 Shows the current number of offset filters defined.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

N_FILTER_ELEMENTS 0..32..64 PER OFFSET FILTER Defines an identical number of elements for each offset filter used system wide. See also Offset Filters on page 8-37.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COS 16..250 FlexiCom 300, 400V: 64 Shows the current number of Classes of Service.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SMDR_BACKUP 0..100..950 FlexiCom 200: 1 Shows the available number of records for SMDR backup buffer.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4IAA_PORTS 4..32..128 FlexiCom 200: 8 CC1 - FlexiCom 200: 4 Shows the current number of ports available for the 4IAA card. Each 4IAA card requires 8 entries. Set this parameter to the total number of 4IAA cards installed multiplied by 8.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-11

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

TOLL_BAR_DIGITS_ 1..7..51 (AVG) Defines the maximum number of digits for a Toll Barrier Element. This parameter is linked to the next parameter, TOLL_BAR_ELEMENTS_(AVG), by the following formula: ((Toll Bar Digits x 2) +5) x Toll Bar Elements < 32,000.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TOLL_BAR_ 0..78..1680 ELEMENTS_(AVG) FlexiCom 200: 0..65..1680 Defines the maximum number of system Toll Barrier Elements. This parameter is linked to the previous parameter, TOLL_BAR_DIGITS_(AVG), by the following formula: ((Toll Bar Digits x 2) +5) x Toll Bar Elements < 32,000.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CONF_CKTS 0..10..100 FlexiCom 200: 0..2..20 FlexiCom 300, 400V: 0..10..20 Shows the available number of multi-party Conference ports that can be utilized per Coral system..
Card Type # CNF (defined as CONF in CLIS) 8DRCF 8DRCM U-MRcsx (IPx Office only) URC2 U-RMIcsx (IPx Office only) URC2 IPx 500M main Cage (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above, RMI-F/URC2) IPx 500M main Cage (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0100X1000, 8DRCF) Required # of Entries per Card 2 1 1 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* 1 TBD

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]


4-12

MRC
* For the required entry, see Meet Me on page 8-83.

DYNAMIC_CONF 0..100 TBD


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DVMS_PORT 0..4..960 FlexiCom 200: 0..4..16 FlexiCom 300, 400V: 0..16 Shows the available number of DVMS ports that can be utilized (one 4VSN card is equipped with four DVMS ports).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual PAGE_Q 0..10..2000 FlexiCom 200: 0..10..200; FlexiCom 300, 400V: 0..1000..2000;

Size Definition

Defines the maximum number of software identification numbers (index) that can be assigned to the Page Queue numbering plan.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VFAC_ACCT 0..65000 FlexiCom 200: 0..1000..65000 Shows the available number of Account Codes that can be utilized in VFAC. The total number is also dependent on #ACCT_DGTS in [SFE].
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAIT_QUE 0..5..128 FlexiCom 200: 10 Shows the maximum number of destinations for calls waiting for routing access.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALL_SERVICES 0..25..N_CALLS (page 4-19) or 500 (whichever is less) FlexiCom 200: 0..20..64 Defines the maximum number of Network and OAI Resources. CoraLINK and ISDNet use these resources to implement such Network features as Call Transfer and OAI features such as MakeCall or FlexiCall.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAMP_ON 1..30..500; FlexiCom 5000, 6000: 1..60..500 Defines the maximum number of stations that can simultaneously camp-on to busy or unanswered network stations or Boss Groups defined as a network stations. This feature is not relevant for external calls.

Recommendation: For large systems, this parameter should be set to 5% of the number of stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TRAFFIC:
NO_OF_TRAFIC_ EVENTS_AND_ TBD FEATURES
l l l l

TOTAL_NO_OF_ DAYS_TO_STORE_ TBD TRAFFIC


l l l l

4-13

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

The Camp On duration is defined in Feature Timers, see CAMP_ON_DURATION [5] on page 6-2.

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

IP:
EXTERNAL_GW 0..2..250 Defines the maximum number of different types of Coral Teleport MP-1xx analog VoIP gateway units allowed in this system. Coral Teleport gateway units include the FXO and FXS external units used to connect SLTs and LGS trunks to the Coral IP network.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ZONE 0..10..32 TBD


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SIP:
MAXIMUM_ 0..10..20 PERSONAL_ TBD PASSWORD_LENGTH
l l l l l l l

MAXIMUM_USER_ 0..??..?? NAME_LENGTH TBD


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NETWORKING:
NETWORK Yes/No FlexiCom 200: Yes Defines whether this FlexiCom system is part of a Private Network. If Y, then a default for NET_NODES and NET_FEATURES is set. Otherwise, NET_NODES and NET_FEATURES are set to 0 by the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NET_NODES 0..10..250 Shows the available number of Network Nodes.

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]


4-14

r
l l l l

Relevant only if NETWORK (above) is set to Yes.

NET_FEATURES

0..150% of the Stations FlexiCom 200: 0..445


Shows the current capacity for simultaneously active ISDNet features.

r
l l l l

Relevant only if NETWORK (above) is set to Yes.

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition

ISDN:
NETWORK_ 0..16..250; FACILITIES FlexiCom 200: 10 Shows the available number of Public Network Service Facilities (NSF). For example: MCI, SPRINT, AT&T.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NUMBER OF 0..64..3200; ALTERNATE ID FlexiCom 200: 20 Shows the number of Alternate Line Identification (ALI) numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

N_SPID_DN_PER_DSL 0..8 CC0: 2..8

Relevant only if PROTOCOL_ID [6] (page 26-14) is set to AT&T.

Defines the maximum number of SPID devices per DSL on the 4/8TBR card. See SPID on page 26-20.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ROUTING:
ROUTING ACCESSES 0..1..4; FlexiCom 200: 2 Shows the current capacity for Routing Accesses and defines the different numbering plans for programming ISDN.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIAL SERVICES 0..30..255; FlexiCom 200: 20

ROUT ELEMENTS 0..50..250; FlexiCom 200: 30 Shows the current capacity for Route Elements (see Chapter 15).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COST_ELEMENTS 0..10..50; FlexiCom 200: 0..1..50 Shows the available number of Cost Calculation Elements (see Chapter 15).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ROUTING_ELEMENT_ 0..5..MAX NPL_SIZE Calculate the average size (average amount of digits per Element) of all the Routing Numbering Plan Elements (see Chapter 15).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-15

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

Shows the current capacity for Dial Services.

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

ROUTING_NPL_ 0..100..MAX ELEMENTS Estimate the number of Routing Numbering Plan elements (see Chapter 15) used in the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHECK MEMORY ? Yes/No Instructs the system to display the database memory status. When the System Size table is displayed without modification, CHECK MEMORY? displays how much memory remains in the system database as follows:
XXXXX BYTES USED BY RAM. XXXXX BYTES LEFT IN MEMORY.

When changes are made to the System Size table, CHECK MEMORY? displays the system memory status as if changes made to the current sizes were updated as follows:
MEMORY EXCEEDED BY XXXXX BYTES, CANT UPDATE.

This message indicates that the memory tables have been exceeded. The technician should try to reduce the values of less important table parameters thus freeing memory for the recent updates. If this is not possible, additional memory cards (see table below) should be purchased.
XXXXX BYTES USED BY DATABASE, AUTO BACKUP AVAILABLE. XXXXX BYTES USED BY DATABASE, AUTO BACKUP NOT AVAILABLE.

When the system database memory is exceeded, the technician should try to reconfigure the size values assigning smaller values for less significant parameters. The technician can also try to perform a manual backup depending on the database size as described in Chapter 21.
Coral system type IPx Office FlexiCom 400, 5000 IPx 500, 800, 3000 FlexiCom 6000 IPx 4000
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Memory card type DBM-2/4/8 DBX (discontinued) DBM-2/4/8 4XMM or 8XMM

Capacity 2, 4 or 8 MB 1 MB 2, 4 or 8 MB 4 or 8 MB

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]


4-16

. MAX: (Both parameters) are defined by and limited by the following equation:

ROUTING_ACCESSESx[ROUTING_NPL_ELEMENTS x ((ROUTING_ELEMENTS_ NPL_SIZ x 2) + 5)] <32,000

PI Reference Manual UPDATE? Yes/No (*Warning*: Upon Update, database is lost.)

Size Definition

Loads the modified SIZE information, initializes the database and resets the system. When making changes in the features listed in the above fields, the changes are temporary. The changes are only made permanent after entering Y. When N is entered, all previous entries are ignored and the system remains at the previously programmed sizes. Upon returning to Size Definition, enter P in the DISPLAY_Pending_Changes parameter (at the beginning of the section) to restore the pre-recorded changes. Otherwise, the changes are erased and the current system parameter values will be displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-17

Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

Sizes Tab

W SYSGEN,2
When entering this branch, the following message is displayed:

[0,0,0,2]

Attention: The sizes in this database are established by Program default and may be changed. Changes may affect other sizes or operational relationships within the system.

Sizes Tabulation relate to the parameter sizes, updating, displaying and tabulating the parameter sizes based on the different types of keysets and system ports available. CURRENT_Config Default/Modified Shows whether or not a change was made in SIZ. If a change was made, the screens displays the MODIFIED message. If no change was made, then the screen will show the DEFAULT message.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CURRENT MEMORY SIZE INFORMATION

Displays the current database memory information.


xxxxxx BYTES LEFT IN MEMORY.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]


4-18

PI Reference Manual RESOURCES 0..64..250 FlexiCom 200: 0..64

Size Definition

Defines the number of ports needed for all the Shared Service cards together in the system.
Card Type 16MFR (MFC) 4DTR 8DRCF 8DRCM 8DTD 8DTR CNF card (defined as C3Way in CLIS) iDSP MRcsx RMI RMIcsx U-MRcsx (IPx Office URC2) U-RMIcsx (IPx Office URC2) URC2 (IPx 500M)
* For the URC2 resources, see Meet Me on page 8-83 MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above

Required # of Ports per Card 16 4 22 22 8 8 8 64 0 0 0 64 - 112* 64 - 112* 64 - 112*

Defines the maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously made within the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALLS_Q 0..150..1000 FlexiCom 200: 0..80..1000 FlexiCom 300, 400V: 0..400..1000 Defines the number of calls that can be simultaneously placed on Hold, Page_Q, Park or Multi-Appearance.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-19

Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]

N_CALLS FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V: 0..64 FlexiCom 400, 5000: 0..256..512 FlexiCom 6000: 0..256..2048 IPx Office: 0..256..1024 IPx 500, 800, 3000: 0..256..512 IPx 4000: 0..256..2048

Size Definition ACD_STATISTICAL_ Yes/No SEARCH? FlexiCom 200: Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

In order to enable the statistical search feature in ACD Hunt groups, this parameter must be set to Yes. The statistical search procedure requires an idle time counter for every group member. This parameter, when set to Y, allows you to define ACD groups with statistical search type (see Hunt Group, Chapter 10).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PARTY_NUM/NAME 0...500 or (number of trunks: (LGS+E&M+DID)/2)+PRI+ISDN) ->only if less than 500; FlexiCom 200: 0..60..500 Defines the maximum number of records used for saving the CPN (Calling Party Number) and Name and the Connected Party Number and Name. Each record can be accessed at any time during the call. The CPN is displayed on the SMDR.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISDN_TRANSIT_ 0..50..250 SETUPS Defines the maximum number of ISDN call setup information to be stored simultaneously. ISDN call information is used for completing the call setup. IP Networks: Note: This number should be increased when IP Network ports are defined for the system in the UGW card(s). The increase is traffic dependent and should be at least 2 times the estimated maximum number of calls setup per second. For Example: For systems where 20 calls can be expected to be setup per second, increase this parameter by 40.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NETWORK_SERVICES 0..50..500 FlexiCom 200:

0..20..500

Defines the maximum number of Network Supplementary Feature procedures that can be performed simultaneously. Network Call Transfer is one example of a NSF procedure.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]


4-20

QSIG Signalling 0..64..256 Connections FlexiCom 200: 0..16..256

This parameter applies only when NETWORKING:NETWORK in Sizes Def.(SIZ branch) is set to Y.

Defines the maximum number of possible simultaneously CISC network calls. If a caller from network node A is connected to a caller in node B using a network feature that requires CISC signaling (e.g. camp-on, follow-me), two QSIG Signalling Connections are being used simultaneously. If the callers are in the same node, then only one QSIG Signalling Connection is used.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition

INTERNAL_SMDR_IN_ Yes/No SYSTEM Set this parameter to Yes to instruct the system to allocate memory to support the display of internal calls on the SMDR report.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NO_OF_CALL_ 0..100..32000 TRACE_RECORDS Defines the maximum number of incoming calls that may be recorded and listed (traced) for the entire system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NO_OF_SILENT_ 0..8..128 MONITORS SAU Requirement The Silent Monitor as well as Split Silent Monitor features require Software Authorization. This parameter defines the maximum number of simultaneous regular 2-way monitors and/or split silent monitors in the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-21

Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

SKW_BASE_ 0..128..256 STATIONS_NUM Defines the maximum number of radio base stations (RBS) in the system.
Card Type # 8SKKipx FlexAir 8SKK 16SKK CoralAIR 2SKW 4SKW Required # of base stations per Card 8 8 16 2 4

IP_MEDIA_ 0..60..3400 CHANNELS Note: Default= 0 when upgrading from non-IP systems

To add IP resources to a non-IP system, IP sizes must be updated and First Initialization performed.

Defines the maximum number of IP media channels that can be used system-wide. A UGW card(s) with MG daughterboard(s) must be installed in the system.
MG Module MG-15 MG-30 MG-60 MG-24 MG-48 MG-72 MRC-8 MRC-16 MRC-32 MRC-64 Provides max. # of media channels 15 30 60 24 48 72 8 16 32 64 PUGW, PUGWipx, IPx Office (MCBcsx) UGW-E, UGW-Eipx UGW, UGWipx, UGW-E, UGW-Eipx Module installed on

Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]


4-22

Certain Coral features require the intervention of media channels. The MG module provides media channels used to convert PCM calls to IP Packets thereby converting standard Coral talk into IP talk. Media channels are also needed when one of the calling parties is not an IP host. No media channels are needed for pure IP-to-IP (peer-to-peer) connections (direct-connects).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual NO_OF_LAR_ 0..40..526; SERVICE_TIMERS FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000: 0..40..1096

Size Definition

Defines the maximum number of LAR timers available in the system. The LAR timer is activated when a failed trunk or Dial service is blocked by the LAR blocking mechanism. The timer counts blocking duration and instructs the main software to release the trunk or Dial Service when the blocking time expires.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PENDING_SMS_MSG_ 0..20..250 POOL r Relevant only for FlexAIR systems. Defines the maximum number of SMS messages that the system can buffer simultaneously for the Wireless handsets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

N_CALL_LOG_PER_ 0..5..100 USER TBD


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHECK MEMORY? Yes/No

The sizes listed in this database are established by program default and can be changed. Changes can affect other sizes or operational relationships within the system.

UPDATE? Yes/No (*warning*:Upon update, system init) (Yes or No must be entered)

Updating the size table initializes the system causing: 1. The system to reset. 2. The interruption of all calls.

Loads the modified Size information and resets the system. When No is entered, all previous entries are ignored and the system SIZES remain as previously programmed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-23

Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]

Instructs the system to display the database memory status. When the System Size table is displayed without modification, CHECK MEMORY? displays how much memory remains in the system database. When changes are made to the System Size table, CHECK MEMORY? displays the system memory status as if changes made to the current sizes were updated.

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

Music Sources
Coral IPx 500M

W SYSGEN,4
The system supports up to four different music sources.

[0,0,0,4]

In the Coral IPx 500M main unit two music sources are supported without additional hardware. Source #0 is connected to Music-1 (pin 19/44) and source #1 is connected to Music-2 (pin 18/43) at the Auxiliary connector.

Coral FlexiCom 200


In the Coral FlexiCom 200 Base Unit two music sources are supported without additional hardware. Source #0 is connected to MP-1 and source #1 is connected to MP-2.

U-RMIcsx, RMIcsx, U-MRcsx and MRcsx cards


In the IPx Office system, Source #0 is connected to M1 and source #1 is connected to M2/P (at the card front panel).

8DRCF, 8DRCM or RMI card


The other systems require an 8DRCF, 8DRCM or RMI card interface which can enable up to 2 external music sources. In order to determine the I/O connections, see the corresponding tables in Chapter 5 of the corresponding Coral Installation and Hardware Reference Manual. Each music source may be fed from one of the following sources: External Sources: Radio Tape Recorder Message Announcer Ringback Busy Silence

Music Sources SYSGEN,4 [0,0,0,4]


4-24

Internal Tones:

The music sources are numbered 0,1,2 and 3. The total number of music sources is fixed by defining # OF MUSIC SOURCES defined below. Any music source may be used for keyset Background Music, Hunt Groups, Transferred, Dial Tone, Hold/Park, Announcers, Page_Q and Wait-Que features. The keyset user can choose the type of background music required via the telephone. The user can also choose the music source for the Hunt and Page_Q feature when he/she wants the caller to hear a different tone than currently chosen. The Wakeup Announcer feature does not include a music source choice. Therefore, it will always be fed from MUSIC SOURCE #0.

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition

Using a second music source on the same U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx/RMI/ASU card prevents using the Public Address feature of the same card. Never connect the sole music source to M2 in these cards.

# OF MUSIC 1..4 SOURCES IPx 500: 1.. 2 Determines the total number of music sources, external and internal, that can be used for the multiple music source feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM 0..3; TO 0..3; MUSIC-SOURCE (1-4) Enter the required range of music sources index numbers. FROM indicates the lowest source index number; TO indicates the highest source index number. The range is limited by the # of MUSIC SOURCES parameter above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LOCATION (Shelf #,Slot #,MP-1/2)/Remove Default: (--,--,--) When external music is required, enter the physical location of the U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx, RMI/ASU or 8DRCF/ 8DRCM card, and MP-1 or MP-2 port to which the music is connected. Information must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order and separated by a space or comma. Shelf and slot locations describe the hardware position of the card in the system cabinet. (Coral IPx 500: Shelf #0, Slot #13). (IPx Office U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx: Shelf #1, Slot #6) MUSIC 1/2 represents the order of the music sources, enter 1 when connected to MP-1, enter 2 when connected to MP-2 (see the relevant tables in Chapter 5 of the corresponding Coral Installation and Hardware Reference Manual). Entering R removes the (Shelf, Slot, Music 1/2) reference. When Remove is entered or (--,--,--) is displayed, the system always selects the TONE TYPE automatically.

TONE TYPE Ringback/Busy/Silence Determines the internal tone type that is sounded when (--,--,--) is displayed or when the U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx, RMI/ASU or 8DRCF/8DRCM card is removed or is malfunctioning.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-25

Music Sources SYSGEN,4 [0,0,0,4]

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

MUSIC SELECTION Music/Tone Maintenance Purposes Interrupts the External Music Source periodically when the Music Source Supply Only is malfunctioning or the maintenance card (U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx, MRcsx, 8DRCF, 8DRCM, RMI or ASU) is malfunctioning. Enter Music to hear the External Music Source. Enter Tone only if the External Music Source is not functioning properly. The Tone is selected in the TONE TYPE parameter above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Updating # of MUSIC SOURCES and/or LOCATION initializes the system, causing: 1. The system to reset. 2. The interruption of all calls.

UPDATE *warning* Yes/No system init (Y/N)? Loads the modified Music information, initializes the database, and resets the system. When No is entered, any previous updates are ignored and the system remains at its pre-programmed sources.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Music Sources SYSGEN,4 [0,0,0,4]


4-26

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition

UNITS

W SYSGEN,5

[0,0,0,5]

Units describes the number of time slots used system-wide as well as allows the user to know which PB card and Power Supplies exist and on which system shelf. This branch indicates whether the unit is local or remote.

The following pages describe the Units branch for the following systems: IPx Office: Systems Only on page 4-28. Coral IPx 500, 800 and FlexiCom 400: HDC Systems Only on page 4-29. Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000: 4GC Systems Only on page 4-30. Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000: 32GC Systems Only on page 4-32.

4-27

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

IPx Office: Systems Only


From/To 0..7 UNIT# 0..7; (0..1: IPx Office) Enter the required range of UNIT numbers. FROM the lowest UNIT number TO the highest. For IPx Office systems, enter 0 and/or 1 only. Unit 0, includes Shelves # 1 and 2. Unit 1 can include only one shelf (Shelf # 3).
Shelf 4: Not Used Shelf 3: Exp.2 IPx Office Shelf 2: Exp.1 Unit 0 Shelf 1: IPx Office
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Unit 1

SHELVES [0]

(0,1),(2,3): IPx Office systems (Read-Only)


Displays the system shelves (1,2) shown as (0,1) ; (3,4) shown as (2,3) that define this Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ACTIVE_UNIT [1] Yes/No Unit 0 is not updatable, it is always active.


l l l

Unit 1 may be set to No (if no second expansion exists) to improve call processing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NUMBER OF TIME-SLOTS [2] UNIT_TYPE [3]

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]


4-28

128/256/512 (Read-Only)
The iGC provides 512 time slots for the IPx Office systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

0 (Normal) / 1 (Remote) (Read-Only)


The Unit Type for all IPx Office systems is 0 (Normal).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition

Coral IPx 500, 800 and FlexiCom 400: HDC Systems Only
From/To 0..7 UNIT# 0..7; (0..0: Coral FlexiCom 400); (0..1: Coral IPx 500, 800) Enter the required range of UNIT numbers. FROM the lowest UNIT number TO the highest. For Coral FlexiCom 400 systems, enter 0 only. The system can have a maximum of one shelf, Shelf # 0, and therefore only one Unit (a Unit is comprised of two shelves). For Coral IPx 500, 800 systems, enter 0 and/or 1 only. Unit 0, includes Shelves # 0 and 1. Unit 1 can include only one shelf (Shelf # 2).
Shelf 3: Not Used Shelf 2: Exp.2 Coral IPx 500 or 800 Shelf 1: Exp.1 Unit 0 Shelf 0: Main
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Unit 1

SHELVES [0]

(0,1): FlexiCom 400 systems (Read-Only) (0,1),(2,3): IPx 500, 800 systems
Displays the system shelves that define this Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

For Coral IPx 500, 800 systems:


l l l

Unit 0 is not updatable, it is always active. Unit 1 may be set to No (if no second expansion exists) to improve call processing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NUMBER OF TIME-SLOTS [2]

128/256/512 (Read-Only)
The HDC provides 512 time slots for the Coral FlexiCom 400 and Coral IPx 500, 800 systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNIT_TYPE [3]

0 (Normal) / 1 (Remote) (Read-Only)


The Unit Type for all FlexiCom 400 and IPx 500, 800 systems is 0 (Normal).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-29

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]

ACTIVE_UNIT [1] Yes/No Not Relevant for FlexiCom 400 systems

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000: 4GC Systems Only


From/To 0..7 UNIT# 0..7; (0..3: Single 4GC; 0..7: Duplicated 4GC) Enter the required range of UNIT numbers. FROM the lowest UNIT number TO the highest. Each UNIT comprised of two system shelves and contains one PB24 card.
UNIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SHELVES (0,1) (2,3) (4,5) (6,7) (8,9) (10,11) (12,13) (14,15) Description Single 4GC Single 4GC Single 4GC Single 4GC 2nd 4GC 2nd 4GC 2nd 4GC 2nd 4GC Only for Duplication systems

The system can have a maximum of 16 shelves or 8 UNITs. When a UNIT is not installed, only the SHELVES [0] and ACTIVE_UNIT [1] parameters (see below) are displayed for that UNIT.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SHELVES [0]

(0,1)..(14,15) (Read-Only) (see table above) (0..7: Single 4GC, 0..15 Duplicated 4GC)
Displays the system shelves that define this Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]


4-30

ACTIVE_UNIT [1] Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes when at least one of the two shelves exist and includes a PB24 card. If the shelves are not installed, set this parameter to No to improve the system call processing (this also avoids unnecessary alarm messages).

Do not set this parameter to No when there are active cards located on the Units shelves!

Setting this parameter to NO when there are active cards in this Peripheral Shelf Unit, causes the following message to be displayed:
WARNING! There is at least one card active in the unit, ARE YOU SURE?-(Y/N)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition When ACTIVE_UNIT [1] is set to No the following parameters are not displayed.

NUMBER OF 128/256/512 (Check the LED indicator on the PB24 Card front Panel) TIME-SLOTS [2] Enter the number of time slots to be used per PB24 card: 128, 256 or 512. The number of time slots is defined in the PBD24M card hardware. One of the three LEDs on the PB24 card front panel, marked with 128, 256 and 512, indicates (when plugged in) how many time slots should be defined. The Coral FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 can be configured for the maximum number of ports in use simultaneously, according to the telephony traffic volume. There are three options available:
l l l

128 time slots per one or two peripheral shelves 256 time slots per one or two peripheral shelves 512 time slots per one or two peripheral shelves
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNIT_TYPE [3] 0 (Normal) 1 (Remote) Defines the Unit type as Normal or Remote Coral FlexLITE.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

If the time slots was changed in this branch, the following message is displayed before an UPDATE can be performed:

! !
l l

ATTENTION, TS (time slots) UPDATES 256 & 512 times slots are valid options with 24 ports High Density (HD) systems only! This must be consistent with PB24 card indication.

Loads the modified time slot and UNIT information. When No is entered, updates are ignored and the system remains at its pre-programmed sources.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-31

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]

UPDATE *warning* Yes/No system init (Y/N)?

Updating this parameter causes the interruption of all calls.

Size Definition

PI Reference Manual

Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000: 32GC Systems Only


From/To 0..7 UNIT# 0..7 (0..7) Enter the required range of UNIT numbers. FROM the lowest UNIT number TO the highest. Each UNIT is comprised of two system shelves and contains at least one PB-ATS card, of which only one is active at any current time.
Peripheral Shelf UNIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Shelf Numbers (0,1) (2,3) (4,5) (6,7) (8,9) (10,11) (12,13) (14,15)

The system can have a maximum of 16 shelves or 8 UNITs. When a UNIT is not installed, only the SHELVES [0] and ACTIVE_UNIT [1] parameters (see below) are displayed for that UNIT.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SHELVES [0]

(0,1)..(14,15) Read-Only
Displays the system peripheral shelves that define this Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]

ACTIVE_UNIT [1]

Yes/No (Read-Only)
If the UNIT is installed (i.e. a PB-ATS or FLMS card is installed on the even shelf), then the system sets this parameter to Yes, defining this Peripheral Shelf Unit as an Active Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PB_STATUS_#1 [2]

Exists/No Card/No Clock/PCM Fault (Read-Only)


Displays the status of the PB-ATS card installed in Slot 1. Both PB-ATS cards are located on the even shelf. If no PB-ATS card is installed, then the parameter displays No Card.

4-32

PI Reference Manual

Size Definition If the card exists and is not functioning properly, then the parameter displays either No Clock or PCM Fault depending on the fault.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PB_STATUS_#2 [3]

Exists/No Card/No Clock/PCM Fault (Read-Only)


Displays the status of the PB-ATS card installed in Slot 2. Both PB-ATS cards are located on the even shelf. If no PB-ATS card is installed, then the parameter displays No Card. If the card exists and is not functioning properly, then the parameter displays either No Clock or PCM fault depending on the fault.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PB_SELECT [4] 1 (Slot1) or 2 (Slot 2) The technician can select which PB-ATS card should be used currently.

Before the technician can remove a PB-ATS card, a working PB-ATS card must be defined in this parameter.

If the selected PB-ATS does not exist or is faulty, the following error message appears:
SELECTED PB IS NOT ACCESSIBLE. TRY AGAIN!
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

POWER_SUPPLY_ STATUS_#1 [5]

OK/Faulty (Read-Only)
Displays the status for Peripheral Power Supply #1 (PPS 1). One, two or no Power Supplies can be installed per shelf.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

POWER_SUPPLY_ STATUS_#2 [6]

OK/Faulty (Read-Only)
Displays the status for Peripheral Power Supply #2 (PPS 2). One, two or no Power Supplies can be installed per shelf.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RING_POWER_ OK/Faulty (Read-Only) SUPPLY_STATUS_#1 Displays the status for the Ringer Power Supply #1 (RPS 1). [7]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RING_POWER_ OK/Faulty (Read-Only) SUPPLY_STATUS_#2 Displays the status for the Ringer Power Supply #2 (RPS 2). [8]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NUMER OF TIME SLOTS [9]

128 or 512 (Read-Only)


Defines the number of time slots for this Unit. The number of time slots is factory set and cannot be changed.
128 - Coral FlexiCom 5000 Peripheral shelves (field upgrades) 512 - Coral FlexiCom 6000 Peripheral shelves 512 - Coral IPx 4000 Peripheral shelves (384 time slots in use)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4-33

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]

Size Definition UNIT_TYPE [10] 0 (Normal) or 1 (Remote) Each unit is capable of operating as:

PI Reference Manual

0 (Normal) via a PBD-ATS card for local peripheral shelves 1 (Remote) via an FLIA-ATS card for FlexLITE remote shelves

Defines the Unit type as Normal or Remote Coral FlexLITE shelf.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND TO 32GC? [11] Yes..No Loads the modified UNIT information. When No is entered, updates are ignored and the system remains at its pre-programmed definitions.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNITS SYSGEN,5 [0,0,0,5]


4-34

Numbering Plan
The Numbering Plan (NPL) is used to determine the Coral system-wide numbering scheme. Two types of numbering Plans are given, a General Numbering Plan and a Special Numbering Plan. The General Numbering Plan establishes the system pattern dialing plan. It is the System Dialing Plan that determines all hardware and many software identifiers used for programming purposes. The Special NPL defines and identifies special feature codes. Details for the Numbering Plans are found on the following pages. General Numbering Plan ..............................................................................5-3 General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) ...........................................5-7 General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) ...........................................5-16 Special Feature Codes ................................................................................5-48 FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes .................................................5-50 SHOW TYPE of NUMBER.......................................................................5-52

On the following pages, sample General Numbering Plans are given.

Dialing digits via the keypad or programmed buttons on the keyset, is the users method of instructing the Coral system to call another user, access a Trunk and dial out, access internal facilities or activate features. The specific structure of the digit patterns used in the Coral for various system instructions is defined in the Numbering Plan. The Numbering Plan includes two parts, the main plan: GENERAL NPL and the secondary numbering plan: SPECIAL NPL. The main Numbering Plan defines the access codes of each of the physical ports in the system. Additionally, the Numbering Plan defines the access codes for Groups, Speed Calling Libraries and features. A dial number is assigned to each Coral feature. The access codes are changed by the UPDATE function. There are also feature access codes that need to be REMOVED or ADDED. In such cases, the system programmer must have a reference tool to relate a dial number to a specific feature. That reference tool is an internal software number which is also known as the index number which relate features to dial numbers, e.g. index number 51 relates Call Forward All to a dial number (141 is the Call Forward All dial number default). For example, assume Call Forward All is not defined in the system and it is requested. Such a change is accomplished in the PATTERN NUMBERING PLAN. The system programmer selects ADD, and then DIAL NUMBER 141,chooses FEATURE and then enters the requested INDEX NUMBER, 51 which actually relates 141 to Call Forward All.

5-1

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual The Special Feature Codes (page 5-48) establish the dial codes used for certain system features typically dialed following a hookswitch flash (for example: Camp-On, Snooze, or Break-In). The FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes (page 5-50) establish the dial codes used for the FlexiCall and IRSS Freedom features allowing non-Coral stations to access Coral services and systems by creating a virtual Coral station via the established connection between the Coral and non-Coral stations.

5-2

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan

General Numbering Plan

W NPL,0

[0,0,5,0]

The General Numbering Plan is used to assign system dial numbers to the system hardware (shelf, slot, circuit) and software (index numbers) in the flexible numbering scheme. The general numbering plan also assigns Network numbers to the Network nodes. SHELF, SLOT, CKT: A shelf, slot, circuit hardware identification (HID) number represents a hardware position in the system cabinet, and must be accompanied by the correctly installed equipment at the start position of the range. The Shelf, Slot and Circuit numbers are only relevant for dial numbers with physical locations such as trunks and stations. INDEX NUMBER: An index number is a software identification number (SID) which identifies a feature, speed dial library, node number or group. Each system feature and key function is identified by a specific index number regardless of the dial number assigned to it by the Numbering Plan. The first feature is identified by index 0. Similarly, each group of any group type, whether Hunt, Pick-up, or Trunk, etc., and each number of the public speed dial library is identified with a specific index number regardless of the dial number assigned to it. Thus, the first trunk group is index 0, the first hunt group is index 0, the first public library number is index 0,etc. In general, the number of groups or libraries established in the System Sizes determines the quantity of index numbers allocated. The first 100 public speed dial library numbers for instance, require index numbers 0 through 99 (inclusive), the second 100 would require index numbers 100 through 199 (inclusive). NODE NUMBER: Each private exchange in a network represents a network node and is designated by a corresponding network node number. The network node number is limited to 8 digits and is not part of the general numbering plan. The network has its own network numbering plan used for network communications.

5-3

General Numbering Plan NPL,0 [0,0,5,0]

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual

SYSTEM DIAL The system dial number is used to access the related equipment or feature. The dial NUMBER: number range (START to END numbers) may be greater or smaller, depending on the information entered in the SIZES Branch (see Chapter 4). START and END numbers must have the same number of digits (e.g., 0-9, 00-99, 000-999...). The following arrow symbol appears when the range END number depends on the maximum number listed in the database as defined in SIZES (Chapter 4). Hence, a number listed after is not necessarily the exact END number for the range and only a suggestion. No number listed after indicates that the END number is defined in the SIZES database.

1 to 8 digits may be used in place of the 3 or 4 digit defaults, however, using less than 3 digits severely restricts the flexibility of the Numbering Plan.

Selecting the NPL branch displays the following menu:


OPTION Description

0 - UPDATE 1 - DISPLAY 2 - ADD 3 - REMOVE 5 - SHOW 7 - ERASE

Allows updating the numbering plan. Displays the entire numbering plan. Adds a number to the numbering plan. Removes selected numbers from the numbering plan. Shows a specific part of the numbering plan according to type. Erases all numbers in the numbering plan.

General Numbering Plan NPL,0 [0,0,5,0]


5-4

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-1: Numbering Plan Options-Full Explanation

Numbering Plan

0UPDATE

FROM OLD DIAL#: TO OLD DIAL#:

Enter the first existing dial number of the range that requires updating. Enter the last existing dial number that requires updating. If only a single number is required, enter the same number as FROM OLD DIAL #. Enter the first new dial number, in the range that was defined under the old dial number. (Once the first number is entered the rest of the defined range is automatically calculated). Displays the first dial number defined in the display range. Displays the last dial number defined in the display range.

FROM NEW DIAL#:

1DISPLAY

FROM DIAL#: TO DIAL NUMBER#: TYPE: INDEX#/ SHELF,SLOT,CKT/ NODE#:

Displays the port, feature or type of group for which dial numbers are assigned. Displays the index number of first library, feature or group, or physical shelf, slot and circuit position of the first port in the range, or the Network node number. Enter the first new dial number of the range that is to be added. Enter the last new dial number to be added. If only a single number is required, enter the same number as FROM NEW DIAL #. Enter Y to assign an additional dial number to a port, feature or group, which already has an assigned (old) dial number. Yes also allows assigning additional dial numbers.

2 - ADD

FROM NEW DIAL#: TO NEW DIAL#:

NUMS ALREADY DEF? (Y/N):

FROM OLD DIAL#: CHOOSE TYPE:

Appears when Yes is selected. Enter the old dial number. Enter the number of the port, feature or group to which dial numbers are assigned. When a port type is selected, the following message appears: -ENTER (SHELF,SLOT,CKT) Enter the physical location of the first new dial number. When any other type is selected the following message appears: - ENTER INDEX # Enter the index of the first new dial number.

5-5

General Numbering Plan NPL,0 [0,0,5,0]

Enter No to assign the first dial number to a port, feature or group which currently has no assigned dial number. If No is selected then the table of all Numbering Plan types (items) appears.

Numbering Plan
Table 5-1: Numbering Plan Options-Full Explanation

PI Reference Manual

3REMOVE

FROM OLD DIAL#: TO OLD DIAL#:

Enter first existing dial number of the range that requires removal. Enter last existing dial number that requires removal. If only a single number is required, enter the same number as FROM OLD DIAL #. After the number is typed and [CR] pressed, if the number was successfully removed the following message appears: NUMBERS REMOVED The requested dial numbers are immediately removed from the numbering plan.

Option 4 is not used in the General Numbering Plan.

5 - SHOW
CHOOSE TYPE:

When SHOW is selected, the table of currently available Numbering Plan types (items) appears. Enter the type (item) number of the port, feature or group to which dial numbers are assigned. Once this type number is selected an informative table showing the dial numbers, type and location of the requested item will appear. Press [CR] to display a list of all items, as in the Display option.

Option 6 is not used in the General Numbering Plan.

7ERASE

** WARNING ** : all dial numbers will be lost ! ARE YOU SURE (Y/N)? N

Caution! Entering Yes immediately and permanently removes all currently defined numbers from the Numbering Plan. The default is No. Press [CR] to return to the main General Numbering Plan menu.

General Numbering Plan NPL,0 [0,0,5,0]


5-6

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order)


Use the following table to locate features by name. To view a list of features by feature number, see Table 5-3 on page 5-21
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
ACCOUNT CODE ACD (HUNT GROUP) NUMBERS ACD - MAX CALLS WAITING for BUSY (Attendant) ACTIVATION CODE ALARM (Attendant) AUTO ANSWER ON/OFF AUTOGUARD TRUNK AUTO REDIAL (ACNR) AUTO REDIAL - ASSIGN PRIORITY AUTO REDIAL - CANCEL PRIORITY AUTO REDIAL - RESTART NUMBER AUTO REDIAL - STOP NUMBER AUTO SET RELOCATE BELL/UNA RELAY 9 5 9 10 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 9 11

Field
109 0 209 3 148 18 154 88 0 1 9 8 220

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


#1990 see page 5-18 #1746 #*1, #11 #1997 #138 #1998 #178 #*8 #*9 #*7 #*6 Not Available

BLOCK STATION BOSS/SECRETARY GROUP NUMBERS BOSS/SECRETARY LINE KEY BREAK-IN BREAK-IN KEY BUSY OUT TRUNK CALL CHARGE PRINT CALL CHARGE RESET WITH PRINTOUT CALL ELAPSED TIME DISPLAY KEY

9 6 9 special 9 9 9 9 9

63 0 6

#153 see page 5-18 #126 3

4 65 162 168 9

#124 #155 #1972 #1978 #129

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-7

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

24: U-RMIcsx (RMI-F) 70507059 24: RMIcsx (RMI-F) 24: U-MRcsx (MR) 24: MRcsx (MR) 24: 8DRCF 24: 8DRCM 8: RMI 8: ASU

Numbering Plan
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
CALL FORWARD ALL (Attendant or Boss Group) CALL FORWARD ALL (Station) CALL FORWARD ALL - External (Attendant or Boss Group) CALL FORWARD ALL - External (Station) CALL FORWARD BUSY (Attendant or Boss Group member) CALL FORWARD BUSY (Station) 9 9 9 9 9 9

PI Reference Manual

Field
78 51 227 222 77 50 226 221 57 225 79 52 228 223 174 175 229 224 239 90 91 102 203 204 205 206 193 86

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


#168 #141, #8 #17707 #17702 #167 #140 #17706 #17701 #147, #2 #17705 #169 #142 #17708 #17703 #1984 #1985 #17709 #17704 #17717 #180, 77 #181,76 #192, 78 #1740 #1741 #1742 #1743 #1444 #176 2 8

CALL FORWARD BUSY - External (Attendant or Boss Group) 9 CALL FORWARD BUSY - External (Station) CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO-ANSWER (Station) CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO-ANSWER - External (Station) CALL FORWARD NO-ANSWER (Attendant) CALL FORWARD NO-ANSWER (Station) CALL FORWARD NO-ANSWER -External (Attendant) CALL FORWARD NO-ANSWER -External (Station) CALL FORWARD TIMED (Attendant) CALL FORWARD TIMED (Station) CALL FORWARD TIMED - External (Attendant) CALL FORWARD TIMED - External (Station) CALL FORWARD UNDEFINED 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 special special 10

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

CALL PICKUP: DIRECTED CALL PICKUP: GROUP CALL PICKUP: NIGHT ANSWER, BELL/UNA GROUP CALL TRACE- Activation Station CALL TRACE- Print Station CALL TRACE- Activation Attendant CALL TRACE- Print Attendant CALLING ID CONTROL CAMP ON - Call Back CAMP ON - Call Back CAMP ON - Call Waiting/Call Offer CANCELLATION CODE

#*0,#10

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-8

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
CHECK IN/OUT CO BLOCKED DISPLAY CONFERENCE LOCK KEY CONFERENCE PORTS CONFERENCE RELEASE/INSPECT CONTINUOUS CONFERENCE from 3way COS SWITCHOVER CPA (Coral Paging Adapter) DAY/NIGHT TRANSFER (Auto/Manual) DAY/NIGHT-1 TRANSFER DAY/NIGHT-2 TRANSFER DEFINE GROUP CALL OPERATOR DC NO CALL DIAL CALL PICKUP: DIRECTED DIAL CALL PICKUP: GROUP DIAL SERVICE DID TEST NUMBER DID TRUNKS DIRECT IN LINE: DAY SERVICE DIRECT IN LINE: NIGHT-1 SERVICE DIRECT IN LINE: NIGHT-2 SERVICE DIRECTORY DIRECTORY-Access Personal Directory Directory-Lower/Upper Case (CAPS LOCK) Directory-Alphanumeric Mode (NUM LOCK) DIVERT CALL KEY DO NOT DISTURB/UNATTENDED DON'T DISTURB for Station by Attendant DROP NO DIAL TRUNK DUMP DVMS MSG 10 9 9 30 9 9 9 2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 36 9 14 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 31 45 37 194 55 155 72 178 0 74 73 75 145 144 95 94 238 179 90 91 0 186 173 35 59

Numbering Plan

Field
157 67 190

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


#1970 #157 #1441 70987099 #1983 #1306 #149 see page 5-17 #1993 #185 #184 #17716 #1989 #180, 77 #181, 76 4850 CC1: 3999 see page 5-40 #164 #163 #165 #1994 #1994, #9 Not Available Not Available #1445 #145 #1999 #162 #1988 see page 5-42

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-9

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
DVMS PORTS EXCLUDE DESTINATION KEY EXCLUDE SOURCE KEY EXCLUSIVE HOLD (Boss Group) EXECUTIVE PRIVILEGE FLASH ON TRUNK FlexiCall All FlexiCall Internal FlexiCall External FlexSet NUMBERS FlexSet ZONE PAGE NUMBERS FlexSet VOICE PAGE NUMBERS FlexSet-IP NUMBERS FlexSet-IP VOICE PAGE NUMBERS FOLLOW ME FOLLOW ME - External FORCED RELEASE KEY GROUP CALL -Access Code GROUP CALL-Add New Member 9 9 9 35 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 32 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 2 20 3 41 0 0 99 233 3 0 33 34 195 198 196 23 31 192 81 92 76 71 70 0 22 21 97 80 60 230 231 232

PI Reference Manual

Field

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


see page 5-40 #1322 #1321 #187 #170 #150 #17710 #17711 #17712 see page 5-17 see page 5-40 see page 5-18 see page 5-44 see page 5-47 #189 #17713 #123 5600 #1304 #1305 #1446 #1449 #1447 #1323 #1302 #1443 #171, #4 #182 #166 #161 #160

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

GROUP CALL-Release New Member GROUP CALL -Release Single Participant GROUP CALL-Temporary Group Call Activation GROUP CALL -Terminate Conference HANDSET/SPEAKER KEY HEADSET ONLY-ON/OFF HELP KEY HOLD HOT STATION DELAY HOT STATION IMMEDIATE HOT TRUNK DELAYED HOT TRUNK IMMEDIATE

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-10

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
HUNT GROUP (ACD/UCD) NUMBERS IDLE DISPLAY ON/OFF INCOMING ONLY TRUNK IP-FlexSet/Keyset NUMBERS IP-FlexSet/Keyset VOICE PAGE NUMBERS IP-LGS NUMBERS (requires Coral Version 14.6x) IP-SLT NUMBERS (requires Coral Version 14.6x) IRSS (Individual Remote System Services) Freedom KB0 SETUP KEYSET NUMBERS KEYSET-IP NUMBERS KEYSET VOICE PAGE NUMBERS KEYSET-IP VOICE PAGE NUMBERS KEYSET ZONE PAGE NUMBERS LAR BLOCK LARGE PUBLIC LIBRARY PREFIX LAST NUMBER REDIAL LAST PARTY RELEASE (multi-party conference only) LED ON/OFF KEY LGS IP NUMBERS LIBRARIES PRIVATE LIBRARIES PRIVATE: PROGRAMMING LIBRARIES PUBLIC LIBRARIES PUBLIC: PROGRAMMING (Attendant) LIBRARY PUBLIC LARGE PREFIX LOAD ID (ACD) LOCK Phone LOG-IN PRIMARY (ACD) LOG-IN/OUT (ACD) LOOP KEY LOOP ORIGINATING ONLY KEY 5 9 9 41 44 43 42 9 9 2 41 3 44 20 9 9 9 9 9 43 19 9 7 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 103 0 104 199 163 58 191 164 1 5 0 169 199 53 32 30 0 234 147

Numbering Plan

Field
0 17 68 0 0

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


see page 5-18 #137 #158 see page 5-44 see page 5-47 see page 5-46 see page 5-46 #17714 #1996 see page 5-17 see page 5-44 see page 5-18 see page 5-47 see page 5-40 #1979 N/A #143, * #1303 #1301 see page 5-46 see page 5-40 #193 6000 #194 N/A #1973 #148 #1442 #1974 #121 #125

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-11

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
MALICIOUS CALL TRACE- Activation Station MALICIOUS CALL TRACE- Print Station MALICIOUS CALL TRACE- Activation Attendant MALICIOUS CALL TRACE- Print Attendant MESSAGE CANCEL MESSAGE WAITING (Attendant) MESSAGE WAITING (Attendant) MESSAGE MESSAGE MLPP MODEM 9 9 9 9 9 9 special 9 special 9 13 237 85

PI Reference Manual

Field
203 204 205 206 54 66

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


#1740 #1741 #1742 #1743 #1440 #156 7 #175, #5 5 #17715

26: U-RMIcsx (RMI-F) see page 5-39 26: RMIcsx (RMI-F) 26: 8DRCF 26: 8DRCM 3: RMI 3: ASU 28 29 15 20 8 0 102 144 95 94 219 7 61 100 64 0 #1328 #1329 #135 #1320 #128 see page 5-44 #192, 78 #1993 #185 #184 None: see page 28-10 #127 #151 #190 #154 7060

MULTILINGUAL DISPLAY MUSIC MULTIPLE SOURCE SELECTION MUSIC ON/OFF MUTE KEY NAME TO DIAL NUMBER DISPLAY KEY (Name/Number)

9 9 9 9 9 39 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 33

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

NETWORK NIGHT ANSWER, BELL/UNA PICKUP GROUP NIGHT/DAY TRANSFER (Auto/Manual) NIGHT1/DAY TRANSFER NIGHT2/DAY TRANSFER NODE ID# for Current Node OCC KEY ORIGINATE ONLY STATION OUTGOING ONLY TRUNK OUTGOING RESTRICTION STATION PAGE_Q

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-12

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
PAGE PUBLIC ADDRESS 12

Numbering Plan

Field

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J

23: U-RMIcsx (RMI-F) 70747079 23: RMIcsx (RMI-F) 23: U-MRcsx (MR) 23: MRcsx (MR) 23: 8DRCF 23: 8DRCM 7: RMI 7: ASU 6 7 4 5 93 177 89 58 176 11 191 96 0 103 19 #*4 #*5 #*2 #*3 #183, #7, 79 #1987 #179 #148 #1986 #131 #1442 #186, #6 see page 5-40 #193 #139

PAGE-DOWN (SCROLL) IN DISCRETE STEPS PAGE-DOWN FAST (SCROLL) PAGE-UP (SCROLL) IN DISCRETE STEPS PAGE-UP FAST (SCROLL) PARK PARTY INFORMATION ON PORTS PASSCODE CHANGE PHONE LOCK PORT INFORMATION PREFERENCE PRIMARY LOGIN (ACD) PRIVACY (Boss Group) PRIVATE LIBRARIES PRIVATE LIBRARY: PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING BUTTON PUBLIC ADDRESS (Paging, Loudspeaker)

10 10 10 10 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 19 9 9 12

23: U-RMIcsx (RMI-F) 70747079 23: RMIcsx (RMI-F) 23: U-MRcsx (MR) 23: MRcsx (MR) 23: 8DRCF 23: 8DRCM 7: RMI 7: ASU 0 104 199 88 53 106 6000 #194 N/A #178 #143, * #196, #9

PUBLIC LIBRARIES (Station) PUBLIC LIBRARY: PROGRAMMING (Attendant) PUBLIC LIBRARY LARGE PREFIX REDIAL AUTO (See AUTO REDIAL) REDIAL LAST NUMBER REDIAL SAVED NUMBER

7 9 9 9 9 9

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-13

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
RELAY 21

PI Reference Manual

Field

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J

25: U-RMIcsx (RMI-F) 70867097 25: RMIcsx (RMI-F) 25: U-MRcsx (MR) 25: MRcsx (MR) 25: 8DRCF 25: 8DRCM 9: RMI 9: ASU 165 142 82 69 16 110-125 126-141 0 106 4 6 5 7 87 161 105 171 #1975 #1991 #172 #159 #136 7010-7025 7026-7041 80 #196, #9 #*2 #*4 #*3 #*5 #17700 N/A #195 #1981 9 197 #1448 see page 5-17 see page 5-46 4 0 10 62 98 #120 #1300 (or # -permanent key) #152 #188

RELEASE FROM ALL ACD/UCD GROUPS RELEASE/RESUME FROM UCD GROUP REMINDER RESERVE TRUNK RING LEVEL Adjustment ROOM STATUS (Attendant) ROOM STATUS (Station) ROUTING ACCESS SAVED / REPEAT NUMBER SCROLL ADVANCES IN DISCRETE STEPS SCROLL BACKWARD IN DISCRETE STEPS SCROLL FAST ADVANCE SCROLL FAST BACKWARD SECURITY

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 37 9 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 9 special 9 1 42 special 9 9 9 9

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

SERIAL LIBRARY PREFIX SERIES SILENT MONITOR (2-Way) SILENT MONITOR (2-Way) SILENT MONITOR (1-way) Splitting SLT NUMBERS SLT IP NUMBERS SNOOZE (WAKEUP/REMINDER) SPEAKER KEY STOP DIAL KEY TERMINATING ONLY STATION TIME/DATE SETTING

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-14

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-2: Default Feature Numbers-in Alphabetical Order Feature
TRUNK AUTOGUARD TRUNK DROP NO DIAL TRUNK GROUP TRUNK NUMBERS UCD (HUNT) GROUP NUMBERS UNATTENDED STATION DESTINATION UNATTENDED/DO NOT DISTURB UNLOCK Phone VOICE MAIL SEQUENCE (Version 10.19 only) VOICE PAGE ACTIVATION VOICE PAGE ACTIVATION from IDLE VOICE PAGE AUTO ANSWER VOICE PAGE FlexSet NUMBERS VOICE PAGE FlexSet-IP NUMBERS VOICE PAGE ON/OFF WAIT QUEUE WAITING CALLS DISPLAY (ACD) WAITING CALLS DISPLAY KEY WAKEUP REPORT (ATTENDANT) WAKEUP (STATION) WAKEUP (ATTENDANT) WHISPER PAGE-Announcing WHISPER PAGE - (DND) Receiving Turning ON/OFF WIRELESS STATION WRAP UP CODE (ACD) WRAP UP TIME (ACD/UCD) XFER (TRANSFER) KEY 9 9 4 0 5 9 9 9 9 special 9 9 3 44 9 38 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 40 9 9 9 167 166 2 0 14 0 172 25 158 83 108 207 208 101 13 0 56 55 58 24

Numbering Plan

Field
154 72

Index/CKT

Default Dial No.J


#1998 #162 see page 5-18 see page 5-17 see page 5-18 #146 #145 #148 #1324 6 #191, #3 #133 see page 5-18 see page 5-47 #134 see page 5-43 #1982 #1325 #1971 #173 #1980 #1744 #1745 see page 5-44 #1977 #1976 #122

0-15

J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151.

5-15

General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order)


NPL Type The following list includes all the different NPL types that the Coral supports. An
NPL type must be defined for each dial number in the system. There are many different NPL types which include among others: dial numbers, trunk numbers, features, group numbers, dial services, and more. A complete list is given below. Numbers shown in square brackets ([ ]) are field numbers used while in the Add (2) or Show (5) submenu of the General Numbering Plan. These bracketed numbers allow quick access to the various numbering plan types (the parameter name) by immediately skipping to the requested field. Note on NPL Type Range Definitions: When the default range/s in the following parameters define a range of dial numbers, the dial number is used to access the related equipment or feature. The dial number range (START to END numbers) may be greater or smaller, depending on the information entered in the SIZES Branch (see Chapter 4) and the number of ports authorized by the SAU (see Chapter 3). START and END dial numbers must have the same number of digits (e.g., 0-9, 00-99, up to eight digits 00000000-99999999). The following arrow symbol appears when the range END number depends on the maximum number listed in the database as defined in SIZES, Chapter 4. Hence, a number listed after is not necessarily the exact END number for the range and only a suggestion. No number listed after indicates that the END number is defined in the SIZES database.

r
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
5-16

Notes: 1 to 8 digits may be used in place of the 3 or 4 digit defaults, however, using less than 3 digits severely restricts the flexibility of the Numbering Plan. # or * may be used only at the beginning of NPL Types FEATURE [9] and EDIT [10] and may not be used at the beginning of any other NPL Type dial number. # or * may not be used in the middle of a dial number.
Warning: Modifying any NPL port number (not feature number) causes: 1. An initialization of the CLA or CLA-ATS card. 2. CoraLINK applications to be interrupted (calls are unaffected). Before the update is performed, the following message prompts: INIT CLA CARD WITH UPDATED NPL (Y/[N])? Enter Y to complete the update and wait for the following message to be shown: CLA initialization completed successfully.

PI Reference Manual TRUNK [0] 7100

Numbering Plan

In European systems Trunk is also designated ALS70/GID.

Designates a range of LS/GS, TWL and E&M trunk dial numbers beginning at a trunk hardware ID number in the system. Numbers are given as a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT [1]

Coral System

Default Dial #s

200..349 (Eu2: 300..449) 2000..2015 (Eu2: 3000..3015) (Eu9: 4000-4015) FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 2000..2319 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 (Eu2: 3000..3319) (Eu9: 4000-4015) CC1: FlexiCom 200 224..247 Designates a range of Single Line Telephone station dial numbers for Magneto and type 500 or 2500 SLT equipment, beginning at an SLT hardware ID number in the system. Numbers are given in a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V CSX 200

KEYSET [2]

Coral System

Default Dial #s

Designates a range of keyset station dial numbers for FlexSets, CPA, DKT, DST, EKT, AA, iCMC and GKT station equipment, beginning at station hardware ID number in the system. Numbers are given in a range beginning with a START number and concluding with an END number. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-17

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

400 479 (Eu2:100 179) (Eu9: 2000 2015) CSX 200 4000 4015 (Eu2:1000 1015) (Eu9: 2000 2015) FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 4000 4159 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 (Eu2:1000 1159) (Eu9: 2000 2149) CC1: FlexiCom 200 200 223 Attendant (1st Keyset) 0 (Eu0, Eu3, Eu9: 9) (Eu1: 11) (Eu2: 99) r FlexSet-IP 280S sets are defined in IP_KEYSET [41] (page 5-44).

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V

Numbering Plan KEYSET_V_PAGE [3]


Coral System Default Dial #s

PI Reference Manual

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V 7400 7479 CSX 200 7400 7415 (Eu9:7400 7415) FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 7400 7559 (Eu9:7400 7599) IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 CC1: FlexiCom 200 7400 7423 Designates a range of keyset voice page dial numbers (used to voice page a station), beginning at a FlexSet, CPA, DKT, DST, EKT or GKT hardware ID number in the system.

FlexSet-IP 280S sets have their own Voice Page numbers defined by the IP_KEY_VPG [44] (page 5-47) NPL type.

Numbers are given in a range commencing with a start number and concluding with an END number. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TRUNK GRP [4] Any valid Trunk number (max: 8 digits);


Index # Default Dial #s

0 1..9

(Eu: 0)

81..89

10..15 7081..7085 Designates a range of trunk group dial numbers beginning with a Trunk Group software ID number (Enter index number).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HUNT GRP [5]

Coral System

Default Dial #s

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0


5-18

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V

CSX 200 FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 CC1: FlexiCom 200 750 759 Designates a range of hunt group dial numbers (ACD/UCD Groups) beginning at a Hunt Group software ID number (Enter index number).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

350 389 (Eu2: 550 589) (Eu9: 530 559) 5350 5379

BOSS GRP [6]

Coral System

Default Dial #s

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V CSX 200 FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 CC1: FlexiCom 200

500 529 5000 5079

720 729

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan Designates a range of boss group dial numbers beginning at a Boss Group software ID number (Enter index number). Numbers are given in a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-19

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan PUBLIC LIB [7]


Coral System Default Dial #s

PI Reference Manual

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V 6000 6999 CSX 200 6000 6499 FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 Designates a range of numbers dialed to access specific public (system-wide) speed call numbers, beginning at a Public Library software ID number (Enter index number). Numbers are given as a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FEATURE [9] Designates a range of feature dial numbers beginning at a Feature software ID number (enter index number). Dial the feature dial number to access or activate the specific feature. The dial number can also be used to identify the feature for Keyset button programming purposes. Changing the dial number of a feature that can only be accessed or activated by a Keyset/FlexSet button serves no useful purpose. The following table presents the PI features currently available. Although the default dial number can be changed, the index number remains as the feature identification (this index number cannot be changed). The table below lists the default feature dial and index numbers by dial numbers. To view a list of the features by name in alphabetical order see Table 5-2.

r
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
5-20

General notes for the table below: Features listed in bold type can only be operated by using a programmed key. In Eu2 systems (Germany), all feature default dial numbers that normally begin with the digit 1 are replaced with the * symbol as the first digit. N/A (Not Applicable) means that the Default Dial Number is currently not defined and therefore not in use.

*Station Type:

1. SLT: the feature is available for SLT/FlexSet/FlexSet-IP/DKT/DST/GKT/EKT and Attendant Stations. 2. Keyset: the feature is available for FlexSet/FlexSet-IP/DKT/DST/GKT/EKT and Attendant Stations. 3. Attendant (ATT): the feature is available for Attendant Stations only. 4. DSP: the feature is available for Keysets with display units only.

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** Not Available Index numJ 219 Feature Node ID# for current node Station Type* N/A Description

Numbering Plan

Defines a single and unique Node ID dial number for the current Coral Network Node. This dial number is used for the Path Replacement feature and cannot be used by a station user. Once this Node ID# is defined, it must be added to the NPL of each of the other Network nodes as a NETWORK [39] (page 5-44) number.

Not Available

220

Auto Set Relocate

SLT

Allows swapping station profiles between similar sets (SLT to SLT, Keyset to Keyset, FlexSet to FlexSet, FlexSet-IP to FlexSet-IP) either temporarily or permanently. Not applicable for Coral Teleport FXS IP-SLT. This function has a dual purpose and is dependent upon system programming: - Activates/Deactivates the speakerphone. - Acts as a connect/release (on/off) key. This feature requires a programmed button.

#120

Speaker

Keyset

#121

Loop

Keyset

Defines a two-way loop key used to originate calls or answer calls directed to the station number. This feature requires a programmed button. Initiates a transfer or a three-way conference call. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables an attendant position to force the release of a call after breaking in. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables a user to break-in to an existing call (after warning tone) by forcing a three-way conference call. This feature requires a programmed button. Defines a one-way loop key to be used for originating calls only. Defines a line key that is reserved for Boss Group use.

#122

XFER (Transfer) Keyset

#123

Forced Release Break-In

Keyset

#124

Keyset

#125 #126

5 6

Loop Originating Keyset Only Boss/Secretary Line Keyset

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-21

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #127 Index numJ 7 Feature OCC Station Type* Keyset

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables a user to send additional digits to a trunk, after a stop dial or interdigit time-out. This feature requires a programmed button. Converts the displayed name to a dial number. This feature requires a programmed button.

#128

Name to Dial Number Display Call Elapsed Time Display Stop Dial Stop Dial (during dialing) Last Party Release (Multi-Party Conference Only) Group Call Operator-Add Member Group Call OperatorRelease Member Continuous Conference from 3way

DSP

#129 #1300 #

9 10 N/A

DSP Keyset SLT

Shows the time elapsed since the origination or answer of a trunk call. Forces the termination of a dial out situation, thereby enabling an outgoing call to transfer to another station and avoid the inter-digit delay. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables any one of the multi-party conference members to release the last party that was added to the conference (excluding himself).

#1303

32

SLT

#1304

33

Keyset

Allows the Group Call Operator, while still a member of the group call, to add members to the ongoing group call. Allows the Group Call Operator, while still a member of the group call, to release members from the ongoing group call. Enables a 3way call group member to create a multi-party conference call regardless of the initiators COS transfer key definition. Further members may be added by using the Transfer key. Enables a keyset station, while off-hook, to select a specific line, trunk, trunk group or library number.

#1305

34

Keyset

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#1306

35

Keyset

#131

11

Preference

Keyset

N/A #133

12 13

Not Used Voice Page Auto Answer Keyset Enables control of the incoming voice page auto answer feature. Allows the user to answer a voice page call manually or handsfree.

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-22

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #134 Index numJ 14 Feature Voice Page On/Off Music On/Off Ring Level Idle Display On/Off Auto Answer Programming Button Mute Station Type* Keyset Description

Numbering Plan

Enables the incoming voice page feature to be switched on or off (Do Not Disturb for voice page). Enables background music to be switched on or off. Used with station VOL keys to set the ring level, cadence and ring type. Enables switching the clock/date and station number display on or off, while the station is idle. Enables a keyset to control the auto answer feature (auto answer on/off). Enables the programming of keyset buttons. This code may also be programmed directly by using the key. Enables a keyset user to disable the handset or speakerphone microphone during a call. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables a user to switch between a 3-way conference and private conversation, with second party, for split calls. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables a user to switch between a 3-way conference and private conversation, with third party, for split calls. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables switching between the handset and speakerphone. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables the keyset user to program a button for contacting Voice Mail on an SLT. The sequence includes the SLT (Voice Mail) dial number + #1324 + the DTMF digits required by Voice Mail device.

#135 #136 #137

15 16 17

Keyset Keyset DSP

#138 #139

18 19

Keyset Keyset

#1320

20

Keyset

#1321

21

Exclude Source

Keyset

#1322

22

Exclude Destination

Keyset

#1323

23

Handset/ Speaker Voice Mail Sequence

Keyset

#1324 (Used only in Version 10.19)

24

Keyset

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-23

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #1325 Index numJ 25 Feature Calls Waiting Display Not Used Not Used Multilingual Display Multiple Music Source Selection LED On/Off DSP Keyset Station Type* DSP

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables a keyset user with display to view the number of calls waiting to be answered. This feature requires a programmed button.

#1326 #1327 #1328 #1329

26 27 28

Enables the user to set the keyset display language. Enables the user to select the background music from the multiple music sources. Enables the user to program a key to operate a series of features while having the LED controlled by the key pressing order. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables the headset and disables the keyset microphone and loudspeaker.

29

#1301

30

Keyset

#1302

31

Headset Only

Keyset

Note: Relevant for IP Keysets only when Headset is connected.


N/A #140 32-49 50 51 52 Not Used Call Forward Busy Call Forward All Call Forward No-Answer Last Number Redial SLT SLT SLT Enables the user to forward calls to a defined destination if the user station is busy. Enables the user to forward all calls to a another destination. Enables the user to forward calls to a another destination if a call to the user station remains unanswered. Enables the user to automatically redial the last external or internal number dialed. (The system can redial the last internal number dialed only when INTERNAL_LAST_NUMBER (Station Options, [SFE,2]) is set to Yes. Enables the originator of a message to cancel the message.

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#141, #8 #142

#143,

53

SLT

#1440

54

Message Cancel

SLT

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-24

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #145 Index numJ 55 Feature Unattended Station Type* ATT Description

Numbering Plan

Enables an attended to implement the Do Not Disturb feature. Since the user is defined as an attendant, the display changes to unattended and calls are rerouted to an unattended destination. Enables a user to block calls to the station. Enables an attendant to designate a station to which calls are routed when the attendant station is Unattended. Enables the user to forward calls to a designated station if the user is busy or a call remains unanswered. Enables the user to lock the station dial (the entire keypad is locked). Enables the user to switch his Class of Service between primary and secondary. Enables the user to send a hookflash signal over a trunk. Enables an attendant to permit any system station the ability to make, but not receive calls.

#145 #146

55 56

Do Not Disturb Unattended Station Destination Call Forward Busy/No Ans Phone Lock

SLT ATT

#147, #2

57

SLT

#148 #149 #150

58 59 60

SLT

COS Switchover SLT Flash on trunk (Calibrated Opening) Originate Only Station Terminate Only Station Block Station Station Outgoing Restriction Keyset

#151

61

ATT

#153 #154

63 64

ATT ATT

Enables an attendant to block any station from making or receiving any calls. Enables an attendant to block any station from making any trunk calls. Enables an attendant to busy out any system trunk, effectively blocking all incoming or outgoing calls on a specific trunk.

#155

65

Trunk Busy Out ATT

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-25

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#152

62

ATT

Enables an attendant to permit any system station the ability to receive, but not make calls.

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #156 Index numJ 66 Feature Message Waiting Station Type* ATT

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables an attendant to set Message Waiting at any designated system station. The designated station can then be defined as a Hot Station to the attendant that initiated the Message Waiting feature. Enables an attendant to display the trunks that are blocked by the central office. Enables an attendant to define a trunk as Incoming only. Enables an attendant to reserve any trunk or trunk group to any designated station or station group. Enables an attendant to set a designated trunk to this status. Trunk Operation is dependent upon the Central Office. Enables an attendant to set a designated trunk to this status. Trunk Operation is dependent upon the Central Office. Enables an attendant to implement this status at any designated trunk. The trunk is released if no digits are dialed before the time-out interval. Enables an attendant to designate a station, station group, or library as the destination for incoming calls on each trunk when the system is in Night 1 mode. Enables an attendant to designate a station, station group, or library as the destination for incoming calls on each trunk when the system is in the Day mode. Enables an attendant to designate a station, group, or library as the destination for incoming calls on each trunk when the system is in the Night 2 mode. Enables an attendant to define a station as a Hot Station Immediate (immediate ringdown), and designate a destination station.

#157 #158 #159

67 68 69

Trunk CO ATT Blocked Display Trunk Incoming ATT Only Reserve Trunk ATT

#160

70

Hot Trunk Immediate Hot Trunk Delayed Trunk Drop No Dial

ATT

#161

71

ATT

#162

72

ATT

#163

73

Direct In Line: Night 1

ATT

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#164

74

Direct In Line: Day Service

ATT

#165

75

Direct In Line: Night 2

ATT

#166

76

Hot Station Immediate

ATT

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-26

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #167 Index numJ 77 Feature Call Forward Busy Destination Station Type* ATT/Boss Group Description

Numbering Plan

Enables an attendant or boss group member forward all calls of a busy station or boss group to another destination. Enables an attendant or boss group member to forward all calls of a station or group (ACD/UCD/Boss) to another destination. Enables an attendant or boss group member to forward unanswered calls of a station or boss group to another destination. Enables a station user to temporarily apply his/her stations Executive Privilege COS. This dial number, when defined as a DID group dial number, can also be used in conjunction with the Freedom feature (IRSS) to enable IRSS calls from off-site phones that do not possess a Caller ID number, see EXEC_ PRIV [32] (page 7-11).

#168

78

Call Forward All ATT/Boss Destination Group Call Forward No-Answer Destination Executive Privilege ATT/Boss Group SLT

#169

79

#170

80

#171, #4 #172 #173 #174 #1740 #1741 #1742 #1743 #1744 #1745

81 82 83 84 203 204 205 206

Call Hold Reminder Wakeup Not used Malicious Call Trace Malicious Call Print Malicious Call Trace Malicious Call Print

SLT SLT SLT

Enables a station user to place a call on hold. Enables a station user to ring the station at specific times. Enables a station user to ring the station at specific times.

SLT SLT ATT ATT

Enables the station user to activate a Call Trace record. Enables the station user to print the Call Trace record. Enables the Attendant to activate Call Trace records for one or more stations. Enables the Attendant to print Call Trace records for one or more stations. Enables a user to Whisper Page another party engaged in an ongoing conversation. Enables a user to deny any Whisper Pages to his/her station.

207 208

Whisper Page - SLT Announcing Whisper Page - SLT Do Not Disturb

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-27

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #1746 Index numJ 209 Feature Station Type*

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables the Attendant to define the maximum number of waiting calls for an ACD group.

ACD Group, ATT Max Calls Waiting for Busy ACD Message SLT

#175, #5

85

Enables a station user to leave a message indication at any designated station. Also allows keyset users access to the message list. Enables a station user to queue to a busy or ring-no answer (RNA) station or busy trunk. Enables a station user to block against trunk camp-on or break-in to his station. Enables the user to forward external calls only to another destination if the station is busy. Enables the user to forward all his/her incoming external calls to a another destination. Enables the user to forward his/her incoming external calls to another destination when the users station is not being answered. Enables the user to forward all his/her incoming external calls to another destination during system defined time periods. Enables the user to forward all his/her incoming external calls to another destination when the station is not answering or is busy. Enables an attendant or boss group member to forward external calls of a busy station or boss group to another destination. Enables an attendant or boss group member to forward all external calls of a station or group (ACD/UCD/Boss) to another destination. Enables the attendant or boss group member to forward external calls of a non-answering station or boss group to another destination.

#176 #17700 #17701 #17702

86 87 221 222

Camp On (Call Back) Security CF Busy - External CF All - External CF No Answer - External CF Timed - External

SLT SLT SLT SLT

#17703

223

SLT

#17704

224

SLT

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#17705

225

CF Busy/NoAns SLT - External CF Busy - External CF All - External CF No Answer - External ATT/Boss Group ATT/Boss Group ATT/Boss Group

#17706

226

#17707

227

#17708

228

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-28

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #17709 Index numJ 229 Feature CF Timed - External Station Type* ATT/Boss Group Description

Numbering Plan

Enables the attendant or boss group member to forward external calls of a station or group (ACD/UCD/Boss) to another destination at pre-determined system time intervals. Enables a station user to define an additional Coral or non-Coral system telephone as a remote destination. This feature causes all the station users calls to arrive at both destinations. Answering the call at one destination stops the other destination from ringing. Enables a station user to define an additional Coral or non-Coral system telephone as a remote destination. This feature causes all the internal calls arriving at the station to arrive also at the remote phone destination. Answering the call at one destination stops the other destination from ringing. Enables a station user to define an additional Coral or non-Coral system telephone as a remote destination. This feature causes the all the external calls arriving at the station to arrive also at the remote phone destination. Answering the call at one destination stops the other destination from ringing.

#17710

230

FlexiCall All

SLT

#17711

231

FlexiCall Internal

SLT

#17712

232

FlexiCall External

SLT

#17714

234

SLT Individual Remote System Services (IRSS) Freedom SLT Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)

The IRSS feature, also known as Freedom, allows a user to define an off-site phone with the capability of dialing into the Coral and becoming a virtual Coral station for the duration of the call. The Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (MLPP) service allows ranked Coral users (graded from 1 to 4) to prioritize calls causing calls with a lower priority to be dropped when resources are low or when the call is of higher precedence than routine calls on a per call basis.

#17715

237

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-29

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#17713

233

Follow-Me -External

SLT

Enables a user to collect his/her external calls at another system station.

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #17716 Index numJ 238 Feature Station Type*

PI Reference Manual

Description Defines a Group Call Operator that can continue to be an active member of the group call when adding or releasing members. Assigns a Call Forward Destination for stations in an Undefined call state (cannot be defined by ATT): FlexIP SoftPhone or IP stations/trunks which have lost their Primary Call Agent because of Network or UGW card problems. FlexIP SoftPhone users not currently connected to a Network Unplugged FlexSets/Keysets SLTs connected to extracted Line Cards or Malfunctioning Cards

Group CallKeyset Define Operator Call Forward Undefined SLT

#17717

239

#178

88

Auto Redial (ACNR)

Keyset

Enables a station user to activate the system automatic redial feature (some systems require an 8DTD, 8DRCF or 8DRCM card to activate this feature). Enables a station user to change the 4 digit passcode. Enables a station user to answer a ringing station by dialing this code and then the ringing station dial number. Enables a station user to answer a ringing station by dialing a group code. Enables an attendant to define a station as Hot Station Delay (ringing after first digit time-out). Enables a station user to park a call and pick it up at any system station. Enables an attendant to switch the system between Day and Night 2 mode. Enables an attendant to switch the system between Day and Night 1 mode.

#179 #180, 77

89 90

Passcode Change

SLT

Dial Call Pickup: SLT Directed Dial Call Pickup: SLT Group Hot Station Delay Call Park Night-2/Day Transfer Night-1/Day Transfer ATT

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#181, 76 #182

91 92

#183, #7, 79 93 #184 #185 94 95

SLT ATT ATT

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-30

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #186, #6 Index numJ 96 Feature Privacy (Boss Group) Station Type* SLT Description

Numbering Plan

Enables a member of a Boss Group to activate Boss line privacy at the user station, preventing another member of the Boss Group from joining an in progress call on a Boss line. Enables a member of a Boss Group to activate the Boss line exclusive hold at the user station, to be answered only at the user station. Enables an attendant to set the system time and date. Allows a station user to reroute calls intended for a designated station to the station invoking this feature. Enables an attendant to limit a trunk's use to outgoing calls only. Enables a station user to voice page any other system keyset station. Enables a group member to answer a call directed to the UNA bell. Enables a station user to add, delete, or change information in the Private (station speed call) Library. Enables an attendant to add, delete, or change information in the Public (system-wide speed call) Library. When transferring a call, use the Series function to have the caller return to you after the transferred call is completed. Enables saving and/or redialing the last number dialed.

#187

97

Exclusive Hold (Boss Group)

SLT

#188 #189

98 99

Time and Date Setting Follow Me

ATT SLT

#190 #191, #3 #192, 78

100 101 102

Trunk Outgoing ATT Only Voice Page SLT

Night Answer SLT Bell/UNA Pickup Group Private Library: Programming Public Library: Programming Series SLT

#193

103

#194

104

ATT

#195

105

SLT

#196, #9 N/A #1980

106 107 108

Saved / Repeat SLT Number Not used Wakeup ATT

Enables an attendant to set a wakeup time for any designated system station.

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-31

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #1990 Index numJ 109 Feature Account Code Station Type* SLT

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables the user to dial an account code per client, before or during the call, in order to print out call statistics. The code designated calls are assigned to a particular client account, instead of to a telephone number. To enter an Account Code during a conversation without placing the caller on hold: Create a DSS key for this feature to be used during a call. Set ON LINE ACCOUNT CODE [24] (page 6-22) in SFE,2 to Yes.

KEY

7010-7025 7026-7041 #1991

110-125 Room Status 126-141 Room Status 142


Release/Resume from UCD Hunt Group

ATT SLT SLT

Enables an attendant access to the Room Status features. Enables a user access to the Room Status features. Enables a member of a Hunt Group to temporarily remove their station (release) from a designated group, and also add the station back (resume).

#1992 #1993

143 144

Not used Day/Night Transfer (auto/manual) Directory Directory: Alphanumeric Mode


Directory: Lower/UpperCase CAPS LOCK

ATT

Enables an attendant to switch the system between manual and automatic (on time) day/night transfer. Enables the user to search the Directory as well as to use its contents to place calls. Enables the keyset user to toggle between entering digits or characters via the Keyset dial pad for use with the Directory. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables keyset users to toggle between upper and lower case letters being entered via the keyset dial pad for use with the Directory. This feature requires a programmed button.

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#1994

145

DSP DSP

Not 37 Available(only
from Directory)

Not 45 Available(only
from Directory)

DSP

N/A #1996

146 147

Not Used KB0 Setup ATT Enables a technician to reconfigure the KB0 program interface data terminal port.

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-32

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #1997 N/A #1998 #1999 N/A #1970 #1971 N/A N/A #1972 #1973 Index numJ 148 Feature Alarm Station Type* ATT Description

Numbering Plan

Enables an attendant access to the system alarm message list.

149-153 Not used 154 155 156 157 158 Trunk Autoguard Don't Disturb Not used Check In/Out ATT Enables an attendant to set room station to check-out or check-in state. Enables an attendant to send existing wakeup reports to a printer. ATT ATT Enables an attendant to activate/deactivate autoguard on a trunk. Enables an attendant to activate Do Not Disturb on any designated station.

Wakeup Report ATT

159-160 Not used 161 162 163 Serial Library Prefix Call Charge Print Load ID (ACD Hunt Group) Log In/Out (ACD Hunt Group) SLT ATT SLT Enables the addition of a fifth digit to a public library numbering plan. Enables an attendant to send the Call Charge Print. Enables an ACD member to enter his ID when entering the system.

#1975

165

Release from all SLT ACD/UCD Hunt Groups

Reinstates an ACD/UCD group member that was automatically released (if AUTO_ RELEASED_ALL [18] (page 9-8)-SLT or AUTO_ RELEASED_ALL [18] (page 9-32)-KEY is set to Yes) while the member was inactive for one call or more. Enables an ACD/UCD group member to activate/deactivate Wrap-Up Time on his station. Enables ACD group member to send a Wrap-Up code to the PC-ACD or FlexCT Server.

#1976

166

Wrap Up Time SLT (ACD/UCD Hunt groups) Wrap Up Code (ACD Hunt Group) SLT

#1977

167

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-33

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#1974

164

SLT

Enables an ACD group member to Log In/Out of the system.

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #1978 Index numJ 168 Feature Call Charge Reset with Printout LAR Block Not used Silent Monitor (2-Way) SLT Station Type* ATT

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables an attendant to reset and print the accumulated call charge table. Enables an attendant to block/unblock trunks and/or Dial Services and thereby reroute calls.

#1979 N/A #1981

169 170 171

ATT

Enables authorized station users to silently monitor other ports (both conversing ports are monitored simultaneously). Enables the station user to view the number of waiting calls on an ACD group. Enables the station user to release a conference participant. Enables an attendant or boss group member to forward all calls of a station or group (ACD/UCD/Boss Group) to another destination at pre-determined system time intervals. Enables a user to forward calls to a designated station according to system-wide defined periods. Enables manufacturers programmers to display relevant information about a specific port. Enables manufacturers programmers to display relevant information about parties connected to a specific port. Enables manufacturers technicians to download defined memory areas. Enables manufacturers technicians to activate a single cycle of corrective diagnostics.

#1982 #1983 #1984

172 173 174

ACD Calls DSP Waiting Display Conference SLT Release/Inspect Call Forward Timed ATT/Boss Group

#1985

175

Call Forward Timed

SLT

#1986

176

Port Information DSP

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

#1987

177

Party Information on Ports Dump DC No Call

DSP

#1988 #1989 N/A CC1: 3999 (Eu1,2: #286)

178 179

SLT SLT

180-185 Not used 186 DID Test Number DID Used by the CO in order to check the DID line. A successful test results in a 3-second DIAL_ TONE. Used only in CC1, Eu1 and Eu2 systems when either 8DID, 8BID or 8GID cards are installed.

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-34

PI Reference Manual
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** N/A #1441 Index numJ Feature Station Type* Description

Numbering Plan

187-189 Not used 190 Conference Lock Primary Login (ACD Hunt Group) HELP Keyset Locks out additional members from joining an ongoing regular Meet-Me conference. This feature requires a programmed button. Enables an ACD group member to login to a primary group in order to receive all queuing calls on that group before receiving calls from other groups. Enables a keyset station user to call another keyset station equipped with a display for help, without disrupting the call in progress. This programmed button is used also for Request to Speak in a Group Call Conference. This feature requires a programmed button.

#1442

191

SLT

#1443

192

Keyset

#1444

193

Calling ID Control

SLT

While making outgoing ISDN calls, Calling ID Control allows/restricts presentation of the calling party's phone number, possibly with additional address information to the called party. Enables a keyset station user to divert an incoming call to another destination without answering the call. Enables authorized station users (COS: LARGE_CONF_FORC_REL [50] on page 7-15) to force release a Group Call Participant. Enables authorized station users to terminate (force release) a Group Call (all the chained Group Calls or just one of the Group calls in the chain). To use this feature, NEXT GROUP (page 10-31) must be defined for the Group calls involved.

#1445

194

Divert Call

Keyset

#1446

195

Group CallRelease of a Participant Group CallRelease

SLT

#1447

196

SLT

#1448

197

Silent Monitor- SLT (1-way) Splitting

Enables authorized station users to silently monitor one conversing port at a time. The system requires SAU to enable this feature (see SPLIT MONITOR on page 3-10).

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

5-35

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

This feature requires a programmed button.

Numbering Plan
Table 5-3: Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial code** #1449 Index numJ 198 Feature Group CallTemporary Group Call Station Type* SLT

PI Reference Manual

Description Enables authorized station users to establish a temporary Group Call containing no predefined members. The members are added by the call initiator while initiating the call. To use this feature, ADD_ON (page 10-29) must be set to Yes. Enables the addition of up to eight digits to a large public library numbering plan.

N/A

199

Large Public Library Prefix

SLT

* see notes above on page 5-20. J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100). For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for these systems is defined as #151. Not Available for FlexSet-IP 280S.

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0


5-36

PI Reference Manual EDIT [10] The manufacturer recommends no change to defaults. Edit functions may be used: to activate or deactivate codes for system dial format commands with the scanner feature

Numbering Plan

Enter the required editing function index number.


Table 5-4: Edit Feature Default Dial & Index Numbers Default Dial Index No. No. # 8 # 9 #0, #10 (#0, 0, Eu1,2) #1, #11 (#1, 1, Eu1,2) # 2 0 1 2 Feature Assign Priority (ACNR) Cancel Priority (ACNR) Cancellation Code Station Type* Description

Keyset Enables assigning a priority level to an automatically repeated dialing number (ACNR). Keyset Enables canceling a priority level to an automatically repeated dialing number (ACNR). SLT Cancels the activation of a feature.

Activation Code

SLT

Activates a feature.

Scroll advances in discrete steps

Keyset Advances through a scroll list one step at a time. Use the up VOL key on a keyset. Used to scroll forward (Next) port by port through available ports. While scrolling, the port name/number appears on the top line.

# 3 # 4

5 6

Fast scroll advance Scroll backward in discrete steps

Keyset Advances rapidly (FastUp) to the next assigned feature in a scroll list. Keyset Advances backwards through the scroll list one step at a time. Use the down VOL key on a keyset. Used to scroll backward (Previous) port by port through available ports. While scrolling, the port name/number appears on the top line.

# 5 # 6 # 7

7 8 9

Fast scroll backward

Keyset Allows rapidly going backward (FastDown) to the previously assigned feature in a scroll list.

Stops (freezes) Keyset Temporarily bans redial access an (ACNR) number dialing automatically repeated dialing number (ACNR). Restarts Keyset Allows restarting a number that has been (ACNR) number dialing previously frozen by pressing #*6 when repeat dial is activated.

* see notes on page 5-20.

5-37

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan BELL [11] 7050 7059

PI Reference Manual

Central Bell/UNA Relay, RLY2 designates a range of bell dial numbers. One Bell circuit per card. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
CKT Card Type

24 24 8 24 8 24

8DRCM 8DRCF ASU IPx 500M main Cage on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #13) RMI CSX 200 U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx (Shelf #1, Slot #6)

PAGE [12] 7074 7079 Public Address/Page Port, RLY1 designates a range of external page dial numbers. One Page circuit per card. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
CKT Card Type

23 23 7 24 7 23

8DRCM 8DRCF ASU IPx 500M main Cage on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #13) RMI CSX 200 U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx (Shelf #1, Slot #6)
The PAGE number is irrelevant when the 2nd Music Source is used by the RMI, U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx or MRcsx card. The caller receives an ILLEGAL message and a reorder tone.

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0


5-38

r
l l l l

Note: The CAP module is defined as a Keyset unit, see KEYSET [2] on page 5-17.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual MODEM [13] 7070 7073 (CC0: NONE, Eu9: 7070 7071)

Numbering Plan

Designates a range of modem dial numbers in the system. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
CKT Card Type

26 26 26 3 26

8DRCM 8DRCF IPx 500M main Cage on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #13) RMI CSX 200 U-RMIcsx/RMIcsx (Shelf #1, Slot #6)

5-39

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan DID_NUMS [14]

PI Reference Manual

Coral System

Default Dial #s

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V

7500 7563 (Eu9: 7600 7607

CSX 200 5100 5107 (Eu2: 76XX) FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 (Eu9: 7600 7607 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 r 8GID and ALS70-DID (Eu systems) are defined in TRUNK [0] (page 5-17).
Designates a range of direct inward dial (DID) trunk numbers beginning with a DID trunk hardware ID number in the system. These numbers are used exclusively for identifying the trunk for system programming purposes, and do not affect incoming trunk digits. Numbers are given in a range beginning with a START number and ending with an END number. (Enter physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l.

DATA_PORT [16] Not Used


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIVATE_LIB [19] 7000 7009 Eu1: 90 99 CC1: FlexiCom 200: 5059 Designates a range of private library dial numbers used to access private (station-specific) speed call numbers, beginning at a Private Library software ID number (Enter index number). Numbers are given as a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

KEYSET_Z_PAGE [20] 73007309 Eu9: 5500 5509 Keyset Zone Page designates a range of zone page dial numbers to voice page a group of EKT, VDK, DKT, DST, GKT, CPA, FlexSets or IP FlexSets, beginning at a Zone Page software ID number (enter index number). Numbers are given as a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

5-40

PI Reference Manual RELAY [21] 7086 7097

Numbering Plan

Numbers 7092-7097 are not used; these numbers can be removed if required for other features.

Designates a range of dial select/alarm relay RLY3 dial numbers in the system. One Relay per Card. (Enter physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
CKT Card Type

25 25 9 25 25 9 25

8DRCM 8DRCF ASU FlexiCom 200 Base Unit on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #6) IPx 500M main Cage on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #13) RMI CSX 200 U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx/RMIcsx/MRcsx (Shelf #1, Slot #6)

DATA_USER [22] Not Used


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DATA_GRP [23] Not Used


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-41

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan CONF [30] 7098 7099

PI Reference Manual

Designates a range of multi-party conference port dial numbers. The conference ports are used also to establish Group calls (see CONF # on page 10-28). (Enter physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
CKT Card Type

16 16 0, 1

8DRCF 8DRCM CNF Card (defined as CONF in CLIS)

48-53 CSX 200 U-RMIcsx/U-MRcsx (Shelf #1, Slot #7) URC2. For the range of CKTs, see Meet Me on page 8-83. 16 IPx 500M main Cage (Shelf #0, Slot #13) 8DRCF (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0100X1000, 8DRCF)

48-53 IPx 500M main Cage (Shelf #0, Slot #14) URC2 (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above, RMI-F/URC2). For the range of CKTs, see Meet Me on page 8-83.

DVMS_MSG [31] 5400 5499 (Eu2, Eu9: 79XX) CC1: FlexiCom200: N/A

r
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

When installing a 4VSN card, it is advisable to reduce the default range to 32 numbers, by removing numbers 5432 5499, so that the default is 5400 5431

Designates a range of DVMS messages denoted by ID numbers (Enter index number) used to hear the messages. Numbers are given in a range commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number. The END number is limited by MAX_DVMS_MSG [8] on page 6-39 [SFE,7]. For additional information, see Chapter 23 Special Port Facilities. For Example: The default number 5403 is the access dial number for the 4th message (i.e. index #3) on all installed 4VSN cards.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DVMS_PORTS [32]

Coral System

Default Dial #s

FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V CSX 200 FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 CC1: FlexiCom 200

7042 7049 7042 7045

N/A

5-42

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan Designates a range of 4VSN (Voice Synthesizer Facility) dial number card ports with four ports per card. (Enter physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT). For additional information, see Chapter 23, Special Port Facilities.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PAGE_Q [33] 7060 7069 Designates a range of page queue dial numbers beginning at a Page Queue software ID number (Enter index number). The maximum amount of Page_Q ID numbers is limited by PAGE_Q (page 4-13).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MODEM_POOL [34] Not Used (No Longer Available)


l l l l l l l l

GROUP CALL [35] 5600 5603 Designates a range of numbers assigned for preset conference calls. Group Calls consist of one or more Conference Ports and up to 100 stations or trunks. (Enter index number).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIAL_SERV [36] 4850 4865 Eu2: 9250 9265 Eu9: 7020 7035 CC1, FlexiCom 200: 7010 7025 CC1 (all other systems): 7020 7035 Designates a range of dial service dial numbers (used for outgoing calls) beginning at a DIAL SERVICE Software ID number (enter the index number).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Designates a range of Routing Access Dial numbers (used for making outgoing calls) beginning at a ROUTING ACCESS software ID number (enter the index #).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAIT_QUE [38] Range: Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No Default values Eu9: 5605 5609 Designates a range of WAIT_QUE dial numbers beginning at a WAIT_QUE Software ID number (enter the index number) for CoraLINK applications. Calls

5-43

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

ROUTING_ACC [37] 80, 7080

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual are routed to this destination while awaiting routing access (from an external or internal source).

Warning: Modifying the NPL (port numbers only-not feature numbers) causes: 1. An initialization of the CLA or CLA-ATS card. 2. CoraLINK applications to be interrupted (calls are unaffected). Before the update is performed, the following message prompts: INIT CLA CARD WITH UPDATED NPL (Y/[N])? Enter Y to complete the update and wait for the following message to be shown: CLA initialization completed successfully.

NETWORK [39] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); Designates a range of NETWORK dial numbers. The dial numbers are displayed against the Node that they relate to within the Coral Network. A Node # must be entered for each dial number added as this type. The Node # is defined in Node NPL (page 28-6).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WIRELESS [40] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No default is presented when WIRELESS is defined as 0 in Sizes; 5701 57xx where xx=WIRELESS (page 4-5) Designates a range of dial numbers for CoralAIR and FlexAir wireless handsets. An index number is assigned (by the system) for each dial number. Each handset comes with a specific Electronic Serial Number (ESN) that belongs to the particular handset. The handset ESN must also be entered in the Wireless Stations (WST, 0) branch, otherwise the handset is inoperable (see Wireless Stations beginning on page 9-26).

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0


5-44

At each handset, the specific index number assigned by the Coral system must be entered into the HID # 0 field in the SYSTEM CONFIG. menu of the handset (See the relevant Coral Installation Manual for details).

IP_KEYSET [41] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No default is presented when KEYSETS_IP is defined as 0 in Sizes; 5800 5859 Designates a range of dial numbers for IP Keysets (FlexSet-IP 280S). An index number is assigned (by the system) for each dial number (no shelf, slot and circuit numbers are needed for IP Keysets).

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan Additionally, each IP Keyset has its own hardware identification MAC address. The MAC numbers must be previously defined in the IP Stations branch (see IP Ports: Keyset beginning on page 29-20) to initialize the keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-45

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual

IP_SLT [42] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No default is presented when IP_SLT is defined as 0 in Sizes; 5860 5879 Designates a range of dial numbers for IP SLT FXS interface unit circuits. An NPL index and circuit number is assigned (by the system) for each dial number. The NPL index number is the ENTRY # for the FXS unit defined in IP: Telephony Gateway (page 29-31). One circuit number is assigned for each port on the FXS unit. For Example: The first FXS box entered is labeled ENTRY#=3 and includes 4 ports (i.e. IP: Telephony Gateway: TYPE [1]=2 or 3). The NPL automatically assigns 4 dial numbers for this NPL type displayed as follows:
DIAL NUMBER 5860 5861 5862 5863 INDEX/CKT 3/0 3/1 3/2 3/3

Additionally, each FXS unit has its own hardware identification MAC address. The MAC numbers must be defined in IP: Telephony Gateway (page 29-31) to initialize the units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IP_LGS [43] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No default is presented when IP_LGS is defined as 0 in Sizes; 5880 5899 Designates a range of dial numbers for IP LGS FXO interface unit circuits. An NPL index and circuit number is assigned (by the system) for each dial number. The index number is the ENTRY # for the FXO unit defined in IP: Telephony Gateway (page 29-31). One circuit number is assigned for each port on the FXO unit. For Example: The first FXO box entered is labeled ENTRY#=2 and includes 4 ports (i.e. IP: Telephony Gateway: TYPE [1]=2 or 3). The NPL automatically assigns 4 dial numbers for this NPL type displayed as follows:
DIAL NUMBER 5880 5881 5882 5883 INDEX/CKT 2/0 2/1 2/2 2/3

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0


5-46

Additionally, each FXO unit has its own hardware identification MAC address. The MAC numbers must be defined in IP: Telephony Gateway (page 29-31)) to initialize the units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan

IP_KEY_VPG [44] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No default Index numbers begin at 0 and end at one less than the number of IP keysets defined in KEYSETS_IP (page 4-5) in Sizes.

Relevant only for FlexSet-IP 280S sets.

Designates a range of IP keyset voice page dial numbers (used to voice page a station) based on the IP keysets index number in the system (and not according to its physical location, because the physical port is a virtual one on the UGW card).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IP_NET [45] Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No default is presented when NET_IP is defined as 0 in Sizes; Default: 5900 5929 Defines IP Network trunk type dial numbers. Designates a range of dial numbers for IP Network ports. An index number is assigned for each dial number (no shelf, slot and circuit numbers are needed for IP trunks). Does not require UGW cards already installed in the system. SIO_TERMINAL [46] TBD
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SIP_TRUNK [47] TBD


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DYNAMIC_CONF [48] TBD


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-47

General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual

Special Feature Codes

W NPL,1

[0,0,5,1]

This option is used to set the dial numbers for special features such as Camp on, Snooze, Message, etc. Any single dial number can be used only once.

1) A special feature code is always activated in response to an implemented feature or after a hookflash to initiate a feature.Therefore, no conflict exists between the Special Feature number and the General Numbering Plan. 2) Only one number (between 0 and 9 or * and #) can be utilized per feature. When an attempt is made to define another feature with an existing code, the feature code is erased and a question mark (?) is displayed instead. This allows you to then enter another number. 3) If you attempt to define a feature with a number that was previously used, the following message appears:
# Plan Err, TRY AGAIN

Enter an undefined number and continue.

BREAK_IN

, #, 0..3..9 inclusive, None


Used to activate the break-in (forced 3-way conference) feature to an existing conversation following warning tone. This option is also used to activate DND override.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAMP_ON (Callback)

, #, 0..2..9 inclusive, None


Used to activate the camp-on feature to a busy or unanswered (Ring/No Answer) station or busy trunk. Also used for queue on-hook for Routing Access or network purposes.This is generally known as a Callback feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Special Feature Codes NPL,1 [0,0,5,1]

MSG

, #, 0..5..9 inclusive, None


Used to allow the user to leave a message at a busy or unanswered station (Ring/No Answer).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SNOOZE

, #, 0..4..9 inclusive, None


Instructs the system to repeat a wakeup or reminder ring after the time-out interval set in the Feature Timer option.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ATT_MSG Attendant Stations Only

, #, 0..7..9 inclusive, None


Used when leaving a message indication from the Attendant Console at a busy or unanswered station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-48

PI Reference Manual V_PAGE

Numbering Plan

, #, 0..6..9 inclusive, None


Used to voice page a busy or idle keyset.

For Voice Paging Network Stations, dial its Voice Page number (Hookflash 6 cannot be used to activate Voice Page for Network stations).

SILENT_MON

, #, 0..9 inclusive, None


SAU Requirement Silent Monitoring (2-Way) is used to monitor any system port (except data and conference) in any state, without audio or visual warning to the monitored party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAMP_OFFHK

, #, 0..8..9 inclusive, None


Used to camp-on a busy station as multi-appearance. This feature is also known as CALL WAITING or Call Offer by other manufacturers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-49

Special Feature Codes NPL,1 [0,0,5,1]

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual

FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes

W NPL,2

[0,0,5,2]

This option defines the special feature codes used to establish the FlexiCall and IRSS Freedom features. The FlexiCall feature allows a user to define an off-site phone as a supplementary phone which rings simultaneously with his/her Coral station. Only when the call is answered at the remote phone, are these Coral features enabled at the remote phone. The IRSS feature, also known as Freedom, allows a user to define an off-site phone with the capability of dialing into the Coral and becoming a virtual Coral station for the duration of the call. The Coral features listed in this branch are accessible from the non-Coral phone during the FlexiCall/IRSS call by using these specially defined feature codes. FEATURE_PREFIX

, #, 0..9 inclusive Default:


Define the dial number/character prefix for all the special FlexiCall/IRSS features.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NEW_CALL 0..1..9 inclusive Define the dial number for the remote phone user to initiate a new call via the Coral system. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes NPL,2 [0,0,5,2]


5-50

TRANSFER 0..2..9 inclusive Define the dial number for the remote phone user to initiate a call transfer via the Coral system. The Transfer type is based on the stations COS Call Transfer and 3-way definition. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_ PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIVERT 0..3..9 inclusive Define the dial number for the remote phone user to divert the answered call to any Coral station. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VM_ACCESS 0..4..9 inclusive Define the dial number for the remote phone user to enable DTMF dialing to the Voice Mail system (or IVR) and circumvent the Coral DTR. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Numbering Plan

DIVERT_TO_LOCAL_ 0..5..9 inclusive STATION Define the dial number for the remote phone user to divert the answered FlexiCall call to his/her Coral station. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

5-51

FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes NPL,2 [0,0,5,2]

Numbering Plan

PI Reference Manual

SHOW TYPE of NUMBER

W NPL,3

This NPL branch enables the technician to display requested dial numbers against their NPL types. FROM/TO Range: Any valid NPL dial number DIAL# Default:All NPL dial numbers Enter the requested range of dial numbers from the lowest to the highest dial number. Only dial numbers that already exist in the numbering plan can be entered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

The PI now displays a range of entered dial numbers against their NPL Types.

For Example:
Dial # 9 220 221 420 421 7000 TYPE TRUNK SLT SLT KEYSET KEYSET PRIV LIB

===================================

SHOW TYPE of NUMBER NPL,3


5-52

System
This chapter is used to program the system-wide parameters and contains the following sections: Feature Timers ..............................................................................................6-2 System Features............................................................................................6-7 System Features - Wireless ........................................................................6-48 Card List .....................................................................................................6-51 Port List ......................................................................................................6-58 Port List - Physical Location......................................................................6-59 Port List - Dial Numbers............................................................................6-63 Digital Port Bus List...................................................................................6-74 Tone Plan ....................................................................................................6-78 Ringers ........................................................................................................6-84 Reserved Links ...........................................................................................6-91 Feature Timers establish the time intervals related to each feature. System Features allow, deny or modify the feature operations system-wide. Many of these features, when implemented, may also be restricted by the Class of Service defined (see Chapter 7). The Card List parameters determine the system hardware configuration, while the Port List parameters identify the equipment location, port by port. Tone Plan determines the tone frequencies and duration of each tone. Ringer parameters are used to define and protect the Ringer Power Supplies from overloading.
RPS installed in Coral FlexiCom 5000 and 6000 systems PS19 DC-D installed in Coral IPx 3000, 4000 systems

Reserved Links defines the links dedicated only to DID and/or LS/GS and E&M trunks.

6-1

System

PI Reference Manual

Feature Timers

W FE.T

[0,0,1,0]

Feature Timers are used to define the timer intervals used in the different Coral feature operations for the entire system. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

AUTO_REDIAL [0] 1..30..3780 seconds Determines the time interval between automatic redial attempts by a keyset, to an external number previously busy.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

REMIND_SNOOZE [1] 1..60..3780 seconds Determines the time interval between dialing the Snooze code and a Remind re-ring.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAKEUP_SNOOZE [2] 1..60..3780 seconds Determines the time interval between dialing the Snooze code and a Wakeup re-ring.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAKEUP_RING [3] 1..300..65534

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Determines the duration of each Wakeup call attempt.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NET_FEATURE_ACK 1..40..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [4] Determines the time period that the system waits for a signal acknowledgment to activate a Network feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]

CAMP_ON_DURATION 1..12..168 (1 unit = 1 HOUR) [5] r For Networks: Define this timer identically for all the network PABXs. Determines the duration of the CAMP-ON feature. After this time-out interval, camp-on feature is automatically canceled.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DELAY_BEFORE_PR 1..60..600 (1 unit=1.0 second) [6] This parameter defines the time interval after which the PATH REPLACEMENT [6] (page 28-4) feature is acitvated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-2

PI Reference Manual SUSP_OFFHK [7] 3..5..10

System

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Determines the maximum time that the system waits for an offhook or seize message from a port after a Suspect Offhook or Suspect Seize signal.

r
l l l l

SUSP_OFFHK time must be greater than any MIN_SZE and/or MIN_OFFHK recognition timer in the entire PI (see Chapter 8).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BELL_RING Defines the cadence of both internal (station-to-bell) and external (trunk-to-bell)
Central Bell/UNA calls. Related equipment: RMI, 8DRCM, 8DRCF, U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx, MRcsx, IPx 500M. ON_BELL [8] 1..10..65534

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Determines the duration of Bell/UNA relay contact closure.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OFF_BELL [9] 1..20..65534

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Determines the duration for which the Bell/UNA relay contact is open, i.e. between Bell Ring On cycles (above).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ATT. MSG [10] 1..50..600

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Determines the ring burst duration used to indicate Attendant Message Waiting.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

EXPENSIVE_ROUTE_ 1..10..20 (1 unit = 0.1 second) TONE [11] Determines the duration of an Expensive Route Tone.

r
l l l l

EXPENSIVE_ ROUTE_TONE programming is also required in the Routing Class of Service (Warning Tone) and for Routing Dial Services (EXPENSIVE TONE, See Chapter 15).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RING [12] 50..100..600

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Determines the silence period after offhook to answer a feature ring (for example, Wakeup, Reminder, Camp-on, etc.), the system waits for a Snooze or Activate dial code. Time-out after ring for feature activation.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUPV_RECALL [13] 300..3600..7200

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

PWDS Supervision Recall determines the time interval in which a trunk-to-trunk call, of two connected trunk ports without disconnect supervision (determined by trunk port definition) is terminated or recalled to the Incomplete Calls destination for monitoring and supervision, see System Features - Intercept/Incomplete beginning on page 6-29.

Also operates on magneto-to-magneto stations or magneto-to-trunk and

6-3

Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]

System DISA by external trunk-to-trunk port.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

CONF_SUPV_RECALL 300..1800..7200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [14] Conference Supervision Recall determines the time interval in which a trunk or any port without disconnect supervision is connected to a conference and is recalled to the Incomplete Calls destination for monitoring and supervision.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WHISPER_PAGE_ 1..6..60,000 (1 unit = 0.1 second) TIMER [15] Defines the duration of the whisper page tone sent before the whisper page. The tone is heard by the whispering side and by the side whispered to. The other side engaged in the conversation does not hear any tone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BREAK_IN/OUT [16] 1..10..30

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Break In/Out Alert determines the duration of the alert or warning tone when break-in/out occurs. The tone cadences are defined in Tone Plan beginning on page 6-78.

r
l l l l

This timer is irrelevant for Group Call and Meet-Me conference calls. The duration of the conference call alert tone (i.e. when an additional user joins or leaves the call) is set to one second and cannot be modified.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BREAKIN_ Defines the background tone that is heard by the two parties engaged in a call WARNING during the entire break-in period. The tone warns the conversing parties that a third
party is listening. This tone can only be activated when the BREAK-IN_WARNING [1] (page 6-42) is set to Yes. The combination of OFF/ON periods determines the tone character. ON [17] 1..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu9 (Italy): Default = 2 (200 ms) Determines the duration of the break-in warning tone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]


6-4

OFF [18] 1..20..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu9 (Italy): Default = 98 (9800 ms) Determines the duration that the break-in warning tone is off.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DTMF_TONE The following two parameters define the character of the DTMF tone administered
by the Coral system over a DTMF trunk when placing outgoing calls. ON [19] 4..10..50

(1 unit = 10ms)

Determines the duration of the DTMF tone.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual OFF [20] 4..10..50 Eu3: 16

System

(1 unit = 10ms)

Determines the minimum silence period between DTMF tones.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GRP_CALL_RING [21] 1..30..120 seconds

Relevant only for Group Calls.

Defines the time that all the stations defined as registered members of a Group Call Conference continue ringing before the conference is locked against additional members. This duration starts when a caller dials the group call dial number, at which time all the station member keysets ring. The members can off-hook and join the conference. Stations that go unanswered, continue ringing until this GRP_ CALL_RING times out. Members who did not answer are now blocked from joining the group call, depending on the Group Call definitions. For more information on Group Calls, see Chapter 10-Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

V.M_SLT/KEY_ 1..120 (1 unit = 0.1 second) DELAY_BEFORE_ When a station dials a Voice Mail system (or any other system requiring DTMF DIAL [22] tones), this parameter defines the time delay before the Coral station can send the DTMF digits. During this time delay, the Voice Mail System is expected to send an answer signal to the Coral station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CCR_TONE_ 0..130 (1 unit = 0.1 second) DURATION [23] Defines the duration of the Collect Call Reject Tone defined in SLT or KEY. This parameter is relevant only if COLLECT_CALL_REJECT_TONE [38] on page 9-13 (for SLTs) or page 9-50 (for Keysets) is set to Yes.

SPEAK_REQ_ 10..50..100 (1 unit = 0.1 second) RINGBACK [24] r Relevant only for the Group Operators keyset of a Group Call defined to admit participants only in mute mode. See JOIN MEMBERS IN MUTE on page 10-29. Defines the duration within which the speech request message, from group call participants, is displayed at the Group Operators keyset. The related DSS buttons (those stations which requested to speak) wink on the Group Operators keyset for this time duration. After this time, all message and DSS lamps relating to the speech request are cleared.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-5

Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]

The tone frequency is defined in TONE_PLAN, see page 6-80.

System

PI Reference Manual

CALL_DURATION_ 1..600..65535 sec LIMIT [25] Defines a maximum duration for outgoing external calls when required. The stations must be defined with a COS that includes the outgoing trunks, trunk groups or Routing Access used to initiate the call. The related COS Call Duration Limit parameters include: CALL DURATION LIMIT: TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [9] (page 7-5) and CALL_DURATION_LIMIT: DIAL_ SERVICE [10] (page 7-6).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MLPP_PREEMPTION_ 150..300..450 (1 unit = 0.1 seconds) ACK [26] Defines the maximum duration for the called party that hears a continuous Precedence tone to onhook in order to clear though the MLPP call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]


6-6

PI Reference Manual

System

System Features

W SFE

[0,0,4,1]

System Feature parameters allow, deny, or modify the feature operations at the system level. The following SFE options are available:
SFE Option MNEMONIC PAGE #

0 - Outgoing Trunks 1 - Incoming Trunks 2 - Station Options 3 - Intercept/Incomplete 4 - Call Forwarding 5 - Camp-On 6 - Hotel 7 - Messaging 8 - Tones 9 - Diagnostics 10 - ISDN 11 - Network 12 - Wireless

SFE, 0 SFE, 1 SFE, 2 SFE, 3 SFE, 4 SFE, 5 SFE, 6 SFE, 7 SFE, 8 SFE, 9 SFE, 10 SFE, 11 SFE, 12

6-8 6-15 6-16 6-29 6-33 6-35 6-36 6-38 6-42 6-44 6-46 6-47 6-48

6-7

System Features SFE [0,0,4,1]

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Outgoing Trunks

W SFE,0

[0,0,4,1,0]

The following parameters apply only to outgoing trunk calls when CHARGE_TYPE [9] (below) is set to Meter and METERING_UNIT_CHARGE (page 8-27) is not set to N. TK_TO_TK_CONNECT Yes/No [0] Allows or denies trunk to trunk connections. For example, trunks can remain connected after the station originating a 3-way conference call, involving two trunks, goes onhook (disconnects); or an incoming E&M dial trunk call can continue dialing out on another trunk once the station has disconnected.

To override a prohibited trunk to trunk connection on a specific trunk group, use TK_TK_CONNECT_OVERRIDE (page 8-21) in Trunk Group Definition (TGDEF). To override the trunk to trunk prohibition on specific stations, use TK_TK_ XFER_OVERRIDE [65] (page 7-18) in COS.

TK_TO_TK_TO_ST [1] Yes/No Eu: No Trunk To Trunk To Station Connection allows or denies all stations the ability to establish a 3-way conference call using two trunks. After the station goes onhook, the trunks are disconnected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]

PASS_TK [2] Yes/No Allows or denies all stations the ability to transfer an established trunk call to another station. (This feature is also restricted in station Class Of Service.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PASS_TK_DIAL_TONE Yes/No [3] Allows or denies all stations the ability to pass the trunk dial tone to another station. (This feature is also restricted in station Class Of Service.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_DGTS_ON_TK 0..51 [4] Determines the maximum number of digits available for dialing out on a trunk (applies also to Routing, SMDR and Toll Barrier Analysis). This does not affect the numbers dialed after a calibrated opening instruction.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-8

PI Reference Manual

System

SAVE_&_SEND_DTMF Yes/No [5] Determines whether the system will store DTMF digits before the trunk dial tone is present. The system transmits the stored digits after dial tone is detected when this parameter is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

#ACCT_DGTS [6] 1..4..16 Eu:16 Determines the length (number of digits) of the system call account codes that are used for call charges (billing). Selecting a number between 5 and 16 causes the SMDR On-Line report to print two lines per call record, the second line includes the dial number. Changes made in this parameter will also change all codes in the VFAC table. The total number of VFACs is dependent on: VFAC_ACCT in SIZ (see Chapter 4- Sizes Definition), which must be defined first, and #ACCT_DGTS as shown in the following table.
#ACCT_DGTS Maximum Number of Codes per Digit Definition

4 5, 6 7 8-16

100 1,000 10,000 65,000

PASS_ACCT_CODE_ Yes/No FOR_TK_TO_TK_ Determines whether an account code that was defined for the 1st trunk will XFER [7] automatically be passed to the 2nd trunk upon transferring. An extension is connected with trunk no. 1. The extension user defines an ACCT_ CODE. The extension user transfers trunk no. 1 to another trunk, no. 2, and disconnects. This parameter defines whether the ACCT_CODE that was defined for trunk no. 1 will be automatically defined for trunk no. 2 and is printed in the SMDR record. Mainly for Caller ID application, see MFC_CALLER_ID [16] (page 6-12). Transfer the extension # (account code), on Outgoing trunk for CLI SMDR. The extension # (account code) is originated by the Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-9

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]

When VFAC. (below) is set to Yes, its range is between 4 and 16; when VFAC. is set to No, its range is between 1 and 16 (see below).

System VFAC. [8] Yes (All account numbers are checked and verified) No (Account numbers are neither checked nor verified)

PI Reference Manual

Determines whether or not the VFAC feature is used for making outgoing calls. Additionally, defining VFAC. to Yes ensures that all dialed Account Codes are checked and verified according to the VFAC Code table. If #ACCT_DGTS above is set to less than 4, then VFAC. must be defined as No (see Chapter 24).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHARGE_TYPE [9] M (Metering pulses and AOC) C (cost calculation based on call duration) Eu and CC1: M Meter Pulse/Cost - Call Duration determines whether charge calculation is based upon a Metering Pulse (Mtr and AOC) or the Call Duration (Cost calculation feature). For advice of charge (AOC) feature, enter M.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

METER_BEFORE_ Yes/No CONNECT [10] Eu and CC1: Yes

Not used in North America (CC0 systems).

Determines whether metering pulses before a trunk call is established are relevant for call charging.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]


6-10

PI Reference Manual

System Advice of Charge includes the following three parameters when CHARGE_ TYPE [9] (above) is set to Meter and METERING_UNIT_CHARGE (page 8-27) is not set to N.
C C C C O O O O S S S S T T T T $ $ x z $ $ x z $ $ x z x z x z x z x z x z . z x z y z x z y z . z $ $ y z $ $ y z $ $

AOC

$$$ = Currency unit (3 characters) xxxxx.yy: xxxxx = Cost 00,000 to 99,999 yy = Cents 00 to 99 zzzzzzzz = Cost 00,000,000 to 99,999,999

Upon termination of a call, the call cost is displayed in one of the above options according to the following three parameters:
CURRENCY_UNIT [11] Enter 3 printable ASCII characters. For space/blank, enter underscore: _ $__ (Eu2: DM_, CC1: _NIS) Defines the three alphabetic characters of currency unit, used in a country. The currency unit appears on a callers keyset display and in the CHARGE field of an SMDR record, along with the outgoing call price.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CURRENCY_SIGN_ L (left), R (right); PLACEMENT [12] CC1: Left Defines the location of currency unit, to the left or right of the outgoing call price. The currency unit appears on a callers keyset display and in the CHARGE field of an SMDR record along with the outgoing call price.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CURRENCY_FORMAT 1 (xx,xxx.y 5 digits for integer number, with a decimal point for tens digit) [13] 2 (zz,zzz,zzz 8 digits for integer number, without decimal point)

The CHARGE field format of an SMDR record cannot be changed.

Defines the outgoing call price display format, with or without a decimal point. This parameter is applicable to the price which appears on a callers keyset display along with the currency unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-11

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]

System DGTL_TRK ANS_AS_ Yes/No MTR [14] r Not used in North America (i.e. T1 trunks).

PI Reference Manual

Determines whether an E1 Digital Trunk outgoing call charge is started (metering pulse) when an answer is detected. When answer is detected, an additional metering pulse is charged.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_AUTO_REDIAL_ 1..15, N (No Limit) ATTEMPTS [15] CC0:15 Eu2:5 Determines the number of automatic redialing attempts. The Coral system will redial until the external phone rings or up to the number of attempts defined (here) system-wide, before the outside number is erased from the scanner list.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MFC_CALLER_ID [16] S (station #), A (account code)

For Caller ID application, see PASS_ACCT_CODE_FOR_TK_TO_TK_XFR on page 6-9.

Defines whether the caller ID number, sent by the Coral on MFC trunks to another exchange in order to identify the calling exchange, is based on station number or account code. (When A is selected and account code not applied by the user, the number 6666 is sent by default).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DEFAULT_SECOND_ Any Number (up to 16 digits)/R (Remove for None) ALI [17] r This parameter is relevant for outgoing trunks routing calls to Emergency or E911 centers. Define a default second alternate line ID number to be used for calls routed via a dial service that requests a Second Alternate Line ID but the callers number is unavailable or the Second ALI is not defined (see SEC_ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [61] on page 9-48 for Keyset definitions or SEC_ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [28] on page 9-11 for SLT definitions). When no ANI is provided for the specific call (e.g., for calls that do not have a dial number from the NPL), this parameter defines an alternate Line ID for the PSTN.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]

6-12

PI Reference Manual MEET-ME PAGER ( ) = Meet-Me Mode Always, (x), (x,y) PREFIX [18] x, y can be any digit between 0 and 9;

System

This parameter is used when dialing over an E&M trunk group connected to the paging system known as ESPA (European Selective Paging Manufacturers Association). All ranges are entered within parentheses. No digits in parentheses indicate a Meet-Me Mode. Up to a maximum of two digits are allowed, separated by a comma.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NUMBER_OF_CAMA_ 7 or 10 ANI_DIGITS [19] r CCO only Only 7 or 10 can be entered, all other entries will result in an error message. Defines the number of ANI digits to be sent over the CAMA trunk. Set this parameter according to local regulations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LOOK AHEAD Yes/No ROUTING [20] Defines whether or not LAR (Look Ahead Routing) functionality is activated on Dial Services (see Look Ahead Routing Triggers beginning on page 15-24). When set to Yes, the LAR will re-route a call to the next Dial Service whenever asynchronous failure occurs. The failed Dial Service is blocked for a system-wide defined period. When set to No, Dial Services are not be handled by the LAR functionality. An asynchronous failure occurs when the signaling sequence that sets up the call is completed before the connection establishment confirmation has been received from the terminating end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CIRCUIT ASSURANCE None / ISDN / Analog / Both [21] Circuit Assurance reroutes a call over a failed trunk. The failed trunk is blocked for a system-wide defined period and the next consecutive trunk is used. When set to ISDN, Circuit Assurance is activated on ISDN trunks. When set to Analog, Circuit Assurance is activated on analog trunks. When set to Both, Circuit Assurance is activated on both ISDN and analog trunks. When set to No, Circuit Assurance is not activated on any trunk. An asynchronous failure occurs when the signaling sequence that sets up the call is completed before the connection establishment confirmation has been received from the terminating end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-13

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]

System CALLBACK ROUTING Any valid Routing Access or R (Remove for None) DESTINATION [22] Default: First Routing Access defined in NPL

PI Reference Manual

When dialing out to an external destination defined in the Shared or Personal Directory, the system uses this outside line routing access.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BUSY TRUNK GROUP


SKIP_AVAILABLE_ Yes/No TRUNK_CHECK [23] Defines, system-wide, whether or not the system searches a trunk group for an available trunk after finding all trunks busy in a previous search. The system searches the trunk group again if one of the trunks in the trunk group becomes available or if the number of dialing attempts on the trunk group exceeds the value defined in MAX_SKIPS [24], the next parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_SKIPS [24] 1..10..250

This parameter appears only if the previous parameter was set to Yes.

When the system is programmed to skip the search for available trunks, (see parameter above), the system will search again only when one of the trunks in the trunk group is freed or when the number of dialing attempts on the busy trunk group exceeds the value specified by this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]


6-14

PI Reference Manual

System

System Features - Incoming Trunks

W SFE,1

[0,0,4,1,1]

The following parameters apply only to incoming trunk calls. DISA_SUSTAIN_DGT 0-9, #, *(asterisk) [0] Direct Inward System Access Sustain Digit determines the single digit which must be transmitted from an external DTMF telephone to maintain a Remote Access connection. The digit must be sent before the end of each time period, as determined by the SUPV_RECALL timer in Feature Timers, (see page 6-3).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DISA_NEW_CALL_ Range: 0-9, #, * DGT [1] Default: # DISA New Call Digit determines the single digit that must be transmitted from an external DTMF telephone to permit the caller to dial another system number after completing the previous Remote Access call. After pressing the digit, the system sends a new system dial tone to the Remote Access trunk, and is prepared to receive additional digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID_DIAL_TONE [2] Yes/No DID Second Dial Tone determines whether dial tone is sent in response to an incoming DID trunk seizure before the dialed digits are received from the Central Office, when set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M_PULSE_DIAL_ Yes/No TONE [4] E&M Pulsed Second Dial Tone determines whether a dial tone is sent in response to an incoming seizure on incoming E&M pulsed trunks before the digits are received from a distant PABX.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OPERATOR_ACCESS (Single-0/Double-0X) [5] Eu2 only

S/D
Defines whether an incoming GID trunk can dial a single digit 0 (zero) or leading 0 (zero) followed by an additional digit as defined by the DID Group Filter, see DID/E&M Groups beginning on page 8-32, and the System Numbering Plan for attendants.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-15

System Features - Incoming Trunks SFE,1 [0,0,4,1,1]

E&M_CONT_DIAL_ Yes/No TONE [3] E&M Continuous Second Dial Tone determines whether a dial tone is sent in response to an incoming seizure on incoming E&M continuous trunks before the digits are received from a distant PABX.

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Station Options


ALL The following parameters apply to all station types.
MAX_RING [0] 1..20 1..20..33: Coral IPx 3000, 4000 per PS19 DC-D

W SFE,2

[0,0,4,1,2]

Determines the maximum number of single line telephones (SLTs) which can ring simultaneously as follows:

FlexiCom 200 systems: this parameter is replaced by the next two parameters. FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V systems:
Defines the total number of SLTs which can ring simultaneously.

FlexiCom 5000, 6000 systems:


Defines the number of SLTs which can ring simultaneously per Peripheral Shelf Unit. See Ringers beginning on page 6-84 to properly define the Ringer software configuration depending on the Ringer hardware configuration.

CSX 200 and IPx 500 systems: MAX_RING_PER_CARD [1] Coral IPx 500 and CSX 200 only below replaces this parameter. IPx 800, 3000, 4000 systems supported by PS19 AC or PS19 DC:
Defines the number of SLTs which can ring simultaneously per shelf. The ringers for these systems are fed via their Power Supplies, as opposed to the IPx 500 system where the ringers are fed via their SLS card(s). This system wide parameter must be consistent with the capabilities of any connected expansion unit.

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]


6-16

IPx 800, 3000, 4000 systems supported by PS19 DC-D:


Defines the number of SLTs which can ring simultaneously per shelf or per two adjacent shelves depending on their hardware configuration. See Ringers beginning on page 6-84 to properly define the Ringer software configuration depending on the Ringer hardware configuration.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_RING_PER_ 1..6 CARD [1] Defines the number of SLTs that can ring simultaneously per card as follows. Coral IPx 500 and IPx 500: 8SLSipx or 16SLSipx card CSX 200 only CSX 200: 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx or 8S16Fcsx card A maximum of 6 simultaneously ringers per card SLT is supported.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

System

MAX_RING_BASE_ 1..6 UNIT [1] r For optimal ringing capability, do not change this default. Coral FlexiCom 200 only Defines the maximum number of Coral FlexiCom 200 Base Unit SLTs (i.e., SLTs connected via the base unit) that can ring simultaneously. The base unit can support a maximum of 24 SLT stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_RING_ 1..10 EXPANSION_UNIT [2] r For optimal ringing capability, do not change this default. Coral FlexiCom 200 only Defines the maximum number of Coral FlexiCom 200 Expansion Unit SLTs (i.e., SLTs connected via any or all the Expansion units in this Coral FlexiCom 200 system) that can ring simultaneously. Each expansion unit can support a maximum of 48 SLT stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BOSS_RING [3] 1..20 Determines the maximum number of stations in a Boss Group which can ring simultaneously.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIGIT_ONE_AS_H.F. Yes/No [4] r In noisy areas this parameter should be set to No. Defines the digit 1 as a hookflash (Enter Y) or a 1 digit that is ignored (Enter N).

INTERNAL_LAST_ Yes/No NUM_REDIAL [5] Defines the Last Number Redial feature (see page 5-11) to include internal numbers as well as external numbers. Internal numbers include any legal station destination within the system. It does not include feature codes and Page-Q.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TEMPORARY_AUTO Yes/No SET RELOCATE [6] When this parameter is set to Yes, stations are allowed to activate the Auto Set Relocate feature either temporarily or permanently by defining Permanent/Temporary_AUTO SET RELOCATE [33] (page 9-12) in the SLT branch or Permanent/Temporary_AUTO SET RELOCATE [66] (page 9-50) in the Keyset Definition branch. When set to No, this parameter allows stations, system-wide, to activate the Auto Set Relocate feature only on a permanent basis and disables temporary relocation.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-17

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

This parameter applies to any SLT, keyset, or trunk port during internal or QSIG network calls or when the ring/busy tone is heard.

System

PI Reference Manual

PREEMPTION TYPE Intrude/Release [7] r Relevant for Public Libraries defined with PRIORITY_PREEMPTION_ CALL? (page 11-3) set to Yes. This parameter defines whether the emergency call that is preempting the established non-emergency call: breaks into the existing non-emergency call (Intrude) or disconnects the non-emergency established call (Release).

NOTE! Previously established emergency calls are not disconnected. The new emergency call camps on the busy trunk and waits until the trunk is freed.

This parameter is relevant only for the Coral in which the emergency destination resides.

This parameter is not relevant for Corals that serve as transit nodes leading to the Coral with the emergency destination. Regardless of the PREEMPTION TYPE settings in the Coral assigned for emergency purposes, a transit emergency call will disconnect busy trunks leading to the emergency Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_DIGITS_TO_ 5..16 VERIFY_IRSS_ Defines the maximum number of digits required by the system to identify an CALLER [8] external callers number as that of an IRSS (Freedom) destination. The Coral checks the last few digits (5 to 16 digits, defined in this parameter) of the external calling number to verify that it is an IRSS destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

SHORT_CALL_MSG Yes/No [9] Defines a shortened message display on the users keyset. Setting this parameter to No, enables the full keyset display for incoming calls in the format: A call B. The following example of a keyset display shows the trunk number followed by the ANI of the calling party. Susan is the called internal station.
78840 5553067 CALL Susan

Setting this parameter to Yes, enables a shortened display where only the caller ID is presented while the called station number, or name, is omitted. The following example of a keyset display shows that only the external number is display during the call.
78840 5553067

6-18

PI Reference Manual

System This shortened format allows users with smaller keyset displays (FlexSet 120 series) to view the entire calling partys ANI.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

KEYSET

The following parameters apply to all FlexSet, Wireless and Keyset stations.

ACD PROTOCOL Both / ACD / CSTS_ACD TYPES [10] Defines the protocol type for connecting the Coral system (via APA) to an external CTI server for ACD applications that monitor call center activities. CSTS - Coral Supported Telephony Services.
l l l

ACD is used for ACD systems supporting non-CSTS protocol. Applicable for CCM version 2. CSTS_ACD is used for ACD systems supporting CSTS protocol. Applicable for CCM version 3 or higher. Both is used for Coral systems supporting both CSTS and non-CSTS protocols.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DATE_MODE E (European)/U (USA) (Eu/USA) [11] Eu: E The date display on the keyset can be set to either the European standard (dd/month/yy - 26 May 2052), or the USA standard (month/dd/yy - 05/26/52). This parameter also influences how the LAST POWER FAIL time is displayed, as well as enables an AM/PM option in Time Set (page 25-2) which also enables the AM/PM display on Keysets/FlexSets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Displays the station name and dial number on the second line of the keyset display window, when set to Yes. This information is shown on idle stations when the Idle Display Feature is activated and a name has been entered into the system port database, see Port List - Physical Location (PLIS) in this chapter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOLD_AUTO_ACTIVE Yes/No [13] When defined as Yes, the keyset user can press the hold key to automatically recover a call already placed on hold (i.e., there is no need to dial the activation code: 11 or *1).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MSG_AUTO_ACTIVE Yes (activation code not required)/ No (activation code required) [14] Message Auto Active enables retrieving the pending message by pressing the Message key without the need to dial an activation code. When set to No, the user must dial the activation code after pressing the message key, before the pending message can be retrieved.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-19

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

EXT.ID. [12] Yes/No

System

PI Reference Manual

V.P.RING_AFTER_ Ring After Transfer (Yes)/Transfer to Speaker (No) XFER [15] Voice Page Ring After Transfer determines whether a call transferred to a keyset, which has Voice Page On, will ring (Yes), or is immediately connected to the station when the party originating the transfer disconnects (No).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

USER_CANNED_ Yes (Enables User Canned Messages feature; MESSAGES [16] No (Enables Room Status feature Defines whether the system enables either the User Canned messages feature or the Room Status feature for this Coral system. Both features are mutually exclusive and cannot be available to the system simultaneously. The Unauthorized Err message appears when setting this parameter to Yes in unauthorized systems (SAU Requirement).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

USER_CANNED_ Yes/No MESSAGES_ r This parameter is only available when the above parameter is set to Yes. OVERRIDE_2nd_LINE [17] Set this parameter to Yes to enable the canned text message to override the second line of the calling partys display which sometimes displays other information about the call. This is necessary for callers to destinations where the second line display is occupied with call information (such as ACD Hunt groups or other transferring destinations).

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

This parameter overrides the next parameter, SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION [18].


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SYSTEM_WIDE_ Yes/No NAME_RETENTION r If SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION is set to Yes, the next parameter, [18] ACD/LIB_NAME_RETENTION, does not appear. Set this parameter to Yes in order to firstly present the calling partys name on all system keyset displays as well as to retain the name/number when the call is transferred on to further stations or groups. Also, set this parameter to Yes in order to use a Public Library name as a message. Create the Public Library in LIB, 0 (see page 11-2).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ACD/LIB_NAME_ Yes/No RETENTION [19] Set this parameter to Yes in order to present the calling partys name on the keysets of all direct calls to ACD Hunt Groups and Public Library groups and to retain the name/number when the call is transferred.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-20

PI Reference Manual

System If the above two parameters, SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION and ACD/LIB_ NAME_RETENTION are both set to No, the following parameter does not appear.

NAME_RETENTION_ Yes/No OVERRIDE_2nd_LINE Defines whether the second line of the keyset can be overridden with the name of [20] the calling party name and/or number when either SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_ RETENTION or ACD/LIB_NAME_RETENTION is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-21

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

System PI-LANGUAGE [21] D/S/T/F (Default, Second, Third, Fourth)

PI Reference Manual

SAU Requirement Defines which language will be used by the PI system during Names programming (for a list of the languages used in each system see LANGUAGE [51] on page 9-44). A maximum of four languages may be loaded onto each Coral system. When the selected language is written from right to left, all keyset displays are automatically set to display that language and the multilingual display is blocked. The correlation between the Default, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and Multiple Languages is fixed by the manufacturer for each system before First Initialization is performed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TWO_WAY_HOLD [22] Yes/No

Boss Groups Only

Defines whether or not two-way hold can be activated in the system. Set this parameter to Yes so that the members of two different Boss Groups can access their boss group line, place the two calls on hold and allow the two other Boss members to speak directly with each other by picking up the held line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM_3WAY_BOSS_ Yes/No TO_CONF_CALL [23] r Boss Groups Only When a boss group line is engaged in a 3-way conversation, set this parameter to Y in order to allow a fourth participant to join the conversation. The system does this by transferring the line to an available conference circuit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

ON LINE ACCOUNT Yes/No CODE [24] Set this parameter to Yes to enable dialing the online account code during a call without placing the called party on hold. The account code must be entered after pressing a DSS key programmed with the account code feature dial number (default code: #1990).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-22

PI Reference Manual

System

CONTINUOUS_ Initiator/Any party CONFERENCE_ Defines which party is allowed to add further members to a Continuous Conference CONTROL [??] (i.e. a multi-party conference created from a 3way call): The initiator of the multi-party conference (I) or Any of the conference parties (A). After the initiator leaves the conference, any party may add further members.

DKT The following parameters apply to DKTs and FlexSets:


MILITARY_TIME [25] Yes (24 hour clock)/ No (12 hour clock) Determines whether the DKTs and FlexSets time display uses the military standard (24 hour clock) or the USA standard (12 hour clock).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DSP48_NAME_FIELD S/F (Short/Full) [26]

This parameter applies only to DKTs, FlexSet 120D equipped with a DSP48 module (2 rows x 24 characters). and to FlexSet 120S and 121S

DSP48_ELAPSE_ Short/Full TIME_MODE [27] Defines whether the Keyset Elapsed Time Display (feature code: #129) is shown in Short (S) or Full (F) mode. The Full display leaves the ANI displayed on the left and the Elapsed Time in hour:minute:seconds format on the right. If the ANI is too long the words EXT ANSWER may be shortened and the ANI may be shortened or deleted. This display mode is used for DSP80 units.
EXT ANSWER C0-03 12125551234 John Doe 2264 00:12:10

The Short display deletes the ANI. The Elapsed Time remains in its hour:minute:second format on the left side of the display and the word ELAPSE appears on the right side of the display.

6-23

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

Each Port is given a Short name-up to 5 characters and a Long name-up to 16 characters (see page 6-62). This parameter defines the Name Field characteristics by determining whether the Port Names are Short or Full names. A Short Name includes all five characters of the Short Name and a Full Name includes the first nine (or 16 when available) characters of the Long Name.

System This display is used for DSP48 or DSP32 units.


00:12:10 John Doe 2264
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

ELAPSE

SLT The following parameters apply only to SLTs.


MAGNETO_DISC_ Yes/No RING [28] Magneto Disconnect Ring determines whether or not a Magneto Station is disconnected after sending a ring voltage to the Coral, while a call is established (see RING_SIG_RJCT [9] on page 9-88).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RECALL_TK_AFTER_ Yes/No HKFLS [29] CC1: No An extension is connected with a trunk. When the extension implements a hookflash and replaces the handset; this parameter defines whether to return the trunk to the extension or to release the trunk. Because of spikes on the telephone line, the Coral first identifies a hookflash and afterwards an onhook. This parameter is designed to prevent arbitrary ringing when the extension is connected with the trunk; the extension decides to disconnect and replaces the handset. Enter Y to return the trunk to the extension. Enter N to release the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]


6-24

PI Reference Manual

System

HF_FOR_HOT_ST_ Yes/No INTERNAL_SERVICES Defines, system wide, whether a Hot-Immediate SLT user can access internal dial [30] tone when set to Yes. This immediate releases the trunk seized so that it may be used by other users. The Hot Immediate station user hears one of the following when lifting the receiver: External Dial Tone when defined for the Hot Immediate destination. Busy - if Hot Immediate trunk is busy Illegal - if the station COS does not allow connecting to or dial on the Hot Immediate station destination (trunk/trunk group).

When this parameter is set to Yes, the user can press Flash or Xfer to obtain internal dial tone. The internal dial tone can be useful for using other Coral features and accessing other internal services. For example, when this station user hears an illegal tone, the user can change the station COS by receiving an internal dial tone and thus enable the Hot Immediate feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT (DTMF/Hookflash) D (Dial out digit); H (Hookflash) [31] Eu: H

This parameter applies only to rotary SLTs connected to a DTMF SLT or DTMF trunk.

Controls the interpretation of the digit 1 dialed from a rotary (pulse) SLT as a hookflash request (Enter H) or a dial out digit (Enter D).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CID_NAME_SUPPORT Yes/No [32] Enables the caller name (up to 15 characters) in addition to the number to be displayed on SLT sets or Caller ID display devices.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CID_NUMBER_ 1..10..16 LENGTH [33] Defines the maximum number of digits that may be displayed on an SLT with built-in display or Caller ID external device.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

N_CID_ON_IDSP_ 0..32..128 CARD [34] Defines the maximum number of FSK tone generators out of the maximum available on each one of the following cards:
iDSP U-RMIcsx U-MRcsx IPx 500M (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above)

6-25

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

System

PI Reference Manual This setting determines the maximum number of Caller IDs that can be simultaneously transmitted by each card installed in the Coral system for analog trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]


6-26

PI Reference Manual

System

APPLICATION BUSY/IDLE EVENT:


CAP_MSG_ A (All), S (Specific) DESTINATION [35] r When more than 100 APA units are to be installed and used by the system, this parameter should be set to Specific (S) so that a Primary and Secondary message destination may be defined. This parameter defines a universal message destination for busy/idle messages to units defined as PCC or CAP. In this manner, the messages for all the units may be concentrated at one Specific destination. Otherwise, the busy/idle messages for all the PCC or CAP defined units will continue to be sent to each and every unit (All). When Specific is defined, a Primary and Secondary destination can be defined in the next two parameters.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

The next two parameters appear only if CAP_MSG_DESTINATION [35], above, is defined as Specific. PRIMARY [36] Keyset Dial Numbers defined as PCC in Keyset Def., see Chapter 9; None Defines the primary destination for busy/idle messages of all the PCC or CAP defined units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SECONDARY [37] Keyset Dial Numbers defined as PCC in Keyset Def., see Chapter 9; None

ACD_TRK_ All trunks/D.I.L. only INDICATION [38] ACD only ACD applications receive Coral messages regarding the status of the trunks: busy or idle. This parameter indicates whether the Coral reports the status of all trunk types or only of LS/GS trunks defined as Direct In Line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAP/ACD_ST_ Yes/No LOCKOUT_REPORT Defines, system-wide, whether or not the Coral reports to ACD or PCC [39] applications when SLTs are locked out. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ACD/PCC receives messages when the SLT station enters Lockout and when it returns to idle.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-27

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]

Defines alternate destination for busy/idle messages of all the PCC or CAP defined units when the Primary destination is None, undefined, unavailable or invalid.

System

PI Reference Manual

APPLICATION PRESENT EVENT


CAP_ Yes/No REINTRODUCTION_ Defines whether or not a CAP application is prompted with a PRESENT message OF_MA_QUEUED [40] while a multi-appearance station receives a second (wait) call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAP_REPORTS_ Local/Network STATION_NUMBER Non-UDP Networks only [41] Defines, system-wide, the Coral caller number to be reported to the CAP application: either the local station number or the network number. The network number is composed of the local number and the node prefix.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAP_THIRD_PARTY_ Yes/No D.N./ANI [42] When a station in the Coral initiates a call, a PRESENT message is sent to the CAP via APA. If the caller placed the call on a special hold (on the back, by pressing Xfer), the Coral can include the third party identification in the PRESENT message. Some CAP applications require the third party information while other do not. This parameter defines whether or not the third party information is included in the PRESENT message if there is a third party held by the calling party. The third party is identified either by its dial number if it is an internal destination, or by its ANI, if it is an external destination.

System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]


6-28

VM SOFTKEYS Yes/No SUPPORT [43] r This parameter is relevant only when Version Q915, iCMC cards support FlexSets equipped with softkeys (FlexSet 280S/120S-Version 3.5). The Q-915 iCMC card does not support the Voice Mail controlled by softkeys. Set this parameter to No to enable Voice Mail on FlexSets 280S/120S with version 3.50 supported by the iCMC cards with Version Q915. A full array of voice mail features is provided for these FlexSets by using the keypad as opposed to the softkeys.

PI Reference Manual

System

System Features - Intercept/Incomplete

W SFE,3

[0,0,4,1,3]

INCOMPLETE_ The following parameters apply only to incomplete calls when the destination is ROUTING- busy. ON BUSY
E&M [0] Route (Yes)/ Tone (No) Determines if an incomplete call, arriving from an E&M trunk to a busy station, is routed to the incomplete calls destination (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or caller hears a busy tone. The destination is typically the Attendant Console (the system default).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LGS[1] Route (Yes)/Tone (No) Determines if an incomplete call, arriving from a a Central Office loop or ground start trunk to a busy station, is routed to the incomplete calls destination (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or caller hears a busy tone. The destination is typically the Attendant Console (the system default).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID [2] Route (Yes)/Tone (No) Determines if an incomplete call, originating from a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk to a busy station, is routed to the incomplete calls destination (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or caller hears a busy tone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISDN [3] Route (Yes)/Tone (No)

6-29

System Features - Intercept/Incomplete SFE,3

Determines if an incomplete call, originating from a PRI or TBR (BRI) trunk (for ISDN) to a busy station, is routed to the incomplete calls destination (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or caller hears a busy tone.

System

PI Reference Manual

INCOMPLETE The following parameters apply only to incomplete calls defined as when the ROUTING -ON destination does not answer or is considered an illegal destination or the destination ILLEGAL/ station in DND mode or PWDS calls after SUPV_RECALL Time-out. NO_ANS

The incomplete destination is defined in NIGHT Service, Chapter 12.

.E&M [4] Route (Yes)/Tone (No) Determines whether an incomplete call, arriving from an E&M trunk, is routed to the incomplete calls destination, when set to Yes (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or the caller hears a reorder tone, when set to No. The destination is typically the Attendant Console (the system default).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

.LGS [5] Route (Yes)/Tone (No) Determines whether an incomplete call, arriving from a Central Office loop or ground start trunk, is routed to the incomplete calls destination, when set to Yes (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or the caller hears a reorder tone, when set to No. The destination is typically the Attendant Console (the system default).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

.DID [6] Route (Yes)/Tone (No) Determines whether an incomplete call, arriving on a Direct Inward Dial trunk, is routed to the incomplete calls destination, when set to Yes (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or the caller hears a reorder tone, when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

.ISDN [7] Yes (Route)/No (Tone) Determines whether an incomplete call, arriving on a PRI or TBR (BRI) trunk (for ISDN), is routed to the incomplete calls destination, when set to Yes (see Night Service Definition, Chapter 12) or the caller hears a reorder tone, when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Intercept/Incomplete SFE,3


6-30

AFTER_SUPV_ Yes (Route) /No (Disconnect) RECALL [8] CC1: No When two PWDS-type ports are communicating and the SUPV_RECALL time period terminates (see page 6-3), this parameter will determine the outcome: Enter No to disconnect the two ports and make them available for other calls. Enter Yes to transfer the two ports to an incomplete calls destination to renew the call or disconnect it.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

System

INTERCEPT The following parameters apply only to intercepted calls. ORIGIN

Each of these parameters is directly related to the range definition defined in INTERCEPT RELEVANT (page 6-32).

ST. [9] Yes (Route)/No (Reorder Tone) Determines whether an illegal call, defined by the relevant intercept parameters, that has originated at a station is routed to the intercept call destination, when set to Yes, or if the caller hears reorder tone when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M. [10] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Eu: Yes Determines whether illegal calls that originated at an E&M trunk are routed to the intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID. [11] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Eu: Yes Determines whether illegal calls that originated from a Direct Inward Dialing trunk are routed to the intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISDN. [12] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Determines whether illegal calls that originated at a PRI or TBR (BRI) trunk (for ISDN) are routed to the intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Determines whether illegal calls that originated at a preassigned trunk are routed to the intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N). DISA calls are treated by the Coral as calls from an internal station and are allowed to dial within the system and access system features using DTMF signaling.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-31

System Features - Intercept/Incomplete SFE,3

DISA [13] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No)

System

PI Reference Manual

INTERCEPT The intercept destination is defined in Night Service, Chapter 12. RELEVANT
The following parameters apply only to intercept relevant calls. Each of these parameters is directly related to the range route defined in Intercept Origin. In order to intercept a call, range route must be defined as Yes for both Intercept Relevant and Intercept Origin. TOLL_BAR [14] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Eu: (Yes) When Toll Barriers are in effect, TOLL_BAR routes the call to an intercept destination when set to Yes. The caller hears a reorder tone, when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COS_FAIL [15] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Eu: (Yes) When a call is denied because of Class of Service failure, COS_FAIL defines whether the call will be routed to an intercept destination (Y) or the caller hears a reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIAL_FAIL [16] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Eu: (Yes) When an illegal number is dialed, DIAL_FAIL routes the call to an intercept destination (Y) or the caller hears a reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ACCOUNT [17] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) VFAC Fail defines the destination of an incorrect Verified Forced Account Code. When an incorrect Account Code number is dialed, ACCOUNT routes the call to an intercept destination (Y) or the caller hears a reorder tone (N). Station callers are routed after the third fail. E&M/DISA callers are routed after the first fail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Intercept/Incomplete SFE,3


6-32

UNDEFINED [18] Route (Yes)/Reorder Tone (No) Eu: (Yes) When a call is sent to an undefined station, UNDEFINED routes the call to an intercept destination (Y) or the caller hears a reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

System

System Features - Call Forwarding


CF_NO_ANS INT/EXT
ONE_STEP [0] Yes/No Eu: Yes

W SFE,4

[0,0,4,1,4]

Call Forward No Answer One Step determines whether a call should keep forwarding when calls reach a No Answer situation (N) or the call should be forwarded only once (Y). Enter Yes to limit an infinite ring condition when two or more stations defined with CF_NO_ANS call forward each other.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FOR_M.A. [1] Yes/No Call Forward No Answer For Multi-Appearance determines whether or not call forwarding with No Answer is invoked when a station is defined as Multi-Appearance.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-33

System Features - Call Forwarding SFE,4 [0,0,4,1,4]

System

PI Reference Manual

TIMED_ Determines the system-wide time period for forwarding calls. Two such time FORWARD periods can be defined. The start and stop times for each period are independently INT/EXT defined. The user has the option to override the timed call forward by not invoking
it at his or her station. The user can also override any system-wide defined destinations that are programmed into the database. Some typical usages for Timed Call Forward include: Extended Care Facilities Geriatric Institutes School Dormitories Business environments requiring collective calls forward features during lunch breaks or after normal business hours to Voice Mail or other specific destinations. Network applications where calls coming into a remote site after working hours are automatically forwarded to the hub.

1ST_START [2] None or 24 hour clock (hh:mm) Defines the beginning of the first call forward period. Both 1ST_START and 1ST_STOP must be defined for the first time interval to be defined for Timed Forward.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1ST_STOP [3] None or 24 hour clock (hh:mm) Defines the end of the first call forward period. Both 1ST_START and 1ST_STOP must be defined for the first time interval to be defined for Timed Forward.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Call Forwarding SFE,4 [0,0,4,1,4]


6-34

2ND_START [4] None or 24 hour clock (hh:mm) Defines the beginning of the second call forward period. Both 2ND_START and 2ND_STOP must be defined for the second time interval to be defined for Timed Forward.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

2ND_STOP [5] None or 24 hour clock (hh:mm) Defines the end of the second call forward period. Both 2ND_START and 2ND_STOP must be defined for the second time interval to be defined for Timed Forward.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

System

System Features - Camp-On


IMM. CAMP [0] Yes/No

W SFE,5

[0,0,4,1,5]

Immediate Camp-On defines the system-wide manner in which the originator of the Camp-On feature answers the Camp-On call back. When set to Yes, the originator answers the call-back and the destination station immediately rings. When set to No, after the originator answers the call, the digit 2 must be dialed or the Camp-On button must be pressed to activate ringing at the requested destination. In either case, the camped-on station must first be idle before activating this feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ST_CMP_HUNT [1] Yes/No Station Camp On ACD/UCD Hunt Group determines whether a station user calling a busy Hunt Group receives a busy tone (No) or automatically camps-on the busy group (Yes).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID_CMP_HUNT [2] Yes/No DID Trunk Camp On ACD/UCD Hunt Group determines whether a DID trunk calling a busy Hunt Group receives a busy tone (No) or automatically camps-on the busy group (Yes).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

When set to Y, then the calls are assigned priority on a first in first out (FIFO) basis. When set to N, external calls have priority over internal calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-35

System Features - Camp-On SFE,5 [0,0,4,1,5]

INTERNAL/EXTERNAL Yes/No _EQUAL_PRIORITY When both an internal and external call arrive at a busy station concurrently, this [3] parameter defines whether the calls have equal priority to enter the system (Yes) or unequal priority (No).

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Hotel


Wakeup

W SFE,6

[0,0,4,1,6]

ANN_DEST [0] None, Station Number, Trunk Number, Trunk Group, Routing Access, Dial Service, Hunt Group, Boss Group, Public Speed Call Library, DVMS port number Defines the wakeup announcer destination when answering wakeup calls. When defined as none, music is played and the type of music is defined at the FROM TO MUSIC-SOURCE (1-4) on page 4-25 (IP Stations hear tones and no music). Wakeup report destination is defined through Wakeup Control beginning on page 20-2. Simultaneous Wakeup Calls: When required, simultaneous wakeup calls can be made to individuals requesting wakeup at the same time. This is particularly useful for hotel/motel applications, when guest groups need to wakeup at the same hour. To program multiple simultaneous wakeup requests, the announcer should be defined as the destination. The announcer device can be attached to an SLT port or a dedicated message can be programmed for a DVMS port. When attached to an SLT port the port should be defined both as ANNOUNCER [22] and MULTI_APPEARANCE [23] (page 9-9). When attached to a DVMS port, a specific DVMS wakeup message must be defined for the DVMS Port, see DVMS Port beginning on page 23-2. Once this set up is arranged, all guests requesting wakeup for the same hour will hear a waking ring at that hour. If the announcer destination is busy, the awoken party will hear a ringback tone and enter the announcer queue. When the announcer goes idle, the queued calls will be routed to the announcer and all the guests will hear the recorded announcement at the same time. The system can handle up to ten simultaneous wakeup calls. More than ten such calls are broken down into groups of ten, with thirty second intervals between each wakeup response.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Hotel SFE,6 [0,0,4,1,6]

INCOMPLETE_ALERT Yes/No [1] Determines whether an alert call is generated whenever a wakeup attempt fails. The fail indication is routed to the designated incomplete call destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-36

PI Reference Manual

System

CHECK IN/OUT The following parameters are available when the Check-Out or Check-In feature is
activated. OUT_COS. [2] 0 to maximum as defined in Sizes-Chapter 4 Determines the system COS for stations which are in Check-Out mode. When check-in is applied, the room (station) returns to its previous COS (defined in PRM_ COS/SEC_COS parameters (see Chapter 9- Station Controls, SLT And Keyset Definitions).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PCC_UPDATE_COS Yes/No [3] Determines whether or not the COS status of the Check-In port can be changed. When this parameter is set to Yes, then the COS can be changed via the PCC/CAP terminal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WHEN_BUSY [4] Yes/No Permits activating the Check-In or Check-Out features when the station is busy.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SAVE_WAKEUP [5] Yes/No Determines whether the existing station wakeup request is saved while Check-Out or Check-In is activated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CANCEL_CFWD Yes/No INT/EXT [6] Determines whether the existing station Call Forward features are canceled while Check-Out or Check-In is activated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-37

System Features - Hotel SFE,6 [0,0,4,1,6]

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Messaging

W SFE,7

[0,0,4,1,7]

ATT_MSG_HOT_LINE Yes/No [0] Attendant Message Hot Line determines whether activating an attendant message causes a station to be defined as a hot line to the attendant. As soon as the user operates a telephone feature, the station is routed to the attendant who left the message and the message lamp goes out. When set to No, attendant messages can only be canceled by the attendant and the feature can be operated only by pressing a key programmed with this feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ATT_MSG_DEST [1] None, Station, Boss Group, Hunt (UCD/ACD) Group Determines the call back message destination for the attendant message feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLA_MSG_ None, Any valid port or station dial number or Hunt group ORIGINATOR [2] Defines the station originator for Attendant Messages from the CLA.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MSG_LAMP_&_RING Yes/No [3] r For SLTs, the system must be equipped with Single Line Telephone (4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, 8/16/24SLS, 8/16SLSipx, 8/16SLSsl, 8F8Ssl or 4/8/16SH/S-LL) cards, with the Jumper Setting in the SH position plus message waiting lamps physically installed on the telephones. Message Waiting Lamp With Ring, when set to Yes, the message waiting indication consists of both an illuminated message lamp and a message ring for SLTs and Keysets. When set to No, only the message lamp lights. This parameter applies when ATT_MSG_HOT_LINE (above) is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Messaging SFE,7 [0,0,4,1,7]

DKT/DST_MSG_LAMP Yes/No [4] Eu2: No

This parameter applies only to the special message lamp for keysets and does not affect the MSG programmed key LED or any other programmed LEDs.

Lights a blinking message lamp for all pending messages for Keysets/FlexSets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-38

PI Reference Manual MSG_CLEAR_ON_ R(Ring), C(Connect) RING/CONNECT [5] CC1: R Activates two options of controlled message erase:

System

C (upon connect): a pending message status can only be cleared Upon Connect (C), which clears the message when a call is placed to the pending party. R (upon ring): clears the message status when the pending party rings back. Thus, a message is never accidentally erased.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT_RECEIVE_MSG_ D (Distinctive Dial Tone), C (Confirmation Tone) TONE [6] r This feature is of particular concern to SLT Voice Mail users because the SLT has no message lamp. Therefore, a more distinctive Confirmation Tone alerts the user to check the Voice Mail. This parameter relates to the following SLT card/s: 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, 8/16/24SLS, 8/16SLSipx, 8/16SLSsl, 8F8Ssl or 4/8/16SH/S-LL when the jumper is set to the SH position. It determines which tone type is heard when the handset is lifted for messages left at this station by another station or by Voice Mail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WHISPER_PAGE_ Music/Silence PARTNER_HOLD [7] When a user is engaged in a conversation and he receives a whisper page, he can place the other side of the conversation on hold and answer the whisper page. The party on hold can hear music or silence as defined in this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DVMS The following parameters apply to systems equipped with a 4VS or 4VSN card.
MAX_DVMS_MSG [8] 4VS: 1..100 4VSN: 1..32

Each 4VSN card permits a maximum of 32 recorded announcements. Thus, it is advisable to reduce the default range to 32 (the maximum number of recorded announcements for this card).

Determines the maximum number of available DVMS messages that can be utilized. This parameter influences MSG [0] (page 23-2) in [PDB,4], and DVMS_MSG [31] (page 5-42) in [NPL].
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

#DVMS_REPEAT [9] 1..255 Determines how many times the user, who is routed to the DVMS message, hears the message.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-39

System Features - Messaging SFE,7 [0,0,4,1,7]

System

PI Reference Manual

FWD_NANS INT/EXT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in [10] PDB, see Chapter 23 Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to the Call Forward No Answer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FWD_BUSY INT/EXT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in [11] PDB, see Chapter 23 Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to the Call Forward when Busy destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FWD_ALL INT/EXT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in [12] PDB, see Chapter 23 Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to a Forward All Calls destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMPLETE_NANS None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in [13] PDB, see Chapter 23 Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to the Incompleted Calls Destination When No Answer.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMPLETE_BUSY None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in [14] PDB, see Chapter 23 Determines which DVMS message is provided before a call is forwarded to an Incompleted Calls Destination when Busy.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Messaging SFE,7 [0,0,4,1,7]

MLPP Special Announcements


BLOCKED None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in PRECEDENCE ANN PDB (BPA) [15] This DVMS message is provided to MLPP calls that could not be pre-empted because the called party was busy with a call of equal or higher precedence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNAUTHORIZED_ None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in PRECEDENCE_ PDB LEVEL_ANN (UPA) This DVMS message is provided to station users that try to use a higher MLPP [16] precedence level than their COS allows.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-40

PI Reference Manual

System

BUSY STATION NOT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in EQUIPPED FOR PDB PREEMPTION (BNEA) This DVMS message is sounded to the calling party when the called party is not [17] pre-emptable because its station COS is defined with PREEMPTABLE [78] (page 7-20) set to N.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISOLATED CODE None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in ANNOUNCEMENT [18] PDB This DVMS message is used to indicate to the caller that the system is currently malfunctioning and the call cannot be completed as requested. The user should try again at a later time.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT/KEY_V.M The following parameter applies only to systems equipped with Voice Mail on a
SLT or Keyset: DISCONNECT_SEQ None [19] Up to an 8 character string comprised of the following 16 DTMF signals: *, #, 0..9, A-D Defines the DTMF tone sequence to be sent to the Voice Mail on SLT/Keyset system indicating an onhook situation (disconnect) at the Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DEFAULT_ None; DESTINATION [20] Any valid internal dial number or network number via Public Library

This access code also enables a FlexSet 280S/120S user to access the Voice Mail by pressing a soft key.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-41

System Features - Messaging SFE,7 [0,0,4,1,7]

This parameter determines the system Voice Mail center (e.g. iCMC, WWO, etc.) access code.

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Tones


TICK_TONE [0] Yes/No

W SFE,8

[0,0,4,1,8]

Determines whether a tick-tone is heard while dialing, when set to Yes.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BREAK-IN_WARNING Yes/No [1] Break In Warning Tone sets a Break-In warning tone to be heard by the conversing parties during the entire break-in period (when set to Yes). The Break-In tone cadence is defined in Feature Timers beginning on page 6-2.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ORIGINATOR_CALL_ Yes/No WAITING_TO [2] CC1: Yes Defines which ringback tone is sent to the CALLING station when the busy destination is defined as Multi Appearance or when using Call Offer (i.e., by dialing XFER-8 the caller alerts the busy destination that a call is waiting by sending a tone.) This parameter defines whether the caller hears a second ringback (see 2nd R.back on page 6-80), when set to Yes or regular Ringback tone, when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WP_GAIN_COMP [3] -18..-12..+12 db Defines the receiving gain compensation value for the volume of the whisper page voice announcement. This value applies to all system stations.

Warning: For Keysets/FlexSets: Increasing the gain from the default value may enable the connected side which should not hear the whisper page, to hear the whisperer.

System Features - Tones SFE,8 [0,0,4,1,8]


6-42

Decreased Gain

Increased Gain

-18db

-12db

0 db

+12db

Also, if the whisperer uses a loud voice, the connected side that should not hear the whisper page, may hear the whisperer.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

M_LAW [4] Yes (M_LAW)/No (A_LAW) CC0 (USA): Yes Determines the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) encoding standard used by the system to digitize voice signals. The A-Law method is in common use in Europe

PI Reference Manual

System and other countries. Mu-Law is the standard used by common carriers in North America. Changing this parameter requires a hardware change to the iCMC, MCBcsx, MSBipx, HDC, 4GC or 32GC card as well. For further details, see Section 6 in the relevant Coral Installation Manual. When the 4IAA or iCMC card is installed, the card definition must be identical to the definition here (see the 4IAA or iCMC manual).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FLEXAIR_SEARCH_ Tick/Silence TONE [5] Define a search tone to be sounded for callers to a FlexAir handset. The Tick Tone, when set, can indicate to the caller that the Coral system is currently trying to locate the FlexAir handset. A ringback or busy tone is given only after the station is located or timeout period has expired. Enter T for a Tick tone. Enter S for Silence (no tone).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-43

System Features - Tones SFE,8 [0,0,4,1,8]

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Diagnostics


MINOR_RLY [0] Relay number (See [NPL,0,5,21]) or None

W SFE,9

[0,0,4,1,9]

Minor Alarm Relay defines the relay dial number located on an MSBsl, MSBipx, U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx, MRcsx, 8DRCF, 8DRCM, ASU or RMI or in the IPx 500 Main Cage, or the FlexiCom 200 Base Unit, that is activated when a minor alarmcondition occurs in the system (see General Numbering Plan, Chapter 5).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAJOR_RLY [1] Relay number (See [NPL,0,5,21]) or None Major Alarm Relay defines the relay dial number located on an U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx, MRcsx, 8DRCF, 8DRCM, ASU or RMI card or in the IPx 500 Main Cage, or the FlexiCom 200 Base Unit, that is activated when a major alarmcondition occurs in the system. MAJOR_RLY may have the same dial number as a minor alarm relay. (See General Numbering Plan, Chapter 5). If two alarm relays are needed, then two ASU, RMI, 8DRCF or 8DRCM cards are required. For IPx 500 Main Cage and FlexiCom 200 Base Unit systems: These systems include only one relay. For an additional relay, an ASU, RMI, 8DRCF or 8DRCM card must be added to the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_GUARD [2] Yes/No Determines whether the system automatically tests outgoing trunks for dial tone. All trunks failing the test are blocked for outgoing calls while incoming calls are allowed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Diagnostics SFE,9 [0,0,4,1,9]


6-44

ENABLE_BLOCK_ Yes/No ON_FAULT [3] Determines whether the system automatically tests T1/E1 digital trunks (T1, 30T, T1, 30T/x only 30T/E, 30T/M and all 30T/x) for RED alarms. When set to Yes, all trunk cards failing the test are blocked for outgoing calls, but incoming calls are allowed. When set to No, the test is not activated and all trunks are released for outgoing calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ENABLE_BLOCK_ Yes/No ON_FAULT [4] Determines whether the system automatically tests ISDN trunks (4TBR,8TBR) for 4/8TBR only alarms. When set to Yes, all BRI trunk cards failing the test are blocked for outgoing calls, but incoming calls are allowed. When set to No, the test is not activated and all trunks are released for outgoing calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

System

ENABLE_BLOCK_ Yes/No ON_FAULT [5] Determines whether the system automatically tests ISDN trunks (PRI-23, PRI-30 PRI23/30, IPG only and IPG) for alarms. When set to Yes, all PRI and IPG trunk cards failing the test are blocked for outgoing calls, but incoming calls are allowed. When set to No, the test is not activated and all trunks are released for outgoing calls.

6-45

System Features - Diagnostics SFE,9 [0,0,4,1,9]

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - ISDN


See System Features - ISDN on page 26-2.

W SFE,10

[0,0,4,1,10]

System Features - ISDN SFE,10 [0,0,4,1,10]


6-46

PI Reference Manual

System

System Features - Network


See System Features - Network on page 28-3.

W SFE,11

[0,0,4,1,11]

6-47

System Features - Network SFE,11 [0,0,4,1,11]

System

PI Reference Manual

System Features - Wireless

W SFE,12

[0,0,4,1,12]

SAU Requirement The following parameters relate to systems that provide for CoralAIR and FlexAir wireless telephones. Software Authorization Units (SAU) are required for these parameters and the wireless telephones in order to operate.

SYSTEM ID# Any 12 digit number

Notes: Not for FlexAir systems. Use the SAU device # For the Coral FlexiCom 5000 or Coral IPx 3000 systems with Duplicated Common Control, use the Master Side SAU device #. For the Coral FlexiCom 6000/R or Coral IPx 4000/R systems with Dual Common Control, use the Active Side SAU device #.

Note: A System ID# must be entered before continuing to change the values of the related parameters. Enter this system number to identify the system towards each of its wireless handsets thereby preventing cross-signalling between unrelated systems and handsets. This system ID number is automatically programmed into each handset belonging to the particular Coral system. This system ID number is defined and supplied by the manufacturers Service Center.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Wireless SFE,12 [0,0,4,1,12]

Number of Clusters 0..8 Enter the number of SKK Clusters to be used in this Coral system. The number of Clusters determines the number of SKK Master cards installed system-wide. Each Master card can support 7 additional SKK slave cards physically linked together.

The Coral limits the use of SKK cards to a maximum of 32 8SKK and 16 16SKK cards per Coral system. See the FlexAir Installation Manual for further RBS and Repeater limitations and details.

Enter 0 when no FlexAir system is used in this Coral.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-48

PI Reference Manual Cluster #n - Link (Shelf/Slot) location or R for Remove (--, --) Master Card (n = 1-8) Shelf Options: 0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC); 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

System

2..3: CSX 200 Expansion cages IPx 500X/800X 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000 Slot Options: 1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC) 1..10: CSX 200 IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: CSX 200 IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

This parameter is only displayed when the Number of Clusters, above is greater than 0. n is determined by Number of Clusters.

Enter the physical location of this SKK Master Card.

r
l l l l

The SKK physical Master card must be initiated before the other FlexAir cards. Otherwise, the FlexAir system will not function properly.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Enter Activation Code Activation code supplied by manufacturer. CoralAIR CC0 only r The UTAM code is valid for 2 hours after receiving it. For CoralAIR systems, enter the 18 digit alphanumeric UTAM code supplied by the Service Center to activate wireless communication. If this UTAM code is not entered, SKW cards already installed in the system cannot be activated, accepted or initialized. This code also incorporates the number of SKW cards installed in the system. Therefore, a new code must be obtained to activate more SKW cards.

A system powered-down for more than 8 consecutive hours disables any wireless activity. A new UTAM code must be obtained to resume wireless service.

6-49

System Features - Wireless SFE,12 [0,0,4,1,12]

If 2 clusters are required, then this parameter appears twice: once with n=1 and the second time with n=2.

System

PI Reference Manual Entering a new code may cause one of the following error messages to appear: INVALID UTAM CODE: Authorization (SAU#) mismatch error OUTDATED UTAM CODE: Invalid time and/or date.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

# of Base Stations 0..128 Authorized For CoralAIR systems, defines the number of authorized Radio Base Stations CoralAIR CC0 only (RBS) for this system. Each SKW card supports 2 or 4 RBSs depending on the card type (2/4SKW). The number of SKW cards cannot be increased without obtaining a new UTAM code (see above parameter).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System Features - Wireless SFE,12 [0,0,4,1,12]


6-50

PI Reference Manual

System

Card List

W CLIS

[0,1,0]

Card List (CLIS) parameters identify the location, type, logical status and software version of the various system plug-in cards. Card List is also used for assigning a database (Card DB) to each card. FROM/TO SHELF# All Shelves; 0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC); 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

1..3: CSX 200 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Enter the required range of shelf numbers FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM/TO SLOT# All Slots 1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

2..11: CSX 200 main cage (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: CSX 200 IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: CSX 200 IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Enter the required range of slot numbers FROM the lowest slot number TO the highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SHELF# [0]

see FROM/TO SHELF# above


Identifies the shelf location of the indicated card for display.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLOT# [1]

see FROM/TO SLOT# above


Identifies the slot location of the indicated card for display.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-51

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]

System P_TYPE [2]

PI Reference Manual

Any shared service or peripheral card type See Tables 6-7 and 6-8
Present Card Type identifies the Peripheral or Shared Service card type which is currently located in the designated slot. If no card is currently located in the slot, the NO_CARD message appears.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I_TYPE [3] Default: NO_CARD Range: Any peripheral card type or NO_CARD See Table 6-7 and 6-8 or Table 6-1, for the Coral FlexiCom 200 Identifies the Peripheral card type initialized (first time card identified by system) in the designated slot. Shared Service cards do not appear in this field since no memory is reserved for them. This field can be updated even if the slot is currently empty in order to assign the desired new peripheral card type. For a CNF card, to change the card mode from C3Way to Conference, type CONF. To clear an empty slot, type NO_CARD. Enter NO_CARD to clear a slot equipped with a P_TYPE Resource card, or to display a P_TYPE card when equipped with an I_TYPE.

Caution: NO_CARD erases all the port dial numbers associated with the slot. All these dial numbers are erased from the NPL, Trunk Groups, Hunt Groups, Boss Groups, etc.

Check Default Configuration (see page 8-94), before any Digital Card (T1 and 30T/x) Installation. To assign a slot for a specific peripheral card, although no card is installed (i.e. P_TYPE is set to No_Card, enter the card type in I_Type. This is also known as 0/0 DATABASE PROGRAMMING, see below. 0/0 DATABASE PROGRAMMING The user can program the system without actually installing the peripheral cards. This is a special engineering feature that allows programmers to prepare an entire customer database at the manufacturers premises or at a central staging area, thereby saving on-site testing time. The system is programmed through the CARD LIST by entering the card name in the I_TYPE field while the P_TYPE for the card is defined as NO_CARD. The following example shows how Card List is displayed. Enter 16SLS in order to add the peripheral card even though there is no 16SLS physically installed.
CARD LIST 0,1 SHELF#SLOT#P_TYPEI_TYPE0 1 NO_CARD NO_CARD 16SLS

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]


6-52

PI Reference Manual

System

Coral FlexiCom 200 Base Unit:


The control circuits (drivers) for the station cards (those to be inserted in slots #4 and #5) are physically located on the MSBsl card, instead of on the station peripheral cards as in the other Coral systems. Therefore, the PI will always report the I_TYPE for Slot #4 as 24SFT and for Slot #5 as 24SLS, regardless of the physical card installed (see Table 6-1, below). This means that all Keysets will always be defined by the PI on Slot 4 although they may be physically located either on Slot 4 or 5. Likewise, all the SLTs will always be defined by the PI on Slot 5 although they may be physically located on Slot 4 or 5 (See Tables 6-2 and 6-3).

The PI reports the physically installed card type in the P_TYPE correctly. The Card status in both slots is always ACTIVE, whether or not a card is physically installed.

This arrangement removes the need to re initialize the card slot any time a card is replaced in either slot #4 or #5.
Table 6-1: Coral FlexiCom 200: Card List Range for Slots 4 & 5 SLOT #4 P_TYPE: 8SFTsl, 8SLSsl, 8F8Ssl 16SFT* I_TYPE: CARD_DB# STATUS: 24SFT*** (fixed display) N/A 16SLS** 24SLS (fixed display) 0-3 (defines SLT Card DB # for Slots #4 and# 5) SLOT #5

Always ACTIVE
(whether or not a card is inserted)

Station Card Location The station cards that support only 8 stations (8FSTsl, 8SLSsl, and 8F8Ssl) can be physically inserted in either slot (4 or 5), however the SLTs or Keysets connected via these cards may appear as if they are connected on the other slot. For example, an 8F8Ssl card is physically installed on Slot 5. The PI reports any keysets connected via this card on Slot 4 CKTs 8-15. (See Tables 6-2 and 6-3). The 16SFTsl can only be inserted in Slot 4 and 16SLSsl only in Slot 5; each card supports only up to 16 stations per card (while each system port (i.e., Slot 4 or 5) can support a maximum of 24 stations). See Tables 6-2 and 6-3 for default card arrangements.

6-53

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]

* The number of SFTsl ports in the Base Unit cannot exceed 24. ** The number of SLSsl ports in the Base Unit cannot exceed 24. *** The number of SFTsl and SLSsl ports together in the Base Unit cannot exceed 32.

System

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-2: Cards Physically installed in Slot 4, Coral FlexiCom 200 Physical Card Installed in Slot 4 16SFTsl 8SLSsl 8SFTsl 8F8Ssl Default NPL range 400-415 200-207 400-407 4 5 4 PI reports Slot # PI reports Ckt # 0-15 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7

200-207 for 5 SLTs 400-407 for 4 Keysets

Table 6-3: Cards Physically installed in Slot 5, Coral FlexiCom 200 Physical Card Installed in Slot 5 16SLSsl 8SLSsl 8SFTsl 8F8Ssl Default NPL range 208-223 208-215 416-423 5 5 4 PI reports Slot # PI reports Ckt # 8-23 8-15 16-23 8-15 16-23

208-215 for 5 SLTs 416-423 for 4 Keysets

CARD_DB# [4] 0 (1 for T1 and PRI cards) See Table 6-7 and 6-8 or Table 6-1, for the Coral FlexiCom 200 Identifies the card database (CDB) number assigned to the card type in the designated slot. Each peripheral card type can be allotted one of the database tables that are assigned to cards of that type. CDB numbers of different card types are completely independent of one another, that is, CDB 0 for 8DID is independent of CDB 0 for 4TEM.

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]


6-54

1) When CARD_DB# is set to N/A for this card type, "___" is displayed. 2) Entering an incorrect CARD_DB# displays an ERROR message. 3) Do not change the CARD_DB# of the PRI card.

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-4: Criteria for Installing Card_DB#* P_TYPE [2]
RESOURCE PORT RESOURCE NO_CARD PORT NO_CARD

System

I_TYPE [3]
NO_CARD NO_CARD PORT PORT PORT NO_CARD

CARD_DB# According To:


P_TYPE P_TYPE P_TYPE I_TYPE I_TYPE (see Notes 1 & 2, above)

*This table shows the relation between P_TYPE and I_TYPE, which define the Card Database number.

VERSION [5] Displays the designated card software version.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUBVERSION [6] Displays the designated card software subversion.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

STATUS [7] Displays the current logical status of the designated slot. Primarily used by maintenance personnel. Status messages are described below.

6-55

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]

System
Table 6-5: Card Slot Status Messages Message
ACTIVE ACTIVE/P

PI Reference Manual

Description Initialization was successfully completed. Card is partially active because there are not enough resources to support the other sub circuits on an 8DRCM, 8DRCF, U-RMIcsx, U-MRcsx, RMIcsx, MRcsx cards or on the IPx 500M (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above) or not all tone generators are being used on the iDSP/URC2 card (see N_CID_ON_ IDSP_CARD [34] on page 6-25). P_TYPE and I_TYPE are not compatible. Card has not received database, or has not reported initialization. None

Recommendations

Readjust SIZES to support unsupported sub circuits for the card. Partial Active for the iDSP/URC2 card is not critical. Readjust the parameter value only when needed. Install proper card or enter NO_ CARD in the I_TYPE option. Continue waiting

REPLACED

WAIT_DB

UGW: For the UGW card only: Enter the correct UGW MAC UGW MAC address is either incorrectly entered address or not registered Check that the network cables There is no network connection to Media and/or properly connected Signalling Fasten the MG/ULI/ULI-1 MG module is not installed properly ULI/ULI-1 module is not installed properly Network Configuration problem
NO_RESOURCES

modules securely Check the network configuration Check the default SIZES definitions.

Insufficient system memory to initialize card. For the UGW card only: More UGW cards are physically installed or defined in I_TYPE, than the system can handle Any one of the End Point port Types (IP-Keyset, -SLT, -LGS, -NET) has exceeded its Sizes Definition

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]


6-56

Media Channels Sizes Tab definition has been exceeded.


CONFIG_ERR UGW Card only

This error is displayed when inserting a UGW card when the slot i_type is defined as NO_CARD and the UGW Default Configuration defines any one of the following: media channels while no MG module is installed on the UGW more media channels than the card can physically support an end point type that is not supported by the UGW a total number of end point ports that exceed the cards physical capacity

Reallocate the Required Capacity of media channels or end point types in the UGW Current Configuration to reflect its Physical Capacity. See UGW: Current Configuration (page 29-8).

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-5: Card Slot Status Messages Message
NOT_COMPAT UGW Card only

System

Description Coral software version 14.5x or higher requires UGW version 2 or higher Coral software version 15.xx or higher requires UGW version 3 or higher

Recommendations Install a UGW card- Version 2 or higher and re initialize the card. Install a UGW card- Version 3 or higher and re initialize the card. Check HDLC wiring Install an updated version of the SAU with the appropriate amount of ports added. Ask your dealer for an authorized upgrade.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FAULT UNAUTHORIZED Systems with SAU only

HDLC problem The SAU ports are limited and therefore the card is not authorized for use in this system. See Authorization Items on page 2-12 and Feature Authorization beginning on page 3-3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-57

Card List CLIS [0,1,0]

System

PI Reference Manual

Port List

W PLIS
The Port List parameters identify individual ports on a peripheral card.

[0,2,0]

Access Port List by entering the physical location of the port (Shelf, Slot, CKT), or the dial number assigned to the port. In either case the displayed information is identical, except for the order of appearance. When entering the Port List by its mnemonic (PLIS) or the root menu (0,2,0), the PI prompts the user to enter a 0 for access by physical location or a 1 for access by dial number. In both Physical Location and Dial Number, direct access is possible by entering either the parameter name or the field number enclosed in brackets ([ ]).

Port List PLIS [0,2,0]


6-58

PI Reference Manual

System

Port List - Physical Location

W PLIS,

0 [0,2,0,0]

PHYSICAL Physical Location is used to display or modify port information by entering the LOCATION ports physical location in the system. The name of the port, and in the case of trunk
ports, the port database may be modified. FROM/TO All Shelves; SHELF# 0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

1..3: CSX 200 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Enter the required range of shelf numbers; FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM/TO SLOT# All Slots 1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

2..11: CSX 200 main cage (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: CSX 200 IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: CSX 200 IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Enter the required range of slot numbers; FROM the lowest slot number TO the highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM/TO CKT# Any valid CKT number, All Enter the required range of CKT numbers; FROM the lowest circuit number TO the highest circuit number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-59

Port List - Physical Location PLIS, 0 [0,2,0,0]

System SHELF# [0]

PI Reference Manual

0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III/4GC) 1..3: CSX 200 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Identifies the shelf, in which the port is located.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLOT# [1]

1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC) 2..11: CSX 200 main cage (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: CSX 200 IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: CSX 200 IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Identifies the card slot, in which the port is located.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Port List - Physical Location PLIS, 0 [0,2,0,0]


6-60

CKT# [2]

0-n, where n = number of ports on card 1


Identifies the circuit (CKT), on the card associated with the port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TYPE [3]

Any Shared Service or Peripheral card type (see Table 6-7 and Table 6-8)
Identifies the Shared Service (Resources) or Peripheral card type on which the port is located (e.g., 4TEM, 8T-C, 8DRCF).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual >NOTE [4]

System

See Table below


This parameter appears when the condition of a card within a slot is valid, but not desirable. Such a state could lead to system problems. This state should be corrected as soon as possible.
Table 6-6: Note Recommendations P_Type
RESOURCE

I_Type
PORT

Type

>Note

Port_DB by
I_TYPE

Technical Recommendations
A Resource card is operating in a slot reserved for Port cards. If this is to be a permanent condition, then release the Port card through the CLIS option. 0/0 state: The Port card was initialized in the past, but is not installed. Install the card. If this is to be a permanent condition, then release the slot through the CLIS option. A Port card was initialized for a certain type of card, but a different Port card is currently installed.

P_TYPE I_TYPE

NO_CARD

PORT

I_TYPE

NO_CARD I_TYPE

PORT

<>PORT I_TYPE

NO_CARD I_TYPE

DIAL# [5]

Any valid Numbering Plan dial #


Identifies the dial number assigned to the port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1) When PORT_DB# is not applicable for this port type, -- -- is displayed. 2) Entering an incorrect PORT_DB# displays an ERROR message.

Identifies the port database number assigned to the port.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VERS [7] Any type of Version number Identifies the version number of a keyset connected to the reported port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-61

Port List - Physical Location PLIS, 0 [0,2,0,0]

PORT_DB# [6] 0, see Table 6-7; 1: T1 Trunks

System

PI Reference Manual

NAME
SHORT (5) [8] Maximum of 5 ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK); CO trunks: CO-01..CO-jj DID trunks: DID00..DIDnn: where nn = number of DID trunks minus 1 All other port types: BLANK Defines the port short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters), which appears on keysets equipped with a display. A port name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FULL (16) [9] Maximum of 16 ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK); CO trunks: CO-01..CO-jj DID trunks: DID00..DIDnn: where nn = number of DID trunks minus 1 All other port types: BLANK Defines the port full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters), which appears on keysets equipped with a display. A port name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number. This name is used for the 1-SLT and 2-Keyset and Wireless entries of the systems Shared Directory (default feature code: #1994). Full Names defined as Blank are not copied to the Shared Directory. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Port List - Physical Location PLIS, 0 [0,2,0,0]


6-62

PI Reference Manual

System

Port List - Dial Numbers

W PLIS,

1 [0,2,0,1]

Port List parameters display or modify port information by first entering the port type, and then the port dial number. The port name, and the port database may be modified. After selecting Port List by dial number, the PI prompts for the type of port to be listed. By entering a number corresponding to the port type, a specific type of port may be selected, or all port types may be selected. Each port type is identified by a number as shown below; all ports may be listed by entering the word
ALL. 0 - Trunk 1 - SLT 2 - Keyset and Wireless 3 - DID 4 - Data 5 - Modem

(RMI:Ckt 3)(FlexiCom 200, IPx 500 or 8DRCM/8DRCF: Ckt 26)

6 - Page-RLY1 7 - Bell-RLY2

(RMI:Ckt 7)(FlexiCom 200, IPx 500 or 8DRCM/8DRCF:Ckt 23) (RMI:Ckt 8) (FlexiCom 200, IPx 500 or 8DRCM/8DRCF:Ckt 24)

8 - Relay-RLY3

(RMI:Ckt 9) (FlexiCom 200, IPx 500 or 8DRCM/8DRCF:Ckt 25) ALL (entire list)

In European systems, GID and ALS70-DID are displayed in the Trunk option-(0).

FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid Numbering Plan dial #, All Ranges Enter the range of the dial number assigned to the required ports; FROM the lowest port dial number TO the highest port dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TYPE [0]

Any Shared Service or Peripheral card type (see Table 6-7 and Table 6-8)
Identifies the Shared Service or Peripheral card type on which the port is located (for example, 4TEM, 8T-C, 8DRCF, WLESS for Wireless).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

>NOTE [1] This parameter appears when the condition of a card within a slot is valid, but not desirable.This condition can cause system problems and should be corrected as soon as possible. See Table 6-6 for more information concerning >NOTE.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-63

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]

System SHELF [2]

PI Reference Manual

0: 0..15: 1..3: 0..2: 0..15:

Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC); Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC) CSX 200 Coral IPx 500, 800 Coral IPx 3000, 4000

Identifies the shelf on which the port is located.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLOT [3]

1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC) 2..11: CSX 200 main cage (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: CSX 200 IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: CSX 200 IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Identifies the Slot (card) in which the port is located.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CKT [4]

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]


6-64

0 to n, where n = number of ports on card minus 1


Identifies the circuit (CKT) on the card associated with the port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PORT_DB# [5] 0, see Table 6-7; (1: T1 trunks)

1) When PORT_DB# is set to Not Applicable for this card type, -- -- is displayed. 2) Entering an incorrect PORT_DB# displays an ERROR message.

Identifies the port database number assigned to the port.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VERS [6] Any type of Version number Identifies the version number of a keyset connected to the reported port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

System

NAME [7]
SHORT Maximum of 5 ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK); CO trunks: CO-01..CO-jj DID trunks: DID00..DIDnn: where nn = number of DID trunks minus 1 All other port types: BLANK Defines the port short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters), which appears on keysets equipped with a display. A port name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FULL [8] Maximum of 16 ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK); CO trunks: CO-01..CO-jj DID trunks: DID00..DIDnn: where nn = number of DID trunks minus 1 All other port types: BLANK Defines the port full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters), which appears on keysets equipped with a display. A port name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number. This name is used for the 1-SLT and 2-Keyset and Wireless entries of the systems Shared Directory (default feature code: #1994). Full Names defined as Blank are not copied to the Shared Directory. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-65

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]

System

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-7: Summary of Ports and Card Types
Port
SLT - station SLT - station with Message Lamp SLT - station (LL) SLT - station SLT - station with Message Lamp SLT - station

Card Type
4/8/16 S 4/8/16 SH 16 SH 8/16/24 SLS

Port DB # Card DB# Range Range


N/A N/A N/A N/A 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3

Comments
Card Discontinued Card Discontinued Long Loop

8/16/24 SLS/H N/A 8/16/24 SLS-C N/A

8/16/24SLS card version 4.xx and higher is defined as 8/16/24SLS-C in P_Type. Also supports SLT-Caller ID feature. 8/16/24SLS card version 4.xx and higher. Also supports SLT-Caller ID feature and message waiting lamp.

SLT - station with Message Lamp

8/16/24 SLS/H-C

N/A

0-3

Magneto - station Wireless handset CoralAIR Wireless handset FlexAir EKT - station DKT/DST/GKT - station DKT/DST/GKT - station DKT/DST - station FlexSet/DKT/DST/GKT station

8SM 2/4SKW 8/16SKK 4/8SK 8/16 SKD 8/16/24 SDT 8SVD 8/16/24 SFT

N/A

0-2 Card Discontinued

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Card Discontinued Card Discontinued Card Discontinued Card Discontinued Supports FlexSet Universal Gateway-Supports IP Keysets. Media Gateway module piggybacks UGW. MG module initializes only after its MAC is defined to UGW. 24 KEYSET1 entries are allocated in SIzes for each iCMC, however, only CKTs 0 to 15, 17 &18 are used. CKTs 16, & 19-23 are not used and can be removed from the system database. Do not change CARD_DB#: ETSI

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]


6-66

IP Keyset station (FlexSet-IP UGW 280S)

iCMC

24SDT (I_type) 16ICMC/16 (P_Type for iCMC)

N/A

N/A

IPG

PRI30

N/A

See Table 6-9 for Coral FlexiCom 200 Port and Card Types; See Table 6-10 for Coral IPx 500 Port and Card Types

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-7: Summary of Ports and Card Types
Port
IPC/SFC IPC/uCMC ISDN - PRI trunk ISDN - PRI trunk ISDN - BRI trunk ISDN - BRI trunk DIGITAL - trunk DIGITAL - trunk DIGITAL - trunk DIGITAL - trunk Non-DID/DDI/DDO DIGITAL - trunk E&M Continuous DIGITAL - trunk DDI/DDO

System

Card Type
24SDT 24SDT PRI 23 PRI 30 4/8 TBR 8 TBRP $DPC T1 30T 30TE 30TE 30TM

Port DB # Card DB# Range Range


N/A N/A N/A N/A 0-3 0-3 N/A 0-3 0-3 0-1 0 0-1 N/A N/A 1 0 0-3 0-3 N/A 0-3 0-3 0-1 0-1 0-1

Comments

Do not change CARD_DB#: AT&T,4ESS Do not change CARD_DB#: ETSI

Supplies External Power Digital Protocol Converter North America only CEPT/E1 European systems only - E1 (30T/E) Port DB is not programmable.(30T/E) Master - E1(30T/M),30T/M variations, e.g.: 30T/M-BZL, 30T/M-PL, 30T/M-ARG, 30T/M-CHI,etc. Port DB is not programmable. 30T/M variations, e.g..: 30T/M-BZL, 30T/M-PL, 30T/M-ARG, 30T/M-CHI,etc.

DIGITAL - trunk E&M Continuous

30TM

0-1

E&M Pulsed trunk LS/GS - trunk LS/GS - trunk LS/GS - trunk LS/GS - trunk ALS70 - trunk ALS70 - trunk DID - trunk BID - trunk

4TEMP 4TMR 8T 4/8T-C 4/8T-CID 4ALS 8ALS 8DID 4BID

0-3 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-3 0-3 N/A 0-3

0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0 0

4TEM/S layout B & C 4TPF, 4TMR-PF 8TPF Includes Power Fail Includes Power Fail Supports Caller ID Holland: European systems only Holland: European systems only 8DID, 8DID/S Belgium DID: European systems only

See Table 6-9 for Coral FlexiCom 200 Port and Card Types; See Table 6-10 for Coral IPx 500 Port and Card Types

6-67

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]

E&M Continuous - trunk

4TEM

N/A

0-2

System

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-7: Summary of Ports and Card Types
Port
BID - trunk GID - trunk GID - trunk 4TWL

Card Type
8BID 4GID 8GID 4TWL

Port DB # Card DB# Range Range


0-3 0-3 0-3 0 0 0-3 0-3 0-3

Comments
Belgium DID: European systems only German DID: European systems only German DID: European systems only New Zealand & India: Two Way Loop (DID and DOD) Card Discontinued Card Discontinued CKT # 3: Card Discontinued CKT # 26 Public Address: CKT# 7: Card Discontinued Public Address: CKT# 23 Bell/UNA/Night Answer CKT# 8: Card Discontinued Bell/UNA/Night Answer: CKT# 24 Auxiliary or Alarm Rely: CKT# 9: Card Discontinued Auxiliary or Alarm Rely: CKT# 25 Two Multi-party Conference bridge (15-way) CKT #16 One Multi-party Conference bridge- 6-way Card Discontinued 4VSN card with software version 50.xx - field installable voice messages.

ASU card RMI card MODEM MODEM Page - RLY1 PAGE UNA/Bell - RLY2 UNA Relay - RLY3

ASU RMI RMI 8DRCM or 8DRCF RMI/ASU 8DRCM or 8DRCF RMI/ASU 8DRCM or 8DRCF RMI/ASU 8DRCM or 8DRCF CNF 8DRCM or 8DRCF 4VS 4VS

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]


6-68

Relay CONF CONF

DVMS - 4VS card DVMS - 4VSN card

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

See Table 6-9 for Coral FlexiCom 200 Port and Card Types; See Table 6-10 for Coral IPx 500 Port and Card Types

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-8: Shared Resources Service Cards - Summary Port
Tone Detector Tone Detector DTMF - Receivers DTMF - Receivers DTMF - Receivers C3WAY C3WAY MFR - card 4IAA - card Wireless - station iDSP

System

Card Type Port DB # Card DB# Range Range


8DTD 8DRCM or 8DRCF 4DTR 8DTR 8DRCM or 8DRCF CNF 8DRCM or 8DRCF 16MFR 8SD SKW iDSP N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 N/A N/A N/A 0 0 0 N/A N/A 0

Comments
8 Dial Tone Detectors: Card Discontinued 8 Dial Tone Detectors: CKT # 8-15 DTMF 4 receivers: Card Discontinued DTMF 8 receivers DTMF 8 receivers: CKT # 0-7 Eight 3-way conference/Silent Monitors (2-way) Six 3-way conference/Silent Monitors (2-Way): CKT # 17-22 MFC 16 receivers (for 8DID, 4/8BID, 30T, 30T/E, 30T/M and 30T/x) 4-Integrated Automated Attendants with software version 40.xx: Card Discontinued PLIS shows WLESS as station type: Card Discontinued PLIS shows iDSP/xxx where xxx is the number of FSK tone generators defined in N_CID_ON_IDSP_ CARD [34] on page 6-25.

See Table 6-9 for Coral FlexiCom 200 Shared Resources Service Cards.

6-69

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]

System

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-9: Coral FlexiCom 200-Base Unit: Port and Card Types Port Card Type Port DB # Range Card DB# Range
Comments

SLOT# 1, 2 & 3:
ISDN - BRI trunk ISDN - BRI trunk LS/GS - trunk LS/GS - trunk LS/GS - trunk LS/GS - trunk 4/8TBRsl, 4/8TBRipx 8TBRPsl, 8TBRPipx 4/8Tsl 4TMRsl 4/8TPFsl 0-3 0-3 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 Includes Metering Includes Power Fail Includes Metering & Power Fail Supplies External Power

4TMR-PFsl, 0-5 4TMR-PFsl-G, 4TMR-PF-Gipx, 4TMR-PFipx,


4TMR/S-12/16PF-Gipx,

LS/GS - trunk LS - trunk LS/GS - trunk 4TWL ISDN - PRI trunk ISDN - PRI trunk

4/8T-Csl, 4/8T-Cipx 4/8T-Cipx FJ 4/8T-CIDsl, 4/8T-CIDipx 4TWLsl, 4TWLipx PRI-23sl, PRI-23ipx PRI-30sl, PRI-30ipx 8SDT 8SDT 8SDT T1sl, T1ipx

0-5 0-5 0-5 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0-3

0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 1 0 N/A N/A N/A 0-3 0-3 0-2 N/A

Includes Power Fail Includes Power Fail Includes Power Fail Supports Caller ID New Zealand and India: Two Way Loop (DID & DOD) Do not change CARD_DB#: AT&T, 4ESS Do not change CARD_DB#: ETSI

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]


6-70

iVMFipx IPCipx/SFC IPCipx/uCMC DIGITAL - trunk DIGITAL - trunk E&M Cont. - trunk IP Keyset station (FlexSet-IP 280S)

North America only CEPT/E1

30Tsl, 30Tipx 0-3 4TEMsl, 4TEMipx UGWipx N/A N/A

Universal Gateway-Supports IP Keysets. Media Gateway module piggybacks UGW. MG module initializes only after its MAC is defined to UGW. Card Discontinued

Wireless handset CoralAIR Wireless handset FlexAir

2/4SKWsl 8SKKsl, 8SKKipx

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-9: Coral FlexiCom 200-Base Unit: Port and Card Types Port
Voice Mail iCMC-200 iCMCipx

System

Card Type Port DB # Range


24SDT (I_type) 16ICMC/08 (P_Type for iCMC-200) iVMFipx, uCMCipx N/A N/A

Card DB# Range

Comments
24 KEYSET1 entries are allocated in SIzes for each iCMC-200, however, only CKTs 0 to 15, 17 &18 are used. CKTs 16, & 19-23 are not used and can be removed from the system database.

Voice Mail

SLOT# 4 & 5:
SLT - station SLT - station 8/16SLSsl 8/16SLSsl N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A (Slot #4) 0-3 (Slot #5) SLT with Message Lamp Ckt # 0-7 (FlexSet/DKT/DST/GKT/APDL) Ckt # 8-15 (SLT)

FlexSet/DKT/DST/GKT 8/16SFTsl -station FlexSet/SLT/DKT/DST/ 8F8Ssl GKT - station

SHARED SERVICE CARDS (RESOURCE) MSBsl Components (SLOT #6)


MSBsl MODEM PAGE - RLY 1 UNA/BELL - RLY2 RELAY - RLY 3 CONF 4DRCM* MSBsl MSBsl MSBsl MSBsl CNSsl N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0 Used in ROW CKT=26 CKT=23 Public Address CKT=24 Bell/UNA Night Answer CKT=25 Auxiliary or Alarm Relay

*These cards are a composite unit of the following: D: 4 Dial Tone Detectors circuits (DTD) R: 4 DTMF Receivers circuits (DTR) C: CNSsl Card: CONF (one 6-Way CKT#16), C3WAY (six 3-Way) and Synchronization M: Remote Maintenance and Service (comparable to the RMI) Ckt 23: Page (RLY 1) Ckt 25: Relay (RLY 3) Ckt 24: Bell (RLY 2) Ckt 26: Modem

6-71

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]

CKT=16: One Multi-Party Conference bridge- 6-way

System
Table 6-10: Coral IPx 500: Port and Card Types Port Card Type Port DB # Range Card DB# Range

PI Reference Manual

Comments

SLT - station

8/16SLSipx jumper set to S 8/16SLSipx jumper set to SH

N/A

0-3

8/16SLS card version 4.xx and higher is defined as 8/16SLS-C in P_Type. Also supports SLT-Caller ID feature. 8/16SLS card version 4.xx and higher. Also supports SLT-Caller ID feature and message waiting lamp. Defined as 8/16SLS/H-C in P_Type when set to SH. Supports FlexSet/DKT/DST/GKT/APDL

SLT - station with Message Lamp

N/A

0-3

FlexSet/DKT/DST/GKT 8/16SFTipx - station ISDN - BRI trunk ISDN - BRI trunk LS/GS - trunk 4/8TBRipx 8TBRPipx

N/A 0-3 0-3

N/A 0-3 0-3 0-3

Supplies External Power Includes Metering & Power Fail

4TMR-PF-Gipx, 0-5 4TMR-PFipx,


4TMR/S-12/16PF-Gipx,

LS/GS - trunk LS - trunk LS/GS - trunk 4TWL ISDN - PRI trunk

4/8T-Cipx 4/8T-Cipx FJ 4/8T-CIDipx 4TWLipx PRI-23ipx PRI-30ipx T1ipx 30Tipx 4TEMipx UGWipx

0-5 0-5 0-5 0 N/A N/A 0-3 0-3 N/A N/A

0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 1 0 0-3 0-3 0-2 N/A

Includes Power Fail Includes Power Fail Includes Power Fail Supports Caller ID New Zealand and India: Two Way Loop (DID & DOD) Do not change CARD_DB#: AT&T,4ESS Do not change CARD_DB#: ETSI North America only CEPT/E1

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]


6-72

ISDN - PRI trunk DIGITAL - trunk DIGITAL - trunk E&M Cont. - trunk IP Keyset station (FlexSet-IP 280S)

Universal Gateway-Supports IP Keysets. Media Gateway module piggybacks UGW. MG module initializes only after its MAC is defined to UGW.

Wireless handset FlexAir Voice Mail iCMCipx

8SKKipx 24SDT (I_type) 16ICMC/08 (P_Type for iCMC-200) 8SDT N/A N/A 24 KEYSET1 entries are allocated in SIzes for each iCMC-200, however, only CKTs 0 to 15, 17 &18 are used. CKTs 16, & 19-23 are not used and can be removed from the system database. Voice Mail

iVMFipx

N/A

N/A

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-10: Coral IPx 500: Port and Card Types Port
IPCipx/SFC IPCipx/uCMC

System

Card Type
8SDT 8SDT

Port DB # Range
N/A N/A N/A N/A

Card DB# Range


Voice Mail Voice Mail

Comments

SHARED SERVICE CARDS (RESOURCES): 8DRCF* unit on motherboard (Shelf 0, Slot #13)
DTD DTMF MODEM PAGE - RLY 1 UNA/BELL - RLY2 RELAY - RLY 3 C3WAY CONF 8DRCF 8DRCF 8DRCF 8DRCF 8DRCF 8DRCF 8DRCF 8DRCF N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKTs 8-15 CKTs 0-7 CKT=26 CKT=23 Public Address CKT=24 Bell/UNA Night Answer CKT=25 Auxiliary or Alarm Relay CKTs 17-22: Six 3-Way CKT=16: One Multi-Party Conference Meet Me bridge- 6-way

SHARED SERVICE CARDS (RESOURCES): RMI-F unit on motherboard (Shelf 0, Slot #13) MSBipx Hardware Issue0200X1000 and above Available only with Coral Version 14.67xx and higher
MODEM PAGE - RLY 1 UNA/BELL - RLY2 RELAY - RLY 3 Music1/Music 2 RMI-F RMI-F RMI-F RMI-F RMI-F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A CKT=26 CKT=23 Public Address CKT=24 Bell/UNA Night Answer CKT=25 Auxiliary or Alarm Relay N/A

SHARED SERVICE CARDS (RESOURCES): URC2 unit on motherboard (Shelf 0, Slot #14)MSBipx Hardware Issue0200X1000 and above Available only with Coral Version 14.67xx and higher
DTR CONF (Meet Me) URC2 URC2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Ckt # 0 to 23 Ckt # 48 to 53 Each Meet-Me bridge circuit is a multi-party conf with a max of 14 mem Ckt # 56 to 79

C3WAY iDSP (CID) DTD

URC2 URC2 URC2

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

Ckt # 80 to 111

Ckt # 112 to 143

* 8DRCF, RMI-F and URC2 units must be installed for these ports to be defined in CLIS. The circuit definitions depend on the maximum number of ports defined for each URC resource in CDB, 11,1. For example, if only 5 DTMF receivers are defined in the cards current configuration, then only Circuits 0 to 4 are available for the DTMF receivers.

6-73

Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]

System

PI Reference Manual

Digital Port Bus List

W DLIS

[0,1,1]

The Digital Port List parameters identify individual digital ports on a Digital Terminal or Telephone Peripheral card: 8/16/24SFT, 8/16SFTipx, 8/16/24SFTcsx, 4S8Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, 8/16SFTsl, 8F8Ssl, 8/16/24SDT, 8/16SKD and 8SVD. To access the Digital Port List, enter the physical location of the port (Shelf, Slot, CKT). The cards contain eight, sixteen or twenty-four identical ports (CKTs) respectively, which provide a two-wire interface called UP0. The ports must be connected to external devices. Up to eight external devices can be connected to each digital port while the limit is 32 devices per card. Devices that can be connected and are available with this Coral Software version include FlexSet, GKT, DKT, DST and DPEM sets and CPA, APDL terminals. For more information about the physical installation, refer to the Coral Terminal Equipment - Installation Manual. The eight external devices relate to the port as if connected to a logical identification number. The ID numbers range from 0 to 7 in each port. ISDN convention stipulates that instead of having only one piece of equipment plugged into the ISDN phone line (point-to-point communication), the multi-drop feature allows connection of up to eight devices to each single ISDN line. FROM/TO SHELF# All available shelves 0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

1..3: CSX 200 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Enter the required range of shelf numbers, FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Digital Port Bus List DLIS [0,1,1]


6-74

PI Reference Manual FROM/TO SLOT# All Slots 1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

System

2..11: CSX 200 main cage (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: CSX 200 IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: CSX 200 IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Enter the required range of slot numbers; FROM the lowest slot number TO the highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM/TO CKT# Any valid CKT number, All Enter the required range of CKT numbers; FROM the lowest circuit number TO the highest circuit number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ID.

0..7
Identifies the logical location of the indicated P_Type and I_Type. Identifies the logical connection to the port. Every external device is logically connected to internal Bus UP0. A maximum of eight devices can be connected to one physical port where each device is associated with a different logical location. The logical locations are identified by numbers 0 to 7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

P_TYPE

See Table 6-11


Identifies the external device type which is currently installed and located in the designated ID.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-75

Digital Port Bus List DLIS [0,1,1]

System

PI Reference Manual I_TYPE Any external device type (see Table 6-11) or R(Remove) for --(No device) Identifies the external device type initialized (first time, the external device identified by the system - but not necessarily installed) in the designated ID. This field can be updated, even if the slot or port is currently empty, in order to assign the desired new device type.

1) To clear an empty ID., type R (Remove). 2) To assign an ID for a specific external device, although no device is physically installed, enter the device type according to the table listed below.

The following table describes the various options available for connecting external devices to a digital port. A maximum of eight external devices can be connected per port and defines the related ID# for the external device. The main operating device is always defined as ID# 0. The first DPEM is always defined as ID# 4. The second DPEM is always defined as ID# 5. The third DPEM is always defined as ID# 6. A single DPEM connected cannot be defined as ID# 0, 1, 2, 3 or 7.

Digital Port Bus List DLIS [0,1,1]


6-76

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-11: DLIS P_Type and I_Type ID# 0 I_type or P_type DKT1 DKT1N DKT1N* DKT2 DKT2N DKT2N* DKT3S DKT3S* DKT5S DKT5S* DST2 DSTN GKT 4 5 6 7 DPEM1 DPEM2 DPEM3 APA Devices DKT 1xxx FlexSet 120 / 120D FlexSet 120 / 120D Issue 10 or higher

System

The * indicates that the phone is based on a SCOUT unit. DKT 2xxx, iCMC, CPA FlexSet 280 / 280D / 280D-Z FlexSet 280 / 280D Issue 12 or higher The * indicates that the phone is based on a SCOUT unit. FlexSet 120S FlexSet 121S The * indicates that the phone is based on a SCOUT unit. FlexSet 280S FlexSet 281S The * indicates that the phone is based on a SCOUT unit. 2W-DIM, DST FlexSet 120L FlexSet 80S / 80P 1st DPEM (for DKT2xxx), 1st FlexSet 40B (for FlexSet 280x)

3rd DPEM (for DKT2xxx), 3rd FlexSet 40B (for FlexSet 280x) FlexSet 280S with APA or PEX+APA FlexSet APDL with APA or PEX+APA FlexSet 80S FlexSet 80P GKT 4320, GKT 4321 DKT 2322 DKT 2000 Series with APA DKT APDL

APA*

APDL/S The * indicates that the phone is based on a SCOUT unit.

6-77

Digital Port Bus List DLIS [0,1,1]

2nd DPEM (for DKT2xxx), 2nd FlexSet 40B (for FlexSet 280x)

System

PI Reference Manual

Tone Plan

W TON

[0,0,4,2]

The system Tone Plan includes 18 internal tones. These tones are programmed according to type, number of segments, Basic Tones and Basic Tone duration. Each tone can be defined as a combination of any of the basic tones. TONE # 1..23 (excluding: 8, 11, 14, 15) Defaults: See Tables 6-12 and 6-13 Identifies the name of the tone. The list of default tones is shown in Table 6-12. Special Tones for different countries are listed in Table 6-13. The various tone functions are described in Table 6-14.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NAME

See Tables 6-12 and 6-13


Displays the Tone Name. This name cannot be changed and is for display only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TYPE 1 (Continuous), 2 (Single Burst), 3 (Multi-Burst) See Tables 6-12 and 6-13 Defines the tone as continuous, single burst, or multi-burst. When the tone is defined as Continuous (i.e. TYPE=1), only the 1TN (see page 6-78) is used (2TN to 6TN are irrelevant because the tone is continuous).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

# SEG 0 (when TYPE, above, is set at 1) 1..6 (when TYPE, above, is set to 2 or 3) Defines the number of different segments for each single burst or multi-burst tone. A segment is defined by a Basic Tone frequency plus its tone duration. Only the required segments are displayed in Update Mode. For example, defining this parameter to three, causes the PI to display the next two parameters (TN and MS) three times, once for each segment.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]

TN 0..7, see Table 6-15 (1TN: Tone Segment 1 A maximum of 6 different segments can be defined, therefore, up to 6 different TN values can be defined, depending on what was defined in TYPE and # SEG. 6TN: Tone Segment 6) Each TN defines which Basic Tone frequency is being used for the current segment. There are eight Basic Tones (see Table 6-15) from which to choose. For example, enter 4 to choose Basic Tone 4 for the current segment. This defines the frequency for the Tone segment. The Tone duration, however, can be changed by using the next parameter, MS-TIME.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-78

PI Reference Manual MS - Time 0..5100 ms See Tables 6-12 and 6-13 for default tone durations and Table 6-15 for the Basic Tone (Tone 0 to Tone 7) Frequency Defines the duration of each Basic Tone segment in milliseconds.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

System

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No Sends the new tone configuration to the MSBsl/MSBipx/SVC24/HDC/32GC/4GC Control cards immediately. When No is entered, routine diagnostics periodically resend the tone plan to the card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-79

Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]

System
Table 6-12: Default Tone_Plan
Tone # NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Busy Dial Distinct. Reorder TYPE* #SEG 3 1 1 3 2 0 0 2 2 0 2 6 2 0 2 2 2 6 4 4 0 3 5 6 6 2 1

PI Reference Manual

1TN TIME** 2TN TIME 3TN TIME 4TN TIME 5TN TIME 6TN TIME 3 1 4 3 2 0 5 60 1 5 61 3 6 0 0 5 1 61 7 3 0 58 59 500 0 0 240 1000 0 60 100 100 0 2000 100 300 120 120 600 0 200 100 100 120 1640 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 3 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 500 0 0 240 3000 0 1000 100 100 0 0 100 100 80 80 5000 0 200 100 100 80 360 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 7 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 120 120 5000 0 200 100 100 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 80 80 5000 0 0 100 100 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 120 0 0 0 0 200 600 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5100 0 0 0 0 0 80 0 0 0 0 0 3000 80 0 0

Ringback 3 Silence Tick PL CWAIT Confirm BRK_ In/Out PL Conf V.P Conf 1 3 3 3 1 2 3

Z.P Warn 3 LCR_ expens LCR_ cheap 2 2

Call Wait 3 DISA dial 1 CCR WP 2nd R.back Speaker PL R.BACK PL Preempt 3 2 3 3 3 1

Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]


6-80

23 24 25

*TYPE Defintions: Type 1: Only the first basic tone (1TN) is used for a continuous tone. TIME is determined by the system according to the actual use of the tone. Type 2: The relevant basic tones are sounded in turn, only once. Type 3: The relevant basic tones are sounded cyclically, i.e.one after the other (1TN to 6TN and then beginning again with 1TN: (multi-burst). **TIME: milliseconds

See Table 6-13 for different tone values by country.

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-13: Default Tone Plan-Special Tones by Country TONE_PLAN
NO. NAME

System

TYPE #SEG 1TN TIME 2TN TIME 3TN TIME 4TN TIME 5TN TIME 6TN TIME

CC0:
5 8 11 24 25 Ringback PL CWAIT PL Conf PL R.BACK PL Preempt 3 3 2 2 6 2 2 60 61 2000 100 2000 0 0 0 4000 100 0 0 60 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 60 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 5100 0

TBD TBD CC2:

1 4 5 10 18

Busy Reorder Ringback

3 3 3

2 2 2 4 5

3 3 2 5 5

260 260 1000 500 200

0 0 0 0 0

260 260 4000 180 600

0 0 0 5 5

0 0 0 180 200

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 180 5000

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 5000

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

Break-In/Out 2 Call Wait 3

Eu1:
9 18 17 Confirm Call Wait DISA dial 3 3 1 2 6 0 1 5 7 40 200 0 0 0 0 40 2000 0 0 0 0 0 2000 0 0 0 0 0 2000 0 0 0 0 0 2000 0 0 0 0 0 2000 0

Eu2:
2 3 Dial Distinct. 3 3 6 6 1 4 180 180 0 0 180 180 1 4 180 180 0 0 180 180 1 4 180 180 0 0 1000 1000

Eu9:

3 4 5 6 10 18 19

Distinct. Reorder Ringback Silence

1 3 3 1

1 2 2 1 4 2 1

4 1 2 0 5 5 1

0 200 1000 0 200 200 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 200 4000 0 200 4900 0

0 0 0 0 5 0 0

0 0 0 0 200 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1400 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Break-In/Out 3 Call Wait DISA Dial 3 1

6-81

Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]

Dial

System
Table 6-14: Tone Functions Tone# 1 2 3 Tone Name Busy Dial Tone Function

PI Reference Manual

Informs the calling party that the called destination is busy. Informs a caller that dialing can take place. The tone is activated when offhook or by hands free dialing.

Distinctive Dial Informs the station user that certain features are in use at the station, for example: Call Forward All, Do Not Disturb, Messages, Secondary COS. (DDT) DDT is also used between patterns of digits when dialing certain types of
features, such as Account Code or Routing Access. This tone is also sounded during a call after a Hookflash signal.

4 5 7

Reorder Ringback Tick

Informs a calling party that the call was intercepted because of either a misdial or an illegal attempt to access a facility that was blocked by COS definition. Informs the calling party that the designated station is ringing. Informs a station user that the system is waiting for additional digits to be dialed. This tone is heard by the called party to indicate that an MLPP call with equal precedence is currently waiting to be answered. This tone is heard only when the called station is set as a Multi-Appearance station. Informs a station user that a feature was successfully activated. Informs two parties engaged in a conversation that a third party is breaking in or is leaving the call. Also informs parties engaged in a conference call that additional user joins or leaves the call. MLPP Conference Tone. This tone is currently not used.

8 MLPP Call CC0 Only Wait 9 10 Confirmation Break-In/Out

11 PL CONF CC0 Only 12 and 13 Voice/Zone

Informs station users that Voice/Zone Paging is in progress.

Informs a calling station about the outgoing type of route cost selected by 17 and 16 Routing Expense/Chea the System Routing. p

18 19 20

Called Waiting Informs a station user engaged in a call that another call is waiting for the
user.

DISA Dial Collect Call Reject (CCR)

Informs a remote access party that dialing can take place. Instructs the operator to reject the collect call request.

Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]


6-82

21 22

Whisper Page Informs one party during a conversation that a Whisper Page is about to be received from a third party. The second party does not hear the tone. (WP) Second Ringback (2nd R.back) Speaker
When a caller waits for a port currently engaged in a call, he/she will hear a 2nd ringback tone. This tone notifies the caller that the station is currently busy. When the called party disconnects, the waiting call rings next at the destination. Receive Speaker Status Tone. This tone indicates whether the second party (called or calling) has the speaker turned on. This tone is heard immediately when the call is answered. MLPP Ringback Tone. This tone is heard by the calling party who is waiting to be answered by the called party currently engaged in an MLPP call with equal precedence. MLPP Preemption Tone. This tone is heard by the called party to indicate that an MLPP call will immediately preempt the call.

23

24 PL R.BACK CC0 Only 25 PL Preempt CC0 Only

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-15: Basic Tones (in Hz)-By Country Codes Country Code CC0*, CC4 CC1,CC7, CC9, CC10 Eu4, Eu5 CC2, CC3, CC5 CC6 CC8 Eu0 Eu1 Eu2, Eu3 Eu6, Eu7 Eu8 Eu9 Basic Tone # 0
0 Hz

System

7
0

60
0

61

350/440 440/480 480/620 480 440

1000 400

0 Hz

350/440 440

440

440 440

1000 400

780/540 660/540

0 Hz

420

420

420

420 420

1000 420

780/540 660/540

0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz

450

450

450

450 450 420 400 520 420 420 420 530 420 420 420 420 420 420 420

1000 450 1000 420

780/540 660/540 780/540 660/540 0 0 0

420/370 420/370 400 420 420 420 420 420 420 420 420 420 420 420

1000 1170 0 1000 1170 0 1000 400 1000 420 0

400/450 420 420 420 420

780/540 660/540 0 0

1000 1170 0 1000 400 0

350/420 420

In CC0 systems these tones are coded using M-Law. All other systems use A-Law (see M_LAW [4] on page 6-42).

6-83

Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]

System

PI Reference Manual

Ringers

W RPS

[0,0,4,3]

Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 and FlexiCom 5000, 6000 Systems Only The parameters for this branch are configured differently for the two different types of systems: See IPx 800, 3000 or 4000 Configuration to define the PS Ringers for IPx systems. See FlexiCom 5000 or 6000 Configuration to define the PS Ringers for FlexiCom systems.

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]


6-84

PI Reference Manual

System

IPx 800, 3000 or 4000 Configuration


This branch is relevant only for Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 systems where the PS19 DC-D specifically supports SLT cards on two shelves. This branch is not relevant for Coral IPx systems using the PS19 DC and PS19 AC, in which case, the Coral defaults are applicable. The PS19 DC-D may be installed on every shelf or every two shelves. Based on its hardware configuration, it supplies power to the shelves in the following manners:
System Power Mode Normal Power Peripheral Shelf Hardware Configuration Use this branch to distribute MAX_RING [0]* among:

One PS19 DC or PS19 AC supports each shelf. every system shelf. NO hard wire connection is possible between two shelves in this mode.

Double Power

One PS19 DC-D is installed on each shelf.


AND

each shelf.

NO H719 DC-D hard wire connection exists between the shelves. Economical One PS19 DC-D is installed in one shelf supporting two shelves by using an H719 DC-D hard wire connection between the two adjacent shelves. One PS19 DC-D is installed on each shelf
AND

both shelves.

Redundant

both shelves.

an H719 DC-D connects two adjacent shelves, thereby enabling redundancy in case one PS fails.
*

MAX_RING [0] (page 6-16) defines the maximum number of SLTs that can simultaneously ring per one or two Shelves depending on the hardware configuration.

FROM/ 0..2 (IPx 800); 15 (IPx 3000, 4000); TO 0..15 SHELF# Enter the required shelf number range to display or update, that carry SLS cards, FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RINGER # 0..2 (IPx 800); 0..15 (IPx 3000, 4000); Default: See Table 6-16 for IPx systems Defines the shelf number in which there is a PS unit that supplies power to the current SHELF# (i.e. the one chosen in the parameter FROM/ TO SHELF# above).

6-85

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]

System

PI Reference Manual Different shelves defined with the same RINGER # cause MAX_RING [0] to be distributed among all the shelves that share the same RINGER # definition.

! !

During installation, inspect the physical setup of the Power Supply Units and update the Ringer PS table accordingly. Otherwise, SLTs on some shelves may not be able to ring or some calls may not processed. Do not define the same PS Ringer Shelf # for more than two shelves.

Table 6-16: Defaults for Coral IPx Systems


Shelf # 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15

Ringer P. S. 0 located on Shelf #

By default, MAX_RING [0] (page 6-16) is distributed per shelf, thereby supporting the Normal Power and Double Power mode.

r r

Do not change these defaults for the Normal and Double Power modes. For Redundancy or Economical power, these defaults must be modified to reflect the actual hardware setup, thereby ensuring maximum and efficient use of the Ringer Power Supplies (see Figure 6-1).

Use the following sketches to determine how to define Ringer # for each shelf in a Coral IPx system based on the system hardware setup.

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]


6-86

PI Reference Manual
Figure 6-1. IPx Ringer PS Configurations

System

PS19 DC-D

Shelf# X

Max_Ring
Shelf# Y

Double Power:
Shelf #: X PS Ringer: X Y Y (Coral Default)

PS19 DC-D

Max_Ring

The PS Ringer defaults for IPx systems is set for Double Power systems.

PS19 DC-D

Max

Shelf# X

_Ri

Economical:

Shelf# Y

ng

Shelf #: X PS Ringer: X

Y X

Max
PS19 DC-D

Shelf# X

_Ri

Economical:

Shelf# Y

ng

Shelf #: X PS Ringer: Y

Y Y

Redundant:
PS19 DC-D

Max

Shelf# X

Shelf #: X PS Ringer: Y

Y Y

_Ri

PS19 DC-D

Shelf# Y

ng

or
Shelf #: X PS Ringer: X Y X

!
l l l l

Caution! For Economical and Redundant Systems: The PS Ringer Coral default should be changed to avoid a PS overload which may prevent some SLTs from ringing or prevent dialing.

6-87

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]

System

PI Reference Manual

FlexiCom 5000 or 6000 Configuration


The Coral FlexiCom 5000 or 6000 uses RPS Power Supplies to supply ring to the SLS cards that support SLTs in their systems. The configurations are made per Peripheral Shelf Unit (even numbered shelf and its odd numbered shelf). The Peripheral Shelf Units include a built-in hard wire connection between the even and its odd shelf. There is no option for hard wire connections between even numbered peripheral shelves or between odd numbered shelves. The RPS units can be installed in any of the following manners:
System Power Mode Economical Peripheral Shelf UNIT: Hardware Configuration One RPS is installed in the even shelf and supports the even and odd shelves concurrently. Use this branch to distribute MAX_RING [0]* among: both shelves of the Peripheral Shelf Unit.

Redundant Even Shelves Only


*

One RPS is installed on the even both shelves of the Peripheral Shelf Unit. shelf and one on the odd shelf. One RPS is installed per even each EVEN shelf. shelf AND no odd shelves exist in the system.

MAX_RING [0] (page 6-16) defines the maximum number of SLTs that can simultaneously ring per one or two Shelves depending on the hardware configuration. FROM/ 0..15 TO 0..15 SHELF# Enter the required shelf number range to display or update, that carry SLS cards, FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RINGER # 0..15; Default: See Table 6-17 for FlexiCom systems

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]


6-88

Defines the shelf number in which there is an RPS unit that supplies power to the current SHELF# (i.e. the one chosen in the parameter FROM/ TO SHELF# above). Different shelves defined with the same RINGER # cause MAX_RING [0] to be distributed among all the shelves that share the same RINGER # definition.

! !

During installation, inspect the physical setup of the Power Supply Units and update the Ringer PS table accordingly. Otherwise, SLTs on some shelves may not be able to ring or some calls may not processed. Do not define the same PS Ringer Shelf # for more than two shelves.

PI Reference Manual
Table 6-17: Defaults for FlexiCom Systems
Shelf # 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 12 13 12

System

14 12

15 12

Ringer P. S. 0 located on Shelf #

By Coral default, MAX_RING [0] (page 6-16) is distributed over every 4 shelves. Therefore if MAX_RING [0] is set to 20, only 20 SLTs of all the SLTs installed on shelves 0 to 3 may ring simultaneously.

These defaults must be modified to reflect the actual hardware setup thereby ensuring maximum and efficient use of the Ringer Power Supplies.

For example: If an RPS on shelf# 0 supports shelves# 0 and #1, while an RPS on shelf #2 supports shelves #2 and #3, the table should be updated as follows:
Shelf # Ringer P. S. (located on Shelf #) 0 0 1 0 2 2 3 2

See Figure 6-2 for examples showing how to define the Ringer PS for the different FlexiCom Power Modes.

6-89

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]

System
Figure 6-2. FlexiCom Ringer PS Configurations
RPS

PI Reference Manual

Max

Shelf# 0

_Ri

Economical:

Shelf# 1

ng

Shelf #: 0 PS Ringer: 0

1 0

2 2

3 2

Max
RPS

Shelf# 0

_Ri

Economical:

Shelf# 1

ng

Shelf #: 0 PS Ringer: 1

1 1

2 3

3 3

Redundant:
RPS

Max
RPS

Shelf# 0

Shelf #: 0 PS Ringer: 1

1 1

2 3

3 3

_Ri

Shelf# 1

ng

or
Shelf #: 0 PS Ringer: 0 1 0 2 2 3 2

RPS

Shelf# 0

Max_Ring
RPS Shelf# 2

Even Shelves Only:


Shelf #: 0 PS Ringer: 0 1 2 NA 2 3 NA

Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]


6-90

Max_Ring
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NA: Since there is no odd shelf, then the definition for the odd shelves are irrelevant.

PI Reference Manual

System

Reserved Links

W LINK
Coral FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V (SVC) Systems Only

[0,0,4,4]

The maximum amount of reserved links allowed for the combined total of DID and TRUNKS, cannot exceed 64. However, the sum can be less than 64. For example, if DID equals 30, then TRUNKS can be no greater than 34.

DID 0..64 Defines the number of links reserved for DID trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TRUNK 0..64 Defines the number of links reserved for LS/GS and E&M trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UPDATE? Yes/No Allows backing out of the proposed change. Enter Yes to reserve the modified link. Enter No to ignore any entries made in the current session and to retain the previously programmed system links.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

6-91

Reserved Links LINK [0,0,4,4]

System

PI Reference Manual

Reserved Links LINK [0,0,4,4]


6-92

Class of Service
This chapter describes all Class of Service (COS) parameters. The COS types are listed below along with the page number where their descriptions appear:

Station and Trunk COS ................................................................................7-2 Attendant Class of Service .........................................................................7-28 Tenant Class of Service ..............................................................................7-37 Class of Service is assigned throughout the system and determines the features that stations, trunks, attendant console, tenant and Routing Access can access. All the system ports are normally assigned their Primary (main) Class of Service. Stations, however, may be assigned a different Class of Service (secondary) during night service or after COS Change has implemented a feature. Class of Service also applies to trunks. They are assigned a single class of service which remains in effect for both Night or Day modes. Trunks cannot be defined as an attendant. The number of available COS tables is defined in SIZES (see page 4-11).

Notes: COS COS COS COS #1 default is initialized for stations defined as attendant. #10 default is initialized for trunks. #11 default is initialized for DID trunks. #0, and COS #2-9 default is initialized for stations.

7-1

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

Station and Trunk COS

W COS,0

[0,0,2,0]

Establishes the basic Class of Service table for all stations and trunks. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

The Hunt Group COS is always determined by the COS defined for the first member of the Group.

FROM/TO COS# 0 to maximum number defined in Sizes, see COS on page 4-11 All Enter the required COS numbers FROM the lowest TO the highest COS number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NAME (16) [1] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK) Defines the COS name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters). Use the COS name to indicate what it restricts, for example, MANAGERS Only, or NO_INTL_ CALLS. A name defined as BLANK displays only the COS number. Use _ (underscore) for space. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-2

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service

TOLL_BAR The following three options apply to stations and incoming trunks when making
external calls: DIGIT_ANLS [2] Pass (P), Block (B), Check (C)

Applies only to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls.

Digit Analysis determines the toll barrier digits condition as follows: Pass: All outgoing calls are released without toll barrier checks. Block: All outgoing calls are blocked. Check: Check the information of the toll barrier digits based on the elements in the pattern table as determined by the next two parameters: NO_MATCH (P/B) [3] & PTRN_TABLE (0-7) [4].
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NO_MATCH (P/B) [3] Pass (P), Block (B)

Applies only to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls.

Defines when the default toll barrier condition passes or blocks digits. This option is relevant when the dialed number does not match one of the ranges defined in Toll Barriers (see Chapter 13).

Relevant only when Check (C) is entered in the DIGIT_ANLS [2] above.

Pass: All digits will be passed except those Blocked in toll barrier elements. Block: All digits will be blocked except those Passed in toll barrier elements.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PTRN_TABLE (0-7) [4] 0..7

Choose a pattern table (0-7) for this COS. The pattern tables are defined in Toll Barriers. See SELECT PTRNS on page 13-2.

r
l l l l

Relevant only when Check (C) is entered for the DIGIT_ANLS parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-3

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Applies only to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

TK_GRPS/ROUTING Any valid trunk group(s) or Routing Access code(s) or ( ) None; ACCESS [5] First 4 trunk groups and the first Routing Access number Identifies the Trunk Groups and Routing Access which may be used for outgoing calls when this COS is defined for the Station or Trunk. Enter information under the display line.
l l l

To add a single number or more, enter: (A, number 1, number 2,...) To remove a single number or more, enter: (R, number 1, number 2,...) To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

F.A.C_TK_ GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [6]

Any valid trunk group(s) and/or Routing Access code(s) or ( ) None


Forced Account Code Trunk Groups and Routing Access allows dialing defined Trunk Groups and Routing Access only after dialing an Account Code. Trunk Group and Routing Access numbers are entered between parenthesis, with each group separated by commas or spaces. ACCT [56] (page 7-16) must be set to Yes. Enter information under the display line.
l l l

To add number(s), enter: (A, number, number 2,...) To remove number(s), enter: (R, number, number 2,...) To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

F.A.C_DIAL_SERVICE Any valid Dial Service number or ( ) None [7] Defines whether or not the port user is required to enter an Account Code when using the dial service/s specified in this entry. ACCT [56] on page 7-16 must be defined as Yes. To enable emergency (E911) dialing without entering an Account Code, define a Routing Access with several Dial Services to reach the PSTN, where one Dial Service is for emergency calls and does not require an Account Code. The other trunk groups in the Dial Services can be defined to require an Account Code by defining them in the above parameter F.A.C_TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [6]. This procedure enables avoiding the necessity to define required Account Codes for Routing Access.

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-4

This parameter is enabled only when DIRECT_DIALING_ON_DIAL_SERVICE [60] (page 7-17) is set to Yes.

Example:
9 is the Routing Access
7020, 7021 and 7022 are the Dial Services used to access the PSTN, that require an Account Code. 7029 is a Dial Service for E911 calls. 81, 82, 83, and 89 are the respective trunk groups.

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service Therefore, 81, 82, 83 should be defined in the above F.A.C_TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [6] parameter. Trunk Group 89 should not be included.
This parameter F.A.C_DIAL_SERVICE, should include the 7020, 7021 and 7022 Dial Services. The 7029 dial service should not be included in this parameter.

Enter information under the display line.


l l l

To add number(s), enter: (A, number, number 2,...) To remove number(s), enter: (R, number, number 2,...) To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ROOM_STATUS [8] All possibilities between 0 and 15, inclusive, combination of any digits, Any SAU Requirement number between 0 and 15 or ( ) for None Defaults: COS 0-9: (0..15) COS 10,12-249: (2) COS 11: ( ) None Defines which Room Status or User Canned messages (see Chapter16 - Room Status) are accessible by the station. Room Status and User Canned Messages are mutually exclusive such that the system can only support one of these features. Each feature requires Authorization, however, the system defaults to the Room Status Feature. To change this default, USER_CANNED_MESSAGES [16] (page 6-20) must be set to Yes in the system Station Options branch (SFE,2). If no Authorization exists when dialing the Room Status/Message code, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station users keyset. Room Status/Canned Message numbers are entered between parentheses, with the numbers separated by a comma or spaces. Enter information under the display line.

CALL DURATION LIMIT: TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [9]

Any valid trunk group(s) and/or Routing Access code(s) or ( ) None


Ensures a maximum duration for outgoing calls initiated by trunks, trunk groups and routing access listed here. The call duration is quantified in CALL_DURATION_ LIMIT [25] (page 6-6) in the Feature Timers [FE.T] branch. Enter information under the display line.
l l l

To add number(s), enter: (A, number, number 2,...) To remove number(s), enter: (R, number, number 2,...) To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-5

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Corresponding default feature dial numbers: 7026 to 7041

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

CALL_DURATION_ Any valid Dial Service number or ( ) None LIMIT: Ensures a maximum duration for outgoing calls initiated by the dial services listed DIAL_SERVICE [10] here. The call duration is quantified in CALL_DURATION_LIMIT [25] (page 6-6) in the Feature Timers [FE.T] branch.Enter information under the display line.
l l l

To add number(s), enter: (A, number, number 2,...) To remove number(s), enter: (R, number, number 2,...) To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1=BROKER, 2=CONSULT, 4=3-WAY, 5=ALL, 6=Continuous Conf [11]

1 (Broker Service), 2 (Consultation Call), 4 (Three-Way Conference), 5 (Combination of Consultation/Broker/Three-Way Conference Call) 6 (Continuous Conference Feature) COS 0-9,11: 4 COS 10, 12-249: 2
Each station/trunk can be set-up to use only one of the three-party features. This parameter defines which multi-party function is available by the station or E&M trunk. Choose 1 to define the station/port three-way party connection as a broker, i.e. when a third party is added to the line, transfer can be used to switch between parties any number of times, but no 3-way conversation is possible. Choose 2 to define the station/port three-way party connection as a consultation call, i.e., converse with a third party while the second party is on hold. Returning to the second party causes the third party to be disconnected. iVMFipx card ports must have this parameter set to 2, Consultation. To enable live record via voice mail systems, (IPC/SFC or IPC/uCMC) card ports must set this parameter to 2, Consultation.

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-6

Choose 4 to define the station/port three-way party connection as a 3-way conversation, i.e. a third party can be added to the existing 2 party call. Choose 5 to allow the user to change a conversation from broker to consultation to three- way conference by pressing the transfer key while in conversation. The first transfer allows the user to converse privately with a third party. The second transfer allows the user to speak privately with the original party, while the third party is put on hold. The third transfer places the user in a three-way conversation with all parties. Choose 6 to allow the user to migrate from 3-Way conference calls to multi-party conference calls (up to 6/15 members, depending on system hardware) where anyone of the original 3 members can add additional conference participants and have other conference features enabled (join parties or release last party).

r
l l l l

When choosing 6, Continuous Conference, it is advisable to reserve conference circuits for regular conference calls. See CIRCUIT_RESERVED [2] (page 23-5) in PDB,3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual BREAK_IN [12] Yes/No; COS 0, 2-249: No COS 1: Yes

Class of Service

Defines whether or not a station user, or incoming E&M trunk, is allowed to breakin to an existing call on a non-Data Secure line. (A warning tone is sounded before break-in.) Corresponding default feature dial number: #124 or hookflash-3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SILENT_MON [13] Yes/No SAU Requirement Silent Monitoring defines whether or not a station user, or E&M trunk, is allowed to monitor any connected system port, station, trunk, conversation in any state without either monitored party receiving audio or visual warning. When SPLIT MONITOR (page 3-10) is authorized with SAU, then this parameter also enables the COS authorized user to monitor only one side of the conversation at a time (default feature dial number: #1448). For 2-way monitoring, (default feature dial number: #1981), a 8DRCM, 8DRCF, CNF, CNSsl for most systems or URC2 in the Coral IPx 500 systems card must be installed. When the CNF card is installed, it must be defined as C3WAY in Card List (see Chapter 6). Corresponding default feature dial number: #1981 Silent Monitor (2-Way) #1448 Split Silent Monitor (1-Way)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Silent Monitoring Deny defines whether or not a station user or E&M trunk, is protected against other users from monitoring its calls by using either the Silent Monitor (2-Way) or Split Silent Monitor (1-Way) feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DND/DATA SEC. Yes/No OVERRIDE [15] COS 0, 2-249: No COS 1: Yes Do Not Disturb and Data Secure Line Override defines whether or not a station user, or E&M trunk, is allowed to break into an existing data secured call, and override a Do Not Disturb condition at the called station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-7

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

SILENT_MON_DENY Yes/No; [14] COS 0-9: Yes (Protected), COS 10-249: No (Not Protected)

Class of Service CF_BUSY INT/EXT Yes/No [16] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

PI Reference Manual

Call Forward If Station Is Busy defines whether or not a station user can forward all the stations calls to another destination determined by the station user when user station is busy. Corresponding default feature dial number: #140 and #17701.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CF_ALL INT/EXT [17] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Call Forward All Calls defines whether or not a station user can forward all his calls to another destination determined by the station user. Corresponding default feature dial number: #141 and #17702.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CF_BSY+NA INT/EXT Yes/No [18] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Call Forward If Busy Or Not Answered defines whether or not a station user can forward his calls to another destination determined by the station user when the user station is busy or unanswered. Corresponding default feature dial number: #147 or #2, and #17705.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CF_NO_ANS INT/EXT Yes/No [19] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Call Forward If No Answer defines whether or not a station user can forward his calls to another destination determined by the station user if the user station is not answered. Corresponding default feature dial number: #142 and #17703.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

TIMED_FWD INT/EXT Yes/No [20] Defines whether or not a station user can forward his calls to another destination according to system-wide periods. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1985 and #17703.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FOLLOW_ME INT/EXT Yes/No [21] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a station user can collect all calls from another station. Corresponding default feature dial number: #189 and #17713.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-8

PI Reference Manual CF_UNDEF [22] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Class of Service

Call Forward Undefined defines whether or not a station user can define a call forward destination for all calls to the users destination when the users phone is in an Undefined state: i.e., SLTs connected to extracted line card, unplugged Keysets, IP ports with Network or UGW faults. Corresponding default feature dial number: #17717.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DONT_DIST [23] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Do Not Disturb defines whether or not a station user can activate the Do Not Disturb (block incoming calls) feature. DONT_DIST changes to ATTENDED/UNATTENDED when the user is defined as an Attendant. Corresponding default feature dial number: #145.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DND_WP [24] Yes/No Do Not Disturb-Whisper Page defines whether or not a station user can activate the DND_WP feature thus preventing other users from whispering to their station while engaged in conversation. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1745.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIAL_LOCK [25] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a station user can lock the telephone in order to prevent unauthorized station use. Both the keypad and the programmable keys are locked, thus preventing outgoing calls. Incoming calls are still allowed. The telephone can be unlocked by entering the dial lock feature code and telephone passcode. Corresponding default feature dial number: #148.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COS_CHANG [26] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Change Class Of Service defines whether or not a station user can change his station COS between primary/secondary classes. Corresponding default feature dial number: #149.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-9

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Class of Service REMINDER [27] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not a station user can use the REMINDER feature (station rings at the user-selected time). Corresponding default feature dial number: #172.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAKEUP [28] Yes/No SAU Requirement COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a station user can use the WAKEUP feature (station rings at the user-selected time). If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station users keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #173.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MESSAGE [29] Yes/No COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No Defines whether or not a station user, or E&M trunk, may leave a message indication at a destination station, where the destination is a keyset or an SLT equipped with a message waiting lamp. Corresponding default feature dial number: #175 or hookflash-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CAMP_ON [30] Yes/No COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No Defines whether or not a station user can camp on (queue to) to a busy station, non-answering station and busy outside line. After dialing the camp-on feature code (while hearing the busy, or no-answer tone), the call is disconnected. The calling station rings when the called station is no longer busy or the non-answering station becomes active. This feature is also known as Call Back. Corresponding default feature dial number: #176 or hookflash-2.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

CAMP_OFFHK [31] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Camp-On While Offhook defines whether or not an offhook station user, or incoming E&M trunk, may camp-on to a busy station by hookflashing (or dialing XFER) followed by dialing 8 and remaining offhook. When a dialed station is busy, the calling party may send a call-waiting tone to indicate that his/her call is waiting. The calling party then hears a ringback tone

7-10

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service (see ORIGINATOR_CALL_WAITING_TO [2] on page 6-42 to see which ringback tone the caller hears). This feature is also known as Call Offer. Corresponding default feature dial number: hookflash (or Transfer)-8.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

EXEC_PRIV [32] Yes/No; COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No CC1 (Israel): COS 0-9: No Executive Privilege defines whether or not a station user, or trunk may temporarily transfer all special features from his/her station to be temporarily used at another station. (Once the station goes on-hook, the temporary change is canceled.) IRSS (Freedom) To enable IRSS calls from non-Coral destinations which do not possess a Caller ID (ANI) number, a special DID dial number used to activate the Executive Privilege must be defined in the NPL for use with those IRSS destinations (the special dial number must be defined with the Executive Privilege Feature Code Index (80), so that when the user calls this number from an off-site destination, the Executive Privilege feature is automatically activated to enable the IRSS call. The Coral station must have its COS defined with Executive Privilege set to Yes. Corresponding default feature dial number: #170.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PASS_CHNG [33] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Corresponding default feature dial number: #179.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNA_PICKUP [34] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Bell / UNA Pickup defines whether or not a station user can pick up a central bell or Universal Night Answer (UNA) call by dialing the Night Answer code. Corresponding default feature dial number: #192 or 78.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-11

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Passcode Change defines whether or not a station user can change the 4 digit station passcode.

Class of Service DIRECTED_PICKUP Yes/No; [35] COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not a station user, or trunk, can answer any ringing station by first dialing the directed Pickup code and then dialing the ringing stations number. Corresponding default feature dial number: #180 or 77.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GROUP_PICKUP [36] Yes/No; COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No Defines whether or not a station user can answer any ringing station in his own user group, by dialing the Group Pickup code. Corresponding default feature dial number: #181 or 76.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PARK [37] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a station user can park an established call and then retrieve the call from any system station. Corresponding default feature dial number: #183 or #7 or 79.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOLD [38] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-12

Defines whether or not a station user can place a call on hold. Corresponding default feature dial number: #171 or #4.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIVACY [39] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Boss Group Privacy defines whether or not a station user can activate the Boss Group Privacy feature to prohibit another group member from joining an in-progress call. Corresponding default feature dial number: #186 or #6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual EXCL_HOLD [40] Yes/No; COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No

Class of Service

Exclusive Hold defines whether or not a station user can activate the Boss Group Exclusive Hold in order to prohibit a call that has been placed on hold by the user station, from being retrieved by another group member. Corresponding default feature dial number: #187.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

V_PAGE [41] Yes/No; COS 0-10, 12-249: Yes COS 11: No Defines whether or not a station user can voice page a keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #191 or hookflash-6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WHISPER_PAGE [42] Yes/No Defines whether or not a station user can use the Whisper page feature. When set to Y, the station can page one party of an ongoing conversation. The party on the other end of the ongoing conversation does not hear the whisper page. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1744.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RELAY [43] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Corresponding default feature dial number: 7086.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UNA [44] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a station user, or trunk, can access UNA/Bell, RLY2, (CKT8 on the RMI/ASU or CKT 24 on the 8DRCM/8DRCF and FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500). Corresponding default feature dial number: 7050.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-13

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Defines whether or not a station user can switch an RMI/ASU/8DRCM/8DRCF relay ON or OFF in order to activate external devices or accessories (RLY3, CKT9 on the RMI/ASU or CKT 25 on the 8DRCM/8DRCF and FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500).

Class of Service MODEM [45] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not a station user, or trunk, can dial the MODEM, CKT3 on the RMI/ASU or CKT 26 on the 8DRCM/8DRCF and FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500. Corresponding default feature dial number: 7070.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PAGE [46] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Public Address defines whether or not a station user can activate the RMI/ASU/8DRCM/8DRCF (RLY1, CKT7 on the RMI/ASU or CKT 23 on the 8DRCM/8DRCF and FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500) page loudspeaker, typically used for the public address system.

RMI: This option is relevant only when a second music source is not connected to MP-2.

Corresponding default feature dial number: 7074.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CONF [47] Yes/No

Not relevant for Group Calls.

Defines whether or not a station user, or trunk, can use the Join a Meet-Me Conference or Progressive Add-On conference features. Corresponding default feature dial number: 7098.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CONF_RELEASE [48] Yes/No

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-14

Not relevant for Group Calls.

Defines whether or not a station user, or E&M trunk, is allowed to release conference participants from an ongoing regular Meet-Me conference. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1983..
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CONF_LOCK [49] Yes/No

Not relevant for Group Calls.

Defines whether or not a keyset station user is allowed to block a potential user from joining an ongoing regular Meet-Me conference. This parameter has no effect on Group Calls. See LOCK ACTIVE GROUP CALL (page 10-30) for blocking non-registered members from joining an ongoing Group Call. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1441.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service

LARGE_CONF_ Yes/No FORC_REL [50] Defines whether or not an idle station user is allowed to force release a single participant from an ongoing Group Call (or chained Group Call). This parameter must be set to Yes for COS defined Group Call Operators to operate the release member from an active group call (default feature code #1305). Corresponding default feature dial numbers: Any idle station user can release member: #1446 Group Call Operator: Release member from within Group Call: #1305.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GROUP_CALL_ Yes/No RELEASE_ALL [51] Defines whether or not a user is allowed to terminate (disconnect) an entire Group Call (all the chained Group Calls or just one of the Group Calls in the chain). Corresponding default feature dial number: #1447.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GROUP_CALL_ Yes/No OPERATOR [52] r Keysets Only Stations defined with this COS are able to define themselves or others as the Group Call Operator. The group call operator may mute members or give speaking permission add/release members from an ongoing group call define another keyset station user (instead of the current operator) as the group call operator from within the ongoing group call.

Corresponding default feature dial numbers:#17716: Define Operator


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ADD_ON_ Yes/No CONFERENCE [53] Defines whether or not a station user is allowed to establish a temporary Group Call. The Group Call being used for this purpose must have the ADD_ ON (page 10-29) parameter set to Yes. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1449.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-15

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

The Group Call operator can also be defined via the PI database in the CALL branch, see GROUP OPERATOR (page 10-30).

Class of Service DVMS [54] Yes/No COS 0-9 = Yes; COS 10-249 = No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not a station user, or trunk, can activate the DVMS announcements on the 4VS or 4VSN card. Corresponding default feature dial number: DVMS Message: 5400 DVMS Port: 7042.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SAVED [55] Yes/No COS 0-9 = Yes; COS 10-249 = No Saved Current Dial Number/Redial defines whether or not a station user can save the currently dialed external number for future redialing by code. Corresponding default feature dial number: #196 or #9.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ACCT [56] Yes/No COS 0-9 = Yes; COS 10-249 = No Defines whether or not a station/trunk user can add the account code (as required) to the call record before, during or after call.

This option does not require the station user to dial an account code. To require a user to dial an account code, F.A.C_TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [6] on page 7-4 must be defined.

Corresponding default feature dial number: #1990.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VFAC_PUBLIC [57] Yes/No Defines whether or not a station user can use all account codes reserved for a special station. Even account codes not defined for any users can be entered. When enabled, this feature essentially transforms the station into a public telephone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

SERIES [58] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a station user engaged in conversation can activate the series feature. This feature allows the user to mark a call before transferring it to a third party. This causes the call to return to the original station after the third party hangs up. Corresponding default feature dial number: #195.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-16

PI Reference Manual SECURITY [59] Yes/No COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Class of Service

Defines whether or not a station user can activate dataline security in order to prevent break-in or a call-waiting tone over an in-progress call. This feature is applicable, for example, while using a modem or facsimile. Corresponding default feature dial number: #17700.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIRECT_DIALING_ ON_DIAL_SERVICE Yes/No; [60] Defines whether or not the port user is allowed to access destinations by directly dialing the dial service number. Set this parameter to Yes to enable the F.A.C_DIAL_SERVICE [7] (page 7-4) parameter (i.e. enable VFAC on Dial Service).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PASS_TK_DIAL_TONE Yes/No; [61] COS 11: No CC1: COS 2-6 = No Transfer Trunk Dial Tone defines whether or not a station user or E&M trunk can seize a trunk and transfer the dial tone to another station (allowing the second station to dial out).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PASS_TK [62] Yes/No; COS 11: No

ACCEPT_COLLECT_ Yes/No; (CC3: No) CALLS [63] A collect call is an incoming call where the called party is billed. CC3 Systems only This parameter defines whether or not a station user or another trunk can accept an incoming collect call. The called party is not billed for the call, but the system manager is ultimately billed. The protocol is available on incoming MFC lines on 30T/x cards and 8DID/S-Z cards. Similarly, it is available on an incoming analog line on 4T,8T,4TPF,8TPF,4T-C,8T-C cards.

For collect call blocking on incoming analog calls on 4T/8T cards, see COLLECT CALLS BLOCK [11,12,13] CC3 only on page 8-49.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-17

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Defines whether or not a station user, or E&M trunk, can transfer a trunk call to another station.

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

ACCEPT_TRUNKS_ Yes/No XFERD [64] Defines whether or not a station user or trunk can accept a trunk transfer by another user. The purpose of this option is to deny specific users access to external calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TK_TK_XFER_ Yes/No OVERRIDE [65] Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Override allows a station to establish a connection between two trunks. Entering Yes allows a trunk to remain connected after the station involved in a 3-way conference, between two trunks, onhooks.

r
l l l l

This parameter is relevant only when TK_TO_TK_CONNECT in SFE is set to No (see page 6-8) and when TK_TK_CONNECT_OVERRIDE (page 8-21) in Trunk Group Definition ([TKGDEF]) is set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SMDR_SPLIT [66] Source/Destination/Both; COS 0-9 = Both; COS 10-259 = Source CC1: COS 0-9 = Source Determines which station is charged when a transferred trunk call is made. Charges can be made to the Source (Originator), the Destination or split between both the source and destination, according to usage. Source: Total charge is recorded against the extension that initiated the call. Destination: Total charge is recorded against the extension where the call terminates (receiving side). Both: All parties are charged in proportion to the active call engagement.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PAGE_Q [67] Yes/No Defines whether or not a station user or E&M trunk, can place a call on page queue. The Page-Q parameter does not affect the Paging (ESPA) feature. Corresponding default feature dial number: 7060.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-18

DTD [68] Yes: Dial tone must be detected on outgoing calls No: The user can dial out without waiting for an external dial tone Dial Tone Detect defines whether or not a station user is prohibited from dialing on a trunk before the trunk dial tone is detected. This feature can be used only when the outgoing trunk is not in a trunk group that overrides the dial tone detect (requires an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF to be installed in the system), see DTD OVERRIDE on page 8-19.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual FLASH_TK [69] Yes/No; COS 11: No

Class of Service

Calibrated Opening On Trunk defines whether or not a station user, or E&M trunk, can make a hookflash signal on a trunk. Corresponding default feature dial number: #150.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIV_LIB [70] Yes/No; CC1: COS 0-9: Yes Private Library defines whether or not a station user can program or update his own private speed dial number library (library of frequently dialed numbers, auto dialed when the speed dial code is entered). Private library numbers relate only to the particular station and are not available to other station users. Corresponding default feature dial number: #193.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALL_TRACE [71] Yes/No Defines whether or not a station user can utilize the Malicious Call Trace option. (A list of incoming calls is recorded and can be printed.) Corresponding default feature dial number: #1740.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO SET Yes/No RELOCATE [72] Defines whether or not a station user is allowed to swap phone profiles. This feature is available only when this parameter is set to Yes for both source and destination phones. Corresponding default feature dial number: N/A

FLEXICALL [73] Yes/No SAU Requirement Defines whether or not the FlexiCall feature is accessible by the station. When defined as Yes, this parameter enables defining another station or an off-site telephone as an adjunct to your station number. Additionally, the off site phone is enabled with Coral features. Corresponding default feature dial number: FlexiCall All #17710; FlexiCall Internal: #17711; FlexiCall External #17712.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-19

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

No default feature dial number is automatically assigned for this feature. The system manager must define a default feature dial number corresponding to the feature index number (220).

Class of Service IRSS_FEATURE [74] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not a station user can dial into the Coral from their Coral defined IRSS destination and access certain Coral services by becoming a virtual Coral station. Corresponding default feature dial number: #17714 + Public or Private Library #.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IRSS_PASSCODE [75] Yes/No Defines whether or not a passcode is required when dialing into the Coral from an IRSS destination to receive Coral Services. Set this parameter to No only for IRSS destinations which possess a Caller ID.

DIAL_TONE 0..3 MESSAGE SOURCE 0..1: FlexiCom 200, IPx 500 [76] R (--): Remove for None None (--) (Dial Tone is heard) SAU Requirement When feature authorization exists (Music Dial Tone), use this parameter to define which Music Source is to be used instead of a Dial Tone. The music source may also be a taped recording. This source cannot replace Distinctive Dial Tone. The music source must be connected via a RMI, 8DRCM, 8DRCF or URC2. Otherwise only normal dial tone can be heard. When None (--) is entered, normal dial tone is heard.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

BOSS_GROUP_CFWD Yes/No INT/EXT [77] CC1: COS 0-9 = Yes Defines whether or not a Boss Group member can forward Boss Group calls to another destination. Entering Yes enables the Boss Group member to activate any type of attendant call forward feature. Corresponding default feature dial numbers: Internal/External Call Forward features: #167, #168, #169, #1984 AND External Call Forward features: #17706, #17707, #17708, #17709.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MLPP
PREEMPTABLE [78] Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes to enable MLPP call preemption by this station user.

7-20

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service An established call where one of the parties is defined with COS Preemption set to No, cannot be pre-empted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRECEDENCE_LEVEL 0: Flash Override [79] 1: Flash: 2: Immediate; 3: Priority 4: Routine

(Highest Precedence: Level 0);

(Lowest Precedence: Level 3); (No Precedence: Level 4)

This parameter is only relevant when PREEMPTABLE [78], above, is set to Yes. This parameter defines the precedence capability of the station user defined with COS PREEMPTION set to Yes. Precedence Capabilities: 0- Flash Override allows the highest precedence level. This enables the user to have any other type of call dropped in order to place a call over a busy trunk. 1- Flash allows precedence over all types of calls except 0-Flash Override. 2- Immediate allows precedence over all types of calls except 0-Flash Override and 1-Flash. 3- Priority allows precedence over all Routine calls only. 4- Routine defines routine calls which may be placed by anyone and is not defined as a precedence call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MLPP SERVICE None or {Domain #} DOMAIN [80] This parameter defines the MLPP Service Domain number for this station user.

The domain number is a unique number determined by the system administrator.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Unique MFC Category 1..15 Digit [81] Choose a unique MFC calling category. This category is to be sent to the CO while the extension makes outgoing calls over MFC/R2 trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-21

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Station users may implement the MLPP feature only on other station users that have identical domain numbers. The same domain number may be assigned in more than one Coral system.

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

ACD/UCD: Authorization Limit


The following options apply to ACD/UCD group members: LOG_IN/OUT [82] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not the ACD group member can log in/out independently of his/her ACD group. Also defines log-in to a primary group feature. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1974.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LOAD_ID [83] Yes/No Determines whether or not an ACD member can load an ID number. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1973.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WRAP_UP_CODE [84] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not an ACD member can activate a wrap-up code, after an ACD incoming call has been completed. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1977.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WRAP-UP TIME [85] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not an ACD/UCD member can activate the wrap-up time feature. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1976.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

RELEASE_RESUME_ Yes/No; ALL [86] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not an ACD/UCD group member can independently Release/Resume to or from all groups of which he or she is a member. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1975.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-22

PI Reference Manual RELEASE_RESUME_ Yes/No; SINGLE_UCD [87] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Class of Service

Determines whether or not a UCD group member can independently Release/Resume from a single UCD group. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1991.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALLS_WAIT [88] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not a FlexSet/keyset station user can view the number of waiting calls for any ACD group. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1982.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-23

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual The following options apply only to Keysets/FlexSets and special CPA and APDL terminals.

KEYSET ONLY:

The PROGRAM and PREFERENCE parameters apply to WSTs as well.

V_PAGE_IN [89] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not a keyset station user can activate the voice page on/off feature (default feature code: #134). This allows blocking or permitting the keyset from receiving private and/or zoned voice page calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_ANS_V_PAGE Yes/No; [90] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not a keyset station user can activate automatic answer (open microphone) of incoming voice page calls to the users station. V_PAGE_IN [36] (page 9-37), must be set to Yes and turned on at the keyset, to allow auto answer. (Not available to FlexSet 120L and DST users). Corresponding default feature dial number: #133.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_ANS [91] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Auto Answer defines whether or not a keyset station user can activate auto (handsfree) answer of calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #138.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-24

MUSIC [92] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not a keyset station user can activate the background music on/off feature. This feature requires that an ASU/RMI or 8DRCM/8DRCF card be installed in the system. In the Coral FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500, no additional hardware is required. A music source(s) must be connected and the music must be programmed (see Music Sources - Chapter 4). Corresponding default feature dial number: #135.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual RING_ADJ [93] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Class of Service

Adjust Ring Level, Frequency, Cadence determines whether or not a keyset station user can adjust ring volume, frequency, and cadence levels. Corresponding default feature dial number: #136.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IDLE_DISPLAY [94] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Determines whether or not an idle display (Name, Number, Date and Time) can be turned on or off at the keyset station. Allows showing or hiding the clock/date/station identification display. This option is relevant only for key sets equipped with a display window. Corresponding default feature dial number: #137.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PROGRAM [95] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a keyset or wireless station user can program the programmable keys (and DPEM/FlexSet 40B when provided). Corresponding default feature dial number: #139.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Defines whether or not a keyset or wireless station user can program preference priorities; to select a specific line, loop, etc. whenever the handset is lifted, the Speaker key is pressed, or the dial pad is used. Corresponding default feature dial number: #131.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_REDIAL [97] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not a keyset station user can activate the Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR). This feature requires an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF card with dial tone detectors installed in the system.Corresponding default feature dial number: #178.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-25

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

PREFERENCE [96] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Class of Service AUTO_REDIAL # [98] 0 (denied)..3..100 (100 number directory) CC1: COS 0-9 = 10

PI Reference Manual

Defines the amount of external phone numbers (ACNR) that can be stored for redialing by the system. Redial is on a one-by-one basis. Corresponding default feature dial number: #178.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISDN: The following three parameters apply to ISDN sets or stations that access ISDN features: BCCOS [99] 0..63 Defines which Bearer Capability COS (BCCOS) is relevant for the specific trunk or station defined as ISDN when dialing in or out of the Coral system. BCCOS is defined in Chapter 26.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISDN_ONLY [100] Yes/No Defines whether the ISDN call is routed along ISDN trunks for the entire connection when set to Y, i.e. full end-to-end ISDN connection required. If the Network routes the call over a non-ISDN service, a message is sent back to the caller and the call is terminated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALLER_ID_ Yes/No CONTROL [101] Defines whether or not a station user can access the feature allowing or restricting (temporarily) the presentation of their telephone number to the called party. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1444.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]


7-26

IP:
SECURED CALLS Yes/No [102] Defines whether to secure IP calls by encoding the call. When set to Yes, the call is encoded according to the highest coding allowed by both sides of the call. The FlexSet-IP 280S reports its coding abilities in the registration message after initialization.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service

USER_ All possibilities between 0 and 13 within parentheses separated by commas COMPRESSION_LIST or spaces, or ( ) for None [103] Default: (5)

0=G.711 with 10ms; 1=G.711 with 20ms 2=G.711 with 40ms; 3=G.723 with 30ms; 4=G.729 with 10ms; 5=G.729 with 20ms; 6=G.729 with 30ms;

7=G.729 with 40ms; 8=G.723 with 30ms+vad; 9=G.723 with 60ms; 10=G.729 with 20ms+vad; 11=G.711 with 80ms 12=G.723 with 90ms; 13=G.729 with 80ms;

G.711 defines no compression G.723 defines compression ratio between 5 and 6 G.729 defines a compression ratio of 8 VAD makes use of silence to gain even better call compression with x ms defines the delay time between packets
Defines the available Gateway Compressions used for IP calls, in order of preference, for this COS. Any number of compressions may be entered between parentheses, separated by commas or spaces. The placement of the numbers defines their priority. Matching compression values must be found in the COSs of both calling parties in order to complete the IP call. If one of the calling sides is not an IP endpoint, then that party assumes the compressions available for the UGW card (via the MG module) handling the call. For Example: (1, 2, 3, 4) means that compression 1=G.711 with 20 ms is to be used for all calls defined with this COS number, but only if both IP endpoints have the same COS. If both sides do not have compression 1 defined in their COSs, then the system tries to use the next number on the list, 2 in this case. If both have 2 defined in their COS definition, then the call is completed in with the compression of 2=G7.11 with 30ms. The system continues looking for matching compressions within both COSs. If no compression matches both COSs, then the call is denied and a CODEC MISMATCH error ensues. Enter information under the display line.
l l l

To add a single number or more, enter: (A, number 1, number 2,...) To remove a single number or more, enter: (R, number 1, number 2,...)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

To remove all numbers, enter: ( )

7-27

Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

Attendant Class of Service

W COS,1

[0,0,2,1]

The following features apply only to stations defined as Attendant (see ATT [16] on page 9-8:SLT and on page 9-31:Keysets/FlexSets). The attendant controls are divided into three categories: Station Controls, Trunk Controls and System Controls. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM/TO COS# 0 to maximum number defined in SIZ (see page 4-11) All Enter the COS numbers required for attendant stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ST CONTROL: The following parameters determine the ability of an Attendant station user to (a)
change some non-Attendant station definitions (such as originate/terminate only), (b) establish hot destinations, (c) block stations and trunks, (d) set wakeup and call forward assignments for stations. NAME (16) [1] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK) Defines the COS name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters). Use the COS name to indicate what it restricts, for example, MANAGERS Only, or NO_INTL_ CALLS. A name defined as BLANK displays only the COS number. Use _ (underscore) for space. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ORIG.ONLY [2] Yes/No COS 11: No Originate Calls Only defines whether or not an attendant can prohibit a station from receiving calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #151.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]


7-28

TERM.ONLY [3] Yes/No; COS 11: No Terminate Calls Only defines whether or not an attendant can prohibit a station from making any calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #152.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual ST_BLOCK [4] Yes/No; COS 11: No

Class of Service

Block Calls To/From Station defines whether or not an attendant can remove a station from service. In other words, prohibiting the station from both making and receiving any calls at the station. Corresponding default feature dial number: #153.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_TK_REST [5] Yes/No; COS 11: No Outgoing Trunk Restriction defines whether or not an attendant can prohibit a station from originating outgoing trunk calls. (Internal calls are permitted.) Corresponding default feature dial number: #154.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MSG_WAIT [6] Yes/No; COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can leave a message waiting indication at a station (ring or lamp. Message indicator type depends upon station equipment.) Corresponding default feature dial number: #156 or hookflash-7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOT_ST_IMM [7] Yes/No; COS 11: No Hot Station Immediate defines whether or not an attendant can designate a station to automatically and immediately ring at a predetermined destination when offhook. Corresponding default feature dial number: #166.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOT_ST_DELAY [8] Yes/No; COS 11: No Hot Station Delay defines whether or not an attendant can designate a station to automatically ring at a pre-determined destination, if no digits are dialed, within a specified time (see 1st_DIGIT [10] on page 9-3 in Station Timers). Corresponding default feature dial number: #182.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CF_BUSY INT/EXT [9] Yes/No COS 11: No Defines whether an attendant can activate Call Forward Busy for other stations. Corresponding default feature dial number: #167 and #17702.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-29

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]

Class of Service CF_ALL INT/EXT [10] Yes/No COS 11: No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether an attendant can activate Call Forward All for other stations and groups. Corresponding default feature dial number: #168 and #17707.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CF_NO_ANS INT/EXT Yes/No [11] COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can activate Call Forward No Answer for other stations. Corresponding default feature dial number: #169 and #17708.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TIMED_FWD INT/EXT Yes/No; [12] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can activate Call Forward Timed for other stations. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1984 and #17709.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DONT_DISTURB [13] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can place a users station in Do Not Disturb mode. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1999.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]


7-30

WAKEUP [14] Yes/No; SAU Requirement COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can set wakeup time for a users station. If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the attendants keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1980.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual CHECK_IN/OUT [15] Yes/No; SAU Requirement COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

Class of Service

Defines whether or not an attendant or PMS can change the status of a station from check-in to check-out or from check-out to check-in. If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the attendants keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1970.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALL_TRACE [16] Yes/No Defines whether or not the Attendant can create Malicious Call Trace records for any other station user. (A list of incoming calls is recorded.) Corresponding default feature dial number: #1742.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALL_TRACE_PRINT Yes/No [17] Defines whether or not the Attendant can print the Call Trace Records created. This parameter is only relevant when CALL_TRACE above is set to Yes. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1743.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ROOM_STATUS [18] 0..15 or ( ) for None; SAU Requirement Defaults: COS 0-9: (0..15); COS 11: ( ) None; COS 10, 12-249: (0, 2..14) Defines which Room Status or User Canned Messages are accessible by the attendant to enable at different stations. Room Status and User Canned Messages are mutually exclusive such that the system can only support one of these features. Each feature requires Authorization, however, the system defaults to the Room Status Feature. To change this default, USER_CANNED_MESSAGES [16] (page 6-20) must be set to Yes in the system Station Options branch (SFE,2). Up to 16 unique status categories can be defined in the Coral. Any one or more Room Status may be assigned to a station (room) at any time. Only one User Canned Message may be assigned to a station at a time. If no Authorization exists when dialing the Room Status/Message code, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station users keyset. If no Authorization (SAU) exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station attendants keyset.Room status/User Canned Messages numbers are entered between parentheses, with the numbers separated by a comma or spaces. Enter information under the display line. Corresponding default feature dial number: 7010 to 7025.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-31

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

TRUNK The following parameters determine an Attendants ability to modify certain trunk CONTROL: operations.
BUSY_OUT [19] Yes/No COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can make a trunk busy, effectively taking it out of service for incoming and outgoing calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #155.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_BLOCK [20] Yes/No COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can display trunks blocked by the CO. Corresponding default feature dial number: #157.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LAR_BLOCK [21] Yes/No Defines whether or not an attendant can block and/or release a trunk/Dial Service blocked by the Look Ahead Routing (LAR). Corresponding default feature dial number: #1979.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_GUARD [22] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can set or reset the Auto Guard status of individual trunks. When set to Yes, Auto Guard Active automatically checks trunks for dial tone and removes trunks from service if no dial tone is present (see also, AUTO_GUARD [2] on page 6-44). Corresponding default feature dial number: #1998.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]


7-32

I/C_ONLY [23] Yes/No COS 11: No Incoming Only defines whether or not an attendant can prohibit outgoing trunk calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #158.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_ONLY [24] Yes/No COS 11: No Outgoing Only defines whether or not an attendant can prohibit incoming trunk calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #190.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual RSRVD_TO [25] Yes/No COS 11: No

Class of Service

Defines whether or not an attendant can reserve a trunk to a specific station or group of stations for outgoing calls. Corresponding default feature dial number: #159.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOT_TK_IMM [26] Yes/No COS 11: No Hot Trunk Immediate defines whether or not an attendant can designate an outgoing trunk to immediately connect when the trunk is seized. Corresponding default feature dial number: #160.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOT_TK_DELAY [27] Yes/No COS 11: No Hot Trunk Delay defines whether or not an attendant can designate an outgoing trunk to connect when no digits are dialed within the time specified by the Outgoing 1st_DGT timer (see page 8-3). Corresponding default feature dial number: #161.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DROP_NO_DIAL [28] Yes/No COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can instruct the system to disconnect a seized outgoing trunk if no digits are dialed within the time specified by the Outgoing 1st_ DGT timer (see page 8-3). Corresponding default feature dial number: #162.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIR_IN_LINE [29] Yes/No COS 11: No Direct In Line (DIL) defines whether or not an attendant can designate the incoming call destination of a trunk (Direct In Line, or DIL) to a specific destination when the system is in DAY mode. Corresponding default feature dial number: #164.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NIGHT1_DEST [30] Yes/No COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can designate the incoming call destination of a DIL trunk to a specific destination when the system is in NIGHT1 mode. Corresponding default feature dial number: #163.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-33

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]

Class of Service NIGHT2_DEST [31] Yes/No COS 11: No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not an attendant can designate the incoming call destination of a DIL trunk to a specific destination when the system is in NIGHT2 mode. Corresponding default feature dial number: #165.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SYS(TEM) The following parameters determine an Attendants ability to control system CONTROL: options.
ATT_ST_DEST [32] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No; CC1: COS 0-9 = No Attendant Station Destination defines whether or not an attendant can route calls to a specific station when the Attendant station is in the DO NOT DISTURB mode (unattended). See AUTO_UNATT_TRANS [17] on page 9-8 for SLTs or AUTO_UNATT_TRANS Attendant Stations Only [17] on page 9-31 for FlexSets/Keysets. Corresponding default feature dial number: #146.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TIME/DATE_SET [33] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can set the system time and date.

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]

Corresponding default feature dial number: #188.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NIGHT1_SELECT [34] Yes/No COS 11: No Defines whether or not an attendant can change the system between DAY and NIGHT 1 mode (when the change is made it overrides the system time definition of Night 1 transfer). This type of service is used when the system is programmed for manual operation. Corresponding default feature dial number: #185.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-34

PI Reference Manual NIGHT2_SELECT [35] Yes/No COS 11: No

Class of Service

Defines whether or not an attendant can change the system between DAY and NIGHT2 mode (when the change is made it overrides the system time definition of Night2 transfer). This type of service is used when the system is programmed for manual operation. Corresponding default feature dial number: #184.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_NIGHT SERV Yes/No; [36] COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Automatic/Manual Night Service defines whether or not an attendant can set the system for manual or automatic (on time) Day/Night mode transfer. (See ON TIME on page 12-2 in Night Service Timers, for an explanation of automatic or manual service period transfer). Corresponding default feature dial number: #1993.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PUBL_LIBS [37] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can add, change or delete public library (system wide speed call directory) numbers.

Corresponding default feature dial number: #194.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

KB0_SET_UP [38] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can change the communications parameters of PI terminal port KB0 (on CSX 200, MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2 or MCP-ATS cards). Corresponding default feature dial number: #1996.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-35

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]

The Attendant may add, change, or delete public speed call libraries, but may not change the Toll Barrier Override and Name parameters of an entry (Public Library). The Toll Barrier Override default is No and can be changed only via a PI service terminal.

Class of Service ALARM [39] Yes/No; COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether or not an attendant can list system alarm messages on an Attendant keyset station equipped with a display. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1997.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAKEUP_REPORT Yes/No; [40] COS 0-9: Yes; SAU Requirement COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can send a request to receive a wakeup report on a monitor or printer. If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station attendants keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1971
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHARGE_PRINT [41] Yes/No; SAU Requirement COS 0-9: Yes; COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can send a request to receive a system Charge Table printout (detailed station current phone charges). If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station attendants keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1972.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHARGE_PRINT_ Yes/No; AND_RESET [42] COS 0-9: Yes; SAU Requirement COS 10-249: No Defines whether or not an attendant can send a request to receive a printout and then reset the system Charge Table. If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message ILLEGAL appears on the station attendants keyset. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1978.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]

ACD_CALLS_FOR_ Yes/No BUSY [43] Defines whether or not the attendant is allowed to determine the maximum number of calls waiting for any ACD group in the system. Corresponding default feature dial number: #1746.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

7-36

PI Reference Manual

Class of Service

Tenant Class of Service

W COS,2

[0,0,2,2]

The Tenant COS is an optional programming tool which allows the system to be segmented into as many as 64 (0-63) unique Tenant Groups. Each tenant group is a separate virtual system. It can be independently configured to operate as a key system, hybrid system or private branch exchange. Tenant programming is usually applied when one Coral has to serve several groups of users. Tenant COS allows intra-system calling to be segmented as if each tenant group owns a dedicated system. Hierarchical orders can be established through tenant groups. For example, a manager can be defined to enable placement of calls to assistants, but the assistants can be defined so that they cannot directly call the manager. Instead, their calls can be routed to another destination. The Tenant COS feature may require altering the maximum number of Classes of Service provided in the system size programming (see Chapter 4 - System Sizes). The COS entry in system sizes should allow each tenant its own Class of Service. By assigning different COS numbers to particular ports, groups may be composed solely of trunks, of stations, or a combination of trunks and stations. Tenant stations may be allowed or denied access to other group stations and trunks. Inter-tenant calling may be allowed either one-way only or two-way (by defining the Tenant Groups and Group Accesss accordingly). When Tenant COS is defined as one-way, Tenant A stations can call Tenant B stations, but Tenant B stations cannot call Tenant A stations. When defined as two-way, both tenant groups can call each other.

Figures 7-1, 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4 below, illustrate typical tenant group applications.

7-37

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]

COS defaults to tenant group 0. There may be as many as 64 (0-63) unique tenant groups and as many as 250 Classes of Service, as defined in Sizes (see page 4-11), allowing an average of up to four different Class Of Services for each tenant group.

Class of Service FROM/TO COS# 0 to maximum defined in Sizes, see COS on page 4-11; All Enter the COS numbers required for Tenants.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

TNNT_GRP [0] 0..63 (see Figure 7-1) Ports can receive calls only from other ports whose GRP.ACCESS includes the number defined in this field (not used for voice page, see VP_TNNT_GRP [5], below).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GRP. ACCESS Defines the group access, i.e., all ports with the same current COS that can make calls to other ports whose TNNT_GRP number is defined in this parameter.

Notes: Enter information under the display line. The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order and separated by a space or comma. Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]


7-38

PI Reference Manual GRP. ACCESS (0-15) [1] Any ascending combination (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15) COS 1= 0..15

Class of Service

GRP. ACCESS (16-31) [2] Any ascending combination (16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,30,31) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 16..31 GRP. ACCESS (32-47) [3] Any ascending combination (32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 32..47 GRP. ACCESS (48-63) [4] Any ascending combination (48,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 48..63
Figure 7-1. Tenant Group-Group Access

COS 0 TNNT_GRP GRP. ACCESS (0-15) GRP. ACCESS (16-31) GRP. ACCESS (32-47) GRP. ACCESS (48-63) 0 (1,2) () () (63)

TNNT_GRP GRP. ACCESS (0-15) GRP. ACCESS (16-31) GRP. ACCESS (32-47) GRP. ACCESS (48-63)

1 (0,1) () () (63)

TNNT_GRP GRP. ACCESS (0-15) GRP. ACCESS (16-31) GRP. ACCESS (32-47) GRP. ACCESS (48-63)

2 (0,2) () () (63)

COS 3 and COS 4 TNNT_GRP GRP. ACCESS (0-15) GRP. ACCESS (16-31) GRP. ACCESS (32-47) GRP. ACCESS (48-63) 63 (1) () () (63)

7-39

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]

COS 1

COS 2

Class of Service VP_TNNT_GRP [5] 0..63 (See Figure 7-2)

PI Reference Manual

Allows placing all keysets with the same COS into a unique tenant group for incoming voice paging calls (not used for incoming calls, see TNNT_GRP, above). Keyset users can receive voice page calls only from other ports whose VP.ACCESS includes the number defined in this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VP. ACCESS Allows defining all ports with the same current COS that can make voice page calls to other keysets whose VP_TNNT_GRP number is defined in this parameter.

Notes: Enter information under the display line. The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order and separated by a space or comma. Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]


7-40

PI Reference Manual VP. ACCESS (0-15) [6] Any ascending combination (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15) COS 1= 0..15

Class of Service

VP. ACCESS (16-31) [7] Any ascending combination (16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,30,31) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 16..31 VP. ACCESS (32-47) [8] Any ascending combination (32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 32..47 VP. ACCESS (48-63) [9] Any ascending combination (48,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 48..63
Figure 7-2.Tenant Group-Voice Page Access

COS 0 VP_TNNT_GRP VP. ACCESS (0-15) VP. ACCESS (16-31) VP. ACCESS (32-47) VP. ACCESS (48-63) 0 (1,2) () () (63)

COS 1 VP_TNNT_GRP VP. ACCESS (0-15) VP. ACCESS (16-31) VP. ACCESS (32-47) VP. ACCESS (48-63) 1 (0,1) () () (63)

COS 2 VP_TNNT_GRP VP. ACCESS (0-15) VP. ACCESS (16-31) VP. ACCESS (32-47) VP. ACCESS (48-63) 2 (0,2) () () (63)

COS 3 and COS 4 VP_TNNT_GRP VP. ACCESS (0-15) VP. ACCESS (16-31) VP. ACCESS (32-47) VP. ACCESS (48-63) 63 (1) () () (63)

7-41

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

SILENT_MONITOR_ 0..63 (See Figure 7-3) TNNT_GRP [10] Allows placing all keysets with the same COS into a unique tenant group for silent monitoring use. Ports can be monitored only by other ports whose SM.ACCESS includes the number defined in this field.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SM.ACCESS Defines the Silent Monitor access, i.e. all ports with the same current COS that can silent monitor other ports whose SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP number is defined in anyone of the following four parameters:

Notes: Enter information under the display line. The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order and separated by a space or comma. Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]


7-42

PI Reference Manual SM. ACCESS (0-15) [11] Any ascending combination (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15) COS 1= 0..15

Class of Service

SM. ACCESS (16-31) [12] Any ascending combination (16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,30,31) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 16..31 SM. ACCESS (32-47) [13] Any ascending combination (32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 32..47 SM. ACCESS (48-63) [14] Any ascending combination (48,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 48..63
Figure 7-3. Tenant Group-Silent Monitor Access

COS 0 SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 0 SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS (0-15) (16-31) (32-47) (48-63) (1,2) () () (63)

COS 1 SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 1 SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS (0-15) (16-31) (32-47) (48-63) (0,1) () () (63)

COS 2 SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 2 SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS (0-15) (16-31) (32-47) (48-63) (0,2) () () (63)

COS 3 and COS 4 SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 63 SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS SM. ACCESS (0-15) (16-31) (32-47) (48-63) (1) () () (63)

7-43

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP 0..63 (See Figure 7-4) [15] Allows placing all keysets with the same current COS into a unique tenant group for Breaking In to a call. Ports can accept break-ins into established calls only from those ports whose BRK.ACCESS includes the number defined in this field.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BRK.ACCESS Defines the Break-In access, i.e. all ports with the same current COS that can break-in to established calls of other ports whose BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP number is defined in anyone of the following four parameters:

Notes: Enter information under the display line. The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order and separated by a space or comma. Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]


7-44

PI Reference Manual BRK. ACCESS (0-15) [16] Any ascending combination (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15) COS 1= 0..15

Class of Service

BRK. ACCESS (16-31) [17] Any ascending combination (16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,30,31) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 16..31 BRK. ACCESS (32-47) [18] Any ascending combination (32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 32..47 BRK. ACCESS (48-63) [19] Any ascending combination (48,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63) or ( ) for None; COS 1= 48..63
Figure 7-4. Tenant Group-Break-In Access
COS 0 BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP BRK. ACCESS (0-15) BRK. ACCESS (16-31) BRK. ACCESS (32-47) BRK. ACCESS (48-63) 0 (1,2) () () (63)

COS 1 BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP BRK. ACCESS (0-15) BRK. ACCESS (16-31) BRK. ACCESS (32-47) BRK. ACCESS (48-63) 1 (0,1) () () (63)

COS 2 BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP BRK. ACCESS (0-15) BRK. ACCESS (16-31) BRK. ACCESS (32-47) BRK. ACCESS (48-63) 2 (0,2) () () (63)

COS 3 and COS 4 BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP BRK. ACCESS (0-15) BRK. ACCESS (16-31) BRK. ACCESS (32-47) BRK. ACCESS (48-63) 63 (1) () () (63)

7-45

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]

Class of Service

PI Reference Manual

Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]


7-46

8
General Trunk Timers ....................................... 8-2 Trunk Timers ..................................................... 8-6 MFR Card Database .......................................... 8-9 General Trunk Definitions............................... 8-10 Trunk Group Definition................................... 8-16 Alternate Route................................................ 8-31 DID/E&M Groups ........................................... 8-32 Offset Filters .................................................... 8-37 Power Fail Trunk Definition ........................... 8-39 LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks................ 8-41 4T/8T LGS Port Database............................... 8-44 4T/8T Card Database ...................................... 8-46 E&M Continuous Timers ................................ 8-52 4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database ..... 8-55 4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database ............ 8-57 4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database ........... 8-59 4TWL Trunk Card DB .................................... 8-76 URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) ................... 8-79 URC-Default Configuration ............................ 8-81 URC-Current Configuration............................ 8-83 E&M Trunk Definition.................................... 8-86 DID Trunk Definition...................................... 8-89 8DID Card Database ....................................... 8-90 T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration .................. 8-94 T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x Synchronization ........... 8-97 T1 and 30T Card Database ........................... 8-100

Trunk Controls
This chapter contains the programming instructions for all trunks. T1 and 30T Port Database .............................8-103 30T/M Card Database ....................................8-105 30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database.......... 8-111 30T/M DDI Port Database.............................8-113 30T/M Timers ................................................8-114 30T/E Card Database .....................................8-115 30T/E DDI Port Database..............................8-120 30T/E DDO Port Database ............................8-122 30T/E NonDDI Port Database .......................8-123 ALS70 Trunks ................................................8-125 ALS70 Card Configuration............................8-126 ALS70 Card Database....................................8-128 ALS70 Port Database.....................................8-131 ALS70 Loop Start Port Database ..................8-132 ALS70 DID Port Database ............................8-133 ALS70 NonDID Port Database .....................8-134 ALS70 Trunk Timers .....................................8-135 BID Trunks.....................................................8-136 BID Trunk Port Database ..............................8-137 BID Trunk Timers..........................................8-139 GID Trunks ....................................................8-140 GID Card Database ........................................8-141 GID Port Database .........................................8-145 GID Timers ....................................................8-147 PRI/TBR/BRI Card Database .........see Chapter 26 ISDNet.............................................see Chapter 28

8-1

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

General Trunk Timers

W TK.T,0

[0,0,1,2,0]

General Trunk Timers are used to set the system timers for all trunks. Specific trunk types (for example, E&M, DID) may have additional timing parameters which must also be programmed. RELEASE_BLOCK [0] 1..3..100 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu3: 31; Eu8: 40 Determines the time interval following release of a trunk, in which an outgoing seizure on the trunk is prohibited. This option thus provides a guard period after the trunk is released to ensure that the CO has cleared the existing call before a new call is attempted. This timer has no effect on the appearance of a new incoming call on the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RECALL [1] 100..150..4200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu0/Eu2: 600 CC1/Eu1: 450 Recall determines the time interval a transferred or camped on trunk call remains unanswered at the transfer-to station before recalling to the call originator or rerouting to the Incomplete Call Destination. This feature is not relevant when a station is defined as Multi-Appearance.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RLS_AFTER_XFER [2] 1..100 (1 unit = 0.1 second) CC0: 30 (Use 1 unit if the system is not connected to a CENTREX) Release After Transfer is relevant when the Coral is connected through a trunk to another exchange such as an electromechanical switch or for CENTREX applications. Coral station A in Exchange Y is connected through a trunk to station B in Exchange X. A wants to transfer the call to station C in Exchange X and disconnect, leaving station B connected to station C. In this case, station A and the trunk are released to idle. Station A must send a Flash On Trunk (i.e. Calibrated Opening) signal and then dial the telephone number for station C in Exchange X after which A onhooks. If station A onhooks before the O/G interdigit time-out period, or while the system sends digits from a speed dial library or programmed button, the Coral waits a RLS_AFTER_XFER period before releasing the trunk. If station A onhooks after the O/G interdigit time-out period, the Coral does not wait the RLS_AFTER_XFER period and the trunk is immediately released. The Flash On Trunk signal is activated at a Coral station by using feature code 150 or by programming a speed dial number with code E9.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

General Trunk Timers TK.T,0 [0,0,1,2,0]


8-2

PI Reference Manual MFC_ACK [3] 100..600..3000 (1 unit = 0.1 second) CC2: 1200

Trunk Controls

Defines the maximum duration within which an MFC acknowledgment signal is transmitted to the Central Office. For each digit recognized by the Coral, the Coral must send an MFC ACK signal until the tone is ceased by the Central Office. If the tone is not stopped, this parameter determines the time value that MFC ACK sends. This feature is used mostly for 8BID or 30T/E trunks in European systems, and 30T/M in Mexico. This parameter must be defined in conjunction with the MFR Card Database beginning on page 8-9.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MLPP_RESERVED_ 50..150..450 (1 unit = 0.1 seconds) FOR_REUSE [4] Defines the maximum time period that the trunk can be held after the MLPP station user cleared the trunk from a previously engaged call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following options are relevant for incoming calls only.
DELAY_DISA [5] 10..40..250 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu1: 80 Eu9: 250 Determines the time period that an incoming external caller on a trunk defined as DISA [0] (page 8-10) must hear a ringback tone before the incoming call is answered with system dial tone, for further inward dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1st_DGT [6] 10..100..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu1: 650

INTERDGT [7] 10..60..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu1: 650 Eu2: 200 Determines the maximum system waiting time between any two dialed digits in an incoming call on a DID, E&M or DISA remote access trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALLER_ID_TIMEOUT 1..50..600 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [8] Defines the maximum system waiting time for information over analog trunks for CID information. For these trunks, the call handling proceeds after the CID information is received or the time-out expires.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-3

General Trunk Timers TK.T,0 [0,0,1,2,0]

Determines the maximum system waiting time for receiving the first dialed digit, on an incoming trunk call on a DID, E&M, or DISA remote access trunk.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

OUTGOING: The following options relate to outgoing calls only:


ANSWER_DELAY [9] 100..600..4200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Determines the maximum system waiting time, after origination of an outgoing trunk call, for the called partys offhook (answer) signal. This timer is relevant only to trunks which detect an answer supervision signal. The Wait for Answer timer is initiated at the expiration of the O/G Interdigit timer (defined later in this chapter).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TONE_DELAY [10] 10..600..1000 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu1: 250 Determines the maximum system waiting time to detect tone on outgoing trunks. The delay operates under the following conditions: While waiting for trunk dial tone (if so defined) in order to start outdialing. After an E6 (#6) command while waiting for second trunk dial tone (speed and routing dialing). While waiting for ringback or busy tone by the Auto Called Number Repeat feature. Tone detection requires an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF in card installed in the system. The Coral FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500 do not require these cards.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1ST_DGT [11] 10..600..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Eu1: 100 Determines the maximum system waiting time, after trunk seizure, for the first dialed digit on outgoing trunk calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INTERDGT [12] 10..60..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Determines the maximum system waiting time, between any two dialed digits, on outgoing trunk calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

General Trunk Timers TK.T,0 [0,0,1,2,0]


8-4

BUSY_ON_TRUNK 1..300..65500 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [13] When a user (station or E&M trunk) dials an outgoing CO trunk to a busy external telephone, this feature determines the duration of the external (CO) busy tone before the Coral system reverts to reorder tone (disconnect). Defines the duration that the busy tone will be sent by the CO to the extension when the outgoing trunk is PRI/BRI or MFC and the destination is busy.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PTS_DELAY [14] Contact manufacturer; 600 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Proceed To Send Delay determines the protection time interval for trunks waiting for a PTS signal. Also applies to GS and 30T/E/M-DDO trunks. Consult the manufacturer before changing the default.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual DELAY_TO_VM_ DIGITS [15] Outgoing Network Calls only

Trunk Controls

1..40..65500 (1 unit = 0.1 second)


Defines the maximum time period that the originating PINX waits before sending DTMF digits (such as Voice Mail box number, personal passcode, etc.) to the destination PINX connected to an external application, usually a Voice Mail system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-5

General Trunk Timers TK.T,0 [0,0,1,2,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Timers

W TK.T,1

[0,0,1,2,1]

Each trunk port is assigned one of the five Trunk Timer Tables (TK TIMER [2] (page 8-10)). Loop-start/Ground-start (LS/GS) and Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks default to values listed in Table 0, E&M trunks default to values listed in the first Table. Additional timers may be required for specific trunk types.

FROM 0..4 TO 0..4 TK_TIMER# Enter the required range of trunk timers; FROM the lowest TO the highest.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

H. FLASH [0] Range: 2..100

(1 unit = 10 ms) Timer 1: CC0: 60 CC7: 20 Other Systems: 40

Defaults: Timer 0: CC0: 67 CC1: 60 Eu0: 10 Eu1-8: 14 Other systems: 6

H.Flash (i.e. Calibrated Opening) determines the duration of the pulse sent as a hookswitch flash on a trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following parameters are relevant only during incoming calls on trunks, and
may be adjusted to match the protocol for the terminating end. E&M_SEIZE_TO_ 1..10 (1 unit = 0.1 second) WINK [1] E&M Delay from Seize to start of Wink determines the delay period from the E&M Continuous Only detection of an incoming Seize signal to the start of the outgoing Seize acknowledge signal. In addition to this delay, a Wink will not start until system resources (for example audio link and DTMF receiver) are available to process the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Trunk Timers TK.T,1 [0,0,1,2,1]

E&M_CONT_WINK_ 1..2..10 (1 unit = 0.1 second) TIME [2] Determines the duration of a Wink signal. E&M Continuous Only
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-6

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

OUTGOING: The following options are relevant only during outgoing calls on trunks, and may
be adjusted to suit the receiving end protocol. E&M_CONT_ 10..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second); WINK/SG_DELAY [3] Timer 0: 1 E&M Continuous Only Timer 1: 45 Timers 2..4: 1 Determines the maximum time system waits for Wink/Start-Go (seize acknowledge) signal on E&M continuous trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEIZE_TO_DIAL [4] 1..400 (1 unit = 0.1 second); CC0: 15 Timer 0: 30 Timer 1: 1 Timers 2..4: 30 Determines the time from trunk seizure, until the first digit is dialed by the system. See the notes below for system action during specific circumstances. 1) If an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF card is installed in a Coral system, the detection of dial tone overrides this timer. 2) If a ground start trunk (tip to ground) is not returned by the time-out, the trunk is considered NOT READY and is released. 3) On E&M continuous trunks defined as Wink Start, this is the delay from a received Wink signal until digits are transmitted. 4) On E&M continuous trunks defined as Immediate Start, this is the delay from seizure until digits are transmitted.

8-7

Trunk Timers TK.T,1 [0,0,1,2,1]

5) On E&M continuous trunks defined as Stop/Go, this is the delay between the time a Go signal is received until the digits are transmitted.

Trunk Controls SECOND_DIAL_TONE 1..60..600 (1 unit = 0.1 second); [5] Eu3: 120

PI Reference Manual

Presets the system waiting time for a second dial tone before sending additional digits. Second dial tone is applied, for example, when E6 (#6) code is programmed into Speed Dial numbers (see page 8-4), or ROUTING and SDT parameters in Trunk Groups.

1) If an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF card is installed in the Coral system, this time is added to TONE_DELAY in General Trunk Timers (see page 8-4). 2) Relevant to Eu3 systems only: After dialing 07 (the first two digits of outside numbers) the system automatically stops sending digits and waits for a dial tone from the CO, before sending the remaining digits.The wait period for sending the remaining digits is defined through the SECOND DIAL TONE parameter, above. (However, TONE_ DELAY is not added to the wait time.) If the dial tone is not detected before time-out, the system disconnects the call. This parameter operates in a manner similar to the E6 key when programmed into Speed Dial Numbers.

Trunk Timers TK.T,1 [0,0,1,2,1]


8-8

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

MFR Card Database

W CDB,6

[0,1,2,6]

The Multi-Frequency Receiver (MFR) is a shared service card that allows defining the MFR resource card parameters. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

1) An MFR card must be installed in order to utilize the MFC in the following cards and countries: 30T-DOD: CC1; 30T/E-DID/DOD and 4/8BID: Eu1; 30T/M-DID/DOD: CC2,3,5,6, Eu4,6; 8DID /S-Z: CC3,4. 2) Programming the MFR card must be accompanied by defining MFC_ ACK [3] (page 8-3).

FROM/TO CARD_DB# 0 Enter the card database table number. Currently only zero (0) is allowed, which is assigned to all MFR cards.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_ON [0] 0..40..2540 ms (in 10 ms increments) Minimum On Recognition Time defines the minimum time in which the MFR must detect an active MFC tone sent by the far end (see sketch below) in order to recognize an MFC tone. If the tone is shorter than the defined time, the signal is not identified as an MFC tone.
Figure 8-1

ON PERIOD

OFF PERIOD

MIN_ON

MIN_OFF

MIN_OFF [1] 0..40..2540 ms (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Off Recognition Time defines the minimum time allowed between the end of the MFC tone and MFR verification (see sketch above). The Coral will stop sounding the ACK Tone only after recognizing a silence period within the MIN_ OFF duration.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No Transfers the updated data immediately to the card database. This parameter is used only in Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-9

MFR Card Database CDB,6 [0,1,2,6]

MFC TONE VERIFIED ON

MFC TONE VERIFIED OFF

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

General Trunk Definitions

W TRK,0

[0,2,1,0,0,0]

Trunk Definitions are used to specify the general trunk definitions per trunk dial number. The general definition of a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk does not include all fields, although field position numbers do not change. Additional programming is required for each trunk type. Field Numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

In this table, a sign indicates a field used for DID trunk definition.

FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid trunk dial number; Default: All defined trunks Enter the required range of trunk dial numbers, FROM the lowest trunk dial number TO the highest trunk dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DISA [0] 0 (E&M Trunks, Not DISA), 1 (DISA/Immediate), 2 (DISA/Delayed) Not used for DID trunks Direct Inward System Access determines if a LS/GS trunk is Direct Inward System Access (DISA), and the type (immediate/delay). Direct Inward System Access is active only during a DIL/Night1/Night2 mode in which the trunk incoming destination is None. Thus, for example, incoming calls on the trunk may be answered by a station during DAY mode, and Direct Inward System Access during NIGHT 1. The delay period is defined by the DELAY_DISA [5] (page 8-3) timer in General Trunk Timers.

General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]

The DISA feature can be secured by using a Verified Forced Account Code. VFAC can be a programmable code, 4 to 16 digits in length.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COS [1] 0..Maximum defined in Sizes (see COS on page 4-11) 10 DID trunks: 11 Determines the trunk Class of Service. Each trunk is assigned one COS. A COS defines a list of features which the trunk user is able to use in which certain features may be denied.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TK TIMER [2] 0..4 E&M Trunks: 1 Determines the Trunk Timer table number (0-4) assigned to the trunk, see Trunk Timers on page 8-6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-10

PI Reference Manual MFC [3] Yes/No

Trunk Controls

Determines whether the trunk signaling type is MFC. Generally, the MFC is used in the following countries and cards: 30T-DOD: CC1; 30T/E-DID/DOD and 4/8BID: Eu1; 30T/M-DID/DOD: CC2,3,5,6, Eu4,6; 8DID/S-Z: CC3,4. When this parameter is set to Yes, the following TYPE parameter is not displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TYPE [4] 0 (Pulse), 1 (DTMF), 2 (Mix), 3 (CAMA) CAMA only for 4T,4T-PF, 4T-C, 8T,8T-PF, 8T-C or 4TEM cards) 0: Eu2, E&M Pulsed, TBR, PRI

Notes: In European systems this parameter is not used for BID and 30T/E-DDI trunks; MFC is used instead. For 4TWL trunk card version 1.02 and lower, set this parameter to 1 (DTMF). Pulse dialing on the 4TWL requires card version 1.03 or higher.

Determines the type of trunk signaling method used for dialing. Enter 0 for Dial Pulses (rotary trunks). Enter 1 for DTMF trunks. Enter 2 to block DTMF tones on outgoing rotary trunks (i.e. the caller sends DTMF tones.) Enter 3 to define the trunk as a CAMA trunk used for emergency 911 dialing. This enables the trunk to send MF tones to the destinations and is used to send ANI on LS and E&M trunks. When an E&M trunk is defined as CAMA (this requires Feature Authorization, see E911 (page 3-10)), the E&M line signaling protocol is automatically set to Wink by the system (see page 8-86).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Determines whether a trunk is defined as Incoming Only, thereby prohibiting outgoing calls. This parameter cannot be changed on DID trunks (except in European ALS70 and BID systems). When creating a larger Group Call from more than one Group Call, back to back, set this parameter to Yes to define the trunks as incoming only. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-11

General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]

I/C_ONLY [5] Yes/No DID: Yes; BID: No

Trunk Controls O/G_ONLY [6] Yes/No;

PI Reference Manual

Not used for DID trunks

Determines whether a trunk is defined as Outgoing Only, thereby prohibiting incoming call recognition. (Attendant modifiable) When creating a larger Group Call from more than one Group Call, back to back, set this parameter to Yes for the trunk included in the Public Library used for establishing a connection between the Group Calls.

When the Trunk TYPE [4] above is defined as 3-CAMA, then this parameter should be defined as Y to prevent the trunk from receiving calls and thus keeping it available for outgoing emergency calls.

BUSY_OUT [7] Yes/No Determines whether a trunk is busied out, thereby prohibiting outgoing calls and maintaining a constant seizure to block incoming calls. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_GUARD [8] Yes/No Not used for DID trunks Indicates whether a trunk prohibits outgoing calls because the Auto Guard test failed (locks trunk dial tone). When set to Yes, the trunk is blocked for outgoing calls. A technician can only enter No in order to release a locked trunk. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOT_IMMED [9] Yes/No Not used for DID/PRI trunks Determines whether a trunk automatically and immediately connects-out upon trunk seizure. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]

HOT_DELAY [10] Yes/No Not used for DID/PRI trunks Determines whether a trunk is automatically connected if digits are not dialed within the Outgoing First Digit timer, see 1st_DIGIT [10] on page 9-3. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DROP_NO_DIAL [11] Yes/No Eu1,Eu2,GID: Yes Not used for DID trunks Determines whether a trunk is released by the system if digits are not dialed within the defined Outgoing First Digit timer, see 1st_DIGIT [10] on page 9-3. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-12

PI Reference Manual RSRVD_TO [12] None, Any valid station or boss group dial number Not used for DID trunks

Trunk Controls

Determines whether a trunk is reserved, and identifies the station or group for which the trunk is reserved, for outgoing calls. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

D.I.L. [13] None LS/GS Default: First System Keyset (Attendant)

Any valid station, boss/hunt group, public library, Bell/UNA, Modem, DVMS MSG/Port, group call, Wait-Que, Network # Not used for DID trunks
Direct In Line determines whether incoming calls on the trunk are directed to a destination during DAY mode, and also identifies the destination. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NIGHT1 [15] None Any valid station, boss/hunt group, public library, Bell/UNA, Modem, DVMS MSG/Port, group call, Wait-Que, Network #

LS/GS Default: First System Keyset (Attendant) Not used for DID trunks
Determines whether incoming calls on the trunk are directed to a destination during NIGHT1 mode, and also identifies the destination. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NIGHT2 [16] None Any valid station, boss/hunt group, public library, Bell/UNA, Modem, DVMS MSG/Port, group call, Wait-Que, Network #

LS/GS Default: First System Keyset (Attendant)


Not used for DID trunks
Determines whether incoming calls on the trunk are directed to a destination during NIGHT2 mode, and also identifies the destination. (Attendant modifiable)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-13

General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]

Trunk Controls DISC_SUPER [17] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Loop Start: No NonDID: Yes


Not used for DID trunks

1) Relevant for Loop Start trunks. 2) Also relevant in European systems for ALS70-Non DID trunks. 3) When the Trunk TYPE [4] above is defined as 3-CAMA, then this parameter should be defined as Y.

Disconnect Supervision determines if system call processing logic can expect disconnect supervision from the Central Office. If N is entered, the trunk is considered a Port Without Disconnect Supervision (PWDS), and when connected to another PWDS, will recall to the incomplete calls destination periodically to determine if a conversation is still in progress between the two ports. N should be entered if disconnect supervision is not provided, or not consistently provided on the trunk. Should disconnect supervision appear on the trunk, an N in this entry will inhibit its recognition by the system. If Y is entered, supervision must be provided by the Central Office.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

0 = IMM, 0 (Immediate Start)/1 (Wink Start or Delay Start) 1 = Wink/Delayed [18] r 1) Relevant for DID trunks. 2) In European systems set this parameter to zero (0) for BID and 0 = IMM/BID, 30T/E-DDI trunks. 1=Wink/Delayed [18] European Systems only Determines whether the signaling (handshaking) protocol of the trunk is Immediate Start, Wink Start or Delay Start. Entering 1 allows the trunk to be either Wink Start or Delay Start.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]

DND_WP [19] Yes/No;

Not used for DID trunks

Relevant only for analog trunks.

Defines whether this trunk can prevent other stations from whisper paging to one side of a conversation on an engaged trunk. Enter Yes to enable the trunk to prevent Whisper pages by entering the applicable feature code. To enable this feature, define DND_WP [24] on page 7-9 in COS,0 to Y.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RECEIVE_SPKR_ Yes/No STATUS [20] When set to Yes, this parameter enables the far-end user over a trunk to receive a tone indicating that the second conversing party is holding the conversation with the speaker turned on.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-14

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

IP_FAX_ENABLED Yes/No [21] Defines whether the MG module should try and detect Fax Tones from this trunk. The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt voice calls. The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l v91536*/

IP_MODEM_ENABLED Yes/No [22] Defines whether the MG module should try and detect modem Tones from this trunk. The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt voice calls. The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

r
l l l l

Tip: Set this parameter to Yes for trunks ports servicing only Voice Mail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-15

General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]

BLOCK_REORDER_ Yes/No TONE(VM) [23] Disable the reorder tone sent to the trunk that continues to seize the 2-way call at disconnect when the other party has already onhooked.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Group Definition

W TGDEF

[0,5,1,0]

Trunk Group Definition defines the features that are relevant for all the trunks listed in the selected Trunk Group. The features and trunks group members are defined in this section. For CAMA (E911) Trunks: It is strongly recommended to create a trunk group with only CAMA trunks all having the same parameter definitions for DTD Override (Yes) and Dialing Method (Enblock) to enable Emergency 911 service.

The first trunk group in the system is trunk group index 0. The default Numbering Plan defines this Trunk Groups dial number as 9 (or 0 for Eu0, Eu1, Eu2 and Eu9 countries).

FROM/TO Any valid trunk group access code number; Default: All TK_GRP# Enter the required range of trunk group dial numbers; FROM the lowest trunk group number TO the highest trunk group number.

r
l l l l

The first trunk group in the system is trunk group index 0. The default Numbering Plan defines this Trunk Groups dial number as 9 (or 0 for Eu0, Eu1, Eu2 and Eu9 countries).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum 5 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK) Defines the trunk groups short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters), which appears on keysets equipped with a display when the group is accessed for an outgoing call. A group name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]


8-16

FULL (16) Maximum 16 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)

Defines the trunk groups full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters), which appears on keysets equipped with a display when the group is accessed for an outgoing call. A group name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IP_ZONE 0..7 or R for (--) None Define the IP Zone to be used for this IP Network Trunk group. Only one Zone can be defined per Trunk Group. (Note: IP_NET [45] (page 5-47) dial numbers may be defined only in QSIG Trunk groups).

PI Reference Manual The following warning is issued:

Trunk Controls

All NET IP calls in this group will disconnect upon Update!


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ISDN ONLY Yes/No IPG, PRI23, PRI30 r Only extensions with ISDN Only COS (see page 7-26) can require ISDN and Only trunk lines. BRI (4/8TBR) only Ensures that the ISDN call is routed along ISDN lines for the entire connection (end to end). When this parameter is set to Y, only stations defined by their COS as ISDN ONLY can dial out on an ISDN Only trunk. Only ISDN trunks may be entered as members in this trunk group. If the Network (Public or Private) routes the call over a non-ISDN service, a message is sent back to the Coral and the call is terminated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

QSIG Yes/No PRI, BRI and IP_Net Determines whether or not the trunk group is a QSIG trunk group. only For PRI/BRI trunks, check that the trunk protocol is defined as QSIG in PROTOCOL_ID (see page 26-14). For IP_NET trunks, the trunk protocol is automatically defined as QSIG. Other QSIG parameters for these trunks may be defined in the QSIG Definitions section of IP: NET beginning on page 29-41.

When changing trunk group types from QSIG to non-QSIG, first remove all the trunks from the trunk group and then change from Y to N or vice versa.

DTMF_DIGITS_ Yes/No BEFORE_ANSWER r Relevant only for Network Calls at the outgoing Gateway PINX. This parameter relates to the PINX connected to an external application (usually a Voice Mail system) or a CO trunk. The technician must check the external application to determine whether the Coral should send the DTMF digits before or after an answer signal is received from the external application or CO trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-17

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

ANI_SCREENING_ U (Unavailable), S (Site LDN), T (Transparent), O (Omit) SEND This parameter screens the Calling Party Number (CPN) of transit calls at the Gateway PINX and determines its format before being sent to its destination in the public Network. This parameter similarly screens the Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) of transit calls sent to the public Network.
CPN x CPN y Network QSIG Coral Gateway PINX CPN z Public Network ISDN ANI Screen Send (Filter) ISDN (PRI, BRI) Public Network CPN x screened CPN y screened CPN z screened

Enter U if no CPN is to be sent. The UNAVAILABLE information element is sent instead. Enter S to send the Site LDN number defined for the Routing Access (see SITE LDN [5] on page 15-6) of the outgoing gateway associated with the call*. (Route: LCR, 1) Entering T causes the CPN to pass through the Gateway PINX without being screened. Enter O to prevent sending the ANI (on the trunk group members) to the called party. Use this option to prevent call rejection by the CO when receiving an ANI that was not requested. For example: BRI trunks on a 4TBR line are marked with 8 CPNs. The CO expects to find one of these numbers in the CPN field. When a Coral station uses one of these trunks, the resulting ANI includes the station number, thus creating an unidentifiable ANI which is not accepted by the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]


8-18

SEARCH TYPE 0 (Circular), 1 (Terminal) Trunk Group Index 0: Default = 0 Determines whether outgoing trunk group access always selects the lowest member number available (terminal), or selects the next available member following the member last selected in the group (circular).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

*. The Site_LDN # (if defined) is sent regardless of the SITE LDN ALL CALLS (Route: LCR, 1) definition. . When the NPID of the received CPN is Private, then the UNAVAILABLE IE is sent.

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

DTD OVERRIDE No (Follow originating port COS), Yes (Disregard originating port COS) Irrelevant for ISDN (IPG, PRI, BRI) trunks. For CAMA trunks, set this parameter to Yes. (It is strongly recommended to create a separate trunk group for CAMA trunks with this definition group wide.) Override Dial Tone Detector determines whether outgoing access to a member of the group allows dialing on the trunk before dial tone is detected, regardless of the originating port Class of Service requirement to wait for dial tone before dialing. Dial tone detection (entering an N) requires an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF card to be installed in the system (see DTD [68] on page 7-18).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OGR_OVERRIDE Yes/No Defines whether a station defined as Outgoing Restricted is allowed to use this specific trunk group to make outgoing trunk calls, overriding the restriction. For example: hotel guests who have already checked out can still access voice mail connected over an E&M trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COLLECT_TONE_ Yes/No OVERRIDE? r This parameter is relevant only if COLLECT_CALL_REJECT_TONE [38] on page 9-13 (SLT) or 9-50 (KEY) is set to YES. Defines whether or not an incoming collect call arriving via this trunk group to a station may override the collect call restriction, if defined for the station. This is relevant when a Coral user needs permission to accept collect calls from a specific destination only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SDT Yes/No EU only When Second Dial Tone is set to Y, the Coral checks the first digits of an outgoing call (see Table 8-1 on page 8-20). When a match is found, the Coral sends only those matched first digits. The system then waits for dial tone from the CO at which point the rest of the digits of the external number are out-pulsed. When an 8DTD, 8DRCM or 8DRCF card (with dial tone detectors) is installed, the outgoing call will be disconnected when the second dial tone is not detected. However, when the relevant Dial Tone card is not installed, the rest of the digits are released after a system-wide time-out (see SECOND_DIAL_TONE [5] (page 8-8) in Trunk Timers).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-19

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

Trunk Controls PAGING Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

This feature applies to groups of E&M trunks connected to the paging system known as ESPA protocol (European Selective Paging manufacturers Association)

1) This feature is mutually exclusive with SDT, above. If Yes is selected for PAGING, then SDT must be set to No. 2) When selected, the E&M trunk must be defined as DTMF (see page 8-11) or IMMEDIATE (see page 8-86)
Table 8-1: Chart of Second Dial Tones - Europe* Outpulsing Digits # of digits before SDT is checked

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

Eu0 (Netherlands)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 9 7 1,2,3,4,5 or 8 1,2,3,4 or 5 1,3,4,5 or 8 3 or 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 --any digit 0 3 5 8 1,6,7 or 8 1,2,5 or 9 2 or 4 1,2,4,7 or 9 1,2,4,6,7 or 9 3 or 8 -------any digit any digit any digit any digit any digit any digit -------any digit any digit any digit any digit any digit any digit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]


8-20

Eu1 (Belgium)
0 0 ---2

Eu3 (Spain)
0 7 ---2

* Second Dial Tone is not relevant in Eu2 countries.

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

TK_TK_CONNECT_ Yes/No OVERRIDE Trunk to Trunk Connect Override allows or denies a trunk group member to connect to another trunk within the same group, as well as within another group. This parameter is relevant only if TK_TO_TK_CONNECT [0] on page 6-8 is set to No, and TK_TK_XFER_OVERRIDE [65] on page 7-18 is set to Yes.

r
l l l l

When the trunk group includes ISDN trunks defined as NETWORK_SIDE, this parameter must be set to YES.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BCCOS 0..63 ISDN only Defines which Bearer Capability COS is applied for trunks defined as ISDN when dialing in or out of the Coral System. See BCCOS Control beginning on page 26-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ROUTING ACCESS Routing Access number (see NPL,0,5,37) or None (80)

Irrelevant when DIALING METHOD (below) is set to Overlap.

Determines the Routing Access, if any, to be applied to each outgoing trunk belonging to the trunk group, when the trunk is not accessed by dialing the Routing Access number. See Chapter 15 for Routing Access information.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIALING METHOD O (Overlap)/E (Enblock)

For CAMA trunks, set this parameter to Enblock.

Defines which dialing method is used for the related trunk group.

When OVERLAP is chosen, the trunk is seized first and then the digits are sent. To set this parameter to Overlap, define the following PRI signaling parameters for the related trunk group in the DTDB,4 branch as follows:
l l l

PROTOCOL_ID [6] (page 26-14) should not be defined as QSIG SENDING_COMPLETE for Outgoing Calls [13] (page 26-15) to No. SENDING_COMPLETE for Enblock Incoming calls [14] (page 26-15) to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

QSIG trunk groups should set this parameter to Enblock.

8-21

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

When ENBLOCK is chosen, the Coral sends all digits in a packet.

Trunk Controls DIAL IN FILTER Table 8-3 on page 8-34

PI Reference Manual

For incoming calls only.

The filter modifies digits received from the trunks in the group to match the system numbering plan. Digits may be added, removed (i.e. ignored) or conditionally removed when they match a specific pattern. The system numbering plan can only accept a range of one to eight digits. If the result of a filter directs a call to a station, no additional digits can follow the station number. A filter can channel an incoming DID/E&M call to an outbound tie line or CO trunk. Such a filter contains the Public Library dial number to access the desired trunk or trunk group, not the trunk or trunk group dial number. Digits may appear in the filter after the Public Library dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIAL IN/CALLER OUT 0..to Max defined in SIZ (see OFFSET_FILTER (page 4-11); OFFSET R (Remove for None) Defines which offset filter is relevant for E&M or DID members when dialing into the Coral system (see page 8-37). Trunks dialing into the system are interpreted as the specification of the filter (see Offset Filters beginning on page 8-37). In the absence of an extended filter (NONE), default, each digit is separately verified according to the numbering plan without filtering. When an offset filter is defined, the incoming digits are modified to match the system numbering plan. Applies also to outgoing calls by reverse defining the ANI. If DIAL IN FILTER above is defined, then the incoming number is first filtered by that Dial In filter and then filtered according to this offset filter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALLER # OUT Delete Digits using Rn: where n is the number of digits to be removed FILTER from the beginning of the ANI

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]


8-22

For outgoing calls only.

Defines the filter used to define the outgoing ANI (Automatic Number Identification). This is the number that is displayed to the network. If DIAL IN/CALLER OUT OFFSET above is defined, then the outgoing number (ANI) is first filtered by that offset filter and then by this Caller # Out Filter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

INCOMING ANI Yes/No FILTERS r The following two sets of parameters First Incoming ANI Filters: and Second Incoming ANI Filters: are displayed and can be defined only when this parameter is set to Yes. Set this parameter to Yes to enable the system to modify the incoming ANI for calls on this trunk based on the caller type. A maximum of two different types of modified ANI may be defined for different combinations of caller number types (Unknown, International, National, or Subscriber) where the filters for the first set (First Incoming ANI Filters:) are applied before the second set (Second Incoming ANI Filters:). When this parameter is set to No, no filters are applied to the incoming ANI. The modified ANI can be used for:
l l l

displays on Keysets, and, SLTs with CID displays SMDR Reports Reports to external applications (e.g.: billing, CRM or a Directory application) Outgoing Calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-23

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual The following parameters define the ANI modification required based on the type of the incoming number. A second, additional, ANI modification can be defined by defining the parameters for Second Incoming ANI Filters:, below, however, this set of filters are applied to the ANI before the Second Set. FILTER None (no filter applied) See Table below. The filter modifies the incoming ANI by adding, removing (i.e. ignoring) and/or conditionally removing part or all of the ANI digits. This filter is applied before the next, OFFSET filter.

First Incoming ANI Filters:

r
Filter Operation ADD/INSERT DIGITS

To alter the ANI for a range of stations, use the OFFSET below.

Table 8-2: Incoming ANI Filters - Range of Operation Example Digit string from trunk: Desired digit string: Filter entry: DELETE MATCHING DIGITS (Conditional Extraction) DELETE DIGITS Desired digit string: Filter entry: Desired digit string: Filter entry:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Explanation 156 4156 4 456 [123] 354 R3


l l l l l l

Defines the required digits to be added to the beginning of the ANI call number. Enclose the digit pattern that should be matched and deleted between square brackets ([ ]). Define the number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the ANI call number by entering R followed by the quantity of digits to delete.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Digit string from trunk:123456

Digit string from trunk:396354

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

OFFSET None (no offset filter applied) 0 to Max as defined in SIZ for OFFSET_FILTER (page 4-11), R (Remove for None) Enter the index number of the offset filter element used. Each offset filter is defined in Offset Filters beginning on page 8-37. This offset filter is applied to the ANI only after the above FILTER is applied.

r
l l l l

Offset filters cannot be applied on ANI numbers longer than 8 digits.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Relevant Define the type/s of ANI number to which the above filters are to be applied. Number Types: More than one type of number may be defined as Yes.
UNKNOWN Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of an UNKNOWN type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-24

PI Reference Manual INTERNATIONAL Yes/No

Trunk Controls

Relevant only for ISDN ANI type numbers.

Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of an INTERNATIONAL type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NATIONAL Yes/No

Relevant only for ISDN ANI type numbers.

Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of a NATIONAL type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUBSCRIBER Yes/No

Relevant only for ISDN ANI type numbers.

Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of a SUBSCRIBER type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-25

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual This is the second set of parameters that define the ANI call number modification required, based on the type of incoming number. This set of filters is applied on the ANI number only after the first set is applied.

Second Incoming ANI Filters:

FILTER None (no filter applied) See Table 8-2 on page 8-24 above This filter modifies the incoming ANI by adding, removing (i.e. ignoring) and/or conditionally removing part or all of the ANI digits.

r
l l l l

To alter the ANI for a range of stations, use the OFFSET below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OFFSET None (no offset filter applied) 0 to Max as defined in SIZ for OFFSET_FILTER (page 4-11), R (Remove for None) Enter the index number of the offset filter element used. Each offset filter is defined in Offset Filters beginning on page 8-37. This filter is applied to the ANI number only after the above FILTER is applied.

r
l l l l

Offset filters cannot be applied on ANI numbers longer than 8 digits.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Relevant Define the type/s of ANI number to which the above filters are to be applied. Number Types: More than one type of number may be defined as Yes.
UNKNOWN Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of an UNKNOWN type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]


8-26

INTERNATIONAL Yes/No

Relevant only for ISDN ANI type numbers.

Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of an INTERNATIONAL type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NATIONAL Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of a NATIONAL type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUBSCRIBER Yes/No Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined above, for incoming ANI call numbers of a SUBSCRIBER type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

METERING_UNIT_ 0.00 to 65000.99 (for systems with decimal definitions for cents) CHARGE 0 to 65000 (for systems defining only integers) N (number of pulses is displayed, instead of cost)

Irrelevant when DIALING METHOD (page 8-21) is set to Overlap.

Defines the cost per one metering pulse received from the CO for an outgoing call. The total price of a call is the price per pulse multiplied by the number of pulses. Entry can be made with a decimal point for cents or without decimal point for integer number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING_CLI_ Yes/No REQUEST Determines if a request should be made to the CO for Calling Line Identification (CLI) on an incoming call. Enables the display of incoming caller identification (CID or CLI) to telephone with a display unit. During ringing, the incoming caller identification display allows the called party to decide whether to answer the call or not. The CLI number will remain on display for the call duration, both in the CAP and the SMDR listing. The incoming CLI can be received via 4/8T-CID trunk cards and via MFC trunks. Likewise in DTMF signaling, only from E&M continuous with Wink Start trunks.

Notes: To display the incoming call (CLI) in the SMDR listing, ON_LINE EXTENDED_SMDR_INFORMATION [7] on page 14-4 (SMDR Control) must be defined. This parameter is also defined in the DID/E&M branch. The CLI feature for analog Loop-Start / Ground-Start trunk requires Authorization for Caller ID. The CLI display feature for SLT requires a 8/16/24SLS (software version 3.xx or higher) peripheral card, iDSP card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. In the CSX 200 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires a U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. In the IPx 500 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires an MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port.

When a particular trunk is defined in both the above tables during an incoming call, the CLI parameter in the DID/E&M table is the determining factor.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-27

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

Trunk Controls SEND_ANI_USING_ Yes/No DTMF/MFC r Not Relevant:

PI Reference Manual

for QSIG groups or when ANI_SCREENING_SEND, above, is set to Omit.

When SDT is defined for the trunk group (Holland-Eu0, Belgium-Eu1 or Spain-Eu3), set this parameter to No.

Enables sending the ANI over E&M trunks using DTMF. The trunks must use the E&M protocol that supports ANI transmission. The ANI is determined by the Coral as a combination of the caller ID and a prefix. The caller number is based on either the station number or the CPN for incoming trunk calls. The ANI is defined in OUTGOING ANI (page 15-6). The offset filters described above apply to this ANI as well. Set this parameter to Yes if the called PBX or CO expects ANI digits, otherwise, set this parameter to No.

Tip: When connected in a network with another Coral, one Coral can send ANI if
the INCOMING_CLI_REQUEST (page 8-27) of the relevant trunk group in the called Coral is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NUMBER OF DIGITS 1..51/R (Remove for None)/None EXPECTED Determines the number of digits that are expected to be received by the Coral from the CO through the incoming trunk. When None (default) is selected, the received digits are analyzed when the interdigit time-out is over. However, when a number between 1 and 51 is selected, the received digits are immediately analyzed after all the expected digits are detected. If the call is on a PRI trunk in ENBLOCK mode, the parameter need not be defined since the number of digits is sent in the packet.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

DISABLE_DTMF_ Yes/No SUPERVSION Defines whether DTMF resources will be used to process the incoming digits over this trunk line. When this parameter is set to Yes, DTMF receivers are not used. Set this parameter to No if this trunk group will be used to serve applications where Coral DTMF analysis is required, such as external Voice Mail., Answering Machines and FlexiCall. Set this parameter to Yes only if this trunk group will be used exclusively to serve applications where Coral DTMF analysis is not required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

JOIN GROUP CALL IN Yes/No MUTE Set this parameter to No for the outgoing trunk that is used for establishing the connection between Group Calls thus creating a large Group call.

8-28

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls This accommodates the expanded Group Call by providing an open bi-directional channel between two adjacent Group Calls. See Example (page 10-26) in Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LAR_MAX_ 0..2..10 ASYNCHRONOUS_ Defines the maximum number of Look Ahead Routing (LAR) attempts FAILS (undertaken within a specific trunk group) to re-route a call to the trunk next in order to the one that has failed with an identifiable cause pointing to asynchronous failure. When the allowed maximum is reached, the connection fails and the system returns a failure cause message to the originating Coral (see Look Ahead Routing Triggers beginning on page 15-24). When the route to the terminating Coral is split into a few legs by having transit Corals along the routing path, the failure cause message is sent to the originating Coral for that particular leg. An asynchronous failure occurs when the signaling sequence that sets up the call is completed before the connection establishment confirmation has been received from the terminating end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LAR SYSTEM Cost/Performance PREFERENCE Define the Look Ahead Routing (LAR) system Preference by either Cost or (COST/ Performance. PERFORMANCE) Selecting Performance causes LAR to block the failed trunk for a longer period. This reduces the number of re-attempts to re-route the call to that trunk, thus providing a faster response for the user. Selecting Cost causes LAR to block the failed trunk for a shorter period. This makes re-attempts to re-route the call to that trunk more frequent, thus increasing the probability of establishing a connection over the most economical route.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LAR_TRIGGERS_SET 0..3 Defines the Look Ahead Routing (LAR) Trigger set for this Trunk Group. A LAR trigger set groups together ISDN/QSIG causes launching LAR. Each set pertains to a specific network, e.g. Public Network, Private QSIG Network, IP Network or Analog Network. (see NAME (16) [1] (page 15-26) in the Look Ahead Routing Triggers beginning on page 15-24). When an asynchronous failure occurs over a call sent via that trunk group the call is rerouted in the specified network. An asynchronous failure occurs when the signaling sequence that sets up the call is completed before the connection establishment confirmation has been received from the terminating end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-29

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

TRANSIT ALI 0..3200 (or maximum as defined in SIZ, see Chapter 4) or R (Remove for no Alternate), None This parameter provides the Alternate Line ID (i.e. caller number information) for incoming tandem (transit) calls that do not possess Caller ID information by marking the call with an ALI index number. The index number given in this parameter (i.e., 0 to 3200) is defined with Caller ID info in the ISDN/ALI tables in the Alternate Line ID (page 26-9) branch. The Caller ID information is displayed at the terminating end and can be used for call recording systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MEM # Default: Trunk Group Index 0: All LS/GS trunks in ascending order, equipped at First Initialization, Default for all Other Groups: None Range: Any valid outgoing trunk dial numbers, including IP_NET trunks; Max: 95 members

In European systems all ALS70 and GID trunks are (by default) also members of trunk group index 0.

Identifies the dial number of each trunk, in ascending order, assigned to the group. Each trunk can be a member of only one trunk group. A trunk need not be a member of any group, however outgoing access to a trunk cannot be denied by Class of Service unless the trunk is a member of a trunk group. Entering R removes the member currently displayed from the group and decrements the MEM# of following group members, filling the void left by the removed member.

Always remove a trunk from a trunk group before the trunk dial number is removed from the numbering plan.

Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]


8-30

Entering A allows a new trunk to be added in the existing order, incrementing the MEM# of the member currently displayed and all that follow, shifting existing members out of the way to make room for the added trunk. Always enter a trunk to a similar type trunk group, such as a QSIG trunk to a QSIG trunk group. Attempting to enter a QSIG trunk to a non-QSIG trunk group causes the following error message:
TRUNK GROUP IS NOT QSIG.

Likewise, attempting to enter a non-QSIG trunk to a QSIG trunk group results in a similar error message:
ONLY QSIG ALLOWED.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

Alternate Route

W ROUT

[0,5,1,1]

Alternate Route is used to determine the outgoing call route when all trunks of a selected trunk group are busy. While not intended to take the place of true Routing Access (which requires additional authorization), alternate routing is a simple method of accommodating trunk group overflow conditions. Each Alternate Route entry specifies a primary trunk group, one or more alternate trunk groups or public library numbers, and the time of day the alternate route is available. Each trunk group can have only one alternate route available at any given time of day. If more than one alternate route is entered, the time period that each alternate route is available must not overlap or conflict with the time period of any other entry. Alternate Route is a type of cascade route. If Trunk Group A alternate routes to Trunk Group B, and Trunk Group B alternate routes to Trunk Group C, when Trunk Groups A and B are both busy, an outgoing call attempt to Trunk Group A selects a trunk from Trunk Group C if one is available. Alternate Route programming is not necessary when routing access is implemented in the system.

SELECT TK GRP # Any valid trunk group dial number;

Default: 1st Trunk Group (Index # 0)


Determines the dial number of the primary trunk group. (See Trunk Group Definition beginning on page 8-16.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GRP#/LIB# Any valid trunk group or public library dial number

FROM TIME 00:00..23:59 (None) Determines the time the alternate (secondary) route becomes available. Time is entered in a 24-hour format (00=midnight, 12=noon; 01=1 AM, 13=1 PM; see Programming and Entering Time Units on page 2-6) as HH:MM.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TILL TIME 00:00..23:59 (None) Determines the end of the time period the alternate (secondary) route becomes available. Time is entered in 24-hour format (00=midnight, 12=noon; 01=1 AM, 13=1 PM; see Programming and Entering Time Units on page 2-6) as HH:MM. For example, for 1:13PM, enter 13:13.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-31

Alternate Route ROUT [0,5,1,1]

Determines the dial number of the alternate trunk group or public library (speed call) dial number to process an outgoing call if the primary trunk group has no available trunks.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

DID/E&M Groups

W DIDG

[0,5,6]

DID/E&M Groups establish from one to four unique Direct Inward Dial (DID) and E&M trunk groups. Each group has an individual digit filter, allowing incoming digits from the trunks within a specific group to be modified thus matching the system numbering plan. A DID/E&M trunk may be a member of a DID/E&M group consisting of one or more DID/E&M trunks, however a trunk can be a member of only one DID/E&M group. If a DID/E&M line belongs to a DID/E&M group, the number of digits received by the Coral is defined when the group was assigned its identifying numbers. The number assigned to a group can consist of between one and ten (1 - 10) digits. Once the number is assigned it is fixed unless changed through the filter. By using the filter the DID/E&M number can be changed to suit various system requirements by making it compatible to the system numbering plan. The number pattern is verified and acted on by the system only after all digits are received as defined. If a DID/E&M line does not belong to a DID/E&M group, then each digit of the numbering plan is separately verified for acceptance. Only after all the digits have passed and the numbering plan is correct, communication continues without filtering. Legal DID group members may be defined through the following types of cards:

4TWL

8DID 8GID 8BID

4GID 4BID

30T/E

30T

30T/M

DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]


8-32

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

FROM 0..3 TO 0..3 DID/E&M_GRP# Enter the required range of DID/E&M group index numbers FROM the lowest DID/E&M group index number TO the highest DID/E&M group index number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum: 5 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK) Defines the trunk groups short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) and full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters), associated with the trunk group. This entry is used only for programming purposes. Incoming trunk calls display the individual trunk name, not this group name. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FULL (16) Maximum: 16 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK) Defines the trunk groups full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters), associated with the trunk group. This entry is used only for programming purposes. Incoming trunk calls display the individual trunk name, not this group name. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FILTER See Table 8-3 below The filter modifies digits received from the trunks in the group to match the system numbering plan. Digits may be added, removed (i.e. ignored) or conditionally removed when they match a specific pattern. The system numbering plan can only accept a range of one to eight digits. If the result of a filter directs a call to a station, no additional digits can follow the station number. A filter can channel an incoming DID/E&M call to an outbound tie line or CO trunk. Such a filter contains the Public Library dial number to access the desired trunk or group, not the trunk or trunk group dial number. Digits may appear in the filter after the Public Library dial number. The table below lists and explains the various filters. This filter is relevant only when INCOMING_OFFSET_FILTER (below) is defined as NONE.

8-33

DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual When more than one group of stations or when the capability to address a fragmented numbering plan is required, use the INCOMING_OFFSET_FILTER listed below.
Table 8-3: DID/E&M Group Filters - Range of Operation

Filter Operation ADD/INSERT DIGITS

Example Digit string from trunk: Desired digit string: Filter entry: 156 4156 4

Explanation

Enter the required digits at the position in the filter where the insertion is desired. Additional digits are inserted before any remaining digits are received from the trunk. Digits cannot be added to the end of a digit string received from the trunk. Enclose the digit pattern that should be matched and deleted between square brackets ([ ]). Digits will only be deleted if the pattern appears starting with the first digit received from the trunk. The received pattern must match the pattern within the brackets, exactly. Entering D in the digit string matches any digit received in that position. A specific number of digits may be deleted within the string by entering R followed by the quantity of digits to delete. Digits are always deleted from a received string starting with the first digit received. Digits in the middle of the received string may not be deleted. Incoming calls routed from the system to other switching systems in a network may require delays (pauses) during the digit string transmission. Delays are entered into the filter string at any position by entering D followed by a single digit (1-9) These digits denote seconds (one through nine seconds). Numbers can be entered one after another in order to increase the delay period beyond 9 seconds.

DELETE MATCHING DIGITS (Conditional Extraction)

Digit string from trunk:123456 Desired digit string: Filter entry: 456 [123]

DELETE DIGITS

Digit string from trunk:396354 Desired digit string: Filter entry: 354 R3

INSERT DELAY

Digit string from trunk: 1234 Desired digit string: 6000,14 second delay,1234 Filter entry: *6000D9D5

DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]


8-34

* 6000 is a Public Library num

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

INCOMING_OFFSET_ None (previous filter applied) FILTER 0 to Max as defined in SIZ for OFFSET_FILTER (page 4-11), R (Remove for None) Defines which offset filter element is relevant for DID/E&M members when dialing into the Coral (see Offset Filters beginning on page 8-37). DID and E&M members dialing into the system are interpreted as the specification of the extended filter. In the absence of an extended filter, the previous filter is applied. The extended filter can be used for installing a fragmented numbering plan with the capability to dial to several groups of stations with different prefixes. The previous filter supports only one area.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

#_DIGITS_EXPCTD 1..51, R (Remove for None) Determines the number of digits that are expected to be received from the Central Office through the incoming trunk. When None (default) is selected, the received digits are analyzed when the interdigit time-out is over. However, when numbers 1 through 51 are selected, the received digits are immediately analyzed after all the expected digits are detected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING_CLI_ Yes/No REQUEST Determines if a request should be made to the CO for Calling Line Identification (CLI) on an incoming call. Enables the display of incoming caller identification (CID or CLI) to telephone with a display unit. During ringing, the incoming caller identification display allows the called party to decide whether to answer the call or not. The CLI number will remain on display for the call duration, both in the CAP and the SMDR listing. The incoming CLI can be received via 4/8T-CID trunk cards and via MFC trunks. Likewise in DTMF signaling, only from E&M continuous with Wink Start trunks.

Notes: This parameter is also defined in the DID/E&M branch. The CLI feature for analog Loop-Start / Ground-Start trunk requires Authorization for Caller ID. The CLI display feature for SLT requires a 8/16/24SLS (software version 3.xx or higher) peripheral card, iDSP card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. In the CSX 200 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires a U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. In the IPx 500 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires an MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above, Authorization for

8-35

DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. For display of the incoming call (CLI) in the SMDR listing, the On-Line Extended SMDR Information parameter on the SMDR Control branch must be defined (see Chapter 14). This parameter is also defined in Trunk Group Definition beginning on page 8-16. When a particular trunk is defined in both the above tables during an incoming call, the CLI parameter in the DID/E&M table is the determining factor.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PREFIX: FROM/TO 0..9, number of digits defined in #_DIGITS_EXPCTD, R (Remove) Eu1 only (BID, 30T/E) This option is relevant when #_DIGITS_EXPCTD, above, equals 1 through 8. The maximum number of prefixes allowed per DID group is five (5), for each of five (5) different Numbering Plan ranges. This represents the five prefix ranges permitted by the Central Office for dialing internal stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COLLECT_TONE_ Yes/No OVERRIDE? r This parameter is relevant only if COLLECT_CALL_REJECT_TONE [38] on page 9-13 (SLT) or 9-50 (KEY) is set to YES. Defines whether or not an incoming collect call arriving via this trunk group to a station may override the collect call restriction, if defined for the station. This is relevant when a Coral user needs permission to accept collect calls from a specific destination only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MEM # Any valid DID or E&M trunk dial number up to 255 members, None Identifies the dial number of the DID or E&M trunk in the DID/E&M group. The prompt appears each time an entry is made and [ENTER] is pressed. If an attempt is made to define a member that is not a DID or E&M trunk number this error message appears:
NOT DID/E&M TK#.

DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]


8-36

A trunk can be a member of only a single DID/E&M group. If an attempt is made to define a trunk that is already defined, the following message appears:
ALREADY DEFINED IN GRP#?

To insert a DID or E&M trunk dial number into an existing list, press [CR] at the trunk dial number which is to follow the inserted trunk. Enter A and the new trunk dial number. In order to remove a trunk from the group, enter [R]. All trunks must be removed from a group before the group can be deleted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

Offset Filters

W ROOT,0,0,7
In addition to the filter provided for each trunk group, the Coral allows defining a maximum of 250 Offset Filters with a fixed number of elements per offset filter, (see OFFSET_FILTER on page 4-11). The Offset Filter can be used for installing a fragmented numbering plan with the capability to dial several groups of stations with different prefixes. The Offset Filter is used for mapping the Numbering Plan ranges of the Coral System to that of the Network. The offset filter works in conjunction with any filter previously defined for a trunk or trunk group. For an incoming DID call, the regular filter (defined in the trunk group) is applied first and then the offset filter. An outgoing call can also use the offset filter. In this instance, the offset filter is applied before the regular filter, but for ANI only. It is possible to choose only an offset filter, or a regular filter, or both, or no filter at all. Each element is programmed to filter a specific range of received dial numbers to match the system numbering plan. The number of elements allowed, system-wide, is defined in N_FILTER_ELEMENTS PER OFFSET FILTER (page 4-11) in the Sizes Definition branch. The following examples demonstrate a few ways in which the Offset filters redefine numbers received in the Coral.
Offset Filter #1 Element # Element #1 Received Number Number in Coral

FROM: TO:

356-6000 356-6199 326-4500 326-4599 8-536-2500 8-536-2599

2000 2199 4500 4599 84002500 84002599

Element #2

FROM: TO:

Element #3

FROM: TO:

SELECT OFFSET 0 to Max as defined in SIZ for OFFSET_FILTER (page 4-11) FILTER# Enter the number of the required offset filter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-37

Offset Filters ROOT,0,0,7

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual Once this filter is selected, the following option menu becomes available:
Option 0 - UPDATE 1 - DISPLAY 2 - ADD Description

Allows updating the existing filter element. Displays the elements for the selected filter. Adds an element to the selected filter. Up to N_FILTER_ELEMENTS PER OFFSET FILTER (page 4-11) (defined in SIZ) elements per offset filter exist. Removes a specific element from the selected filter. Erases all elements in the selected filter.

3 - REMOVE 7 - ERASE

FROM/TO RECEIVED# Up to eight digits, 0 to 9, *, # Enter the first and last numbers in a range of dial numbers as received from the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM DIAL# Up to eight digits, 0 to 9, *, # Enter the first number in a range of Coral internal dial numbers that is to be dialed when the FROM/TO RECEIVED# above is received. The To Dial # end range is automatically applied.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ERROR MESSAGES The following error messages may be received when programming Offset Filters:
Error Message OFFSET FILTER NOT DEFINED Cause Received when attempting to display elements in a filter that has no previous elements defined. Received when attempting to update elements of a filter that has no previous elements defined, or the wrong range of numbers has been entered. Received when attempting to remove elements from a filter that has no previous elements defined, or the wrong range of numbers has been entered. Received when attempting to add elements to a filter that has no previous elements defined, or the wrong range of numbers has been entered.

WRONG OFFSET FILTER UPDATE

Offset Filters ROOT,0,0,7


8-38

WRONG OFFSET FILTER REMOVE

WRONG OFFSET FILTER ADD

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

Power Fail Trunk Definition

W TRK,4

[0,2,1,0,0,4]

Power Fail Trunk Definition establishes the database for power fail (PF) trunks. Power fail programming applies only to LS/GS (Loop Start or Ground Start) analog trunks. Power fail trunks are standard Ground Start or Loop Start trunks connected to a Power Fail trunk card, along with any one of the following cards: 4T cards with four (4) PF ports (CKT# 0, 1, 2, and 3): 4TPF, 4T/S-PF-ES, 4TMR/S-12PF-ES, 4T/S PF-G, 4TMR/S-12/16PF, 4TMR/S-12/16PF/S, 4TMR-PF-G, 4TMR/S-50/16-PF-G 4TMR-PFipx, 4TMR/S-12/16-PF-Gipx, 4ALS 4TPFsl, 4TMR-PFsl, 4T-C, 4T-Cipx, 4T-Csl, 4T-CID, 4T-CIDipx and 4T-CIDsl 8T cards with two (2) PF ports (CKT# 2, 3, 4, and 5): 8TPFsl 8T cards with four (4) PF ports (CKT# 4 and 5): 8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T/S PF-G, 8TPF, 8ALS, 8T-Cipx, 8T-Csl, 8T-CIDipx, 8T-CIDsl

Each LS/GS trunk port may have one station dial number assigned to it, along with any one of the following cards: 2/4/8SK (Cards Discontinued) 4/8SH/S(-LL) (Cards Discontinued) 16SH/S(-LL) 8/16/24SLS; 8/16SLSipx; 8/16SLSsl; 8F8Ssl 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx station card circuit, plus a SLT station card circuit, plus a power fail EKT301-PF or EKT321-PF. (Discontinued) Power fail EKT301-PF or EKT321-PF (Discontinued) provide voice only communication when in power fail mode, (the display is blank and programmed buttons do not function).

Should power return to normal while a station is in conversation, the call is not disconnected since the station is defined as busy to the system. Install a power fail station near the Attendant position when possible.

In European systems 4ALS and 8ALS trunks have the Power Fail option when defined as Loop Start or NonDID type trunks. Incoming trunk seize must be accompanied with a ring current, see CHECK_RING for the relevant Port Database.
Only SLTs or EKT301/321-PF sets can be power failure stations. FlexSets, DKTs and DSTs cannot be power failure stations.

8-39

Power Fail Trunk Definition TRK,4 [0,2,1,0,0,4]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid LS/GS analog trunk dial numbers/All LS/GS analog trunks

Digital trunks cannot be used.

Enter the required range of Loop Start/Ground Start analog trunks; FROM the lowest LS/GS analog trunk number TO the highest LS/GS analog trunk number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DEST Any valid station SLT or EKT301/321-PF dial number/None Determines the power fail station system dial number that is connected during power failure to the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Power Fail Trunk Definition TRK,4 [0,2,1,0,0,4]


8-40

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks

W TRK,2

[0,2,1,0,0,2]

LOOP START/GROUND START/ALS70-LS/NON-DID/DDO/NON-DDI TRUNKS


The following information applies to ground start, loop start, ALS70-LS, non-DID, DDO and non-DDI trunks only (including 4TWL cards). The following parameters are used in addition to the General Trunk Definitions, as described in this chapter. Field Numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid LS/GS trunk number // All defined LS/GS trunks Enter the required range of trunk numbers, FROM the lowest TO the highest.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LS/GS [0] 0 (Loop Start)/1(Ground Start) 4T/8T Trunks only CC0: 1 Determines whether the trunk loop signaling is loop start (LS) or ground start (GS). This entry must match the entry in the 4/8TPF, 4/8TPF-sl, 4TMR/4TMRsl, 4/8T-C, 4/8T-CID, 4/8T-Csl, 4/8T-CIDsl Card Database in this chapter, and option strapping on the card (see relevant Installation Manual).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DISC_SUPER [2] Yes/No Loop Start and Eu0 nonDID: Yes Eu0 (NonDDI) only This option is the same as DISC SUPER in General Trunk Definitions (see page 8-14). Programming one Disconnect Supervision will directly affect the other. It is recommended to program this option through General Trunk Definitions beginning on page 8-10. Determines whether the system call processing logic can expect disconnect supervision from the Central Office. If N is entered, the trunk is considered a Port Without Disconnect Supervision (PWDS), and when connected to another PWDS, will recall to the incomplete calls destination periodically to determine if a conversation is still in progress between the 2 ports. Enter N if disconnect supervision is not provided, or not consistently provided on incoming calls to the trunk. Should disconnect supervision appear on the trunk, an N in this entry will inhibit its recognition by the system. Entering Y requires Central Office supervision.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-41

LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks TRK,2 [0,2,1,0,0,2]

ANSWER [1] Yes/No Digital Trunks only Determines whether an outgoing call should expect an answer from the Central Office. If Yes is selected the system waits for a CO answer for the duration of the wait time defined in ANSWER_DELAY [9] (page 8-4). When the time expires before answer is detected, the system automatically disconnects the trunk. A user connected to the trunk cannot transfer calls before answer is accepted.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

DISC_SUPER_I/C [3] Yes/No Ground Start only Incoming Disconnect Supervision determines whether the system call processing logic can expect disconnect supervision from the Central Office. If N is entered, the trunk is considered a Port Without Disconnect Supervision (PWDS). When connected to another PWDS, the connection periodically recalls the incomplete calls destination to determine if a conversation is still in progress between the 2 ports. N should be entered if disconnect supervision is not provided, or is not consistently provided on incoming calls to the trunk. Should disconnect supervision appear on the trunk, an N in this entry does not inhibit its recognition by the system. If Y is entered, supervision must be provided by the Central Office. This entry is independent of the DISC SUPER O/G entry.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DISC_SUPER_O/G [4] Yes/No Ground Start only Outgoing Disconnect Supervision is similar to, but independent of DISC SUPER I/C, above. This parameter determines whether the system call processing logic can expect disconnect supervision from the CO during outgoing calls. If N is entered, the trunk is considered a Port Without Disconnect Supervision (PWDS) when the trunk is seized to make an outgoing call. Should disconnect supervision appear on the trunk, a N in this entry will not inhibit its recognition by the system. If Y is entered, supervision must be provided by the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

POLAR RVRS UPON:


ANSWER [5] Yes/No Polarity Reverse Upon Answer determines whether the first polarity reverse after outgoing seizure is interpreted as answer supervision. If Y is entered, ANSWER_ DELAY [9] on page 8-4 (General Trunk Timers) is active, and battery reverse must occur before the trunk can be held or transferred.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks TRK,2 [0,2,1,0,0,2]


8-42

ONHK [6] Yes/No Polarity Reverse Upon Onhook determines whether a polarity reverse is interpreted as disconnect supervision. If Y is entered and POLAR RVRS UPON ANSWER is Y, the first polarity reverse outgoing seizure is interpreted as an answer, and the following reverse is interpreted as a disconnect. If POLAR RVRS UPON ANSWER is N, the first polarity reverse after seizure is interpreted as a disconnect. Regardless of this entry, an open circuit from the Central Office is interpreted as a disconnect.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

ACTIVE_CALL_ C (Camp)/B (Busy) CAMP_BUSY [7] Determines how the system relates to incoming trunk calls (trunk-to-station) to a busy station not defined as Multi-Appearance (see M.A. definition for SLTs on page 9-14, for Keysets on page 9-42). Enter B (Busy) so that the calling party hears a busy tone when the destination station is busy. Enter C (Camp-on offhook/Call Waiting/Call Offer) to treat the line as a regular LS/GS trunk and to have the Coral relate to the call as an incoming call from the CO. In this case, if the internal called station is busy, the call automatically camps-on to the busy station or enters as a second call in the multi-appearance. In this case (camp-on offhook or multi appearance), the calling party hears a second ringback tone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CALLER_ID [8] Yes/No SAU Authorization Defines whether this analog line can provide the Callers ID. When this information is available, the Callers Name/Number can be displayed on the station user set with a display unit. Define this parameter to Yes when the trunk card is 4/8T-CID, 4/8T-CIDsl, (or when the external trunk CID hardware used to implement this feature is installed in parallel to the analog line).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

This parameter is relevant only when external trunk hardware is used to implement Caller ID. Defines the physical hardware external box number to which this analog trunk line is connected. The hardware, an external box, is physically connected in parallel to the analog trunk, and to the 8DRCM, 8DRCF or RMI card via a RS232 serial interface port (like the PI Terminal Device). The hardware runs an application to read the Caller ID information thus enabling Caller ID functions on the station connected via analog trunks. Each box contains 8 ports and a maximum of 8 boxes can be connected to one system. If this number is already defined for another trunk, then the following message is displayed:
ALREADY_DEFINED_BY_DIAL#; CONFIRM Y/N?

The Caller ID information is sent to a Coral Caller ID (CID) box port on a RS232 serial interface port terminal. The terminal should be defined in TERM as CID (see page 17-18).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-43

LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks TRK,2 [0,2,1,0,0,2]

CALLER_ID_BOX_ 1..64/N (None) LINE# [9] r For 4T/8T-CID & 4/8T-CIDsl cards as well as for Coral Teleport FXO units, define this parameter as None.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

4T/8T LGS Port Database

W TRUNK,1

[0,2,1,0,1]

The Trunk Port Database allows programming the trunk port database tables for Loop Start and Ground Start trunk ports connected to 4T or 8T card types. 4TMR-PF, 4TMR-PRsl 4TPF, 8TPF, 4TPFsl and 8TPFsl 4T-C, 8T-C, 4T-Csl and 8TCsl 4T-CID, 8T-CID, 4T-CIDsl and 8T-CIDsl

There are 6 Trunk Port Databases (0-5), one of which is assigned to each Loop Start and Ground Start trunk port (see Port List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM: 0..5 TO: 0..5 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of 4T/8T Port Database tables, FROM the lowest 4T/8T Port Database table number TO the highest 4T/8T Port Database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_DISC [0] 250..1000..2500 ms(in 50 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period that a disconnect signal from a trunk must remain before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [1] 50..80..500 ms(in 10 ms increments); Eu0: 200 ms Eu3: 300 ms Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party. SUSP_SZE results in prohibiting outgoing calls thus preventing a glare condition, or double seizure (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4T/8T LGS Port Database TRUNK,1 [0,2,1,0,1]

CO_BLOCK [2] 50..110..300 ms (in 10 ms increments) Ground Start Trunks Determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the Central Office only (ground or ring), which is the minimum silent duration until the system interprets the signal as a block signal. The timer applies only to trunks defined as Ground Start with Ring (see 4T/8T Card Database beginning on page 8-46). In a CO block state, the trunk is considered busy, thus prohibiting an outgoing trunk seizure. The system awaits ringing indicating an incoming call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-44

PI Reference Manual MIN_SZE [3] 50..300..500 ms (in 10 ms increments); Eu0: 330 Eu3: 320

Trunk Controls

Minimum Seize time determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. In other words, incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_ SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

SEND_TO_CARD? [4] Yes/No Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the port database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Figure 8-2. Incoming Trunk Call Seize Timers


IDLE

INCOMING CALL

MINIMUM SEIZE

time

SUSPECT SEIZE

OFFHOOK

8-45

4T/8T LGS Port Database TRUNK,1 [0,2,1,0,1]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

4T/8T Card Database

W TKDB

4T/8T Card Database establishes the card database for the following Loop Start/Ground Start (LGS) trunk cards: 4T, 4TMR 4TMR-PF, 4TMR-PRsl 4TPF, 8TPF, 4TPFsl and 8TPFsl 4T-C, 8T-C, 4T-Csl and 8TCsl 4T-CID, 8T-CID, 4T-CIDsl and 8T-CIDsl 4TWL

The system allows for a maximum total of four 4T/8T card database combinations (0-3). The Coral system makes no logical distinction among a 4T, 4TMR and a 4TPF card, and likewise 8T and 8TPF cards are considered equivalent. Where a parameter (option) is available for only the 4T/4TPF/4T-C or 8T/8TPF/8T-C card, this is noted. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

FROM: 0..3 TO: 0..3 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of Card Database tables; FROM the lowest Card Database table number TO the highest Card Database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4T/8T? [0] 4T/8T Determines the database card type. If 4T is defined, after a power failure the system returns to 8T. Card type 4T should be used only when the system is using 4T cards exclusively. When 4T is defined the system skips the last four circuits (CKT 4-7). Enter 4T for 4T, 4TMR, 4TPF, 4TPF, 4T-C, 4T-CID and 4TMR-PF cards. Enter 8T for 8T, 8TPF, 8T-C and 8T-CID cards.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4T/8T Card Database TKDB

LS_RING_PAUS [1] 1..5..12 seconds 7: Eu8 Loop Start Ring Pause determines the minimum period that ring generator must remain absent during an incoming call before the system terminates an incoming call indication. This timer applies only to trunks which are defined as Loop Start (LS) in the Trunk LS/GS Port Definition and LS/GS Trunk Card database. The entry should be at least one second greater than the normal interval between ring bursts from the Central Office.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-46

PI Reference Manual GS_RING_PAUS [2] 1..12 seconds

Trunk Controls

Ground Start Ring Pause determines the minimum period that earth ground must remain absent from the tip conductor during an incoming call before the system terminates an incoming call indication. This timer applies only to trunks defined as Ground Start (GS) in the Trunk LS/GS Port Definition and LS/GS Trunk Card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G BREAK_TIME [3] 18..60..90 ms (in 3 ms increments); 67: CC2, Eu3, Eu6, Eu8; 65: Eu1 Outgoing Break Time determines the period that the loop current is interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G MAKE_TIME [4] 18..40..90 ms Eu3 and CC2: 33

(in 3 ms increments);

Outgoing Make Time determines the period that loop current is restored during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G INTERDGT_T [5] 200..800..2250 ms Eu: 2100 ms CC2: 320 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time-Out determines the minimum period that loop current will be restored between digits being rotary (pulse) dialed from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call (for DTMF trunk tones see DTMF_ TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

This is the period of time after a ground start trunk is disconnected in which no outgoing calls may be generated along the trunk. Incoming calls are received during this period, however.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-47

4T/8T Card Database TKDB

GS_DISCONNECT [6] NO RANGE 800 ms: Set by manufacturer DO NOT CHANGE THE DEFAULT.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

METER (4TMR):
f0 [7] 0(16kHz), 1(12kHz), 2(50Hz) Eu0: 2 Eu8: 0

Not used for CC0 (USA) systems

Identifies the frequency sent by the CO to define a meter pulse. This option is relevant for 4TMR and 4TMR-PF cards only. The frequency must match the frequency type printed under the card name on the front panel.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

f0 ACCURACY [8] 1..3..10 inclusive 1 unit = 1%**

Not used for CC0 (USA) systems.

Identifies the accuracy of the meter pulse frequency sent by the CO. This option is relevant for 4TMR and 4TMR-PF cards only. This feature is not used when f0 [7], above, equals 50Hz (2).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

METER_AFTER_ Yes/No; DISCONNECT [9] Yes: CC2, Eu2, Eu3

DISC_SUPER [17] on page 8-14, [TRK,0] must be set to YES in order to activate this feature.

Determines if metering pulses after a trunk call is disconnected are relevant for call charging (see also METER_BEFORE_CONNECT [10] on page 6-10 in SFE.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

METER_TIME_ 50..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments); AFTER_DISCONNECT Eu2, Eu3: 3000 [10] r This parameter is relevant only when the previous METER_AFTER_ DISCONNECT parameter is set to Yes. Defines the system waiting time for more pulses before a disconnect is actually performed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4T/8T Card Database TKDB

8-48

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

COLLECT CALLS 1..254 (1 unit = 10 ms) BLOCK [11,12,13] r The 4T/8T card software version must be 14.36 or higher. CC3 only Three parameters are used to implement a blocking protocol for incoming collect calls.
Parameter Name
COLLECT_BLOCK_T1 [11] COLLECT_BLOCK_T2 [12] COLLECT_BLOCK_T3 [13]

Default
15 units (150ms) 30 units (300ms) 60 units (600ms)

In an incoming call, if the person called is restricted by COS to accept collect calls, the Coral signals the CO accordingly. The signaling is implemented by disconnecting and connecting the line according to the following time intervals: Line closed for T1 interval Line opened for T2 interval Line closed for T3 interval Line opened for T2 interval Line closed for T1 interval Line opened for T2 interval Line permanently closed

If the incoming call is a collect call, the CO will disconnect the line after identification of the above pulse sequence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-49

4T/8T Card Database TKDB

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

CKT 0-7 (CIRCUITS 0-7 DEFINITION)


A-type G (Ground Start)/L (Loop Start); CC0: G (Table 8-4 describes the circuit defaults.)

If A-(GS/LS) is changed, all established calls on all 4T/8T trunk cards are dropped, and all 4T/8T cards re initialize.

Determines whether the CKT (trunk port) on all cards with this database are Ground Start or Loop Start. The system default is determined by the COUNTRY field in the Installation entry (see Chapter 3-Installation). If 0 (USA/North America) is defined as the COUNTRY code, the default for all CKTs is Ground Start; in other countries the default is Loop Start. Check card to confirm strapping matches the software entry. This entry must match LS/GS (TRK, 2) (see page 8-41).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

B-LS pts Yes/No Loop Start Proceed to Send determines whether the trunk is muted for 750 milliseconds after outgoing seizure to protect the system from Central Office trunks which momentarily interrupt battery following seizure.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4T/8T Card Database TKDB


8-50

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

C-gs with ring Yes (Loop Start or Ground Start w/Ring)/No (Ground Start w/o Ring); The table below presents the various circuit defaults Ground Start with Ring determines whether the trunk recognizes, and waits for, ringing as an incoming call signal. If N is entered, a Ground Start trunk interprets a ground on the tip conductor as an incoming call. If Y is entered, a Ground Start trunk interprets a ground on the tip conductor as a CO Block condition and waits for ring generator to appear before reporting an incoming call.
Table 8-4: Circuit Default Table A-type
Loop Start = LS Ground Start = GS Country Code

B-type
LS PTS (Y/N)

C-type
GS WITH RING (Y/N)

CKT #
0 1 2 3 4* 5* 6* 7*

CC0
GS [14] GS [17] GS [20] GS [23] GS [26] GS [29] GS [32] GS [35]

All
LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS No [15] No [18] No [21] No [24] No [27] No [30] No [33] No [36] Yes [16] Yes [19] Yes [22] Yes [25] Yes [28] Yes [31] Yes [34] Yes [37]

* 8T, 8TPF, 8T-C, 8T-CID cards only

8-51

4T/8T Card Database TKDB

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [38] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

E&M Continuous Timers

W TK.T,2

[0,0,1,2,2]

Each E&M Continuous trunk port (4TEM or 4TEMsl card) is assigned one of two E&M Continuous Timer tables, see E&M_CONTINUOUS_TIMERS # [1] on page 8-86. These timers determine the disconnect and recognition timers for E&M continuous trunks only. In addition to General Trunk Timers, E&M timers must be programmed for all E&M Continuous trunks. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

These timers are not relevant for E&M Pulsed trunks connected to 4TEMP card.

FROM 0..1 TO 0..1 E&M_CONT_TIMERS# Enter the required range of E&M Timer table numbers; FROM the lowest E&M Timer table number TO the highest E&M Timer table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_ONHK [0] 20..40..300

(1 unit = 10 ms)

Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an idle state during a call before the trunk recognizes a far-end disconnect. This timer applies when far-end is released first.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_ONHK_ACK [1] 10..300

(1 unit = 10 ms)

Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an idle state, awaiting on-hook Acknowledgment, before the trunk recognizes a far-end disconnect. This timer applies when the local PABX releases first and the far-end release is expected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M Continuous Timers TK.T,2 [0,0,1,2,2]


8-52

MIN_FLASH [2] 1..4..255

(1 unit = 10 ms)

Minimum Calibrated Opening determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in a high state before the trunk recognizes a far-end calibrated opening signal.

Calibrated opening is used for transfer and feature activation, when H.FLASH ACCEPT [6] on page 8-87 parameter is set to Yes.

PI Reference Manual MAX_FLASH [3] 10..75..255 (1 unit = 10 ms)

Trunk Controls

Maximum Calibrated Opening determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in a high state before the trunk recognizes a far-end calibrated opening signal. When the flash exceeds this defined time the system either ignores the action or reports a disconnect condition, if the minimum on-hook time is not met.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ANS/DISC_PULSE_ 1..10..255 (1 unit = 10 ms) WIDTH [4] r This pulse can only be activated when ANS/DISC_PULSE_ON_XFER (see page 8-88) is set to Yes. Defines the duration of an Answer/Disconnect signal. This signal is normally used for answering services, such as voice mail systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following options apply only to incoming E&M trunk calls.
WINK/DELAY [5] 1..2..30 (1 unit = 100 ms) Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the trunk recognizes an incoming call indication. This timer only applies to trunks which are defined as Wink Start or Delay Start (Stop/Go) (see E&M Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-86).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IMMEDIATE [6] 6..30

(1 unit = 10 ms)

DIGIT_RJCT [7] 3..5..6 (1 unit = 10 ms) Determines the period following incoming seize acknowledge that any change, whether E lead electrical state or audio dialing signal, is ignored. This timer only applies to E&M trunks which are defined as Wink Start or Delay Start (Stop/Go) (see E&M Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-86). This timer is initiated when E lead changes from an active state to an idle state at the end of either a Wink or Go signal. When this timer expires, incoming dialed digit analysis may commence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OUTGOING: The following options apply only to outgoing E&M trunk calls.
MAX_WINK/SG [8] NO RANGE 4 (1 unit = 100 ms) Set by the manufacturer. Not applicable.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-53

E&M Continuous Timers TK.T,2 [0,0,1,2,2]

Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the trunk recognizes an incoming call indication. This timer only applies to trunks which are defined as Immediate Start (see E&M Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-86).

Trunk Controls MIN_ANSWER [9] 10..20..300 (1 unit = 10 ms)

PI Reference Manual

Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the system recognizes a far-end answer. After answer supervision is received, a subsequent return of the E lead to an idle state is interpreted as a far-end disconnect.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M Continuous Timers TK.T,2 [0,0,1,2,2]


8-54

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database

W CDB,3

4TEM Card Database programs the Database for 4TEM and 4TEMsl trunk cards. There are 3 4TEM Card Databases (0-2), any one of which can be assigned to each 4TEM and 4TEMsl trunk card (see Card List - Chapter 6). Programming is in addition to general trunk programming. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

Installation note: When using 4TEM/S card, layout B (issue 3 and higher), the jumper on JMP4 must be set to C position.

FROM: 0..2 TO: 0..2 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of Card Database tables; FROM the lowest Card Database table number TO the highest Card Database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following parameters are relevant only for incoming E&M calls.
I/C_MAX_BREAK [0] 30..90..250 ms (in 10 ms increments) Determines the maximum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the station card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead remains interrupted).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAX_MAKE [1] 30..90..250 ms(in 10 ms increments) Determines the maximum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed (E lead active). If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OUTGOING: The following parameters are relevant only to outgoing E&M calls.
O/G_BREAK [2] 20..59..192 ms Determines the Break time during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a pulse dialing E&M trunk, during an outgoing call (M lead is idle).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_MAKE [3] 20..39..192 ms Determines the Make time during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a pulse dialing E&M trunk, during an outgoing call (M lead is active).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-55

4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database CDB,3

Trunk Controls O/G_INTERDGT [4] 100..200..2550 ms

PI Reference Manual

Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period that the M lead is active between rotary (pulse) dialed digits from a rotary dialing E&M trunk, during an outgoing call. (For DTMF trunk tones, see DTMF_TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [5] Yes/No Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update which has been made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database CDB,3


8-56

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database

W TRUNK,7

4TEMP Port Database establishes the port database for 4TEMP (Pulsed E&M) trunk cards. The system allows for a maximum of four database tables combinations (0-3), one of which is assigned to each Pulsed E&M trunk port (see Port List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

Installation Note: 4TEMP protocol is activated by 4TEM/S card, from Layout B (issue 3 and later), with the jumper JMP4 set to the P position.

FROM: 0..3 TO: 0..3 PORT_DB#Enter the required range of 4TEMP card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SZE_ACK [0] Yes/No Determines if a Seize Acknowledge signal is relevant for the trunk port. The signal specifications are defined in 4TEMP card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ANSWER [1] Yes/No Determines if an Answer supervision signal is relevant for the trunk port. The Answer signal specifications are defined in 4TEMP card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Determines the trunk signaling method used for Calls Clearing. Determines which type of Clearing signals are relevant for the trunk port. The signal specifications are defined in the 4TEMP card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLEAR_FWD_ACK [3] Yes/No Determines if a Clear Forward Acknowledge signal is relevant for the trunk port. The signals specifications are defined in 4TEMP card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLEAR_BCK_ACK [4] Yes/No Determines if a Clear Backward Acknowledge signal is relevant for the trunk port. The signals specifications are defined in 4TEMP card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-57

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database TRUNK,7

CLEAR [2] P (Clear By Pulse)/C (Clear By Continuance N/A)

Trunk Controls CO_BLOCK [5] P (Block By Pulsed) N/A C (Block By Continuance) N/A N (Block By No_Response)

PI Reference Manual

Determines the trunk signaling method used for Blocking by the far-end. Determines which type of Block is relevant for the trunk port. The blocking signal specifications are defined in 4TEMP card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [6] Yes/No Transfer the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically send the Card Database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database TRUNK,7


8-58

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database

W CDB,7

Installation Note: 4TEMP protocol is activated by 4TEM/S card, from Layout B and later (issue 3 and later) with the jumper JMP4 set to the P position.

4TEMP Card Database establishes the card database for 4TEMP (Pulsed E&M) trunk cards.The system allows for a maximum four database table combinations (0-3), one of which is assigned to each card (see Card List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). The fields in 4TEMP table (card database) are organized in groups of related parameters. In Update mode, the first field in each group is used as a control switch to show or skip to the next group. Enter No to skip to the next group of fields, or when the feature is Not Applicable (N/A) for the current version or country. FROM: 0..3 TO: 0..3 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of 4TEMP card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

The following two fields are relevant for all Pulsed E&M trunks. MIN_FLASH [0] 1..10..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Minimum Calibrated Opening Recognition time determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the trunk recognizes a far-end calibrated opening signal.

The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse FLASH signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_FLASH defined below and longer than MIN_FLASH defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_FLASH [1] 1..30..250 (1 unit = 10 ms) Maximum Calibrated Opening Recognition time determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the trunk to recognize a far-end calibrated opening signal. When the pulse exceeds this defined time the Coral either ignores the action or reports another condition. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse FLASH signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_FLASH defined here and longer than MIN_FLASH defined above.

The duration of a flash pulse sent by the Coral is defined in Trunk Timers beginning on page 8-6.

8-59

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

Calibrated opening is used for transfer and feature activation, when H.FLASH ACCEPT [6] (page 8-87) is set to Yes.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

BLOCKING BY PULSE: <N/A>

The following Blocking By Pulse fields are relevant for trunks, only when CO_BLOCK [5]=P is defined in its 4TEMP Port Database.

BLOCK_BY_PULSE Yes/No [2] Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) BLOCK_BY_CONTINUANCE. Press Enter to display BLOCK_BY_PULSE fields. This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

When BLOCK_BY_PULSE above is set to Yes, the following six fields are available:

O/G_BLOCK [3] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Tip: Must be longer than SZE or any other pulse duration. Block By Pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Block pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end in order to block the tie-line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_OUT_OF_BLOCK 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second); [4] Tip: Must be longer than MAX_CLEAR_BCK [37] (page 8-70) duration. Out of Block by Pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of an Out-of- Block pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end in order to release the tie-line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_BLOCK [5] 1..200

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

Incoming lower limit recognition time of Block pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to block the tie-line. This timer determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Blocking signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_BLOCK defined below and longer than I/C_MIN_BLOCK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-60

PI Reference Manual I/C_MAX_BLOCK [6] 1..250

Trunk Controls

(1 unit = 0.1 second)

Incoming upper limit recognition time of Block pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to block the tie-line. This timer determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end Blocking signal. When the signal exceeds this defined time the system either ignores the action or reports another condition. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_BLOCK defined here and longer than I/C_MIN_BLOCK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_ 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second); BLOCK [7] Tip: Must be longer than MIN_SZE [44] (page 8-71) duration. Incoming lower limit recognition time of Out_of_Block pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to release the tie-line. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Out_of_Blocking signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse OUT_OF_BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_BLOCK defined below and longer than I/C_ MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Incoming upper limit recognition time of Out_of_Block pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to release the tie-line. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Out_of_Blocking signal. When the signal exceeds this defined time the system either ignores the action or reports another condition. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse OUT_OF_BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_BLOCK defined here and longer than I/C_ MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-61

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_ 1..250 (1 unit = 0.1 second); BLOCK [8] Tip: Must be longer than MAX_SZE_ACK [56] (page 8-74) duration and longer than MAX_CLEAR_FWD [35] (page 8-69) duration.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

BLOCK BY CONTINUANCE:
<N/A>

The following Blocking By Continuance fields are relevant for trunk, only when CO_BLOCK [5] (page 8-58) = C is defined in its 4TEMP Port Database.

BLOCK_BY_ Yes/No CONTINUANCE [9] Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) BLOCK_BY_NO_RESPONSE. Press Enter to display BLOCK_BY_CONTINUANCE fields. This parameter is used only in the Update mode. When BLOCK_BY_CONTINUANCE above is set to Yes, the following three fields are available:
O/G_BLOCK I/C_MIN_BLOCK (Minimum Block By Continuance Recognition) I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK (Minimum Out Of Block By Continuance Recognition)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_BLOCK [10] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Tip: Must be longer than SZE or any other pulse duration. Block By Continuance, Minimum Transmission duration determines the minimum period that the M lead must remain in an active state, for the far-end trunk to recognize a BLOCK indication. This pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end in order to block the tie-line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_BLOCK [11] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second)

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

The Minimum Block by Continuance recognition duration determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state, before the trunk recognizes a far-end BLOCK indication. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to block the tie-line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_ 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) BLOCK [12] The Minimum Out of Block by Continuance Recognition determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state, during a blocking state, before the trunk recognizes a far-end OUT OF BLOCK indication. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to release the tie-line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-62

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

BLOCK BY NO The following Blocking By No Response fields are relevant for a trunk, only when RESPONSE: CO_BLOCK [5] (page 8-58) is defined as N in its 4TEMP Port Database.
Examples causing a trunk to enter a blocking condition include: Sze Ack is not accepted after Seize was sent for outgoing call. Answer is not accepted after digits were sent to the far-end station. Clear Ack is not accepted after Clear was sent for ending a call. Digits are not accepted after incoming Seize.

BLOCK_BY_NO_ Yes/No RESPONSE [13] Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) CLEARING: (page 8-66). Press Enter to display BLOCK_BY_NO_RESPONSE fields. This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

When BLOCK_BY_NO_RESPONSE above is set to Yes, the following eleven fields are available:
O/G_OUT_OF_ 1..10..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) BLOCK_WIDTH [14] The Out of Block By No Response Pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of an Out-of- Block pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end in order to release the tie-line.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_ 1..9..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) BLOCK [16] Minimum Out Of Block By No Response Recognition is the incoming lower limit recognition time of Out_of_Block pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to release the tie-line from a blocking state. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Out_of_Blocking signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse OUT_OF_BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_BLOCK as defined below and longer than I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK as defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-63

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

O/G_OUT_OF_ 1..35..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) BLOCK_ACK [15] Out Of Block By No Response, Acknowledge Pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of an Out-of- Block-Acknowledge pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is returned by the Coral to the far-end after receiving Out-of- Block pulse.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_ 1..16..250 (1 unit = 0.1 second) BLOCK [17] Maximum Out Of Block By No Response Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of OUT_OF_BLOCK pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to release the tie-line from a blocking state. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end Out_of_Blocking signal. When the signal exceeds this defined time the system either ignores the action or reports another condition. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse OUT_OF_BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_BLOCK as defined here and longer than I/C_ MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK as defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_ 1..20..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) BLOCK_ACK [18] Minimum Out Of Block By No Response Acknowledge Recognition is the incoming lower limit recognition time of Out_of_Block_Acknowledge pulse, which is returned from the far-end to the Coral, after receiving Out_Of_Block pulse. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Out_of_Blocking_ Acknowledge signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACKNOWLEDGE signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACK as defined below and longer than I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACK as defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_ 1..60..250 (1 unit = 10 ms) BLOCK_ACK [19] Maximum Out Of Block By No Response Acknowledge Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACKNOWLEDGE pulse. This pulse is returned from the far-end to the Coral, after receiving OUT_ OF_BLOCK. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end OUT_OF_ BLOCKING_ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than I/C_MAX_OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACK as defined here and longer than I/C_MIN_OUT_OF_BLOCK_ACK as defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-64

PI Reference Manual CYCLE_TIME [20] 1..150..250 (1 unit = 0.1 second)

Trunk Controls

Wait for Out-of-Block-Acknowledge determines the maximum time that the Coral will wait for the Out-of- Block_ Acknowledge signal, after O/G-Out-of- Block was sent. When this time is out without receiving the Acknowledge signal, the Coral will send another O/G_OUT_OF_ BLOCK pulse (i.e.defines the OFF (pause) time between successive O/G-OUT-OF- BLOCK pulses.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAIT_FOR_SZE_ACK 0..50..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) [21] Tip: Must be longer than MIN_TIME_TO_SZE_ACK [54] (page 8-73) Determines the maximum time that the Coral will wait for the Seize Acknowledge signal, after Seize was sent for an outgoing call. When this time is out without receiving the Seize Acknowledge signal, the Coral will block the line for outgoing calls. This timer is relevant for the trunk, only when SZE_ACK [0] (page 8-57) defined as Yes in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WAIT_FOR_ANSWER 0..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [22] Tip: Must be at least 1.0 second less than ANSWER_DELAY defined in route TK.T,0 (see page 8-4) Determines the maximum time that the Coral will wait for the called party's off hook (answer) signal, after origination of an outgoing call. The Wait for Answer time is initiated at the expiration of the Outgoing INTERDIGIT timer (defined later). When this timer is expired without receiving the Answer signal, the Coral will block the tie-line for outgoing calls.

WAIT_FOR_CLEAR_ 0..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) FWD_ACK [23] Determines the maximum time that the Coral will wait for the Clear Forward Acknowledge signal, after Clear Forward was sent for ending an outgoing call. When this time is out without receiving the signal, the Coral will block the tie-line for outgoing calls. This timer is relevant for trunk, only when CLEAR_FWD_ACK [3] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-65

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

This timer is relevant for the trunk, only when ANSWER [1] (page 8-57) defined as Yes in its 4TEMP Port Database.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

WAIT_FOR_CLEAR_ 0..50..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) BCK_ACK [24] Determines the maximum time that the Coral will wait for the Clear Backward Acknowledge signal, after Clear Backward was sent for ending an incoming call. When this time is out without receiving the signal, the Coral will block the tie-line for outgoing calls. This timer is relevant for trunk, only when CLEAR_BCK_ACK [4] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLEARING: Two clearing types are available for call disconnect, one of which is selected to
each trunk in its port database. The following fields are relevant only to Clearing fields.

The Clearing signals duration should be different from all other pulses (except Blocking signals) and it is recommended that it should have the longest duration.

CLEAR_FWD_ACK 1..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms) [25] Clear Forward Acknowledge pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Clear Forward Acknowledge pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). Relevant on an incoming call when the far-end caller initiates clearing. This pulse is returned by the Coral to the far-end caller, after receiving Clear Forward signal. This pulse is relevant for trunk, only when CLEAR_FWD_ACK [3] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

CLEAR_BCK_ACK 1..100..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms) [26] Clear Backward Acknowledge pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Clear Backward Acknowledge pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). Relevant on an outgoing call when the far-end called initiates clearing. This pulse is returned by the Coral to the far-end called, after receiving Clear Backward signal. This pulse is relevant for trunk, only when CLEAR_BCK_ACK [4] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-66

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

MIN_CLEAR_FWD_ 1..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms) ACK Minimum Clear Forward Acknowledge Recognition is the incoming lower limit [27] recognition time of CLEAR_FORWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE pulse. Relevant on an outgoing call when the caller initiates clearing. This pulse is returned from the far-end called to the Coral, after receiving a CLEAR_FORWARD signal. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end CLEAR_ FORWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_FWD_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_FWD_ACK defined below and longer than MIN_CLEAR_FWD_ACK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_CLEAR_FWD_ 1..2500 (1 unit = 10 ms) ACK Maximum Clear Forward Acknowledge Recognition is the incoming upper limit [28] recognition time of CLEAR_FORWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE pulse. Relevant on an outgoing call when the caller initiates clearing. This pulse is returned from the far-end called to the Coral, after receiving a CLEAR_FORWARD signal. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end CLEAR_ FORWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_FWD_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_FWD_ACK defined here and longer than MIN_CLEAR_FWD_ACK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end CLEAR_ BACKWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_BCK_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_BCK_ACK defined below and longer than MIN_CLEAR_BCK_ACK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-67

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

MIN_CLEAR_BCK_ 1..80..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms) ACK Minimum Clear Backward Acknowledge Recognition is the incoming lower limit [29] recognition time of CLEAR_BACKWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE pulse. Relevant on an incoming call when the called initiates clearing. This pulse is returned from the far-end caller to the Coral, after receiving a CLEAR_BACKWARD signal.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

MAX_CLEAR_BCK_ 1..150..2500 (1 unit = 10 ms) ACK Maximum Clear Backward Acknowledge Recognition is the incoming upper limit [30] recognition time of CLEAR_BACKWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE pulse. Relevant on an incoming call when the called initiates clearing. This pulse is returned from the far-end caller to the Coral, after receiving a CLEAR_BACKWARD signal. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end CLEAR_ BACKWARD_ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_BCK_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_BCK_ACK defined here and longer than MIN_CLEAR_BCK_ACK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLEAR BY PULSE:

The following Clearing_By_Pulse fields are relevant for trunk, only when CLEAR [2] (page 8-57) is defined in its 4TEMP Port Database.

CLEAR_BY_PULSE Yes/No [31] Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) CLEAR BY CONTINUANCE: <N/A> (page 8-70). Press Enter to display CLEAR_BY_PULSE fields. This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

When CLEAR_BY_PULSE above is set to Yes, the following six fields are available: CLEAR_FWD [32] 1..100..2000(1 unit = 10 ms) Clear Forward pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Clear Forward pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end, on an outgoing call when the caller initiates clearing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7


8-68

CLEAR_BCK [33] 1..50..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms) Clear Backward pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Clear Backward pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end, on an incoming call when the called initiates clearing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual MIN_CLEAR_FWD [34] 1..80..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms)

Trunk Controls

Minimum Clear Forward Recognition is the incoming lower limit recognition time of Clear Forward pulse. Relevant on an incoming call when the caller initiates clearing. This pulse is sent from the far-end caller to the Coral, in order to end the call. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Clear Forward signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_FWD signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_FWD defined below and longer than MIN_CLEAR_ FWD defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_CLEAR_FWD 1..150..2500 (1 unit = 10 ms) [35] Maximum Clear Forward Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of Clear_Forward pulse. Relevant on an incoming call when the caller initiates clearing. This pulse is sent from the far-end caller to the Coral, in order to end the call. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end Clear_Forward signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_FWD signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_FWD as defined here and longer than MIN_CLEAR_ FWD as defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_CLEAR_BCK [36] 1..43..2000 (1 unit = 10 ms) Minimum Clear Backward Recognition is the incoming lower limit recognition time of Clear_Backward pulse. Relevant on an outgoing call when the called initiates clearing. This pulse is sent from the far-end called to the Coral, in order to end the call. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Clear_Backward signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_BCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_BCK defined below and longer than MIN_CLEAR_ BCK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-69

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

MAX_CLEAR_BCK 1..80..2500 (1 unit = 10 ms) [37] Maximum Clear Backward Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of Clear_Backward pulse. Relevant on an outgoing call when the called initiates clearing. This pulse is sent from the far-end called to the Coral, in order to end the call. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end Clear_Backward signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse CLEAR_BCK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_CLEAR_BCK defined here and longer than MIN_CLEAR_ BCK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLEAR BY CONTINUANCE: <N/A>

The following Clearing_By_Continuance fields are relevant for trunk, only when CLEAR [2] (page 8-57) is defined as C in its 4TEMP Port Database.

CLEAR_BY_ Yes/No CONTINUANCE [38] Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) INCOMING: (page 8-71) fields. Press Enter to display Clear_By_Continuance fields. This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

When CLEAR_BY_CONTINUANCE above is set to Yes, the following four fields are available:

O/G_CLEAR_FWD [39] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Clear Forward, Transmission Duration determines the minimum period that the M lead must remain in an active state, for the far-end trunk to recognize a Clear Forward indication. This signal is sent by the Coral to the far-end on an outgoing call, when the caller initiates clearing in order to end the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

O/G_CLEAR_BCK [40] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Clear Backward, Transmission Duration determines the minimum period that the M lead must remain in an active state, for the far-end trunk to recognize a Clear Backward indication. This signal is sent by the Coral to the far-end on an incoming call, when the called initiates clearing in order to end the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-70

PI Reference Manual I/C_CLEAR_FWD [41] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second)

Trunk Controls

Minimum Clear Forward Recognition determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state, before the trunk recognizes a far-end Clear Forward indication. Relevant on an incoming call when the caller initiates clearing. This signal is sent from the far-end caller to the Coral, in order to end the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_CLEAR_BCK [42] 1..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Minimum Clear Backward Recognition determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state, before the trunk recognizes a far-end Clear Backward indication. Relevant on an outgoing call when the called initiates clearing. This signal is sent from the far-end called to the Coral, in order to end the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following fields are relevant only during incoming calls.
SUSP_SZE [43] 1..2..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Minimum Suspect Seize Recognition determines the period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port (E lead active) before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from the far-end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [44] 1..3..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Minimum Seize Response Recognition is the incoming lower limit recognition time of Seizure pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to start a new call from an idle state. The timer here determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Seizure signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse SEIZE signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_SZE defined below and longer than MIN_SZE defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_SZE [45] 1..22..250 (1 unit = 10 ms) Maximum Seize Response Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of Seizure pulse. This pulse is sent by the far-end to the Coral in order to start a new call from an idle state. The timer here determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral 4TEMP trunk to recognize a far-end Seizure signal. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse SEIZE signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_SZE defined here and longer than MIN_SZE defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-71

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

DELAY_TO_SZE_ACK 0..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) [46] Delay from Seize Receiving to Seize Acknowledge Transmission determines the delay time between Seize recognition to Seize Acknowledge start. In other words, the delay period from the detection of an incoming Seize signal to the start of the outgoing Seize Acknowledge signal. During this time all incoming digits are ignored.

In addition to this delay, a Seize Ack does not start until Coral resources (for example DTMF receiver) are available to process the call.

This timer is relevant for trunk, only when SZE_ACK [0] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes, in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SZE_ACK [47] 1..50..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Seize Acknowledge Pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Seize Acknowledge pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is returned by the Coral after a seizure signal from the far-end has been recognized and resources in the Coral are available. This pulse is relevant for trunk, only when SZE_ACK [0] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes, in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_MAKE [48] 1..20..100 ms Minimum Make Time Recognition determines the minimum Make time between successive Breaks, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead idle). The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse MAKE signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_MAKE defined below and longer than MIN_MAKE defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7


8-72

MAX_MAKE [49] 1..70..250 ms Maximum Make Time Recognition determines the maximum Make time between successive Breaks, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead idle). If E lead remains idle when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse MAKE signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_MAKE defined here and longer than MIN_MAKE defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_BREAK [50] 1..40..100 ms Minimum Break Time Recognition determines the minimum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead active).

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse BREAK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_BREAK defined below and longer than MIN_BREAK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BREAK [51] 1..80..250 ms Maximum Break Time Recognition determines the maximum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead active). The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse BREAK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_BREAK defined here and longer than MIN_BREAK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ANSWER [52] 1..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Answer pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of an Answer pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). The answer signal is returned by the Coral, to the far-end caller, after the called station off-hooks. This pulse is relevant for trunk, only when ANSWER [1] (page 8-57) is defined as Yes, in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OUTGOING: The following fields are relevant only during outgoing calls.
SZE [53] 1..4..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Seizure pulse, Transmission Duration determines the duration of a Seize pulse (the period that the M lead must remain in an active state). This pulse is sent by the Coral from an idle state the far-end in order to place a new outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Seize Acknowledge Reject Time determines the time from Seize sent until the Coral is ready to accept the Seize-Acknowledge from the far-end. This is an anti-glare protection time. Any pulse detected in this time is interpreted as suspected incoming call. Incoming call is preferred over outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE_ACK [55] 1..40..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Minimum Seize Acknowledge Pulse Recognition is the incoming lower limit recognition time of Seize_Acknowledge pulse. Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral recognizes a far-end ready for an incoming call. This pulse is returned by the far-end after the seizure signal from the Coral has been recognized and resources in the far-end are available to accept dial digits.

8-73

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

MIN_TIME_TO_SZE_ 0..250 (1 unit = 10 ms); ACK [54] Tip: Must be less than WAIT_FOR_SZE_ACK [21] (page 8-65)

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse SZE_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_SZE_ACK defined below and longer than MIN_SZE_ACK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_SZE_ACK [56] 1..60..250 (1 unit = 10 ms) Maximum Seize Acknowledge Pulse Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of Seize_Acknowledge pulse. Determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral to recognize a far-end ready for an incoming call. This pulse is returned by the far-end after the seizure signal from the Coral has been recognized and resources in the far-end are available to accept dial digits. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse SZE_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_SZE_ACK defined here and longer than MIN_SZE_ACK defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAKE [57] 1..40..250 ms Outgoing Rotary Dialing Make Time determines the Make time between successive Breaks, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a pulse dialing trunk during an outgoing call (M lead idle). Dialing the number five means 5 Breaks and 4 Makes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BREAK [58] 1..60..250 ms Outgoing Rotary Dialing Break Pulse, Transmission Duration determines the Break time during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a pulse dialing trunk during an outgoing call (M lead active). Dialing the number two means 2 Breaks and 1 Make.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

INTERDIGIT [59] 1..100..250 (1 unit = 10 ms) Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period that the M lead is idle between rotary (pulse) dialed digits from a rotary dialing trunk, during an outgoing call. For DTMF trunk tones, see DTMF_TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_ANSWER [60] 1..200 (1 unit = 10 ms) Minimum Answer Pulse Recognition is the Incoming lower limit recognition time of ANSWER pulse. Determines the minimum period that an E lead must remain in an active state before the Coral recognizes a far-end answer.

8-74

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse ANSWER signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_ANSWER defined below and longer than MIN_ANSWER defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_ANSWER [61] 1..250 (1 unit = 10 ms) Maximum Answer Pulse Recognition is the incoming upper limit recognition time of the ANSWER pulse. Determines the maximum period that an E lead can remain in an active state for the Coral to recognize a far-end answer. The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse ANSWER signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_ANSWER defined here and longer than MIN_ANSWER defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [62] Transfer the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the Card Database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-75

4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database CDB,7

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

4TWL Trunk Card DB


Indian (CC8) and New Zealand (Eu7) systems only

W CDB,10

The Two Way Loop (TWL) Trunk Card Database programs the trunk card database tables for DID and DOD trunk ports connected to the 4TWL or 4TWLsl cards. There are 4 Trunk card Databases (0-3), one of which is assigned to each card (see Card List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). The Two Way Loop (TWL) interface operates on a 2 wire basis, A and B, with a -48V potential or loop. Four analog interfaces with bi-directional TWL protocol exist. Backward recognition is -48V for wire A and earth for wire B (or visa versa). Signals in the forward direction are sent via a loop applied across the 2 wires. The 4TWL card is used to implement DID and DOD functions. Incoming calls will act exactly as DID incoming calls (see DID/E&M Groups beginning on page 8-32). Outgoing calls are Loop Start with answer supervision and disconnect suppression (DTMF only).

No calibrated hookflash is available on this trunk card.

FROM/ 0..3 TO 0..3 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of 4TWL card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [0] 20..60..100 ms (in increments of 10) Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party. SUSP_SZE results in prohibiting outgoing calls thus preventing a glare condition, or double seizure (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TWL Trunk Card DB CDB,10

SEIZE [1] 110..350..500 ms (in increments of 10) Determines the minimum period that an incoming call signal (loop current) must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a seize from the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INTERFACE SIDE [2] 0 (User)/ 1(Network) Not used in this version. Always set to User.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-76

PI Reference Manual CO DISCONNECT [3] 300..600..2500 ms (in 10 ms increments)

Trunk Controls

Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum waiting period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DELAY TO BLOCK [4] 10..65 seconds Delay Before Trunk Block defines the maximum system waiting time for a disconnect acknowledgment signal from the Central Office, before the system blocks the trunk line. When the trunk is blocked the call is either transferred to an incomplete call destination or calls toward the CO are blocked. This timer is applied when the Coral releases first and the CO release is pending.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_BREAK [5] 30..60..120 ms

For card version 1.03 and later.

Outgoing Break Time determines the period that the loop current is interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle conducted by the rotary dialing trunk port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_MAKE [6] 20..40..80 ms

For card version 1.03 and later.

Outgoing Make Time determines the period that the loop current is restored between successive break pulses of the dialed digit, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle conducted by the trunk port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_INDGT [7] 500..700..1000 ms

For card version 1.03 and later.

I/C_MIN_BREAK [8] 10..40..60 ms

For card version 1.03 and later.

Incoming Minimum Break Time determines the minimum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits. A break-time greater than or equal to the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break if it is also shorter than or equal to I/C_MAX_BREAK below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-77

4TWL Trunk Card DB CDB,10

Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period from completion of the lasts digit transmission to commencing transmission of the next consecutive digit, during an outgoing call.

Trunk Controls I/C_MAX_BREAK [9] 30..90..110 ms

PI Reference Manual

For card version 1.03 and later.

Incoming Maximum Break Time determines the maximum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits. A break-time greater than or equal to the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break if it is also shorter than or equal to I/C_MIN_BREAK below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_MAKE [10] 20..60 ms

For card version 1.03 and later.

Incoming Minimum Make Time determines the minimum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed. If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAX_MAKE [11] 40..60..100

For card version 1.03 and later.

Incoming Maximum Make Time determines the maximum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed. If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD [12] Yes/No Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

4TWL Trunk Card DB CDB,10


8-78

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500)


The following pages are used to define the resources ports on:

W CDB,

11

CSX 200: U-RMIcsx and U-MRcsx cards (URC2: Slot #7, Shelf # 1) IPx 500M: MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 (X= Country Initial) or higher (URC2: Slot #14, Shelf # 0)

The URC (Universal Resources Card) is configured with 2DSPs, such that its current CLIS card name is URC2 and includes the following resources: DTMF Receivers (DTR) Dial Tone Detectors (DTD) Caller ID (CID) FSK iDSP transmitters for SLT stations Meet Me (CONF) 14 party Conference Bridge: Enables a conference of a maximum of 84 participants. 3-Way Conference (C3WAY) Enables 3-way conferences of Digital and IP Channels, FlexSet-IP, and Wireless sets.

SAU Requirements, see (see page 3-6) Separate Software Authorization is required to allocate the DTMF, 3WAY, CONF (Meet-Me), CID URC and MFR resources. URC Features The URC is completely managed by its own PI Card Database - Current and Default Branches located in CDB,11. Sizes and maximums must be configured to match the imposed URC time-slots limit. Gains The URC DTMF Receiver (DTR) and DTD Gains may be adjusted in URC Card Database (URC,11,2) and not in the Feature Control branch as with other cards, see DTMF GAIN and DTD GAIN (page 8-85).

Meet Me Conference

Conference Modes
The Meet-Me conference can be defined to operate in one of two different modes: Summation: Enables all conference participants to be heard simultaneously during the conference. Strongest Win: Enables only the loudest speaker to be heard during the conference.

The technician is able to define a maximum number of participants when using the Summation mode. When this maximum is exceeded, the system automatically switches the conference to the Strongest Win mode (see CONF MEMBERS and CONF SWITCH DELAY (page 8-85), in URC,11,2).

8-79

URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) CDB, 11

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

Chained Meet Me Conference Groups

Requires URC Software Versions 2.xx or higher.

The URC has 6 circuits that may be allocated as Conference ports. Each of these ports can enable one conference of 14 participants. Alternatively, these conference ports can be chained together internally by the URC, without using extra time slots, so that a conference with a maximum of 84 participants can be created. The chain definition is created via the PDB branch, see LINKED TO CONF DIAL# [3] (page 23-5).

URC Database Programming The configuration option is used to determine the number of circuits resource on a URC card. Access is accomplished by entering the physical location of any current card (shelf and slot), or before installing the card, by defining the default. When entering the URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) mode, the PI prompts the user to enter 0 for changing the default or 1 for access by physical current card location.

0 - DEFAULT This option is used to display or modify the default configuration of the URC cards. Configuration number of circuits resource This default will be given to the URC card that will be
installed in the future. For URC cards already installed, the configuration can be modified by using the CURRENT Configuration option. Each resource can be separately configured according to any of the ranges listed in Table 8-5 on page 8-81.

1-CURRENT This option is used to display or modify number of circuits resource for each Configuration installed URC card according to card location, by entering the cards physical
location in the system. Each card can be separately configured according to any of the ranges listed in Table 8-5 on page 8-81 below.

URC-Card (CSX 200 & IPx 500) CDB, 11

2-Card Database This option is used to display or modify the DTMF Receiver (DTR) and DTD
Gains. It is also used to define the Conference Modes.

This chapter contains the programming instructions for all URC ports. Refer to the following sections: 0 - URC-Default Configuration 1 - URC-Current Configuration 2 - URC-Card Database on page 8-81 on page 8-83 on page 8-85

8-80

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

URC-Default Configuration

W CDB,11,0

This option number of circuits resource DTMF, Meet Me Conference, C3WAY, CID and DTD) be allocated This default will be given to the URC card that will be installed in the future. For URC cards already installed, the configuration can be modified by using the URC-Current Configuration on page 8-83 option below. Each resource can be separately configured according to any of the following ranges. Maximum URC Resources Each system resource circuit uses Coral times slots. The Coral enables a maximum of 120 time slots per URC2. The following table lists the time slots needed per circuit and enables the technician to plan accordingly when configuring the current and default URC2 configurations.
Table 8-5: PI defaults per URC2 Resource Resource Max Circuits per URC2 (Full Assembly)* Time Slots Needed per Circuit (CKT) Default Configuration Max CKTs 24 16 8 2 16 66 Time Slots Needed 1x24 1x16 4x8 16x2

DTMF Receiver (DTR) DTD 3-WAY CONF (Meet Me) Caller ID (CID) iDSP TOTAL
*

24 32 24 6 32 118

1 1 4 16 1

120

A maximum of 120 Time Slots is allowed per URC2 card. Therefore, the Full Assembly is never used. Allocate your resources such that you use a maximum of 120 Time Slots. For example, increasing the number of 3-way circuits, forces you to decrease one or more of the other resources.

DTMF 0..24 Defines the default maximum number of DTMF Receiver (DTR) resources to be enabled by the system URC cards. Each DTMF receiver requires one card time slot, see Note! in UPDATE, below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-81

URC-Default Configuration CDB,11,0

1x16

Trunk Controls Meet Me 0..2..6

PI Reference Manual

Meet-Me circuits are named CONF in PLIS.

Defines the default maximum number of Multi-Party (Meet-Me) conference bridge resources to be enabled by the system URC cards. Each Meet Me conference circuit requires 16 card time slots, see Note! in UPDATE, below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

C3WAY 0..8..24

The three-way resource is listed as C3WAY in PLIS.

Defines the default maximum number of 3-way Conference bridge resources to be enabled by the system URC cards. Each 3-way conference circuit requires 4 card time slots (therefore, eight 3-way circuits require 32 TS), see Note! in UPDATE, below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CID 0..16..32

CID Transmitters are named iDSP in PLIS.

Defines the default maximum number of Caller ID (CID) transmitter resources to be enabled by the system URC cards. Each CID transmitter circuit requires 1 card time slot, see Note! in UPDATE, below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DTD 0..16..32 Defines the default maximum number of Dial Tone Detector (DTD) resources to be enabled by the system URC cards. Each DTD circuit requires 1 card time slot, see Note! in UPDATE, below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

UPDATE Yes/No Updates system with the current changes that were entered when entering Yes in this parameter.

URC-Default Configuration CDB,11,0


8-82

Note! The card configuration is limited to a total maximum of 120 time slots! A configuration error is displayed and the card cannot be configured (see Table 8-5 for Time Slot computations) if more than 120 time slots are used.

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

URC-Current Configuration

W CDB,11,1

This option is used to display or modify number of circuits resource for each installed URC card according to card location, by entering the cards physical location in the system. Physical Location: (Shelf/Slot) is used to display or modify URC information by entering the ports physical location in the system.

For Coral IPx 500 systems (MSBipx Issue-0200X1000 or higher): The URC is automatically defined in shelf 0, slot 14. For Coral IPx Office systems (U-RMIcsx and U-MRcsx cards): The URC is installed in shelf 1, slot 7.

Each URC card can be separately configured according to any of the ranges listed in Table 8-5 on page 8-81. FROM/TO SHELF# All available shelves; 1: Coral IPx Office 0: Coral IPx 500 Enter the required range of shelf numbers; FROM the lowest TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM/TO SLOT# All available slots; 7: Coral IPx Office 14: Coral IPx 500 Enter the required range of slot numbers; FROM the lowest TO the highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DTMF 0..24 Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - DTMF on page 8-81. Enter the number of URC DTMF receivers to be allocated from this card. Each DTMF receiver requires one card time slot, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Meet Me 0..2..6 Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - Meet Me on page 8-82. Enter the number of URC Meet Me conference circuits to be allocated from this card. Each Multi-Party (Meet-Me) conference circuit requires 16 card time slots, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-83

URC-Current Configuration CDB,11,1

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual C3WAY 0..8..24 Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - C3WAY on page 8-82. Enter the number of URC 3Way conference circuits to be allocated from this card. Each 3-way conference circuit requires 4 card time slots, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CID (iDSP in PLIS) 0..16..32 Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - CID on page 8-82. Enter the number of URC CID transmitter circuits to be allocated from this card. Each CID transmitter circuit requires one card time slot, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DTD 0..16..32 Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - DTD on page 8-82. Enter the number of URC DTD circuits to be allocated from this card. Each DTD circuit requires one card time slot, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND TO CARD Yes/No Transfers the updated card database immediately to the URC2 and the card resets temporarily freezing all URC2 activity. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.

Note! The card configuration is limited to a total maximum of 120 time slots! A configuration error is displayed and the card cannot be configured (see Table 8-5 on page 8-81 for Time Slot computations) if more than 120 time slots are used.

URC-Current Configuration CDB,11,1


8-84

A warning is issued before updating the card:


Warning: Update will reset current card.

Enter Yes to accept updates or No to cancel.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

URC-Card Database

W CDB,11,2
CSX 200: U-RMIcsx and U-MRcsx cards (URC2: Slot #7, Shelf # 1) IPx 500M: MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 (X= Country Initial) or higher (URC2: Slot #14, Shelf # 0) Requires Coral Main Software Version 15.xx

URC Card Database establishes the card database for the following cards:

DTMF GAIN -12dB.. 0..+12 dB

(increments of 0.5dB)

Allows defining transmission value level for URC DTMF receiver ports. Programs the receiving level gain of incoming DTMF tones.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DTD GAIN -12dB.. 0..+12 dB

(increments of 0.5dB)

Allows defining transmission value level for URC DTD receiver ports. Programs the receiving level gain of incoming Call Progress tones.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CONF MEMBERS 1..8..14 1: Strongest Win conference mode (only the loudest speaker is heard) 2..14: Summation conference mode (all participants are heard simultaneously) Define the maximum number of Meet-Me participants for conferences in Summation mode, allowing every participant to hear all other speaking participants. When the number of conference participants exceeds this maximum, the conference automatically switches to the Strongest Win mode where only the loudest speaker in the conference is heard. Set this parameter to one (1) for conferences requiring the Strongest Win mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CONF SWITCH DELAY 0..7..255

(1 unit = 10 ms)

Relevant only for Strongest Win conference mode (see CONF MEMBERS).

Define the time delay required for the URC CONF to switch from the previous loudest party to the new loudest party. This time delay allows the URC card to avoid switching speakers because of sudden spikes heard by the conference circuit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND TO CARD Yes/No Transfers the updated card database immediately to URC cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update which has been made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-85

URC-Card Database CDB,11,2

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

E&M Trunk Definition

W TRK,1

[0,2,1,0,0,1]

E&M Trunk Definition is used to define the trunk signaling parameters for E&M trunks connected to 4TEM, 4TEMsl, 4TEMP, T1, 30T, 30T/E, 30T/M, 30T/x cards. These parameters apply only to E&M trunks, and are used in addition to General Trunk Definitions beginning on page 8-10. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid E&M dial number; Default: All defined E&M trunks Enter the required range of E&M trunks; FROM the lowest E&M trunk number TO the highest E&M trunk number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DELAYED/IMMEDIATE/ 0 (Delay Start), 1 (Immediate Start), 2 (Wink Start); WINK [0] r When this trunk is defined as CAMA in General Trunk Definitions (see Continuous trunks only TYPE [4] on page 8-11), then this parameter is automatically set to Wink start and cannot be changed. Determines whether the signaling/handshaking protocol of the E&M Continuous trunk is Delay Start, Immediate Start, or Wink Start.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M_CONTINUOUS_ 0..1 TIMERS # [1] Determines which E&M Continuous Timer table, 0 or 1, (see E&M Continuous Timers beginning on page 8-52) is used to define the trunk operating characteristics.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

2W/4W [2] 2W/4W 4TEM, 4TEMsl and This option applies only for analog 4TEMsl, 4TEM and 4TEMP cards, providing 4TEMP cards only the cards with the connection to a CO that works in 4-wire mode. The 2-wire or 4-wire option is strap selectable. When working in 4-wire mode ETR and ETT are the transmitting leads and ERR and ERT are receiving leads. In 2-wire mode only ETR and ETT leads are utilized.

E&M Trunk Definition TRK,1 [0,2,1,0,0,1]


8-86

1) Selecting 2W or 4W must match the wire strap on the card (See relevant Coral Installation Manual). 2) Wire selection directly influences the Network Balance (see Balancing Network beginning on page 19-23). The 2-wire mode uses 2 as the Balancing Network, while 4-wire mode uses 0. After selecting the appropriate mode, the Coral system automatically selects the proper balancing network.

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

ANSWER_ Yes/No MANDATORY [3] Provides answer supervision for E&M Continuous trunks, by either disconnecting Continuous trunk only or connecting the trunk when the answer signal is not detected. Entering Yes doesnt accept an answer and automatically releases the outgoing trunk after time-out. Enter No so that if the answer is not accepted, the outgoing trunk connects after time-out.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CORAL_MAIL [4] Yes/No Voice Mail System Determines whether the trunk is connected to the Voice Mail System (Yes). 4TEM and 4TEM/S CoralMail is an integrated proprietary voice messaging system. cards only r When Y is selected, 2W/4W (see above) must be set to 4W, and ANS/DISC_PULSE_ON_XFER (see below) must be set to Y.

DATA_SERVICE [5] Not Used

H.FLASH ACCEPT [6] Yes/No

In noisy areas, set this parameter to No.

CONNECTED_TO_ Yes/No PUBLIC_EXCHANGE This parameter determines how the Coral relates to an incoming call. [7] Enter N to define regular E&M line. When entering Y, the Coral relates to the line as an incoming call from a CO. In this case, if the internal called station is busy, the call camps-on automatically to the busy station or enters as a second call in the multi-appearance to avoid sending a busy tone. Enter Y to enable an incoming call to a busy station to act as a CO trunk; the call rings as multi-appearance or camp-on (instead of busy tone).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-87

E&M Trunk Definition TRK,1 [0,2,1,0,0,1]

Determines whether the E&M trunk can recognize a calibrated opening signal sent from the far-end. Flash duration is defined through E&M Continuous Timers beginning on page 8-52 and 4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database beginning on page 8-59.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

ANS/DISC_PULSE_ Yes/No ON_XFER [8] Answer/Disconnect Pulse After Transfer determines whether the system sends a Continuous trunks only signal when a call is either answered or disconnected by a third party (Yes). This parameter functions when a transferred call appears on a currently busy E&M Continuous trunk. This parameter is typically used when a trunk is connected to a Voice Mail system or automatic attendant. Using this parameter allows immediate Voice Mail response to the transferred call. ANS/DISC duration is defined by ANS/DISC_PULSE_WIDTH [4] on page 8-53, in E&M Continuous Timers. The signal is sent over the E&M Continuous trunk from the third party to the first party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MUSIC_ON_ 0..3 HOLD/TRANSFER [9] Coral FlexiCom 200: 0 (MP-1), 1 (MP-2); Coral IPx 500: 0 (MP-1), 1 (MP-2); Determines which music source is sounded on the called partys line after being placed on hold or transferred by the E&M trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WINK_FOR_BUSY [10] Yes/No

This parameter is relevant only for E&M Trunks defined as Wink Start.

This parameter defines whether or not a wink signal is sent, in addition to the busy tone, when the called party is busy. This wink signal can be used to activate applications which run only on E&M lines (such as voice mail). The wink signalling is defined in Trunk Timers beginning on page 8-6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING_TOLL [11] Yes/No CC10 only This parameter defines whether or not an incoming toll call is allowed to break into an ongoing conversation by the attendant/operator. The operator is notified whether the called party is busy only if the incoming line is prompted with an appropriate signal. Therefore, WINK_FOR_BUSY above must be set to YES and one wink is sent. If the break-in is not allowed, two winks are sent by the Coral (ON, OFF, ON). Additionally, the Coral checks if the called party is engaged in a conversation in a connect state. i.e., it is not held, dialing, in conference, etc., If state of connect is detected, the incoming toll call is allowed to break in and is heard by both parties. The Coral also checks whether break-in is allowed according to other system parameters (such as DATA_SECURE_LINE).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M Trunk Definition TRK,1 [0,2,1,0,0,1]

8-88

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

DID Trunk Definition

W TRK,3

[0,2,1,0,0,3]

DID Trunk Definition is used to program the trunk signaling parameters for each Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk installed in Coral systems. This parameter applies only to DID trunks connected to 8DID, 30T, 30T/E, 30T/M, 30T/x, ALS, BID, GID, 4TWL cards and is used in addition to General Trunk Definitions beginning on page 8-10. FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid DID trunk dial number; All defined DID trunks Enter the required range of DID trunks, FROM the lowest DID trunk dial number TO the highest DID trunk dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IMMEDIATE/WINK, 0 (Immediate Start), 1 (Wink Start or Delay Start) DELAYED Determines when the signaling/handshaking protocol of the trunk is Immediate Start, Wink Start or Delay Start. Entering 1 allows the trunk to be either Wink Start or Delay Start. The signaling protocol is further defined in 8DID Card Database beginning on page 8-90.

1) This entry must match CKT 0-7 defined in8DID Card Database (see page 8-90). 2) In European systems the equivalent BID trunk ports must be set to zero (0). The parameter displays:0 = IMM/BID, 1 = WINK/DELAYED.

8-89

DID Trunk Definition TRK,3 [0,2,1,0,0,3]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

8DID Card Database

W DIDB

The 8DID Card Database is relevant and assigned to each 8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z trunk card (see Card List Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

This menu is not relevant for 4TWL, ALS70-DID, BID or GID cards.

FROM/ 0..3 TO 0..3 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CKT 0-7 0 (Immediate Start),1 (Wink Start), 2(Stop Go [Delay]) (CKT ON DID CARD) Determines when the signaling/handshaking protocol for the CKT (trunk port) on [0,1,2,3,4,5,6 or 7] all trunk cards with this Database is Immediate Start, Wink Start, or Stop/Go (Delay) Start. This protocol is also defined under DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89.

This entry must match the IMMEDIATE/WINK, DELAYED entry found in DID Trunk Definitions (see page 8-89).

8DID Card Database DIDB


8-90

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

COLLECT CALLS 1..254 ms BLOCK [8,9,10] r The 8DID/S-Z card software version must be 17.16 or higher. CC3 only Three parameters are used to implement a blocking protocol for incoming collect calls.
Parameter Name
COLLECT_BLOCK_T1 [8] COLLECT_BLOCK_T2 [9] COLLECT_BLOCK_T3 [10]

Default
15 units (150ms) 30 units (300ms) 60 units (600ms)

In an incoming call, if the person called is restricted by COS to accept collect calls, the Coral signals the CO accordingly. The signaling is implemented by disconnecting and connecting the line according to the following time intervals: Line closed for T1 interval Line opened for T2 interval Line closed for T3 interval Line opened for T2 interval Line closed for T1 interval Line opened for T2 interval Line permanently closed

If the incoming call is a collect call, the CO will disconnect the line after identification of the above pulse sequence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_BREAK [11] 20..32..72 ms Determines the minimum period that loop current must be interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Determines the maximum period that loop current can remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_(BREAK+ 48..200..252 ms MAKE) [13] Determines the maximum rotary (pulse) dial cycle (Break + Make) duration, while a digit is rotary dialed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-91

8DID Card Database DIDB

MAX_BREAK [12] 20..80..72 ms

Trunk Controls SEIZE [14] 10..60..1020 ms

PI Reference Manual

Determines the minimum period that an incoming call signal (loop current) must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a seize from the CO.

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

DISCONNNECT [15] 80..152..300 ms Determines the minimum period for a disconnect signal (loop current interrupted) before the Coral recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEIZE.TO-WINK [16] 80..140..300 ms Determines the minimum delay between the recognition of an incoming seizure and the application of a Wink signal in response. This timer applies only to DID trunks which are defined as Wink Start (DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89). Upon incoming seizure, the system checks resources to determine whether or not the system is ready to process the call. If resources are available, this timer is started. When this timer expires, the trunk sends a Wink signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

WINK WIDTH [17] 40..304..320 ms Determines the duration of the Wink signaling pulse, sent in response to an incoming trunk seizure. This timer applies only to DID trunks which are defined as Wink Start (see DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FILTER AFTER WINK 28..72..120 ms [18] Determines the period following the application of a Wink signal where any change on the trunk, whether electrical state or audio dial signal, is ignored. This timer only applies to DID trunks which are defined as Wink Start (see DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89). When this timer expires, incoming dialed digit analysis commences.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8DID Card Database DIDB

FILTER AFTER GO 28..72..120 ms [19] Determines the period following the application of a Go signal that any change on the trunk, whether electrical state or audio dial signal, is ignored. This timer only applies to DID trunks which are defined as Delay Start (Stop/Go) (see DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89). When this timer expires, incoming dialed digit analysis commences.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-92

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

SG SEIZE.TO START 80..120..300 ms [20] Determines the minimum delay between the recognition of an incoming seizure and the application of a Stop Dial signal in response. This timer applies only to DID trunks which are defined as Delay Start (Stop/Go) (see DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89). When this timer expires, the trunk sends a Stop Dial signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SG PULSE WIDTH 80..140..300 ms [21] Determines the minimum duration of a Stop Dial signal, acknowledging an incoming trunk seizure. This timer applies only to DID trunks which are defined as Delay Start (Stop/Go) (see DID Trunk Definition beginning on page 8-89. When the Time From Seize To Stop/Go Start timer described in this form expires, the trunk sends a Stop Dial signal and the system checks to determine if resources are available to process the call. When system resources are available, this timer is started. When this timer expires, the trunk sends a Go signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [22] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update which has been made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-93

8DID Card Database DIDB

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration

W DTDB,0

The configuration option is used to determine the protocol type for individual channels on a digital trunk card. Access is accomplished by entering the physical location of any current card (shelf and slot), or before installing the card, by defining the default. When entering this mode, the PI prompts the user to enter 0 for changing the default or 1 for access by physical current card location.

0 - DEFAULT This option is used to display or modify the default configuration of the digital Configuration cards. This default will be given to the digital card that will be installed in the
future. For cards already installed, the configuration can be modified by using the 1-CURRENT Configuration option below. Each trunk can be separately configured according to any of the following ranges:
Card Type Range
E&M (0) Continuous T1 30T 30T/E 30T/CHI, etc. 30T/M 30T/E (Eu0) 30T/E (Eu1) 0 (E&M), 1 (LS), 2 (GS) 0 (E&M), 1 (DDI), 2 (DDO) 0 (E&M),1 (DDI), 2 (DDO) 0 (E&M),1 (DDI), 2 (DDO), 3 (BI_D) 0 (E&M),1(DDI), 2(NonDID) 0 (E&M),1 (DDI), 2 (DDO) 0-23 -

Default
DDI (1) 18-29 18-29 18-29 18-29 0-14 DDO, LS, GS, NonDID (2) 0-17 0-17 0-17 0-17 15-29 B_DI (3) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration DTDB,0


8-94

*Bi-Directional, for 30T/M card version 32.xx and higher.

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

1-CURRENT Yes/No Configuration

This option is used to display or modify signaling protocol for each installed digital trunk according to card location, by entering the cards physical location in the system. The system automatically skips over slots not equipped with digital cards. Each trunk can be separately configured according to any of the ranges listed in the 0 - DEFAULT Configuration table above. Before entering Current Config, the system checks for a previous update that is still pending. If such an update is detected then the following message appears:
** WARNING ** DGTL CARD in config mode override configuration? (Y/N)

Entering Yes causes the system to ignore all entries made in the previous card configuration. Entering No causes the system to return to the previous mode level.

FROM/TO SHELF# All available shelves 0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC); 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

1..3: Coral IPx Office 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Enter the required range of shelf numbers; FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

2..11: Coral IPx Office: main cage (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: Coral IPx Office: IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: Coral IPx Office: IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Enter the required range of slot numbers; FROM the lowest slot number TO the highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-95

T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration DTDB,0

FROM/TO SLOT# All Slots 1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

Trunk Controls UPDATE? Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Changing the configuration causes: 1. All established calls on this card to be dropped. 2. The database that belongs to the card and its associated trunks to be erased. 3. The card to re initialize without the previous definitions.

All related databases must be programmed again.

Transfers the new card configuration to the trunk card and database. When No is selected, any entries are ignored. No default is presented, therefore, either Y (update) or N (cancel operation) must be entered. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration DTDB,0


8-96

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x Synchronization

W DTDB,3

The SYNC option form defines the clock reference source with which the Coral system switching is synchronized. ADDR (Shelf, Slot) Determines which of the digital trunks are utilized as the primary (PRM) clock reference source and which digital trunks are utilized as the secondary (SEC) reference source, if any. The PRM and SEC digital trunk cards are especially wired in the backplane in order to use a card operating in slave clock mode. Entering R removes the shelf or slot reference. When Remove is entered or (,) is displayed the system selects the clock source automatically.

When a TBR card is selected, set SYNC_CHANNEL to Yes and PERMANANT ACTIVE CHANNEL [DTDB,4] to No (see page 26-17).

A card operating in Slave Clock mode has the backplane pre-wired at the factory and cards must be installed only in the proper slot. For further details, see the relevant Coral Installation Manual.

Changing the clock reference source through the Address parameter, resets the current digital trunk card.

Attempting to define a location when no ISDN or digital card (T1, PRI24, PRI30, 4TBR, 8TBR or 30T/x) is installed in the defined port, causes the following error message to appear:
NOT DGTL TRK CARD.

The attempt will be refused.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-97

T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x Synchronization DTDB,3

Trunk Controls PRM, SEC - (Shelf #, Slot #), Remove; Default: (--,--)

PI Reference Manual

The two card slots, designated PRM SYNC and SEC SYNC vary with each cabinet. The table below identifies the card slot location range for each cabinet type.
Table 8-6: External Clock Synchronization Card Slots Range Cabinet Type Primary Clock Sync. Card Slot PRM SYNC Secondary Clock Sync. Card Slot SEC SYNC

Coral IPx Office Coral IPx 500 Coral IPx 800 Coral IPx 3000 Coral IPx 4000 Coral FlexiCom 200 Coral FlexiCom 300 Coral FlexiCom 400 FlexLITE 400 Coral FlexiCom 5000
Main with two peripheral shelves 1xPB-24

(1,8) or (1,10) or (2,4) or (3,4) (0,4) or (1,4) or (2,4) (0,4) or (1,4) or (2,4) (0,4) or (8,4) (0,4) (0,2) or (1,2) (0,9) (0,2) (0,2)* (0,4)

(1,8) or (1,10) or (2,5) or (3,5) (0,5) or (1,5) or (2,5) (0,5) or (1,5) or (2,5) (0,5) or (8,5) (2,4) or (4,4) or (8,4) (0,3) or (1,3) (0,10) (0,3) (0,3)* (1,4)

Coral FlexiCom 5000


Main with two peripheral shelves 2xPB-24

(0,4)

(2,4) 128 T.S. (4,4) 256 T.S. (8,4) 512 T.S. (2,4) 128 T.S. (4,4) 256 T.S. (8,4) 512 T.S. (4,4) 128 T.S. (8,4) 256 T.S. (2,4), (4,4) or (8,4)

T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x Synchronization DTDB,3


8-98

Coral FlexiCom 5000


Main with three peripheral shelves 2xPB-24

(0,4)

Coral FlexiCom 5000


Main with three peripheral shelves 3xPB-24

(0,4)

Coral FlexiCom 6000

(0,4)

* Sync slots in FlexLITE are used to synchronize the system clock only when the FlexLITE 400 is used as self-contained cabinets with common control cards.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual STATUS

Trunk Controls

0 (OK), 1 (Lock Fault), 2 (Communication Fault)


Shows the diagnostic status for both primary and secondary digital trunk cards. PRM SEC l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CURR_CLK

0 (Self (Master)), 1 (Primary (Slave)), 2 (Secondary (Slave))


Shows the current clock reference source with which the Coral system is synchronized.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-99

T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x Synchronization DTDB,3

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

T1 and 30T Card Database

W DTDB,1,0

Establishes the T1 (24 channel American standard) and 30T (CET/E1 30 channel European standard) card database. The 30T card database establishes the card database for the E1 30 channel. The card is represented with different suffixes in various countries such as: Israel: 30T; Ireland: 30T/M IR, etc. The /M designation stands for Master or Main. Note that 30T/M xxx is the card type designation, whereas the system assigns a 30T identity through the Card List (Route: CLIS) and Port List (Route: PLIS) branches of the PI. There are four card databases (0 - 3), one of which is assigned to each T1 and 30T digital trunk card (see Card List - Chapter 6). By default, Card Database 0 is dedicated to 30T, and Card Database 1 is dedicated to T1. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

FROM/ 0..3 TO 0..3 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALL: The following parameters apply to all trunk types.


O/G_BREAK [0] 18..61..90 ms (in 3 ms increments)

T1 and 30T Card Database DTDB,1,0


8-100

Outgoing Break Time determines the Break time during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_MAKE [1] 18..40..90 ms (in 3 ms increments) Outgoing Make Time determines the period that loop current will be restored during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G INDGT [2] 200..700..2550 ms (in 10 ms increments) Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period that loop current is restored between digits being rotary (pulse) dialed from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk port, during an outgoing call. (For DTMF trunk tones, see DTMF_ TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

E&M: The following parameters apply only to incoming E&M Continuous calls.
I/C_BREAK [3] 30..90..250 ms (in 3 ms increments) Incoming Break Time determines the maximum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead remains interrupted).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAKE [4] 30..90..250 ms (in 3 ms increments) Incoming Make Time determines the maximum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed (E lead active). If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LOGIC T1 Range: Not Applicable (CEPT=Y/TDMX=N) [5] 30T Range: Y(CEPT)/N(TDMX)

Not used in CC0 (USA) systems.

Choose Y for positive signalling over the trunk lines, such as the -CEPT (European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrations) protocol which allows defining the system logic according to this general European standard. Choose N for reverse signalling over the trunk lines when using products such as the TDMX (TADIMUX- another communication product made by the same Coral manufacturer).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DDO: The following parameters apply only to DDO calls via 30T card. T1 and 30T Card Database DTDB,1,0
The following parameters are only used for 30T DDO cards and are not used in CC0 (USA) systems. FAIL_SEIZE [6] 100..5000..10000 ms (in 100 ms increments) Fail Seize Time determines the maximum system waiting time between seizure and the seize acknowledgment signal. If seize acknowledgment is not recognized, after a defined time-out period, the trunk is released by the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_METER [7] 50..200 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Minimum Meter Pulse Recognition determines the minimum meter pulse duration. The metering pulse interval must be between MIN_METER and MAX_METER in order to be recognized by the 30T trunk. A metering pulse shorter than MIN_ METER is not recognized.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-101

Trunk Controls MAX_METER [8] 200..500..1000 ms

PI Reference Manual

(in 10 ms increments)

Maximum Meter Pulse Recognition determines the maximum meter pulse duration. The metering pulse interval must be between MIN_METER and MAX_ METER in order to be recognized by the 30T trunk. A metering pulse longer than MAX_METER is not recognized.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID: The following parameters apply only to DID calls via 30T card.
The following parameters are only used for 30T DDI cards and are not used in CC0 (USA) systems. MIN_BREAK [9] 20..40..70 ms (in 10 ms increments) CC1: 20 Minimum Break Time determines the minimum period that loop signal must be interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BREAK [10] 70..80..150 ms (in 10 ms increments) CC1: 120 Maximum Break Time determines the maximum period that loop signal can remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_(BREAK+MAKE) 100..200..250 ms (in 10 ms increments) [11] Maximum Break Plus Make time determines the maximum rotary (pulse) dial cycle (Break + Make) duration, while a digit is rotary dialed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

T1 and 30T Card Database DTDB,1,0

DISCONNECT [12] 80..150..1000 ms (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Disconnect Time determines the minimum disconnect signal time period, during a call, in order for the system to identify disconnect.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEIZE [13] 50..60..1000 ms(in 10 ms increments) Minimum Seize Time determines the minimum period in which a trunk card must detect a seize signal in order to identify an incoming seizure.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [14] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-102

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

T1 and 30T Port Database

W DTDB,2,0

The circuit database allows programming the port database tables. There are four digital trunk port databases (0-3). In default mode, Port Database 0 is dedicated to 30T, Port Database 1 is dedicated to T1. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM/ 0..3 TO 0..3 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

METERING [0] Yes/No

r
l l l l

Not used in CC0 systems.

For CC0 systems (North America), change the T1 default to No.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [1] 50..60..300 ms (in 10 ms increments) PDB #1: 80 ms Suspect Seize determines the waiting period for an incoming call signal at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party, in order to prevent glare.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [2] 50..320..500 (in 10 ms increments) PDB #1: 300 ms

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

CO_BLOCK [3] 50..60..300 ms (in 10 ms increments) Ground Start trunks PDB #1: 450 ms) only CO Block determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the Central Office (ground or ring), i.e. the minimum duration without a ring until the system interprets the signal as a block signal. The timer applies only to trunks defined as Ground Start with Ring in the 4T/8T Card Database Branch (see C-gs with ring on page 8-51). In a CO block state, the trunk is considered busy, thus prohibiting outgoing trunk seizure. The system waits for ringing, before indicating an incoming call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-103

T1 and 30T Port Database DTDB,2,0

Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is actually SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

Trunk Controls SEND_TO_CARD? [4] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card Database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

T1 and 30T Port Database DTDB,2,0


8-104

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

30T/M Card Database

W DTDB,1,2

The 30T/M card database establishes the card database for the E1 30 channel in some countries. Some variations of the card (software only) are: Mexican (30T/M), China (30T/M CHI), Brazil (30T/M BZL), Argentina (30T/M ARG), Poland (30T M-PL), etc. Note that 30T/M xxx is the card type designation. The system assigns a 30TM identity through the Card List (Route: CLIS) and Port List (Route: PLIS) branches of the PI. The 30TM card There are two card databases (0 - 1), each of them can be assigned to one or more 30TM trunk cards (see Card List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALL: The following parameters apply to all trunk types.


O/G_BREAK [0] 10..65..120 ms Outgoing Break Time determines the Break time during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_MAKE [1] 10..35..120 ms

O/G_INDGT [2] 500..700..2550 ms (in 10 ms increments) Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period between two successive Break intervals between digits being rotary (pulse) dialed from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk port, during an outgoing call. (For DTMF trunk tones, see DTMF_TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-105

30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2

Outgoing Make Time determines the period between two successive Break intervals during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.

Trunk Controls DISCONNECT Yes/No RECALL [3] Mexico (CC2): Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Notes: Relevant for CC1, CC2, CC3, CC5 and CC6 systems only. This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Outgoing Calls Only: This parameter determines whether to ignore the CO_DISC [2] (page 8-111) time interval and use a longer time interval: DISCONNECT RECALL TIME [5] defined in the 30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database beginning on page 8-111 for this card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IGNORE SUPP#6 [4] Yes/No Belgium and China (Eu1 & CC6): Yes/No

This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Outgoing Calls Only: This parameter enables using the Q.422 protocol instead of the Q.422, Supp 6 protocol for outgoing calls, thereby disabling the metering pulse signals from the far end towards the card during outgoing system calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ENABLE CCB? [5] Yes/No; Brazil (CC3): Yes/No

This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Set this parameter to Yes to enable Call Collect Block, thereby disabling the destination from receiving collect calls. When this parameter is set to Yes, collect calls may be disabled at the destination (as defined by its COS). The following four parameters are presented in order to define the signal indicating the Call Collect Block. During an incoming call, if the system destination is restricted by COS to accept collect calls, the Coral signals the CO accordingly. The signaling pulse is defined by the CCB_Tx time intervals as described in the sketch (CCB_T3 can be set to 0):

30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2


8-106

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

Figure 8-3. CCB Pulse Signal


Line Answer CCB_T2 CCB_T2

CCB_T1

CCB_T3

CCB_T4

Line

CCB Pulse

The CO aborts a call if the destination responds with a CCB pulse pattern.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CCB_T1 (10ms) [6] 0 (Enable CCB? = No; 1..255 units: Enable CCB? = Yes Brazil (CC3): 1..15..255

(1 unit=10 ms)

This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Incoming Calls Only: When ENABLE CCB? [5] above is set to Yes, this parameter defines the CCB_T1 time period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CCB_T2 (10ms) [7] 0: Enable CCB? = No; 1..255 units: Enable CCB? = Yes; Brazil (CC3): 1..30..255

(1 unit=10 ms)

This feature is only available for 30TM cards,Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Incoming Calls Only: When ENABLE CCB? [5] above is set to Yes, this parameter defines the CCB_T2 time period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

This feature is only available for 30TM cards,Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Incoming Calls Only: When ENABLE CCB? [5] above is set to Yes, this parameter defines the CCB_T3 time period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CCB_T4 (10ms) [9] 0: Enable CCB? = No; 1..255 units: Enable CCB? = Yes Brazil (CC3): 1..70..255 units

(1 unit=10 ms)

This feature is only available for 30TM cards,Issue# 021004812 or higher.

Incoming Calls Only: When ENABLE CCB? [5] above is set to Yes, this parameter defines the CCB_T4 time period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-107

30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2

CCB_T3 (10ms) [8] 0..255 units

(1 unit=10 ms)

Trunk Controls CCB PULSE IGNORE 0..60 units (1 unit = 100ms) TIME (100ms) [10] Brazil (CC3): 0..20..255

PI Reference Manual

Relevant only for DDO. This feature is only available for 30TM cards,Issue# 021004812 or higher. This parameter enables the card to disregard CCB signals sent towards the card by defining a CCB Pulse Ignore time period in this parameter. Setting this parameter to 0, disables the ignore CCB pulses (i.e. enables CCB signals). When no time period is defined for this parameter some calls may be disconnected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

METER:
MIN_ON [11] 20..130..140 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Minimum Meter Pulse Recognition determines the minimum meter pulse duration. The metering pulse interval must be between MIN_ON and MAX_ON in order to be recognized by the 30T/M trunk. A metering pulse shorter than MIN_ON is not recognized.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_ON [12] 160..190..990 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Maximum Meter Pulse Recognition determines the maximum meter pulse duration. The metering pulse interval must be between MIN_ON and MAX_ON in order to be recognized by the 30T/M trunk. A metering pulse longer than MIN_ON is not recognized.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_OFF [13] 50..100..2500 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Minimum Time Between Meter Pulses defines the minimum period between meter pulses in order to recognize the next pulse.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2


8-108

METER PULSE Yes/No; ENABLE [14] CC1 (Israel), CC2 (Mexico): Yes/No CC6 (China):Yes/No: only for Bit A

This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

When no R2_Signalling meter pulse information is sent (metering pulses from the CO destination to the call initiator -DDO side), set this parameter to No to block the card from recognizing these pulses.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

DID: The following options are relevant only during incoming calls on DID type trunks.
MIN_BREAK [15] 10..40..70 ms Minimum Break Time determines the minimum period that loop signal must be interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A break-time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BREAK [16] 70..90..255 ms Maximum Break Time determines the maximum period that a loop signal can remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A break-time greater than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_MAKE [17] 10..20..60 ms Minimum Make Time determines the minimum Make (current restoral) period for a loop signal during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A make-time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_MAKE [18] 30..60..255 ms Maximum Make Time determines the maximum Make (current restoral) period for a loop signal during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A make-time greater than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

E&M: The following parameters are relevant only for E&M Continuous type trunks.
I/C_MIN_BREAK [19] 10..30..60 ms Incoming Minimum Break Time determines the minimum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead remains interrupted). A break-time greater that the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAX_BREAK [20] 60..90..255 ms Incoming Maximum Break Time determines the maximum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead remains interrupted). A break-time greater that the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-109

30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2

Trunk Controls I/C_MIN_MAKE [21] 10..30..60 ms

PI Reference Manual

Incoming Minimum Make Time determines the minimum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed (E lead active). If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAX_MAKE [22] 60..90..255 ms Incoming Maximum Make Time determines the maximum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed (E lead active). If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LOGIC (CEPT/TDMX) C(CEPT)/T(TDMX) [23] CEPT (European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrations) allows defining the system logic according to this general European standard. TDMX (TADIMUX - another communication product made by the same Coral manufacturer) that allows defining the system so that 30 calls (analog or digital channels, 64 Kbps data per channel) can be communicated along a pair of standard telephone wires for remote subscribers. A choice of analog or digital channels permits the interconnection of analog or digital PABXs, telephones or terminals.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BIT B VALUE [24] 1 (Bit B value is always 1) 2 (Bit B value takes Bit As value) 3 (Bit B value is always 0)

r
30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2

This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

E & M Signalling protocol is based on changes in the bit signalling. For systems where bit B is analyzed, define it in this parameter towards the far side.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DDO: The following parameters apply only to DDO type trunks.


FAIL_SEIZE [25] 20..50..255 units (1 unit = 100 ms) Fail Seize Time determines the maximum system waiting time between seizure and the seize acknowledgment signal. If seize acknowledgment is not recognized, after a defined time-out period, the trunk is released by the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [26] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-110

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database

W DTDB,2,2,0

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [0] 20..30..50 ms (in 10 ms increments) Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 50..70..1550 ms (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is calculated as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

CO_DISC [2] 200..350..2550 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum waiting period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_BLOCK [3] 60..350..1000 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Central Office Block determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the Central Office. This parameter defines the minimum period for the system to interpret the signal as a block signal. In a CO block state the trunk is considered busy, thereby preventing further use of the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SZ_ACK [4] Yes (Delay)/No (Immediate) Seize Acknowledge determines when the signaling/handshaking protocol of the incoming DID trunk is Delay Start or Immediate Start.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-111

30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database DTDB,2,2,0

Trunk Controls DISCONNECT 60..90..180 seconds RECALL TIME [5] r This feature is only available for 30TM cards with Issue# 021004812 or higher.

PI Reference Manual

When DISCONNECT RECALL [3] (page 8-106) is set to Yes in the Card database, this parameter defines the time period for which the CO Disconnect is extended in order to verify the CO disconnect.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [6] Yes/No Transfers the updated port database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database DTDB,2,2,0


8-112

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

30T/M DDI Port Database

W DTDB,2,2,1

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_DISC [2] 200..350..2550 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a disconnect signal from a trunk that must remain before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_BLOCK [3] 60..350..1000 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the Central Office. This parameter allows the minimum period until the system interprets the signal as a block signal to be defined. In a CO block state the trunk is considered busy, thereby preventing further use of the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DISCONNECT N/A RECALL TIME [4] Not Relevant for DDI.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [5] Yes/No Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-113

30T/M DDI Port Database DTDB,2,2,1

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

30T/M Timers

W TRUNK,6
The following timers apply when the Coral system releases trunks before the Central Office, but the CO is also expected to release. Both timers allow the maximum waiting period, for a disconnect acknowledgment signal from the CO, before the Coral blocks the trunk line to be defined.

1 unit=0.1 second DDO_DELAY_TO_ 1..1800..36000 BLOCK Applies to DDO trunks.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DDI_DELAY_TO_ 1..900..36000 1unit=0.1 second BLOCK Applies to DDI trunks.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/M Timers TRUNK,6


8-114

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

30T/E Card Database


Utilized only in European Systems

W DTDB,1,1

The 30T/E card database establishes the card database for E1 30 channel European standard systems. There are two card databases (0 - 1), one of which is assigned to each 30T/E digital trunk card (see Card List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALL: The following parameters apply to all trunk types.


O/G_BREAK [0] 10..65..120 ms Outgoing Break Time determines the Break time during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_MAKE [1] 10..35..120 ms Outgoing Make Time determines the period in which loop current is restored during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

O/G_INDGT [2] 500..700..2550

(in 10 ms increments)

METER:
MIN_ON [3] 20..100..120 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Meter Pulse Recognition. The 30T/E trunk detects an active metering pulse signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_ON defined below and longer than MIN_ON defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-115

30T/E Card Database DTDB,1,1

Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period in which loop current is restored between digits being rotary (pulse) dialed from a trunk programmed as a pulse dialing trunk port, during an outgoing call. (For DTMF trunk tones, see DTMF_TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers).

Trunk Controls MAX_ON [4] 180..200..990 (in 10 ms increments)

PI Reference Manual

Maximum Meter Pulse Recognition. The 30T/E trunk detects an active metering pulse signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_ON defined here and longer than MIN_ON defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_OFF [5] 200..2550(in 10 ms increments) Minimum Time Between Meter Pulses determines the minimum period between meter pulses so that the next pulse may be identified.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/E Card Database DTDB,1,1


8-116

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

Eu0 systems only DID: The following options apply only during incoming calls on DID type trunks.
MIN_BREAK [6] 10..40..70 ms Minimum Break Time determines the minimum period that loop signal must be interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A break-time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BREAK [7] 70..90..255 ms Maximum Break Time determines the maximum period that a loop signal can remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A break-time greater than the defined period will not be recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_MAKE [8] 10..20..60 ms Minimum Make Time determines the minimum Make (current restoral) period for a loop signal to exist during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Make time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_MAKE [9] 30..60..255 ms Maximum Make Time determines the maximum Make (current restoral) period for a loop signal during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Make time greater than the defined period will not be recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-117

30T/E Card Database DTDB,1,1

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

E&M: The following parameters apply only to E&M Continuous type trunks.
I/C_MIN_BREAK [10] 10..30..60 ms Incoming Minimum Break Time determines the minimum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead remains interrupted). A Break time greater that the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAX_BREAK [11] 60..90..255 ms Incoming Maximum Break Time determines the maximum Break time, during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle, for the trunk card to recognize the rotary dialed digits (E lead remains interrupted). A Break time greater that the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MIN_MAKE [12] 10..30..60 ms Incoming Minimum Make Time determines the minimum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed (E lead active). If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

I/C_MAX_MAKE [13] 60..90..255 ms Incoming Maximum Make Time determines the maximum Make time between successive Breaks while a digit is being rotary (pulse) dialed (E lead active). If signaling current remains when this timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LOGIC (CEPT/TDMX) C(CEPT)/T(TDMX) [14] CEPT (European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrations) allows defining the system logic according to this general European standard. TDMX (TADIMUX- another communication product made by the same Coral manufacturer) that allows defining the system so that 30 calls (analog or digital channels, 64 Kbps data per channel) can be communicated along a pair of standard telephone wires for remote subscribers. A choice of analog or digital channels permits the interconnection of analog or digital PABXs, telephones or terminals.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/E Card Database DTDB,1,1

DDO: The following parameter applies only to DDO type trunks.


FAIL_SEIZE [15] 20..50..5000 (1 unit = 100 ms) Fail Seize Time determines the maximum system waiting time between seizure and the seize acknowledgment signal. If seize acknowledgment is not recognized after a defined time-out period, the trunk is released.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-118

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [16] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-119

30T/E Card Database DTDB,1,1

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

30T/E DDI Port Database


Utilized only in European Systems

W DTDB,2,1,0

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [0] 20..30..50

(in 10 ms increments)

Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 50..70..1500

(in 10 ms increments)

Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

CO_DISC [2] 200..350..2550

(in 10 ms increments)

Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/E DDI Port Database DTDB,2,1,0


8-120

CO_BLOCK [3] 60..350..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Eu0 only Central Office Block determines the blocking signal timing received from the Central Office by defining the minimum period until the system interprets the signal as a block signal. In a CO block state, the trunk is considered busy preventing further trunk use.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_EOS [4] 0..2550 (in 10 ms increments) Eu0 only The Minimum End-Of-Selection timer determines the minimum period that the voltage polarity across the TT-TR must be reversed by the Central Office, after dial outpulsing, for the trunk card to recognize EOS. This option is used for both Pulse and DTMF dialing. The EOS is sent by the CO to the Coral after the last dialed digit is accepted by the CO. The Coral responds by a line terminator of 0 - 560. This signal is also called Number Received Signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

SZ_ACK [5] Yes (Delay)/No (Immediate) Eu0, Eu1 only Seize Acknowledge determines when the signaling/handshaking protocol of the incoming DID trunk is Delay Start or Immediate Start.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [8] Yes/No Transfers the updated port database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card Database to the cards, including any update. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-121

30T/E DDI Port Database DTDB,2,1,0

30T/E DDO Port Database


Utilized only in Eu1, Eu2 and Eu3 systems

W DTDB,2,1,1

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_DISC [2] 200..350..2550 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_BLOCK [3] 60..350..1000 ms

(in 10 ms increments)

Central Office Block determines the timing for a blocking signal received from the Central Office, by defining the minimum period until the system interprets the signal as a block signal. In a CO block state, the trunk is considered busy, thereby preventing further trunk use.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RECONNECT [6] Yes/No Allows defining whether or not a reconnect takes place after a Central Office disconnect is carried out. The reconnect wait period is defined below in SEC.

SEC [7] 1..60..255 seconds

This parameter appears only when RECONNECT [6], above, is set to Yes.

Defines the system waiting time (in seconds) before a reconnect is actually performed.

SEND_TO_CARD? [8] Yes/No Transfers the updated port database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

30T/E NonDDI Port Database


Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

W DTDB,2,1,2

FROM/ 0..1 TO 0..1 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [0] 20..30..50 ms(in 10 ms increments) Determines the period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 50..70..1500 ms(in 10 ms increments) Determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_DISC [2] 200..350..2550 ms(in 10 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum time interval for a disconnect trunk signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect and releases the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_BLOCK [3] 60..350..1000 ms(in 10 ms increments) Central Office Block determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the Central Office, by defining the minimum period for the system to interpret the signal as a block signal. In a CO block state the trunk is considered busy, thereby preventing further trunk use.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_EOS [4] 0, 200..2550 ms(in 10 ms increments) Minimum End-Of-Selection determines the minimum period that the voltage polarity across the TT-TR must be reversed by the Central Office, after dial outpulsing, for the trunk card to recognize EOS. This option is used for both Pulse and DTMF dialing. The EOS is sent by the CO to the Coral after the last dialed digit is accepted by the CO. The Coral responds by a line terminator of 0 - 560. This signal is also called Number Received Signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-123

30T/E NonDDI Port Database DTDB,2,1,2

Trunk Controls SEND_TO_CARD? [8] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Transfers the updated port database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

30T/E NonDDI Port Database DTDB,2,1,2


8-124

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

ALS70 Trunks

W TRUNK,3
Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

[0,2,1,0,3]

ALS70 (Abonnee Lijn Signalering 1970) trunks can be defined as one of the following trunk types: Loop Start DID NonDID

Additionally, each of the various types of ALS70 trunks can have the following attributes: Defined as both incoming and outgoing trunks Receiving and detecting Meter Pulse (4ALS/M and 8ALS/M cards) Trunk group membership, see Trunk Group Definition beginning on page 8-16, where the default is the first group, (dial #0), including all the ALS70 trunks.

A DID type-defined trunk can belong to a DID/E&M group (see page 8-32), with incoming signals sent directly to the destination station. However, trunks defined as either LS or NonDID, connect the line directly to a predefined station.

The suffix /M added to the card name means: Built-In Metering Hardware, for example 4ALS/M or 8ALS/M. This information is printed on the card front panel. However, the /M feature is neither shown in the PLIS nor CLIS menus.

The following options are available under ALS70:

Option
CONFIG CARD_DB PORT_DB TIMERS

Full Name
Configuration Card Database Port Database Trunk Timers

Access
0 1 2 3

Mnemonic
TRUNK 3,0 TRUNK 3,1 TRUNK 3,2 TRUNK 3,3

The following pages present a detailed discussion of each option found under ALS70.

8-125

ALS70 Trunks TRUNK,3 [0,2,1,0,3]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

ALS70 Card Configuration

W TRUNK,3,0
Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

[0,2,1,0,3,0]

Determines the port type for each trunk according to the port location (shelf number, slot number and circuit). Only a slot initialized as an ALS card can be accessed through this option. A 4ALS card includes four trunk ports; 8ALS includes eight trunk ports. A trunk port can be defined as any one of the following types: LS (Loop Start), DID (Direct Inward Dial) or NonDID. The card database configuration must match the option strapping on the card (See the relevant Coral Installation Manual). FROM/TO SHELF # All available Shelves 0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC); 0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

1..3: Coral IPx Office 0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800 0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Enter the required range of shelf location numbers, FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FROM/TO SLOT # All Available Slots; 1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (Coral II-HDC) 1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000 (Coral III-4GC)

ALS70 Card Configuration TRUNK,3,0 [0,2,1,0,3,0]


8-126

2..11: Coral IPx Office: main unit (Shelf #: 1) 1..10: Coral IPx Office: IPx 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..12: Coral IPx Office: IPx 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 2, 3) 1..8: 1..8: 1..10: 1..12: 1..12: 1..12: Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral Coral IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx IPx 500M, 800M main cages (Shelf #: 0) 3000M main cage (Shelf #: 0, 8) 500X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 800X expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2) 3000XE, 3000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 1-7, 9-15) 4000XE, 4000XO expansion cages (Shelf #: 0-15)

Enter the required range of slot location numbers, FROM the lowest slot number TO the highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CARD

4ALS, 8ALS
Displays the initialized card name. The prefix digit indicates the total number of available ports.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual CKT# 0 (LS), 1 (DID), 2 (NonDID) Displays the card layout for each of the eight (0-7) circuits.

Trunk Controls

Circuits 0-3 are used by both 4ALS and 8ALS type cards. Circuits 4-7 are restricted to 8ALS type cards only.

!
l l l l

Changing the DID definition excludes the trunk from the DID/E&M group.

UPDATE (Y/N)? Yes/No Transfers the updated card configuration, immediately to the trunk card and database. When No is selected, all entries are ignored and the card ports remain as previously defined. Modification occurs when Yes is entered. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.

!
l l l l

When ALS is installed, selecting Yes resets the card and disconnects all established calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-127

ALS70 Card Configuration TRUNK,3,0 [0,2,1,0,3,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

ALS70 Card Database

W TRUNK

3,1 [0,2,1,0,3,1]

Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)


ALS70 Card Database establishes the card database for trunk cards 4ALS and 8ALS. The system allows for a maximum total of four ALS card database combinations (0-3), one of which is assigned to each card (see Card List - Chapter 6). The Coral makes no logical distinction between 4ALS and 8ALS cards. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

FROM/TO CARD_DB# 0..3 0..3 Enter the required range of ALS70 card database tables, FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following options apply only during incoming calls on ALS70-DID trunks.
MIN_BREAK [0] 20..30..70 ms DID Minimum Break Time determines the minimum period in which the loop current must be interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Break time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BREAK [1] 30..90..100 ms DID Maximum Break Time determines the maximum period that a loop signal can remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A break-time greater than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALS70 Card Database TRUNK 3,1 [0,2,1,0,3,1]


8-128

MIN_MAKE [2] 10..16..60 ms DID Minimum Make Time determines the minimum Make (current restoral) period for the loop current to exist during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Make time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a make.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_MAKE [3] 30..100 ms DID Maximum Make Time determines the maximum Make (current restoral) period for the loop current to exist during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Make time greater than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a make.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual LS_RING_PAUS [4] 1..5..12 seconds

Trunk Controls

Loop Start Ring Pause determines the minimum period that the ring generator is off during an incoming call, before the system terminates the call. Disconnect takes place before the call is answered or interrupted. This timer applies only to trunks defined as Loop Start (LS) in the ALS70 Configuration Definition and Check Ring in ALS70-LS Port Database. The entry should be at least one second greater than the normal interval between ring bursts from the Central Office.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DID_DISC_BEFORE_ 100..320..2550 (in 10 ms increments) ANS [5] DID Disconnect Before Answer determines the minimum period that the loop current must be reversed during an incoming call before the system terminates an incoming call indication. This timer applies only to trunks defined as DID in the ALS70 Configuration Definition.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NONDID_RING_PAUS 100..320..2550 (in 10 ms increments) [6] NonDID Disconnect Before Answer determines the minimum period that the loop current must be reversed during an incoming call before the system terminates an incoming call indication. This timer applies only to trunks defined as NonDID in the ALS70 Configuration Definition.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OUTGOING: The following options apply only during outgoing calls on ALS70 trunks.
BREAK_TIME [7] 21..59..90

(in 3 ms increments)

Signaling method is defined in TYPE [4] (page 8-11).


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAKE_TIME [8] 21..39..90 (in 3 ms increments) Outgoing Make Time determines the period that loop current is restored during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call. Signaling method is defined in TYPE [4] (page 8-11).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INTERDGT_T [9] 200..700..2550 (in 10 ms increments) Outgoing Rotary Interdigit Time determines the period that loop current is restored between digits being rotary (pulse) dialed from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call. Signaling method is defined in TYPE [4] (page 8-11). (For DTMF trunk tones, see DTMF_TONE beginning on page 6-4 in Feature Timers).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-129

ALS70 Card Database TRUNK 3,1 [0,2,1,0,3,1]

Outgoing Break Time determines the period that loop current is interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call.

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

METER: The following parameters define the METER signal (sent by the CO in order to
define a meter pulse). This option applies to 4ALS/M and 8ALS/M cards only. f0 [10] 0 (16kHz), 1 (12kHz), 2 (50kHz) Identifies the frequency sent by the CO to define a meter pulse. Although 12 and 16 kHz are displayed, currently only 50Hz is available. Therefore only enter 2 for this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

f0 Accuracy (1 - 10)% 1..3..10 1 unit = 1%; 12/16kHz only [11] Identifies the accuracy of the meter pulse frequency sent by the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

f0 Accuracy (5, 10)% 5..10 1 unit = 1% 50Hz only [12] Identifies the accuracy of the meter pulse frequency sent by the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_METER [13] 50..70..200 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Meter Pulse. The ALS70 trunk detects an active metering pulse signal, with the defined frequency, only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_METER defined below and longer than MIN_METER defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_METER [14] 200..250..1000(in 10 ms increments) Maximum Meter Pulse. The ALS70 trunk detects an active metering pulse signal, with the defined frequency, only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_METER defined here and longer than MIN_METER defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [15] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALS70 Card Database TRUNK 3,1 [0,2,1,0,3,1]

8-130

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

ALS70 Port Database

W TRUNK,3,2
Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

[0,2,1,0,3,2]

The ALS70 Trunk Port Database allows programming the trunk port database tables for Loop Start, DID and NonDID trunk ports connected to 4ALS or 8ALS cards. There are 4 Trunk Port Databases (0-3) for each trunk type, one of which is assigned to each trunk port (see Port List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

Access
0 1 2

Option LS DID NonDID

Full Name
Loop Start Direct Inward Dial Non Direct Inward Dial

Mnemonic
TRUNK,3,2,O TRUNK,3,2,1 TRUNK,3,2,2

Each option is discussed below.

FROM/TO PORT_DB# 0..3 0..3 Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest port database table number TO the highest port database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-131

ALS70 Port Database TRUNK,3,2 [0,2,1,0,3,2]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

ALS70 Loop Start Port Database

W TRUNK,3,2,0
Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

[0,2,1,0,3,2,0]

SUSP_SZE [0] 40..50..70 (in 10 ms increments) Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a seize from an outside party. This is done in order to prevent glare.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 100..350..1200 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

CO_DISC [2] 500..960..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHECK_RING [5] Yes/No Check Incoming Seize Ring. An incoming trunk seize may be accompanied with a ring current. This option allows the system to check the ring cadence. (See ALS70 LS_RING_PAUS [4] on page 8-129).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALS70 Loop Start Port Database TRUNK,3,2,0

SEND_TO_CARD? [6] Yes/No Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the port database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-132

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

ALS70 DID Port Database


SUSP_SZE [0] 10..30 (in 10 ms increments)

W TRUNK,3,2,1
Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

[0,2,1,0,3,2,1]

Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal (polarity reversal) must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a seize from an outside party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 40..50..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

CO_DISC [2] 50..60..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Minimum End-Of-Selection determines the minimum period that the voltage polarity across the TT-TR must be reversed by the Central Office (CO), after dial outpulsing, for the trunk card to recognize EOS. This option is used for both Pulse and DTMF dialing. The EOS is sent by the CO to the Coral after the last dialed digit is accepted by the CO. The Coral responds by a line terminator of 0 - 560. This signal is also called Number Received signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SZE_ACK [4] Yes (Delay)/No (Immediate) Seize Acknowledge determines when the signaling/handshaking protocol of the incoming DID trunk is Delay Start or Immediate Start.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [6] Yes/No Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the port database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-133

ALS70 DID Port Database TRUNK,3,2,1 [0,2,1,0,3,2,1]

MIN_EOS [3] 20..100 (in 10 ms increments)

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

ALS70 NonDID Port Database

W TRUNK,3,2,2
Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

[0,2,1,0,3,2,2]

SUSP_SZE [0] 40..50..70 (in 10 ms increments) Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal (polar reversal) must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an outside party thus preventing glare.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 100..350..1200 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

CO_DISC [2] 50..90..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_EOS [3] 20..100 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum End-Of-Selection determines the minimum period that the voltage polarity across the TT-TR must be reversed by the Central Office (CO), after dial out-pulsing, for the trunk card to recognize EOS. This option is used for both Pulse and DTMF dialing. The EOS is sent by the CO to the Coral after the last dialed digit is accepted by the CO. The Coral responds by a line terminator of 0 - 560. This signal is also called Number Received signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALS70 NonDID Port Database TRUNK,3,2,2

CHECK_RING [5] Yes/No Check Incoming Seize Ring determines whether an incoming trunk seize may be accompanied with a ring current. This option allows the system to check the ring cadence. (see ALS70 NONDID_RING_PAUS [6] on page 8-129).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [6] Yes/No Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the port database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-134

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

ALS70 Trunk Timers


Only one timer is available for this option. DELAY_TO_BLOCK 1..100..600 1 unit=0.1 second

W TRUNK

3,3 [0,2,1,0,3,3]

Utilized only in Eu0 systems (Netherlands)

Delay Before Trunk Block defines the maximum system waiting time for a disconnect acknowledgment signal from the Central Office, before the system blocks the trunk line. When the trunk is blocked the call is either transferred to an incomplete call destination or calls toward the CO are blocked. This timer is applied when the Coral releases first and the CO release is pending.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-135

ALS70 Trunk Timers TRUNK 3,3 [0,2,1,0,3,3]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

BID Trunks

W TRUNK,4
Utilized only in Eu1 Systems (Belgium)

[0,2,1,0,4]

The BID (Belgium Inward Dialing) card is the incoming call interface between the Belgium Regie of Telegraphy and Telephony (RTT) and the Coral system. The BID card has a capacity of four (4BID) or eight (8BID) ports. The BID card provides the subscriber with the ability to receive calls directly at the station, without first being routed through an attendant. The BID card acts as a Direct Inward Dialing device. The sole function of this card is to identify an incoming seizure, as well as connect and disconnect signals of the DID channel by reversing polarity (line-signaling). Dial number detection (register signaling) is carried out by the MFC protocol, using the 16MFR card.

The BID card cannot operate without an MFR card installed in the system.

The following BID options are available and are described in the following pages:

Option
PORT_DB TIMERS

Full Name
Port Database Trunk Timers

Access
0 1

Mnemonic
TRUNK 4,0 TRUNK 4,1

BID Trunks TRUNK,4 [0,2,1,0,4]


8-136

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

BID Trunk Port Database

W TRUNK

4,0 [0,2,1,0,4,0]

Utilized only in Eu1 Systems (Belgium)


The BID Trunk Port Database allows programming the trunk port database tables for DID trunk ports connected to 4BID or 8BID cards. There are 4 Trunk Port Databases (0-3), one of which is assigned to each trunk port (see Port List Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM/TO PORT_DB# 0..3 0..3 Enter the required range of BID Port database tables; FROM the lowest port database table number TO the highest port database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [0] 20..200

(in 10 ms increments)

Suspect Seize determines the minimum period that an incoming call signal (polarity reversal) must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from the CO. During the idle state, the voltage across the tip and ring is -48V and the DC current is between 5mA and 90mA. During an incoming call the line polarity is reversed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 50..80..1500

(in 10 ms increments)

As a response to a seizure, the Coral changes the loop impedance from 500 to 15k.

r
l l l l

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_DISC [2] 50..100..2550 (in 10 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a disconnect signal (polarity reversal) before the Coral recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk. Upon CO disconnect the Coral changes the DC resistance to greater than 1m.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-137

BID Trunk Port Database TRUNK 4,0 [0,2,1,0,4,0]

Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal (polarity reversal) must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45).

Trunk Controls CO_BLOCK [3] 50..300..1000 (in 10 ms increments)

PI Reference Manual

Central Office Block determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the CO (polarity reversal). It defines the minimum time until the system interprets the signal as a block signal. In a CO block state, the trunk is considered busy, resulting in only information, since the trunk is only available for incoming calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? [4] Yes/No Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the port database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BID Trunk Port Database TRUNK 4,0 [0,2,1,0,4,0]


8-138

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

BID Trunk Timers


Only one timer is included in this option.

W TRUNK

4,1 [0,2,1,0,4,1]

Utilized only in Eu1 Systems (Belgium)

DELAY_TO_BLOCK 1..600..65534 1unit = 0.1 second Defines the maximum system waiting time for a disconnect acknowledgment signal from the Central Office before blocking the trunk line. This timer applies when the Coral releases first and the Central Office release is pending. The call is disconnected by causing a resistance change from 500 to 15k. Therefore, CO acknowledgment is accomplished through polarity reversal. Once the polarity reversal is recognized, the Coral changes the DC resistance to more than 1m.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-139

BID Trunk Timers TRUNK 4,1 [0,2,1,0,4,1]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

GID Trunks

W TRUNK,5
Utilized only in Eu2 Systems (Germany)

[0,2,1,0,5]

The GID (German Inward Dialing) card is the interface between the German Post, Telegraph and Telephone (PTT) and the Coral system. The GID card is a duplex outgoing/incoming analog device with capacity for four (4GID) or eight (8GID) ports. GID allows the subscriber to receive calls directly at the extension within the system, as well as to dial out. The GID cards can function with any one of the following types of Central Offices: EWSO 1, S55V and DIV0 (called Local EXchange - LEX).

GID is compatible only with pulse dialing. Do not program with DTMF.

The following GID options are available and are described below:

Option
CARD_DB PORT_DB TIMERS

Full Name
Card Database Port Database Trunk Timers

Access
0 1 2

Mnemonic
TRUNK 5,0 TRUNK 5,1 TRUNK 5,2

GID Trunks TRUNK,5 [0,2,1,0,5]


8-140

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

GID Card Database

W TRUNK

5,0 [0,2,1,0,5,0]

Utilized only in Eu2 Systems (Germany)


GID Card Database establishes the card database for 4GID and 8GID trunk cards. The system allows for a maximum of four GID card database combinations (0-3), one of which is assigned to each card (see Card List - Chapter 6). The Coral makes no logical distinction between 4GID and 8GID cards. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM/TO CARD_DB# 0..3 0..3 Enter the required range of GID card database tables; FROM the lowest table number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INCOMING: The following options apply only during incoming calls on GID trunks.
MIN_BREAK [0] 20..35..100 ms Minimum Break determines the minimum period that a loop signal must be interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Break time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a Break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_BREAK [1] 30..85..150 ms Maximum Break determines the maximum period that a loop signal can remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Break time greater than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a Break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_MAKE [2] 20..25..100 ms Minimum Make determines the minimum make (current restoral) period that loop signal must exist during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Make time less than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a make.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_MAKE [3] 25..60..100 ms Maximum Make determines the maximum Make (current restoral) period for a loop signal to exist during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing. A Make time greater than the defined period is not recognized by the system as a make.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-141

GID Card Database TRUNK 5,0 [0,2,1,0,5,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

Clear Down: The following two parameters define the Clear Down pulse duration allowed by the
Coral. Clear Down is a disconnect pulse sent from the LEX to the Coral. Clear Down is a 90Vrms/50Hz pulse and can be initiated by the LEX at any stage. When a Clear Down signal is sensed, the Coral switches to idle. MIN_CLEAR_DOWN 40..80..1000 in 20 ms increments [4] Determines the minimum period for the GID card to detect an active signal in order to identify the Clear Down from the LEX.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_CLEAR_DOWN 40..200..1000 in 20 ms increments [5] Determines the maximum period for the GID card to detect an active signal in order to identify the Clear Down signal from the LEX.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

The following two parameters define the Flash Clear pulse sent by the Coral.

Flash Clear: Is a Clear Backward signal sent from the Coral. This Clear Backward pulse initiates
a disconnect while Coral is in the connect state. To send this pulse, the GID card sends a series of on/off pulses on the TR lead, which are created by connecting a small resistance to the line for a brief period (on), and stopping the pulse for an additional period (off). The combination of brief on/off pulses causes the Flash Clear signal. The duration of these pulses is defined through Coral parameters FLASH_CLEAR_OFF and FLASH_CLEAR_ON, described below. FLASH_CLEAR_ON 100..150..210 (in 10 ms increments) [6] Determines the duration of the FLASH_CLEAR_ON signal, that is, the time that a small resistance is connected to the TR lead.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GID Card Database TRUNK 5,0 [0,2,1,0,5,0]

FLASH_CLEAR_OFF 200..450..600 (in 10 ms increments) [7] Determines the OFF period between the FLASH_CLEAR_ON pulses. The OFF pulse is created by removing the resistance from the TR lead set up in FLASH_ CLEAR_ON.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-142

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

OUTGOING: The following options apply only during outgoing calls on GID trunks. The pulse
signaling method is defined in TYPE [4] (page 8-11). BREAK_TIME [8] 54..60..66 (in 3 ms increments) Outgoing Break determines the period that loop current is interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAKE_TIME [9] 36..39..45 (in 3 ms increments) Outgoing Make determines the period that loop current is restored during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INTER_DIGIT_TIME 640..700..2500 (in 10 ms increments) [10] Outgoing Interdigit Time determines the period that loop current will be restored between digits being rotary (pulse) dialed during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CLEAR_FWD_TIMER 300..1400..2500 (in 10 ms increments) [11] Clear Forward Timer defines the duration of the disconnect signal sent by the Coral. On outgoing calls the Coral can initiate the disconnect by opening the current loop for the period defined in this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

METER: The following parameters identify METER (the frequency sent by the LEX (CO)
to define a meter pulse). The first metering pulse sent from the LEX is guaranteed only after the Coral has made the transition to connect state. F0_ACCURACY [12] 0..2..5 1 unit = 1% Identifies the accuracy of the meter pulse 16 kHz frequency sent by the LEX.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_METER [13] 48..80..352 (in 8 ms increments) Minimum Meter Pulse Recognition. The GID trunk detects an active metering pulse signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_METER defined below and longer than MIN_METER defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_METER [14] 88..368..1000 (in 8 ms increments) Maximum Meter Pulse Recognition. The GID trunk detects an active metering pulse signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_METER defined here and longer than MIN_METER defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_OFF [15] 100..400..2500 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Time Between Meter Pulses defines the minimum period allowed between consecutive metering pulses thus identifying the next pulse.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-143

GID Card Database TRUNK 5,0 [0,2,1,0,5,0]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

TRUNK CODE: Used for long distance LEX (CO) incoming DID calls. Applicable only for EWS01
and DIVO Central Offices. Used in Western Germany. TIME_TO_EOD [16] 200..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Time to End of Dial defines the minimum delay time between recognizing the last correct system dial number (digit) sent by the LEX until the End-Of-Dial (EOD) signal is sent from the Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

END_OF_DIAL [17] 100..150..200 (in 10 ms increments) Determines the duration of the End Of Dial signal, sent from the Coral, after a dial number is accepted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TIME_TO_BUSY [18] 200..700..900 (in 10 ms increments) Determines the delay time between the end of the EOD signal and the start of the busy signal sent from the Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BUSY_SIGNAL [19] 600..750..900 (in 10 ms increments) Determines the duration of the busy signal sent from the Coral. The busy signal is sent with a delay after the EOD signal when the called station is busy. Busy tone is sounded after transmitting the signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

START_SIGNAL [20] 100..150..200 (in 10 ms increments) Determines the duration of the start signal sent from the Coral. The start signal is sent after the called station answers the call (off-hooks). After the end of the start signal the Coral goes to a connect state and reverses the voltage polarity across the TT and TR. This signal is not sent without a trunk code.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GID Card Database TRUNK 5,0 [0,2,1,0,5,0]

MIN_TC [21] 10..66..84 Minimum Trunk Code determines the minimum period in which the GID card must detect an active TC signal in order to identify the Trunk Code signal. The TC signal is sent by the LEX at the beginning of each digit to inform the Coral if the call management is performed according to the incoming Traffic with Trunk Code protocol.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [22] Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-144

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

GID Port Database

W TRUNK

5,1 [0,2,1,0,5,1]

Utilized only in Eu2 Systems (Germany)


The GID Trunk Port Database programs the trunk port database tables for DID trunk ports connected to 4GID or 8GID cards. There are 4 Trunk Port Databases (0-3), one of which is assigned to each trunk port (see Port List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM 0..3 TO 0..3 PORT_DB# Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest port database table number TO the highest port database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SUSP_SZE [0] 10..20..50 (in 10 ms increments) Suspect Seize determines the minimum period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a seize from the LEX, thus preventing glare.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_SZE [1] 20..30..70 (in 10 ms increments) Minimum Seize determines the additional period that an incoming call signal must remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an incoming call. Incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-45). The Coral responds by reversing the polarity.

CO_DISC [2] 50..300..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Central Office Disconnect determines the minimum period for a trunk disconnect signal before the system recognizes the signal as a valid call disconnect, thereby releasing the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CO_BLOCK [3] 50..300..1000 (in 10 ms increments) Central Office Block determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the LEX, thus defining the minimum period before the system interprets the signal as a block signal. In a CO block state, the trunk is considered busy, thereby preventing further trunk use. Central Office Blocking is performed by opening the current loop.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-145

GID Port Database TRUNK 5,1 [0,2,1,0,5,1]

MIN_SZE time must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).

Trunk Controls SEND_TO_CARD? [4] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the port database to the cards, including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

GID Port Database TRUNK 5,1 [0,2,1,0,5,1]


8-146

PI Reference Manual

Trunk Controls

GID Timers
One timer is included in this option. GID_TEST_DURATION 1..30..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second)

W TRUNK

5,2 [0,2,1,0,5,2]

Utilized only in Eu2 Systems (Germany)

Determines the maximum interval that an incoming call from the LEX to the DID Test Number remains in a connected state before the Coral disconnects the call. The DID Test Number is a feature code defined in the system numbering plan (see Table 5-3, DID Test Number, index number 186). This number is used by the LEX as a test port and is not a physical port. The LEX initiates an incoming test call to this logical port as required for diagnostic purposes. The GID card responds to this call as if it were a regular call with Auto Answer and Auto Disconnect, after the GID_TEST_DURATION.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

8-147

GID Timers TRUNK 5,2 [0,2,1,0,5,2]

Trunk Controls

PI Reference Manual

GID Timers TRUNK 5,2 [0,2,1,0,5,2]


8-148

Station Controls
The Station Controls contain the programming instructions for all the different station types. Station Timers...............................................................................................9-2 SLT Definition ..............................................................................................9-5 SLT Card Database.....................................................................................9-16 Keyset/FlexSet Timers................................................................................9-23 Keyset/FlexSet Ring Cadence ....................................................................9-24 Wireless Stations.........................................................................................9-26 Keyset/FlexSet Definition ..........................................................................9-28 Keyset/FlexSet Button Programming.........................................................9-55 Fixed System Keys - Programming ...........................................................9-83 Keyset/FlexSet Preference Programming ..................................................9-84 APA, PEX+APA and APDL RS-232 Setup...............................................9-85 Magneto 8SM Card Database ....................................................................9-87

9-1

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

Station Timers

W ST.T
Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

[0,0,1,1]

Station Timers define the various timers for all station features system wide.

RING [0] 1..450..10000 (1 unit = 0.1 second) CC1: 600 Defines the ringback tone duration to an internal station before the system disconnects or forwards the call to a call forward no answer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MULT_APR_RING [1] 1..900..9000 (1 unit = 0.1 second)

This timer is also utilized for Boss Groups, see Note 1 on page 10-20.

Multi-Appearance Ringback defines the ringback tone duration to an internal multi-appearance station before the system disconnects.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BUSY [2] 1..1200..3000 (1 unit = 0.1 second) When a user dials to a busy station or trunk this timer determines the duration of the internal busy tone before the system reverts to reorder tone (disconnect) or forwards the call to an incomplete destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

REORDER [3] 1..50..3000 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the duration of the reorder (error) tone before lockout (disconnect) on a Single Line Telephone (SLT) and on a keyset before the keyset enters an idle state (see TONE_TO_IDLE [2] on page 9-23).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station Timers ST.T [0,0,1,1]


9-2

CONFIRM [4] 1..9..10 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the duration of the tone confirming feature activation or cancellation. To define the time duration before the keyset can enter an idle state define TONE_TO_ IDLE [2] (page 9-23) as larger than this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DVMS [5] Not applicable.


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HOLD [6] 100..6000..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second); CC1, Eu: 1200 Eu9: 450 Defines the duration of the hold interval after which the call returns to the originating station. An automatic ring indicates that the call has returned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual HARD_HOLD [7] 100..1200..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second); Eu9: 450

Station Controls

Defines the hard hold duration after which the call returns to the originating station. An automatic ring indicates that the call has returned. When HARD_HOLD is utilized the station is considered busy towards new incoming calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PARK [8] 100..1200..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the time period that a party remains parked (special hold, retrievable from any station) after which the call returns to the originating station. An automatic ring indicates that the call has returned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PAGE_Q [9] 100..600..65535 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the duration that a call placed in the page queue remains in the queue before recalling the originator.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

1st_DIGIT [10] 10..100..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the maximum system waiting time for the first digit dialed after offhook. A disconnect follows time-out. This is also the time-out period used when defining HOT_ST_DELAY, i.e. the time the system waits after the station user lifted the handset and received dial tone, but did not yet dial. After this time period the user is automatically transferred to a predetermined Hot Station Delay destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INTERDGT [11] 10..100..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) The interdigit timer defines the maximum system waiting time between any two digits for an internal call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FEAT_DIAL [12] 1..600..1200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Feature Dial defines the maximum idle time allowed while invoking a feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HKFLS FILTER [13] 3..10 Eu: 5

(1 unit = 0.1 second);

Hookflash Filter determines the hookflash filter period following the completion of a valid offhook (for answer). During this period the system ignores all SLT electrical circuit changes or load changes. The Hookflash filter provides a flexible anti-bounce parameter. The anti-bounce filter provides a way of avoiding false signaling problems when an SLT answers a call. Because of the nature of this parameter, all intentional dialing and hookflashing during this period are ignored.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-3

Station Timers ST.T [0,0,1,1]

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

MAGNETO_AUTO_ 10..30..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) ANS [14] Magneto Auto Answer defines the ringback duration to a magneto station before the magneto station automatically answers (automatically connected).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CF_NO_ANS INT/EXT 10..100..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [15] CC1: 180

This parameter is only relevant when the station has defined a Call Forward No Answer destination (default dial #142) or Call Forward No Answer External destination (default dial #17703).

Defines the ringing duration to a called station before the stations calls are forwarded to its Call Forward No Answer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FLEXICALL_CF_NO_ 10..150..200 (1 unit = 0.1 second) ANS [16] This parameter defines the ringing duration to a FlexiCall station and its remote phone, before the stationss calls are forwarded to its Call Forward No Answer destination. Define this parameter as 50% higher than CF_NO_ANS INT/EXT [15] above, to compensate for the delay to the remote phone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station Timers ST.T [0,0,1,1]


9-4

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls

SLT Definition
SLT definition is used to program each:

W SLT

[or IST or 0,2,1,1]

Single Line Telephone (SLT), commonly referred to as 500 or 2500 sets connected to 8/16/24SLS, 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, 4/8/16SH/S-LL, 8/16SLSipx, 8/16SLSsl, and 8F8Ssl cards Magneto telephone set connected to 8SM card

Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system SLT station number, All Enter the required range of SLT dial numbers FROM the lowest number TO the highest number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRM_COS [0] 0..249 (or maximum defined in SIZES, see COS on page 4-11) Sets the stations primary Class of Service (COS). A COS may be assigned to a single station, several stations or all stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEC_COS [1] 0..249 (or maximum defined in SIZES, see COS on page 4-11) Sets the stations secondary COS. This is typically the COS applied to the station when the system is in Night 1 or Night 2 mode. COS ranges are the same as for PRM_COS.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIV_LIBS [2] 0..10..255 (or maximum defined in SIZES, see PRIVATE on page 4-8) This parameter determines the maximum number of speed call (Private Library) numbers available to the station.

TERMIN [3] Yes/No Determines whether a station may only terminate (receive) calls (and not originate them). (Attendant Modifiable: default feature code #152)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ORIGIN [4] Yes/No Determines whether a station may only originate calls (and not receive any calls). (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #151)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BLOCK [5] Yes/No Blocks the station from originating or receiving all (internal and external) calls. (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #153)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-5

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

Station Controls O/G_TK_REST [6] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Set this parameter to Yes to prohibit the station from originating outgoing trunk calls. (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #154)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIVACY [7] Yes/No Boss groups only Prevents a third party from entering a conversation on a Boss line. (User modifiable: default feature code #186/#6)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

EXCL_HOLD [8] Yes/No Boss groups only Boss group member can place a call on hold that can be retrieved from hold only by the station that originated the hold condition. (User modifiable: default feature code #187)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HARD_HOLD [9] Yes/No Defines whether or not a station with an established call on hold is considered busy for additional incoming calls. The station can still originate (initiate) calls. No: Idle for incoming calls and for making additional calls. Yes: Busy for incoming calls and idle for making additional calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LAST_NUM [10] Yes/No Last Number Redial determines whether a station user is able to automatically redial the last number dialed (by pressing a single programmed station button (with default dial number#143) or by dialing *). To enable redialing of internal station numbers, INTERNAL_LAST_NUM_REDIAL [5] (page 6-17) must be set to Yes. This parameter also defines whether or not the station user can save the last external number dialed for future dialing (feature code #196/#9), when defined by COS (see SAVED [55] on page 7-16).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]


9-6

SECURITY [11] Yes/No Prevents break-in and other tones being sent to the station. This parameter is normally used when data (through a modem, facsimile and other similar devices) is being transferred. (User modifiable: default feature code #17700)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DND_WP [12] Yes/No Defines whether this station is blocked from receiving a whisper page (paging only one party) during an ongoing conversation.

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls Enter Yes to inhibit or No to enable Whisper paging to this station. (User Modifiable: default feature code #1745).

r
l l l l

To enable this feature, define DND_WP [24] on page 7-9, in COS, to Yes.

RECEIVE_SPKR_ Yes/No STATUS [13] When set to Yes, this parameter enables the SLT user to receive a tone indicating that the second party (called or calling party) is in Speaker Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

IP_FAX_ENABLED Yes/No [14] r Set to Yes only for IP stations. Defines whether the MG module should try and detect Fax tones from this IP station. Set this parameter to Yes if this IP SLT is able to send or receive fax calls. General The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt voice calls. The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l v91536*/

IP_MODEM_ENABLED Yes/No [15] r Set to Yes only for IP stations. Defines whether the MG module should try and detect modem tones from this station. Set this parameter to Yes if this SLT is able to send or receive modem calls. General The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt voice calls. The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-7

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

Station Controls ATT [16] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Identifies the station as having Attendant station privileges and Class Of Service, see Attendant Class of Service beginning on page 7-28.

Note! It is preferable to define a Keyset/FlexSet Station as an Attendant. Defining an SLT as an Attendant severely limits the Attendants capabilities.

AUTO_UNATT_TRANS Yes/No [17] r Applies only to Attendant Stations (ATT [16] above, must be set to Yes). Allows unanswered calls to an attendant station to be automatically transferred to another destination, after a system wide defined time-out period. When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS is set to Yes, the attendant console will enter the unattended mode automatically, but only after the system defined time-out period AND: The attendants calls are then transferred to an Alternate Attendant Destination (attendant feature code: #146). If no alternate attendant destination is defined, then all calls to this attendant station receive the UNATTENDED message. The attendants calls automatically return to the attendant station the next time the attendant offhooks.

When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS is set to No, the attendant console continues ringing unless it is manually answered.

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

AUTO_RELEASED_ Yes/No ALL [18] ACD&UCD only Defines whether or not the system will automatically release (i.e. invoke ACD&UCD Release/Resume, feature code #1975) an agent that does not answer a call within a predetermined time interval (defined by TIME_TO_NEXT_ MEM (page 10-12) in the HUNT branch). Once the agent is released, no calls are transferred to the agent, thereby improving the ACD/UCD group response time. The released agent is automatically resumed by the system the next time the agent offhooks at the station. Set this parameter to Yes to allow the system to automatically release agents when they are not active.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-8

PI Reference Manual PASSCODE [19] Any 4 digits (0-9, , #), or None

Station Controls

Identifies the stations four-digit passcode needed to operate certain Coral features such as Phone Lock, Executive Privilege, IRSS and COS Switchover. (User modifiable: default feature code #179)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHECK_OUT [20] Yes/No SAU Requirement Determines whether or not the station is in Check-Out status. When set to Yes, the station Class Of Service is changed to a system defined Class Of Service (see OUT_COS. [2] on page 6-37. (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #1970)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TYPE [21] 0 (Rotary, pulse dial only), 1 (Rotary and DTMF) Identifies the station as having rotary (pulse dial) or DTMF dialing. To use a DTMF telephone, a 4/8DTR, 8DRCF or 8DRCM card must be installed in the system, see the Installation Manual. Selecting 1 permits DTMF and pulse dialing on the same line, called MIXED SLT. When an answering machine or other common carriers or any DTMF controlled auxiliary equipment is connected, the type should be set to 1.

r
l l l l

For SLT connected to the Coral Teleport/FXS for VoIP calls, set this parameter to 0 (Rotary), for both DTMF and Pulse dial devices.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ANNOUNCER [22] Yes/No Determines whether a SLT station is used only as an announcer destination for ACD/UCD recorded announcements or wakeup announcer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MULTI_APPEARANCE Yes/No [23] Multi-Appearance defines whether a station can receive several internal calls on a single line, even though the station is active (busy). When set to Yes, the busy called station receives a call-waiting tone and the calling station party hears a ringback tone (see ORIGINATOR_CALL_WAITING_TO [2] on page 6-42 to define which ringback tone is heard). When set to No, the busy called party does not receive any indication and the calling party hears a busy tone.

Notes: For LS/GS trunks Incoming calls always appear as multi-appearance regardless of this parameter definition. Although this parameter is not applicable for magneto telephones, it is still used for displaying magneto information.

9-9

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

ANSWER CALL Yes/No WAITING WITH HF When set to Yes, this parameter enables the user to put the original conversing [24] party on hold and to answer a waiting call by pressing hookflash. If more than one call is waiting, the call with the highest priority is answered first. Any following hookflash changes the call state to Broker/Consultation/3-Way or a combination of them or Continuous Conference, depending on the station COS definition for 1=BROKER, 2=CONSULT, 4=3-WAY, 5=ALL, 6=Continuous Conf [11] (page 7-6). This feature is also enabled by activating the following related keys:
l l l

Digit 1 operating as hookflash (relevant when DIGIT_ONE_AS_H.F. [4] (page 6-17) is defined as Yes) Flash (R button) on some phones FLASH by SLT cradle
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RECEIVE CID [25] Yes/No SAU Requirement Determines whether an SLT set may receive Caller ID information. Set this parameter to YES if this SLT is equipped with a display or an external Caller ID display box. The CLI display feature for SLT requires a 8/16/24SLS (software version 3.xx or higher) peripheral card, iDSP card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. In the CSX 200 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires a U-RMIcsx or U-MRcsx card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port. In the IPx 500 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires an MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above, Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

SEND_CALLER_ID Yes/No [26] r External and Network calls only. This parameter defines whether the calling stations telephone number is displayed on the called stations keyset screen. Enter Yes to send the caller ID information for this station. The user can override this setting (i.e. choose not to send his/her telephone number-caller ID) on a per-call basis (default feature code #1444).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ALTERNATE_LINE_ID 0..3200 (or maximum as defined in SIZ, see Chapter 4) or [27] R (Remove- for no Alternate), None Defines the index number for the alternate ID number for a callers line to be displayed at the terminating end. The ID number is defined in the ISDN/ALI Table

9-10

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls (see Alternate Line ID beginning on page 26-9). This parameter, however, defines the index number within the Table. Use this parameter if the Caller Identification number other than the ISDN Caller ID is sent to the terminating end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEC_ALTERNATE_ 0..3200 (or maximum as defined in SIZ, see Chapter 4) or LINE_ID [28] R (Remove- for no Alternate); None Notes: This number is used for information for E911 emergency centers. This number is only used when USE SECOND ALI [19] (page 15-15) in Dial Services is set to Yes (when set to No, this Second Alternate Line ID is ignored.) This parameter defines a second alternate Line ID number for a callers line to be displayed at the terminating end. It should be used to provide a phone number that is recognized by the emergency center in order to physically locate the calling station user.

AFTER applying the Auto Set Relocate feature (see page 5-21), enter the Second ALI number originally assigned to the users new location before the profiles were swapped.

The ID number is defined in the ISDN/ALI Table (see Alternate Line ID beginning on page 26-9). This parameter, however, defines the index number within the Table When this parameter is not defined for the station, the system definition for the DEFAULT_SECOND_ALI [17] (page 6-12) is used instead.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

This parameter applies to stations only when the station card configuration strap (Jumper S/SH) is set to the SH position.

Over Public Exchange (OPX) Station defines whether to light the message lamp indicator on SLT stations. For SLTs that are directly connected to and operated from the Coral, set this option to No and the station lamp will light for waiting messages. For SLTs connected to the Coral by means of another PABX or through the CO, this option should be set to Yes (disable message lamp) to prevent high voltage pulses from being sent over long distances. Tip: Set this parameter to Yes, to prevent unnecessary damage to electrical circuits, voice mail systems, facsimile machines and modems that may be overly sensitive to the message lamp voltage signal sent. A distinctive tone indicating a waiting message is still sent over the line and heard.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-11

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

OPX_STATION [29] Yes/No

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

HOOK_FLASH_ Yes/No RELEVANT [30] Determines whether the Hookflash operation (i.e. dialing 1 or pressing flash) by the SLT can be accepted by the system. Entering No disables the hookflash operation (i.e. pressing the onhook or 1 button).

Recommendation: In noisy environments or over very long lines, set this parameter to N.

CALL_TRACE [31] Yes/No Defines whether or not the Malicious Call Trace option is active causing the system to record incoming calls to this SLT. The number of calls to be recorded is defined in the #_OF_CALLS_TRACED [32] parameter below. (User Modifiable: default feature code #1740) (Attendant Modifiable: default feature code #1742)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

#_OF_CALLS_ 0..3..60 (Max: 10,000 telephone #'s per system) TRACED [32] Defines the maximum number of incoming traced calls to be recorded. The calls are recorded on a last in, first out method.

r
l l l l

When CALL_TRACE [31] above is set to N, this parameter cannot be changed and remains as previously set.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Permanent/Temporary P/T _AUTO SET r Notes: RELOCATE [33] When TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [6] on page 6-17 is defined to NO in the System Features-Station Options (SFE,2) branch, then this parameter is automatically defined as Permanent and cannot be changed to Temporary. When TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [6] on page 6-17 is defined to YES, then this parameter can be defined as Permanent or Temporary. Define this parameter (also known as Auto Set Relocate) as Permanent so that the station relocation holds until reverse relocation is performed. Define this parameter as Temporary to automatically reverse the relocation at midnight (only when TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [6] on page 6-17 is set to Yes). This parameter should be set identically for both source and destination stations.

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

r r
9-12

Relocation can be performed only on similar station sets (SLT to SLT, Keyset to Keyset or FlexSet to Keyset). Not applicable for Coral Teleport FXS IP-SLT.

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls (User Modifiable: No default feature dial number is automatically assigned for this feature. The system manager must define a default feature dial number corresponding to the feature index number (220).)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VIP [34] Yes/No Defines the station as a VIP station, thereby causing any other internal station to ring differently (same as Voice Page ring). The called station hears the different ring and realizes this is a high priority call.

r
l l l l

Only digital stations can receive a VIP ring.

VOICE_MAIL [35] Yes/No Defines whether this SLT line acts as an interface for a Voice Mail system (Y) or not (N) or whether CoralMail-2 is connected to this line (Y). When this station is defined as a member of an IVR ACD group (see IVR_ACD on page 10-3), the IVR operates as follows: If VOICE_MAIL is set to Yes, the IVR is simultaneously enabled with the ACD waiting queue. The call will not lose its place in the queue while interacting with the IVR. If VOICE_MAIL is set to No, when the station user answers, the call is disconnected from the ACD waiting queue and the IVR application takes over.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MUSIC_ON_ 0..3 HOLD/TRANSFER [37] FlexiCom 200: 0(M1), 1(M2); IPx 500: 0(M1), 1(M2) Defines which music source is sounded on the held (called partys) line when the SLT station places a call on hold or transfers the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

COLLECT_CALL_ Yes/No REJECT_TONE [38] On an incoming call, this parameter defines whether to send a special tone to the Central Office (PTT) attendant indicating that the CORAL called party may not accept a collect call. Set this parameter to Yes to send a collect call reject tone (defined in Tone Plan, see page 6-80) to the Central Office (PTT) attendant. The

9-13

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]

SLT_VM_CAMP_ON Yes/No [36] Enables the SLT line serving as a Voice Mail interface to camp onto a busy station when defined as Y. The line might need to camp on to a busy station as an Automated Attendant service requirement.

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual attendant, upon hearing this tone, should deny the request for a collect call connection and disconnect the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BLOCK_REORDER_ Yes/No TONE(VM) [39] Set this parameter to Yes to disable the reorder tone sent to this SLT when it did not yet onhook after a 2-way call disconnect.

r
l l l l

Tip: Set this parameter to Yes for ports defined as Voice Mail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT Definition SLT [or IST or 0,2,1,1]


9-14

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls

iDSP Card Database

W CDB,9

The iDSP card supports Caller ID for SLT station users in accordance with Bellcore and ETSI standards. DSP technology is employed to enable the FSK tone generators located on the card. This allows simultaneous Caller ID transmission to a maximum of 64 SLT stations. The card is identified by the system as a shared service card and can be inserted in any available Shared Service or Peripheral interface card slot.

CLID TYPE 0 (Bellcore) 1 (ETSI) Defines the type of standard supported by the SLT for the Caller ID feature. Choose 0 if the system supports Bellcore protocol. Choose 1 if the system supports ETSI protocol.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No Transfers the updated card database immediately to the cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is accessible only through the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-15

iDSP Card Database CDB,9

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

SLT Card Database

W STDB

The SLT card database is used to establish the card database for the following station cards: 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, 8/16/24SLS, 8/16SLSipx, 8/16SLSsl, 8F8Ssl, 4/8/16SH/S(-LL). There are four Station card databases (Card_DB#: 0-3), one of which is assigned to each station card (see Card List - Chapter 6). These cards provide station circuits for Single Line Telephone (SLT) sets, commonly referred to as 500 or 2500 sets or for other non-proprietary telephones that interface the Coral system. Card database programming is identical for each card. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]). FROM 0..3 TO 0..3 CARD_DB# Enter the required range of card database tables FROM the lowest card number TO the highest card number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INT_RING (S): The following two entries (Fields 0 and 1) control the ring cadence for internal
(station-to-station) calls. These parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to the S position: 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, jumper JU1

In the Coral FlexiCom 200, these parameters apply to the 8D8Ssl, 8/16SLSsl and 8F8Ssl cards only when the configuration jumper (JP3) - located on the MSBsl is set to the S position.
Figure 9-1. Internal Ring Cadences

SLT Card Database STDB

ON (RINGING) (SILENCE) OFF

ON (RINGING) (SILENCE) OFF

(in 50 ms increments) ON [0] 50..500..12750 ms Eu1 (Belgium): 900 CC1 (Israel), Eu9 (Italy): 1000
Sets the on ringing duration. See Figure 9-1.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-16

PI Reference Manual OFF [1] 50..2000..12750 ms Eu1: 2700

Station Controls

(in 50 ms increments)

Sets the silent period between ring cycles. See Figure 9-1.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

EXT_RING (S):

The following six parameters (Fields 2 - 7) set the ring cadences for incoming trunk calls. These parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to the S position: 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, jumper JU1

In the Coral FlexiCom 200, these parameters apply to the 8/16SLSsl and 8F8Ssl cards only when the configuration jumper (JP3) - located on the MSBsl card - is set to the S position.
Figure 9-2. External Ring Cadences

ON 1

ON 2

ON 3

Ringing Ringing Ringing Silent Silent Silent Period #1 Period #1 Period #2 Period #2 Period #3 Period #3 OFF 1 OFF 2 OFF 3

ON_1 [2] 50..500..12750 ms CC1: 1500 ms Eu1: 250 ms Eu6, CC8: 400 Eu9: 1000 ms

(in 50 ms increments)

OFF1 [3] 50..500..12750 ms CC1: 3000 Eu1: 350 Eu6, CC8: 200 Eu9: 4000

(in 50 ms increments)

Sets silent period between ON_1 and ON_2. See Figure 9-2.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-17

SLT Card Database STDB

Sets the ringing duration of the first ring in a three-ring cycle. See Figure 9-2.

Station Controls ON_2 [4] 0..500..12750 ms CC1, Eu9: 0 ms Eu1: 250 ms CC8: 400 Same as ON_1 but for the second (of three) ringing periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

OFF2 [5] 0..2000..12750 ms CC1, Eu9: 0 ms Eu1: 2700 ms Same as OFF1, but for the silent period between ON_2 and ON_3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ON_3 [6] 0..12750 ms Same as ON_1, but for the third (of three) ringing periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OFF3 [7] 0..12750 ms Same as OFF2, but for the silent period between ON_3 and ON_1.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT Card Database STDB


9-18

PI Reference Manual MSG_LAMP_&_RING See table below for range options (SH) [8] Defaults: 0 (Most systems), Eu1: 2 Eu: 3

Station Controls

Message Waiting Lamp & Ring determines the internal/external ring cadence and Message Waiting lamp flash rate when a station card is installed for SLT stations, equipped with message lamps, in hotel rooms. These parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to the SH position: 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1 4/8/20Scsx, 4S8Fcsx, 4S16Fcsx, 8S8Fcsx, 8S16Fcsx, jumper JU1

In the Coral FlexiCom 200, this parameter applies to the 8/16SLSsl and 8F8Ssl cards only when the configuration jumper (JP3)-located on the MSBsl card - is set to the SH position.
Internal Ring Cadence (ms) ON 1600 750 1000 1000 TBD OFF 4050 3750 3000 3000 TBD USA and Mexico Rest of World Belgium Europe Typically Used In:

Range

External Ring Cadence (ms) ON_1 OFF1 1800 1300 300 500 TBD ON_2 670 850 300 500 TBD OFF2 2520 1500 3100 2500 TBD

0 1 2 3 (to 255) 4

670 850 300 500 TBD

9-19

SLT Card Database STDB

Czech Republic

Station Controls MIN_OFFHK [9] 70..200..500 ms (in 10 ms increments) Eu3, Eu6: 70

PI Reference Manual

Minimum Offhook determines the minimum offhook recognition time for Single Line Telephones (SLT).

r
l l l l

MIN_OFFHK must be less than SUSP_OFFHK [7] (page 6-3).


l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_ONHK [10] 100..790..1200 ms CC1, CC2, Eu9: 200 Eu1: 240 Eu3: 1120

(in 10 ms increments)

Minimum Onhook determines the minimum onhook recognition time for single line telephones (SLT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_HKFLS [11] 10..200..2550 ms CC1, Eu9: 50 CC2, Eu3: 10 Eu1: 90; Eu8: 40

(in 10 ms increments)

Minimum Hookflash determines the minimum hookflash recognition time for Single Line Telephones (SLTs). (Hookflash is used for transfer and feature activation on SLTs.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_HKFLS [12] 10..780..2550 ms CC1: 400 CC2, Eu3: 150 Eu1: 230; Eu8: 16 Eu9: 200

(in 10 ms increments)

SLT Card Database STDB


9-20

Maximum Hookflash determines the maximum hookflash recognition time for Single Line Telephones (SLTs). When hookflash duration exceeds this defined time, the system either ignores the action or reports an onhook condition when the minimum onhook time is met. (Hookflash is used for transfer and feature activation on SLTs.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_BREAK [13] 10..50 ms (in 10 ms increments) CC1, Eu8, Eu9: 20 Eu1: 50 Determines the minimum Break (current interruption) recognition time for pulse dialing on SLTs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual MAX_BREAK [14] 50..90 ms (in 10 ms increments); Eu8: 100

Station Controls

Determines the maximum Break (current interruption) recognition time for pulse dialing on SLTs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MIN_MAKE [15] 10..30 ms (in 10 ms increments) CC1, Eu9: 20 Eu3: 80 Determines the minimum Make (current restoral) recognition time for pulse dialing on SLTs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

MAX_MAKE [16] 30..70 ms (in 10 ms increments) Eu3: 80; Eu8: 100 Determines the max Make (current restoral) recognition time for pulse dialing on SLTs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

H.F. FILTER [17] 200..500..800 ms (in 10 ms increments)

All intentional dialing during this period is also ignored.

Filter After Hookflash determines the period following the completion of a valid hookswitch flash during which any electrical change of the SLT circuit is ignored. During this period, any changes in loop current or audio energy are ignored. This timer is intended to provide a flexible hookswitch anti-bounce parameter, in order to avoid false signaling problems on single line stations when attempting to transfer, park, hold, or conference an existing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

When set to Yes, this parameter distributes the ringing current such that only two SLTs per card ring at once. The Ring On interval is defined below in FIXED_RING_ ON.

r
l l l l

Set this parameter to Y for 8/16SLSsl and 8F8Ssl cards in Coral FlexiCom 200 systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-21

SLT Card Database STDB

FIXED_RING [18] Yes/No Not Used FlexiCom 200: Yes

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual The following two parameters appear only if the above parameter, FIXED_RING, is set to Yes.

FIXED_RING_ON [19] 600..720..2000 ms Not Used When FIXED_RING above is set to Yes, this parameter defines the time interval for the staggered ring.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

FIXED_LAMP_ON [20] 80..120..600 ms Not Used When FIXED_RING above is set to Yes, this parameter defines the time interval that the SLT message lamp is lit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No [21] Transfers the updated card database immediately to the cards. Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any update made. This parameter is accessible only through the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SLT Card Database STDB


9-22

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls

Keyset/FlexSet Timers

W EK.T,0

[0,0,1,3,0]

Keyset Timers are used to set the timing parameters for all keysets system wide. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).

AUTO_ANSWER [0] 1..10..100 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the ring duration (the ring duration at the called station and the ringback tone duration at the calling station) after which the auto answer feature is invoked.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_ANS_V_PAGE 1..10..100 (1 unit = 0.1 second) [1] Auto Answer Voice Page defines the warbling tone duration after which the voice page auto answer feature is invoked.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TONE_TO_IDLE [2] 10..300 (1 unit = 0.1 second) CCO, CC1: 15 Tone Before Idle defines the reorder or confirmation tone duration after which the station idles.

If this timer is increased, it is recommended to also increase the REORDER [3] and CONFIRM [4] timers defined in Station Timers, (see page 9-2).

AOC-E_DISPLAY [3] 1..300..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second)

r
l l l l

AOC-E_DISPLAY [62] on page 9-48 must first be set to Yes.

MUTE_RING [4] 1..50..65534 (1 unit = 0.1 second) Defines the duration of a mute-ring tone towards the keyset user when the first multi-appearance call arrives. Applies only to one burst keysets, (see OPTION [23] on page 9-33).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

NAME/NUMBER 1..30..100 (1 unit = 0.1 second) DISPLAY [5] Define the time interval for the Number of the calling party to be displayed on the users keyset when using the Name/Number feature (default feature code: #128; Index: 8). The calling name is restored on the keyset display after this time period elapses.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-23

Keyset/FlexSet Timers EK.T,0 [0,0,1,3,0]

Defines the duration of the Advice of Charge display which appears after a call has ended and before the display goes into the idle state.

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

Keyset/FlexSet Ring Cadence

W EK.T,1

[0,0,1,3,1]

Keyset Ring Cadence is used to determine the three pairs of ON/OFF ring/silent periods for each of the 8 ring cadences (0 - 7) defined for all the system keysets. Ring cadence, ring level (volume) and ring type (pitch) are selected at individual stations according to user requirements. The user selects the different cadences by the keyset ring adjustment feature code at his/her keyset. The default cadence is 4, the default level is 8 (from 0 to 15), and the default type (pitch) is 0 (from 0 to 7). Each station can select only one cadence, type, and level at any given time. Cadence time entries apply to internal (station to station) calls. Incoming calls from a trunk ring at twice the cadence rate (half each time entry). Voice page, reminder, and wakeup calls ring at three times the cadence rate (one third each time entry).

r
Figure 9-3. External Ring Cadences

The ring type and cadence level for Wireless stations are local handset features, not controlled by the PI.
ON 1 ON 2 ON 3

Ringing Ringing Ringing Silent Silent Silent Period #1 Period #1 Period #2 Period #2 Period #3 Period #3 OFF 1 OFF 2 OFF 3

Table 9-1: Keyset Default Ring Cadence Patterns

Keyset/FlexSet Ring Cadence EK.T,1 [0,0,1,3,1]


9-24

Pair 0
ON_1 OFF1 ON_2 OFF2 ON_3 OFF3 600 300 600 300 900 1,800

Cadence # 1
1,000 2,500 0 0 0 0

2
1,000 1,000 0 0 0 0

3
500 500 500 2,000 0 0

4
500 500 500 500 500 2,000

5
500 500 500 500 1,500 2,000

6
500 500 1,000 2,000 0 0

7
500 500 1,000 500 1,000 2,000

* ON/OFF time periods given in milliseconds

Keysets equipped with a headset should adjust the Ring Type feature at their keyset station to 7, MAX (default access code #136, then enter 2 for Ring Type and press UP Volume button until RING TYPE MAX appears).

This helps eliminate the short annoying burst inherent in the other Ring Types when disconnecting a call while another call is queued at the same station.

PI Reference Manual ON-1 Defaults: see Table 9-1 ON-1: 150..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments) Defines the duration of each of the first ring period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Station Controls

OFF-1 Defaults: see Table 9-1 OFF-1: 150..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments) Defines the duration of the silent period between the ON-1 and ON-2 periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ON-2 Defaults: see Table 9-1 0,150..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments) Defines the duration of the second ring period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OFF-2 Defaults: see Table 9-1 0, 150..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments) Defines the duration of the silent period between the ON-2 and ON-3 periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ON-3 Defaults: see Table 9-1 0,150..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments) Defines the duration of the third ring periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

OFF-3 Defaults: see Table 9-1 0, 150..12750 ms (in 50 ms increments)

9-25

Keyset/FlexSet Ring Cadence EK.T,1 [0,0,1,3,1]

Defines the duration of the silent period between the ON-3 and ON-1 periods.

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

Wireless Stations

W WST,0

[0,2,1,8,0]

Coral systems equipped with SKW peripheral cards provide for wireless station ports enabling service for portable handsets (wireless telephones) that can be used within the system facilities. A unique Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is programmed into each handset during the manufacturing process. This ESN must then be registered into the Coral PI database in order to identify the particular handset with the specific Coral system and enable wireless activity.

The System ID number, defined in SFE,12, (see page 6-48) and dial numbers (defined in the NPL [40]) are not sufficient for defining the portable handsets in the system database.

The ESN numbers can be entered in the PI by designating the index numbers (use Route: WST,0 [0,2,1,8,0]) or dial numbers, (use Route: WST,1 [0,2,1,8,1], see next page) allocated to the wireless units.

0-INDEX_ ACCESS
FROM/TO INDEX# 0 to Maximum defined in SIZ, see WIRELESS in Chapter 4 All Enter the range of wireless station index numbers FROM the lowest index number. TO the highest index number. Use the NPL,0,5,40 route to identify the index numbers associated with the wireless units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

DIAL# Displays the dial number (up to 8 digits) for the portable handset associated with the index number above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Wireless Stations WST,0 [0,2,1,8,0]


9-26

ESN CODE See the portable handset Enter the ESN code of the portable handset defined with the above dial number. For PCS, 1.9GHz models To find the ESN code, perform the following operations on the handset unit: 1. Press the FCN key to place the idle handset in menu operation. 2. Use the scroll s t keys to search for SYSTEM CONFING. Fn 10 3. Press FCN again to display SID#0. 4. Press the END button to display the ESN number. The ESN number is displayed for about five seconds. See the CoralAIR Wireless Systems Installation Manual, Chapter 6 for details. For DECT models: The ESN is found on the back of the handset unit, see the original manufacturers handset User Guide.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual

Station Controls

Wireless Stations
1-DIAL NUMBERS_ ACCESS

W WST,1

[0,2,1,8,1]

FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid system WIRELESS dial number (see Route: NPL, 0,5,40), All Enter the range of wireless station dial numbers. FROM the lowest dial number TO the highest dial number. Use the NPL,0,5,40 route to identify the wireless dial numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

INDEX#

0..1536
Displays the index number for the portable handset associated with the dial number above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ESN CODE See the portable handset Enter the ESN code of the portable handset defined with the above index number. For PCS, 1.9GHz models To find the ESN code, perform the following operations on the handset unit: 1. Press the FCN key to place the idle handset in menu operation. 2. Use the scroll s t keys to search for SYSTEM CONFIG. Fn 10 3. Press FCN again to display SID#0. 4. Press the END button to display the ESN number. The ESN number disappears after about five seconds.

For DECT models: The ESN is found on the back of the handset unit, see the original manufacturers handset User Guide.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-27

Wireless Stations WST,1 [0,2,1,8,1]

See the CoralAIR Wireless Systems Installation Manual, Chapter 6 for details.

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

Keyset/FlexSet Definition

W KEY

[or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]

Keyset Definition allows programming all system keysets and Wireless stations. Programming is identical for all the sets. FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system FlexSet/Wireless/CPA/GKT/DKT/DST/EKT/AA/VDK station #; All Enter the required range of keyset dial numbers FROM the lowest dial number, TO the highest dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRM_COS [0] 0..249 (or maximum as defined in SIZ, see Chapter 4)

1: First keyset (Attendant) 0: All other keysets


Determines the stations primary or normal Class of Service (COS). A COS may be assigned to a single station, several stations or all stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SEC_COS [1] 0..249 (or maximum as defined in SIZ, see Chapter 4)

1: First keyset (Attendant) 0: All other keysets


Determines the stations secondary COS. This is the COS which may be applied during specified Day/Night modes (see Night Service Definition - Chapter 12), or by invoking the Class of Service Changeover feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]


9-28

PRIV_LIBS [2] 0..10..255

(limited by numbering plan)

Determines the maximum number of speed call (Private Library) numbers available.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

TERMIN [3] Yes/No Determines whether a station may only terminate (receive) calls, and not originate any calls. (Attendant Modifiable: default feature code #152)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ORIGIN [4] Yes/No Determines whether a station may only originate calls and not receive any calls. (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #151)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

BLOCK [5] Yes/No Blocks the station from making or receiving all (internal and external) calls. (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #153)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual O/G_TK_REST [6] Yes/No

Station Controls

Outgoing Trunk Restriction determines whether a station cannot originate any outgoing trunk calls. (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #154)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PRIVACY [7] Yes/No Boss Groups only Prevents a third party from entering a conversation on a Boss line or a trunk reserved for the Boss group. (User modifiable: default feature code #186 or #6)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

EXCL_HOLD [8] Yes/No Exclusive Hold enables a Boss/secretary group member to place a call on hold which can later be retrieved from hold only by the station that originated the hold condition. (User modifiable: default feature code #187)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

HARD_HOLD [9] Yes/No Defines whether or not a station with an established call on hold is considered busy towards additional incoming calls. However, the station can still originate calls when HARD_HOLD is set either to Yes or No. No: Idle for incoming calls and for making additional calls Yes: Busy for incoming calls and idle for making additional calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

LAST_NUM [10] Yes/No

To enable redialing of internal station numbers, INTERNAL_LAST_NUM_REDIAL [5] (page 6-17) must be set to Yes. This parameter also defines whether or not the station user can save the last external number dialed for future dialing (feature code #196 or #9), when defined by COS (see SAVED [55] on page 7-16).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SECURITY [11] Yes/No Prevents break-in and other tones being sent to the station. This parameter is normally used when data (through a modem, facsimile and other such devices) is being transferred. (User modifiable: default feature code #17700)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-29

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]

Last Number Redial determines whether a station user is able to automatically redial the last number dialed (by pressing a button programmed for this feature (default dial number #143) or by dialing *).

Station Controls DND_WP [12] Yes/No

PI Reference Manual

Defines whether this station is blocked from receiving a whisper page (paging only one party) during an ongoing conversation. Enter Yes to inhibit or No to enable whisper paging to this station. (User Modifiable: default feature code #1745). For IP Keysets, set this parameter to Yes. To enable this feature, define DND_WP [24] (page 7-9), in COS, to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

RECEIVE_SPKR_ Yes/No STATUS [13] When set to Yes, this parameter enables the station user to receive a message on the display as well as a tone indicating that the second party (called or calling party) is in Speaker Mode.

IP_FAX_ENABLED Yes/No [14] r Set to Yes only for IP stations. Defines whether the MG module should try and detect Fax tones from this IP station. Set this parameter to Yes if this Keyset is able to send or receive fax calls. General The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt voice calls. The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l v91536*/

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]


9-30

PI Reference Manual IP_MODEM_ENABLED Yes/No [15] r Set to Yes only for IP stations.

Station Controls

Defines whether the MG module should try and detect modem tones from this station. Set this parameter to Yes if this Keyset is able to send or receive modem calls. General The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt voice calls. The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ATT [16] Yes/No Yes: First keyset (Attendant)

When an APDL is connected, set this parameter to Yes.

Identifies the station as having Attendant station privileges and COS (see Attendant Class of Service beginning on page 7-28).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Applies only to Attendant Stations (ATT [16] above, must be set to Yes). When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS is set to Yes, the attendant console will enter the unattended mode automatically, but only after the system defined time-out period AND: The attendants calls are then transferred to an Alternate Attendant Destination (attendant feature code: #146). If no alternate attendant destination is defined, then all calls to this attendant station receive the UNATTENDED message. The attendants calls automatically return to the attendant station the next time the attendant offhooks or presses any other station key/button.

When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS is set to No, the attendant console continues ringing unless it is manually answered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-31

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]

AUTO_UNATT_TRANS Yes/No Attendant Stations Only Allows unanswered calls to an attendant station to be automatically transferred to [17] another destination, after a system wide defined time-out period.

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

AUTO_RELEASED_ Yes/No ALL [18] ACD&UCD only Defines whether or not the system automatically releases (i.e. invokes ACD&UCD Release/Resume, feature code #1975) an agent that does not answer a call within a predetermined time interval (defined by TIME_TO_NEXT_MEM (page 10-12) in the HUNT branch). Once the agent is released, no calls are transferred to the agent, thereby improving the ACD/UCD group response time. The released agent is automatically resumed by the system as soon as the agent activates any key at the station. Set this parameter to Yes to allow the system to automatically release agents when they are not answering.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PASSCODE [19] Any 4 digits, 0-9, , # or None Identifies the stations four-digit passcode needed to operate certain Coral features such as Phone Lock, Executive Privilege, IRSS and COS Switchover. (User modifiable: default feature code #179)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

CHECK_OUT [20] Yes/No SAU Requirement Determines whether or not the station is in Check-Out status. When set to Yes, the stations Class Of Service is changed to a system defined Class Of Service (see OUT_COS. [2] on page 6-37). (Attendant modifiable: default feature code #1970)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]


9-32

PI Reference Manual MULTI_APPEARANCE Yes/No: First keyset (Attendant) [21] Yes/No: All other keysets

Station Controls

Multi Appearance defines whether a station can receive several calls on a single line while the station is active (busy). When this parameter is set to Yes, the busy called station receives a call-waiting tone and sees the calling party number on the keyset display. The calling station party hears a ringback tone (see ORIGINATOR_CALL_WAITING_TO [2] on page 6-42 to define which ringback tone is heard) and waits for the call to be answered. When set to No, the busy called party does not receive any indication and the calling party hears a busy tone.

For LS/GS trunks: Incoming calls always appear as Multi Appearance regardless of this parameter definition. Always set this parameter to Yes when:
When an APDL terminal is connected. For CKT # 18 of the iCMC cards when initialized as a 24 SFT card (the Pilot # is the internal APA port for iCMC card).

OPTION [23] No (Continuous), Yes (One burst)

This parameter is relevant only when M.A MUTED_RING [22] above, is set to Yes.

This parameter determines the ring type for the first Multi Appearances Waiting Call. The muted ring tone at the station can be sounded continuously or in one burst. When set to Yes (one burst), the duration is defined by a system-wide parameter, MUTE_RING [4] (page 9-23).

r
l l l l

For Wireless telephones (WST), this feature is controlled at the handset.

9-33

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]

M.A MUTED_RING Yes/No [22] First Multi Appearance Call determines whether a second call indication ring is active (Yes) or not active (No). When set to Yes, the first Multi Appearance call is received both with a muted-ring tone and a display message on keysets equipped with a display panel. This parameter is relevant when MULTI_APPEARANCE, above, is set to Yes and is required for Reminder, Wakeup, Camp-on, Call back, etc.

Station Controls

PI Reference Manual

ANSWER CALL Yes/No WAITING WITH HF When set to Yes, this parameter enables the user to put the original conversing [24] party on hold and to answer a waiting call by pressing the transfer key. If more than one call is waiting, the call with the highest priority is answered first. Any following transfer changes the call state to Broker/Consultation/3-Way or a combination of them or Continuous Conference, depending on the station COS definition for 1=BROKER, 2=CONSULT, 4=3-WAY, 5=ALL, 6=Continuous Conf [11] (page 7-6). This feature is also enabled by activating the following related keys:
l l l

Digit 1 operating as transfer (relevant when DIGIT_ONE_AS_H.F. [4] (page 6-17) is set to Yes) XFER Flash (R button) on wireless handsets
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

AUTO_ANS [25] Yes/No Auto Answer determines whether incoming calls are automatically answered in speaker mode, after a predetermined number of rings. This feature is not recommended for use on models without microphones (FlexSet 120L, DST). When this option is defined as Yes, headsets are recommended. (User modifiable: default feature code #138) For CPA units define AUTO_ANS as YES. For Wireless telephones (WST), this feature is controlled at the handset.

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]

IDLE_DISPLAY [26] Yes/No Determines whether or not an idle keyset, equipped with a display, shows the time, date and site name (site name appears only when defined in SITE NAME for PI on page 17-2 in Root,0,0,3). In addition, to the current time and date, the second line of the display shows the assigned name and station number if defined system-wide, see EXT.ID. [12] on page 6-19. (User modifiable: default feature code #137)

r
l l l l

For Wireless telephones (WST), this feature is controlled at the handset.

9-34

PI Reference Manual VOICE_MAIL Yes/No (dtmf receive) [27] r Set this parameter to No for IP Keysets.

Station Controls

SAU Authorization Determines whether this keyset can be used as an interface for a Voice Mail application or any other application that requires DTMF digits to be sent. This parameter must be set to Yes for iVMFipx ports. The iVMF automatically updates this parameter to Yes for its keyset ports. This keyset station should be defined in an ACD Voice Mail group. When the station is an IVR destination, the IVR definition of the keyset affects the IVR operation as follows: If set to Yes, the IVR is simultaneously enabled with the ACD waiting queue. The call will not lose its place in the queue while interacting with the IVR. If set to No, when the station user answers, the call is disconnected from the ACD waiting queue.

The user calling this Voice Mail station must program a pre programmed keyset button with the station number followed by the DTMF digits to be sent. The system waits for the Voice Mail to send an answer signal to the calling station and then the calling station continues to send the DTMF digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

VM_CAMP_ON [28] Yes/No Determines whether a keyset defined as an interface for Voice Mail will camp-on to a busy destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

SECOND_CALL_ Yes/No DISPLAY [29] r Relevant only for keysets defined with Multi-Appearance. Controls the second line display for the keyset. When the keyset is engaged in a conversation that involves both display lines, such as Name Retention or Call Forward, this parameter defines whether or not the information on an incoming call can be displayed on the second line, instead of the current call information, i.e. the caller name or the forwarded destination. When set to Yes, when an additional call arrives at the keyset, its details are displayed on the second line, overwriting current information. When set to No, when an additional call arrives at the keyset, the user is prompted only with a call-waiting tone. The display remains unchanged, thus, first call information is still displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

9-35

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]

Station Controls AUDIO_PATH [30] Normal/Headset_Only

PI Reference Manual

For DKT2320Z and FlexSet 280D-Z (and FlexSet 280S/281S/120S/121S when defined for zip tone), this parameter must be set to Headset_Only.

When set to Headset_Only, this parameter enables all calls to be conducted via the headset and disables the keyset microphone and loudspeaker when pressing the programmed feature button or by dialing the feature code (default: #1302). The audio path can only be transferred when the telephone is in an idle state, regardless of the handset state.(User Modifiable: default feature code #1302)
FlexSet-IP 280S

The FlexSet-IP 280S user may activate this feature from any telephony state, not only idle by either dialing its feature code or using a pre programmed button. SPKR_ON/OFF [40] below must be set to Yes to enable this feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

r
l l l l

BLOCK_REORDER_ Yes/No TONE(VM) [31] Set this parameter to Yes to disable the reorder tone sent to this Keyset when it did not yet onhook after a 2-way call disconnect.

r
l l l l

Tip: Set this parameter to Yes for Keysets defined as Voice Mail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ANNOUNCER [32] Yes/No Define this parameter to Yes for iVMFipx card ports used as announcer destinations for ACD/UCD hunt groups. Define this parameter to No for iVMF card ports serving as Voice Mail stations in order to enable using the Voice Mail application to record announcements.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Keyset/FlexSet Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]


9-36

KEYCLICK [33] Yes/No Determines whether or not keyclick is heard when a key on the dial pad is pressed.

r
l l l l

Notes: For Wireless telephones (WST), this feature is controlled at the handset. This feature is not displayed for IP Keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

PI Reference Manual MUSIC [34] Yes/No

Station Controls

Determines whether or not background music is heard when the keyset is idle. This feature requires an ASU, RMI, 8DRCF or 8DRCM card to be present in the system. For Coral FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500 systems, no extraneous hardware is required. Music must be programmed (see Music Sources in Chapter 4) and connected to the system. (User modifiable: default feature code #135)

r
l l l l

Define MUSIC as NO for IP keysets and Wireless telephones (WST).